Automation College
Experion PKS:
Fundamentals - Control Execution
Environment Controller & ACE
Implementation
EXP-2001 R400 Student Guide
Rev 05.0
04/2012
Book 1 of 1
.
Notices
While this information is presented in good faith and believed to be accurate, Honeywell assumes
no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this courseware. The courseware is presented
on an “as-is” basis. Honeywell disclaims the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a
particular purpose, and makes no express warranties except as may be stated in its written
agreement with and for its customer.
In no event is Honeywell liable to anyone for any indirect, special or consequential damages even
if Honeywell is informed of the possibility of these damages. The information and specifications in
this courseware are subject to change without notice.
No part of this courseware may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means. It is
intended for the use of the original purchaser only. Copying, duplicating, selling or otherwise
distributing the courseware is a violation of law. The materials and workbooks comprising the
courseware may not, in whole or part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated or reduced
to any electronic medium or machine-readable form without prior consent in writing from
Honeywell.
This courseware is the confidential and proprietary information of Honeywell. The courseware may
only be used by the person who attended the Honeywell class. The courseware may only be used
in conjunction with a Honeywell system at the company that paid for the class. Only Honeywell
may use the courseware for training purposes.
This class has special equipment configurations that are appropriate only for training and should
not be used for any other purpose.
Experion, Da Vinci, IntelliMap, MXOpen, MXProLine, TotalPlant, PlantScape, TDC 3000,
Uniformance, and Universal Control Network are registered trademarks of Honeywell International.
These commodities, technology or software were exported from the United States in accordance
with the Export Administration Regulations. Division contrary to U.S. law prohibited.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell Inc.
Honeywell International, Inc.
Automation College
Global Learning Services
Program Objectives
EXP2001R400 - EPKS CEE R400
Tab
1
Lesson
Orientation and Course Introduction
2
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
3
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
4
Control Builder Introduction
5
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
7
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
8
Controller Hardware Configuration
9
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
11
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Objectives
Course Introduction
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and
Redundancy
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and
Options
Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C
System
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
Use Compare Parameters Options
Use Control Builder Search
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
Open and Operate Control Builder
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E
Hardware and I/O
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control
Builder
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in
SIM-C200E
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the
SCE
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in
SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection
Rules
Describe the Control Firewall Connections in the
Series C System
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
Describe Performance Calculations
Page: 1 of 3
04/04/12
Program Objectives
12
EXCEL Simulation
13
Data Acquisition Control Module
14
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
15
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
16
Checkpoints
17
PID Control Module
18
PID with Split Range Control Module
19
Cascade PID Control Module
20
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
22
Device Control Module
23
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
24
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
Describe the Block Name References in CM and
SCM
Export/Import a Control Module
Describe ERDB Administration
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
Perform Checkpoint Save
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization
Fundamentals
Configure a PID Control Module
Calculate Performance Statistics of the
Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range
Outputs
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two
Secondaries
Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Options
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal
Indications
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
Describe MATH Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Use Counter Function Block
Page: 2 of 3
04/04/12
Program Objectives
25
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
27
Sequential Control Module - Lab
28
Interactive Instructions
29
SCM Abnormal Handlers
30
Final Project
31
PMIO
32
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe Search Functionality
Perform Parameter Search
Perform Where Used Search
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
Explain the Operation of SCMs
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Describe Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Configure an SCM Check Handler
Complete the Final Project - 20
Identify PMIO Hardware
Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to
the PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks
in CMs
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
Describe Device Control Blocks
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E
Operations
Control Module Reference
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Page: 3 of 3
04/04/12
1
Course Introduction
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Introduction to the course

• Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Purpose of This Course
•
Experion PKS Control Execution
Environment C200, C200E, C300
and ACE course will provide you
with the ability to:
– Plan the C200, C200E and C300
controller
Human Interface
Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet
LAN
Process
Server
ACE
C300
ESV-LCN
Connected
– Configure C200, C200E and C300
hardware, control modules and
sequential control modules
Safety
Manager
ControlNet
NIM
C200/ C200E
– Build control strategies on the C200,
C200E, C300 and ACE
TPS, TDC2000, TDC3000
PM I/O
HART
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Who Should Attend
• Experion System implementers who are responsible for designing and
configuring the system:
– System engineers or application engineers who configure, add to or change
the C200, C200E, C300 or ACE controller configuration
– Maintenance engineers or technicians who add new control loops or
troubleshoot existing loops
– Others, whose job functions include performing these tasks
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
What You Will Learn
• In this course, you will learn how to:
the role of the major Experion PKS hardware and software
– Recognize
components and learn how data flows through the C200,C200E and C300
controller
– Configure control modules that incorporate data acquisition, regulatory
 control and logic
– Configure sequential control modules (SCMs) used to control process
 sequences such as startup, shutdown and batch operations
– Create parallel steps in an SCM for parallel branching
– Configure interactive instruction that allows a seamless combination of
 operator-guided manual intervention and automatic control in SCMs
– Configure additional I/O functionality for the PMIO

– Troubleshoot typical errors in configuration
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
5
Honeywell
Course Organization
•
The Experion PKS Control
Execution Environment C200,
C200E, C300 and ACE course is
divided into two sections:
1.
2.
The basic concepts and strategies
needed, to develop guidelines for
effective and consistent system
planning
• Self-paced computer-based
lessons or instructor-delivered
workshops
Human Interface
Console Operations
Fault Tolerant Ethernet
LAN
Process
Server
C300
ESV-LCN
Connected
Safety
Manager
ControlNet
NIM
C200/C200E
A hands-on workshop in which you
will build and configure the Experion
PKS C200, C200E and C300
controller
• Hands-on lab exercises with
step-by-step instructions
• Assessments to reinforce
concepts learned
Orientation and Course Introduction
ACE
TPS, TDC2000,
TDC3000
PM I/O
HART
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Introduction to the course
• Navigating the self-paced computer-based lessons

Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lesson Window
Navigation bar
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
1
Lesson window - Tabs
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Pausing and Playing the Lesson
Click Play to resume
Click Pause to stop the lesson
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Moving Backward and Forward in the lesson
Honeywell
Click slide title
Previous screen
Next screen
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
EXP2001 CEE Introduction and Navigation
Overview
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the first lesson in your course material
Orientation and Course Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Course Introduction
4/13/2012
2
Describe the C200/C200E Controller
Architecture
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• This lesson introduces you to the Experion PKS C200 and C200E
controller architecture.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
– Identify the high-level
components and connections
Experion
Server
ACE
FTE
– Explain the basic purpose
of the components and
connections
– Identify C200 and C200E
ControlNet
Process
C300
Controllers
I/O Options
Rail I/O
Series A
Rack
I/O
Series
A
PM
I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Architecture Overview
Cluster 2
Cluster 3
FTE
Control Net
Peer to Peer (within cluster)
Cluster 1
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
3
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Types of IO:
Series A Chassis IO (Local or Remote – CNI)
Rail IO: Series A, Series H – (CNI)
PMIO (IOLIM)
Foundation Fieldbus (FIM)
HART (Series A Chassis IO & PMIO)
Profibus (PBIM)
DeviceNet (DNB)
Honeywell
C200 / C200E Architecture
ACE
Experion Server
FTE
Process
Controllers
ControlNet
I/O Options
Rack I/O
Series A
Rail I/O
Series A
C300
PM I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Can be redundant:
Server
C200 & C200E
FIM
IOLIM & PMIO
CNI (redun ctlr chassis)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
•
C200E is a newer controller in the Experion family with larger memory
–
–
–
–
The architecture of the C200E is similar to the C200 controller
It supports all C200 functions and features
It has 16 MB of User Memory
It supports some additional feature like
• Experion Batch Manager
• Whole Array Transfer
• Custom Data Blocks (up to 200)
• New Function Blocks
User Memory Specifications
– Rolling Average (RollAvg)
Item / Controller
C200
C200E
– Counter (CTUD)
User memory
4 MB
16MB
– It does not support
Maximum number of
1023
4095
• Custom Algorithm Block
tagged blocks
• PCDI
Maximum No of
•
Component blocks per
CM
Firmware for C200 is frozen at R311
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Primary
100
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interoperability, Redundancy, and Migration
C200
100
ON-Process Migration
C200
Secondary
C200E
C200E
C200
C200E
C200E
Primary
C200E
Secondary
C200
Primary
C200E
OFF-Process Migration
Secondary
C200
C200E
Primary
C200E
C200
Secondary
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
C200E
Honeywell
Question 1: Redundant Components
All of these can be redundant except:
A) C200/C200E processors
B) C200/C200E Fieldbus interface modules
Experion
Server
C) C200/C200E PM I/O link modules
FTE
D) C200/C200E Rack I/O
E) C200/C200E PM I/O
ACE
Process
Controllers
I/O Options
ControlNet
C300
Rail I/O
Series A
Rack
I/O
Series
A
PM
I/O
Fiber Optic
Isolation
HART
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
C200
C200
Rack
Rack
I/OI/O
cannot
cannot
be
YouYou
must
did answer
not
answer
the question
this question
before
redundant.
Incorrect
Correct
You be
-answered
-redundant.
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
continuing
completely
Click anywhere to continue.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
•
Clear
Key concepts to take away from this lesson are:


– The ACE communicates to the Experion Server over FTE
– The C200/C200E communicates to the Experion Server over Ethernet, FTE or

ControlNet
– C200/C200Es, C300s, and ACE nodes on the same Experion Server can
communicate Peer-to-Peer

– Three main types of I/O:
• PMIO, Rail I/O, and Chassis I/O

– The C200E Controller has more memory than the C200
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks
and Redundancy
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn how the C200/C200E controller is
networked to the server and to remote I/O racks in redundant and nonredundant configurations.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Describe the C200/C200E control processor, communication and
redundancy modules
CP or CPM – Control Processor Module
CNI – ControlNet Interface
FTEB – Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge
RM – Redundancy Module
– Explain the C200/C200E network connections and addressing
Honeywell
C C CC
NC P C NCNC
I N MP I NI N
I M I I
R
MR
M
Honeywell
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell
C
N
I
AAADAADD
I O I OO I O I
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
4/13/2012
• C200/C200E Hardware
• C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
C200 Control Processor (CP)
• 100MHz Power PC 603E processor with 8 MB RAM
– 4 MB (of 8 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies
• 4 MB Flash ROM for storing program
• Lithium battery (or optional rechargeable battery extension module)
• Can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
OK
• Controller can be redundant or non-redundant
2
• Double-wide module -- occupies 2 slots on CP rack
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Topics
Honeywell
C200E Control Processor (CP)
• 150MHz Power PC 603R processor with 32 MB RAM
– 16 MB (of 32 MB RAM) available for user built control strategies
• 8 MB Flash ROM for storing program
• Lithium Battery (or Optional Rechargeable Battery Extension Module)
• Can support up to 8 I/O Chassis and 64 IOMs
OK
• Controller can be Redundant or Non-redundant
2
• Double-wide Module -- occupies 2 slots on the CP Rack
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
15
Honeywell
ControlNet Interface (CNI)
• Provides the interface to the supervisory network (supervisory CNI)
• Facilitates Peer-to-Peer communication
• Enables remote I/O communication (downlink CNI)
• Each downlink CNI can support up to 24 remote IOMs
• 4 downlink CNIs can be connected to one controller
NET
• Each CNI must have a unique MAC ID on the
same network
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
4/13/2012
The Device Index
(generally, the last
octet of the IP address)
is set here
FTEB
FTE
CNI
ControlNet
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Redundancy Module (RM)
• Placed in controller chassis to support redundant controllers
– RM must be in the same position in both racks
– Both RMs are connected by an optical cable
– Switchover between redundant controllers is bumpless
Note: If controller is redundant, then all IOMs must be remote
Redundancy Cable (Fiber Optic)
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)
Honeywell
Question 1: C200/C200E Control Processor
Which of these statements about the control processor (CP) is false?
A) It can support up to 8 I/O chassis and 64 IOMs
B) It is a double-wide module that occupies 2 rack slots
OK
C) It can be redundant
2
D) It provides an interface to the supervisory network
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
You
notanswer
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickthe
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
this
question
correctly!
to
tobefore
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Good
Incorrect.
job! The false statement is "It provides an
interface to the supervisory network." The interface
to the supervisory network is provided by either the
CNI
CNI card
card or
or the
the Fault
Fault Tolerant
Tolerant Ethernet
Ethernet Bridge
Bridge (FTEB).
(FTEB)
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• C200/C200E Hardware
• C200/C200E Network Connections and Addressing
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
4/13/2012
TC-CCR013-ControlNet Interface
(CNI), Redundant
Media
TC-PRS021-- C200
Control Processor
(Optional) TC-CCR013-CNI to connect to other
I/O racks
TC-FXX102 -- 10-slot rack
Controller
Chassis
TC-FPCXX2-120/240 VAC
Power Supply
Series A IO can be
in a non-redundant
controller chassis
LAN Connection
Ethernet, TCPIP,etc.
I/O modules and
terminal blocks
Taps -- 9904-TPS, R,
YS, and YR (4 kinds)
ControlNet Cable (TC- KCCxxx) -- Supervisory
C
o
n
t
r
o
l
N
e
t
Terminators-TC-TCXBNC
TC-PCIC01 -- ControlNet
Communication Interface
Module for PC (redundant
media) (in server)
TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media
Server
(stations not
shown)
Additional
Remote I/O
I/O modules and
terminal blocks
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Redundant Controller
TC-PRS021 -- C200
Control Processor
TC-CCR013 -- CNI,
Redundant Media
TC-CCR013 -- CNI to
connect to I/O racks
TC-FXX072 – 7-slot rack
TC-PRR021 -Redundancy
Module
Redundant Chassis
Identical Configuration
Module for module
TC- FXX072
7 SLOT RACK
TC-FPCXX2 -120/240 VAC
Power Supply
-GN KRRxx1 Redundancy
Cable (Fiber Optic)
ControlNet Cable
-- I/O Comm
ControlNet Cable (TC -KCCxxx ) -- Supervisory
Terminators -TC-TCXBNC
NO IOMs PERMITTED IN CONTROLLER
NO IOMs
PERMITTED
IN CONTROLLER
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CHASSIS
FOR REDUNDANT
CONFIGURATION!!
CONFIGURATION!!
(IOLIM and
FIM are exceptions)
to
Server
to IO
Chassis
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Non-redundant Controller
Honeywell
PCIC must be 23
(24 for redundancy)
Supervisory CNIs must be odd 1-19
IO CNets should leave no gap
Use even and odd numbers
All CNets must have a CNI = 1
(network update time)
03
01
02
04
CNI
CNI
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
01
CNI
Address Settings - Non-redundant C200/C200E
Server
03
05
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
PCIC
23
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
4/13/2012
23
23 & 24 for Servers
CNIs in C200 chassis must be the Honeywell
same odd number
Address Settings – Redundant C200/C200E
CNI
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
PCIC
ServerB
01
05
CNI
C200/
C200E
CNI
CNI
01
03
CNI
05
ServerA
PCIC
04
CNI
01
Second one powered on uses virtual (+1) address
IO CNet – Assign 3 to a CNI in a remote chassis
During a failover, it controls Network Update Time
IO chassis are not redundant, so use odd & even
No gaps
RM
01
RM
24
03
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
CNI
CNI
C200/
C200E
23
07
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
4/13/2012
01
01
03
05
CNI
01
05
RM
CNI
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
ServerB
CNI
04
02
Switch
RM
CNI
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
ServerA
03
Switch
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
CNI
FTEB
C200/
C200E
07
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Question 2: MAC Addresses
While configuring a ControlNet-connected Control Processor (CP), which
MAC address is entered as the supervisory MAC address?
A) MAC address of the PCIC card
ServerB
B) Device index of the FTEB card
PCIC
C) MAC address of the CNI card connected
to the server
03
The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Correct!
Incorrect.
The MAC
Theaddress
MAC
of the of
CNI
the
card
CNIconnected
card
You
must
answer
theaddress
question
before
Correct
anywhere
to
You
did
not
this
question
completely
You-answer
answered
this
correctly!
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
to
connected
the server
to
should
the
server
be
entered
should
as
be
the
entered
supervisory
as the
continuing
supervisory
MAC address.
MAC address.
01
CNI
23
CNI
C200/
C200E
D) MAC address of the CNI card connected
to the I/O chassis
Supervisory CNet
I/O CNet
CNI
Click anywhere to continue.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Submit
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
FTEB
Honeywell
Summary
• When you connect the C200/C200E controller to the server and to
remote I/O racks in non-redundant and redundant configurations,
remember:
The double-wide control processor (CP) supports up to 8 I/O chassis and 64
– IOMs.
Interface (CNI) modules provide interfaces to the I/O ControlNet
– ControlNet
and the Supervisory ControlNet.
– Redundant controllers require all IOMs be configured remotely.
– All devices on the same network must have unique MAC addresses.
– Redundant CNI cards must be addressed with the same odd number.
– Redundant FTEBs must be addressed differently with the primary having an
odd number and the secondary having the next highest even number.

C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
27
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200 Controller Racks and Redundancy
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the C200/C200E Controller Racks and Redundancy
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
4/13/2012
2
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about the standard C200/C200E input/output
(I/O) modules and their applications.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– List the standard I/O types that are compatible with the Experion system
– Identify the application for each type of I/O module
Rail I/O
Series A
GI/IS Rail I/O
Series H
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
PM I/O
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Chassis - Series A Input/Output Modules
• Chassis I/O (also referred to as Series A I/O) has the following
attributes:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Compact Size – may reside in either the controller rack or remote I/O rack
Diagnostic and non-diagnostic modules available (DI & DO modules)
IOM configurable through Control Builder
Removable wiring hood
Can be removed and replaced under power
All modules have a form factor of 5” X 5”
Redundancy not supported
• Module Types:
–
–
–
–
–
–
HART / Non-HART Analog Input
HART / Non-HART Analog Output
Digital Input (with and without Diagnostics)
Digital Output (with and without Diagnostics)
Resistance Temperature Detector (RTD) Input
Thermocouple Input
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series A Rail I/O
• Modular connections – slide rail
• 8 terminal bases can be
connected to a single gateway
Gateway
Terminal Base
• Gateway provides link to the
ControlNet
8
2
7
3
DIN Rail
-1 2
+ +
• Analog I/O, digital I/O,
thermocouple and RTD
Redundancy is not
supported.
IOM types:
AI- Analog Input
AO- Analog Output
DI- Digital Input
DO- Digital Output
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
• Galvanically isolated
• Intrinsically safe
Server
Supervisory ControlNet
Redundancy is not
supported.
Controller
CNI
Module
I/O ControlNet
Repeater/
Adapter
E
COM
C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
re a p e
t r
x
Repeater/
Adapter
Fiber Modules
E
T C -P B F O 0 1
MO D
x
E
C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
x
E
C o n rt o N
l e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
P W R
COM
Ch a
n1
1
2
3
Cha
n2
Ch a
n1
x
Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2
1
C o n rt o N
l e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e
T C -P B F O 0 1
X m ti
Ex
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
X m ti
R e cv
Ch a
n1
3
Ch a
n1
i e r Mo u
dl e
x C o n rt o lN eF tb
T C -P M F O 0 1
Ch a
n2
4
R e cv
Fiber
Optic
Cable
E x C o n rt o N
l e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
Ch a
n2
Ch a
n1Cha
n2
4
+V-V+V-V
3
X m ti
PW R
2
2
+ V-V+ V-V
M OD
1
E
i e r Mo u
d l e
x C o n rt o lN e tF b
T C -P M F O 0 1
PW R
4
R e cv
E
E
T C -P B F O 0 1
+V-V+V-V
COM
Fiber Modules
C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r a p te r
e
MO D
Cha
n2
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
E
COM
C o n rt o lN e tR e p e a
t d
A
r ape
e
t r
T C -P B F O 0 1
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
E x C o n rt o lN e tF b
i e r Mo u
dl e
T CP
- M F O0 1
MO D
X m ti
R e cv
Ch a
n 1 Ch a
n2
2
3
Ch a
n 1
NonHazardous
Area
Hazardous
Area
E x C o n rt o lN e
F tb
i e r Mo u
dl e
T C -P M F O 0 1
PW R
1
X m ti
Ch a
n2
4
+V-V+ V-V
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
R e cv
X m ti
Rail I/O Modules - Series H
Ex
T C -P G C N 1 1
I/O ControlNet
Gateway
-+
1
A
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
B
12
+
2
4
V+V- V+V-
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Process Manager I/O (PM I/O)
• Requires a PM I/O Link Interface Module
(IOLIM) in the same rack as the
C200/C200E
• Redundant IOLIMs are supported with
redundant C200/C200Es
• PM I/O can be redundant
• PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C,
DI SOE
• PM I/O requires a separate board to accept
field wiring. This board is called a Field
Termination Assembly (FTA).
PM I/O
• PM I/O can be configured remotely up to
8km using an fiber optic IOLINK Extender
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Series H Rail I/O
Honeywell
Serial Interface Module
NET
OK
NET
Serial Interface Module
Honeywell
SIM FTA
Power Adapter
ADAPTER
SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
MODBUS
(16 Array
Channels)
SERIAL
INTERFACE
FTA
A/B
(16 Array
Channels)
Modbus
Compatible
Subsystem
Allen-Bradley
Compatible
Subsystem
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
35
Honeywell
Question 1: I/O Application
Which I/O module can be used in a hazardous environment?
A) Chassis I/O
B) Serial Interface
NET
OK
NET
C) Series H I/O
Honeywell
Rail I/O Modules - Series H
Ex
TC-PGCN11
Gateway
-+
1
A
B
1 2
+
2
4
V+V- V+V-
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Series
Series
HHI/O
I/O
modules
modules
are
are
specifically
specifically
You must
answer
the
question
before
Correct
- -Click
anywhere
totocontinue
You Incorrect
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
this
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
completely
continue
designed
for
unsafe
environments.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Clear
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Which I/O module will support redundancy?
A) Chassis I/O
NET
OK
NET
B) PM I/O
Honeywell
C) Series H I/O
Rail I/O Modules - Series H
Ex
TC-PGCN11
Gateway
-+
1
A
B
1 2
+
2
4
V+V- V+V-
PM I/O
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
must- Click
answer
the question
before
Correct
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did
You
not
answered
-modules
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
continue
completely
Yes!
PM
I/O
modules
are
the
only
standard
No. PM I/Oanswer
are
the
only
standard
continuing
I/O modules that are available in a redundant
configuration.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Clear
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The standard I/O types compatible with the Experion system are:
Series A I/O modules, which can be installed in the same chassis
– asChassis
the C200/C200E (if the C200/C200E is not redundant) or a remote I/O
chassis.
A Rail I/O modules, which include analog I/O, digital I/O,
– Series
thermocouples, and RTD.
H Rail I/O modules, which are intrinsically safe for use in hazardous
– Series
environments.
– PM I/O modules which include AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, and DI SOE.
Interface modules which interface to Allen-Bradley and Modbus
– Serial
subsystems.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
2
Honeywell
Question 2: I/O Redundancy
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C200/C200E Controller Architecture
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the C200/C200E I/O Modules
4/13/2012
3
Describe the Main Features of the Series C
System
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Series C Deliverables
• Key features of Series C hardware
• Performance targets
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Deliverables
• Products and Functions delivered under
the Series C Umbrella include:
–
–
–
–
–
Series C I/O
Series C FIM
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
C300 Controller
Control Firewall
• Related Deliverables include:
– FTE Bridge firmware that supports C300
connections to selected Series A I/O
• Allows FTE Bridge firmware to be
upgraded from a R300 or later system
• The C300 Firmware should match the
release of the Experion Server
– Power System
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Honeywell
Series C Deliverables
•
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Products delivered in Series C Release
– C300 Controller
• 50 ms and 20 ms
• Initial release C300 20 ms supported
for Turbo machinery Controls
– Series C I/O
• Analog Input – HART, Non-HART
• Analog Output – HART, Non-HART
• Digital Input & DI-SOE
• Digital Output
• Low Level Mux Input
• Speed Protection Module (SPM)
– Only with C300 20 ms
• Servo Valve Position Module (SVPM)
– Only with C300 20 ms
– Fieldbus Interface Module (FIM4, FIM8)
– Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
– Control Firewall
– Power System
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
I/O options for C300
•
Series C I/O
– AI, AO - HART & Non-HART
– DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE
•
Series C Fieldbus Interface
•
3
– FIM4, FIM8
PMIO
– AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE
•
FTEB connected Series A I/O
•
FTEB connections to AB PLCs
– Using a bridge chassis with a FTEB and
downlink CNI
•
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
5
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-HART Series C IO Modules
• Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
• These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
• IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO
IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
Cx-PAIX01
AI-HL
High Level Analog Input
16
Cx-PAOX01
AO
Analog Output
16
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Series C Deliverables
Which of these statements about the Series C deliverables is false?
A) Series C deliverables include Series C I/O, C300,
Series C FIM and Control Firewall
B) Series C deliverables include a new Power System
C) New FTE Bridge firmware is required but cannot
be upgraded from a R310 system
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
false
The false
statement
is " New
is " New
FTE Bridge
FTE
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is: statement
firmware
Bridge firmware
is required
is required
but it cannot
but itbe
cannot
upgraded
be
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
upgraded
from
from
aanywhere
R300
a R300
system."
system."
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Clear
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Series C Deliverables
• Key features of Series C hardware
• Performance targets
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Packaging - Overview
3
• “Series C” is the term used to describe the new
styling for the C300 controller and associated
modules
• The Series C hardware was designed to be
space efficient
– “Designed Vertical”
– No electronic card files
– “Zero Footprint” power system does not impact
module space
– Designed to offer >30% reductions in space
• Combines I/O Processor and Field Terminations
into one Assembly
– Fewer components providing higher MTBF
and Availability
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Key Attributes
• Environmental ratings
– Temperature: 0 -60 Deg C
– EMI/RFI:15 V/M External to cabinet with doors closed
– Vibration: Frequency 10 to 60 Hz, Acceleration 0.5 g max, Displacement 0.1
inch
– Class 1 Div 2/Zone 2 interface & mounting support
• Approvals Support (CE, FM, CSA, ATEX, etc.)
– No plans for UL certification of complete system
• Corrosion protected models
• All Series C components can be mixed and matched in cabinet
• Electronics mounted to IOTA
– Module Removal and Insertion Under Power (RIUP)
– Reduces footprint
• Packaged cabinet solution
– Similar to TPS Process Manager today
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Key Attributes
• “Designed Vertical”
– The modules are set at an 18 degree
angle for greater heat dissipation
• Reduces “hot spots”
– More Efficient Field Wiring
• Top/Bottom Wiring Entry
• More Natural Terminations
• No Severe Wire Bends
• Space Efficient Design
– Comparable to highest density current
competitive offerings
• Modular Approach
– Removable Terminal Blocks
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Mechanical Keying
• The Series C IO Modules all have the same
form factor. To prevent insertion of the wrong
module into the wrong IOTA, the modules are
equipped with tabs or keys which correspond to
slots on the IOTA.
Keys
Key
Slots
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Terminology
IOTA Support
3
IOTA Carrier
IOTA (Input/Output Termination Assembly)
IOM (Input/Output Module)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Main Components
• Mounting concept:
– Single cabinet side for electronics
and terminations
– Cable tray mounted carrier/IOTA with:
• Replaceable Module
• Power and Communication
Connectors
• Field Wiring Connections
• Vertical stacking of elements
– Natural flow of field wiring
• Channel mount
– Channel is like PM FTA channel
– Channel is not the same as FTA and
cannot be used for Series C mounting
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Cabinet Design
Power
Supply
Area
I/O Rail
Area
Batteries/Battery
Charger
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Packaging
What factors contribute to the Series C space-efficient design?
A) Designed Vertical
B) No electronic card files
C) Power system does not occupy footprint
D) All of the above
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect!
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statementsare
aretrue
trueand
and
make
Series
C a more
space efficient
You
must
answer
the question
before design.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Clear
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Terminology
Which of the following is not a Series C hardware terminology?
A) IOTA Support
B) IOTA Carrier
3
C) IOTA
D) IOM
E) CPM
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Theterm
term"CPM"
"CPM"isisnot
notaaSeries
SeriesCC
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
hardware terminology and is used when
You must
answer
the
question
before
referring
toanywhere
a C200
controller.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Clear
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Series C Deliverables
• Key features of Series C hardware
• Performance targets
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Performance “Targets”
FEATURE
C300 (20ms)
C300 (50ms)
65
330 (200)
Fault-Tolerant Ethernet
FTE Node s per Community
1
Non-FTE Node s per Community
200
ACE
No. ACE per Server
7
Controller
No. Controllers per Server (C200 or C300)
Latency
2
20
250 ms
100 ms
Analog
Digital
Notes:
1. 330 nodes per community if no FTEBs are present; 200 nodes per community with FTEBs.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
19
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Limitations
• The following is not supported with C300:
Series C FIM (FIM4)
- OK w/o C300
– Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs
– Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on same I/O Link
Series A FIM (FIM2)
- Requires C200 (CPM)
• The following architectures are not supported:
– C200/C200E Peer-to-Peer communication with Series C FIM4/FIM8
modules
– C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with Series A FIM (FIM2) modules
Peer-to-Peer
OK
PM I/O
OK
Series C
I/O
H
L
A
I
Honeywell
OK
NO
NO
FIM
I
O I
LM
F
I
M
OK
NO
C300
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
F C
T P
E M
B
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 4: Rules
Which of the following statements is true about a Series C system?
A) Peer-to-peer communication with FTEB based
IOLIMs is not supported
3
B) Series C I/O and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the
same I/O Link
C) C200 Peer-to-peer communications with Series C
FIM modules is not supported
D) C300 Peer-to-peer communications with FTEBbased (Series A) FIM modules is not supported
E) All of the above
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
All
All
of
ofthe
theis:
above
abovestatements
statements
You
must
answer
the question
before
are
true
about
the Series
C system.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Clear
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
C hardware includes:
• Series
– Series C I/O (HART and Non-HART AI and AO, DI, DO, LLMUX, DISOE)
–
–
–
–
Series C FIM (FIM4, FIM8)
Profibus Gateway Module
C300 Controller
Control Firewall
C is a space efficient design that combines I/O processor and
• Series
field termination into one assembly.
C electronics are mounted to IOTAs reducing footprint and
• Series
supporting module removal and insertion under power (RIUP).
• C300 controller supports Series C, Series A, and PM I/O, Series C
interface, PGM, and FTEB connections to AB PLCs via
 Fieldbus
Downlink CNI.
C300 controllers are supported per server.
•• 20
C300 Peer-to-Peer communications with FTEB-based IOLIMs is not
• supported.
 Series C and PM I/O cannot be mixed on the same I/O link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the main features of the Series C system
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the Main Features of the Series C System
4/13/2012
3
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
25
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Experion Platform Architecture
Advanced Enterprise Wide
Applications
Business FLEX
Workcenter
POMS, OptiVISION
Firewall
Casual User
Secure Read Only
Process Display
Web Server
eServer
Plant Wide
Data
Warehouse
PHD
Integrated
Physical
Security
Enterprise
Building
Integrator
Desktop
Access
for Business
Applications
Web Browsers
Business Network
Plant Asset
Management
Asset Manager
Remote Operations
Experion Station
Multivariable Control Video as a Process Sensor
Digital Video Manager
and Optimization
Profit Suite
Plant Simulation
UniSim
Video Ethernet
Advanced Applications Network
Integrated
Supervisory Control
ACE
Precision Measurement
Redundant
and Control
Global Database & Historian
Quality Control System
Experion Server
Web-based Human Interface
Experion Station
ASM Operator Effectiveness
Ergonomic
Operator Consoles
Icon Series
Focus of this Presentation
Supervisory Control Network
Regulatory, Logic
Sequential & Model
Based Controls
C300/C200 & Profit Loop
Wireless
Access
Field Mobility
Mobile PKS
Field Rounds
Automation
IntelaTrac PKS
Local Control Network
SIL 3 Safety System
Safety Manager
Redundant and/or
Remote I/O
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Wireless
Transmitters
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Basic
Process
Controller
Manager
Investment Protection
for TPS/TDC
Experion on LCN
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Architecture
AB PLCs
Point to point data using
exchange blocks
In this release,
all Series A IOMs are
supported.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
27
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Gateway Module Architecture
Experion Server
FTE
C200
Process
Controllers
C300
PGM
Rack I/O
Series A
Profibus
I/O Options
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
SST Card
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
•
Series C Profibus Gateway Module (PGM) is used to
connect Profibus devices to a C300 controller
•
Profibus Configuration Tool is integrated into Control
Builder
•
New Profibus Device & Channel Blocks in C300
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
3
– Each C300 Controller supports connections to 2 PGMs
– Each PGM can be connected to a single C300 Controller
– Each PGM supports 2 Profibus Network Links (PBLink)
• Each PGM link supports up to 124 Profibus devices
(slaves)
• Uses Profibus DP protocol to communicate with
devices
– PGMs can optionally be Redundant
• Redundant PGMs are on separate IOTAs
– New PDA protocol supports IO Data Communication
between C300 and PGM
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Architecture
Which of the following statements is not true about the Series C Architecture?
A) Series C FIM is connected to L1 or L2 switch
B) Serial Interface, Pulse Input, Device Net Interface
and Profibus Interface Series A I/O's are connected
to Control Firewall using FTEB
C) Allen Bradely PLCs can also be connected to a rack,
and then to the Control Firewall using an FTEB
D) All of the above
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""Series
SeriesCCFIM
FIMisis
connected to L1 or L2 Cisco switch". The Series C
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
FIM is the Fieldbus interface module which
You
must answer
the question
before
connects
to
the
Control
Firewall
via FTE.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Clear
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• Control Firewalls are connected to Level 1 or Level 2 switches
• The C300 Controller is connected to the Control Firewall using FTE
• The Series C FIMs (4 & 8) are the Fieldbus interfaces. They also
 connect to the Control Firewall via FTE
PGM is the Profibus interface. This module also connects to the
• The
Control Firewall via FTE
A Rack IO connects to the C300 through the Control Firewall
• Series
using an FTEB
– This rack is connected to the Control Firewall using an FTEB and via FTE
Bradley PLCs can also be connected to a Rack, and then to the
• Allen
Control Firewall using an FTEB
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the Architecture of Series C System
4/13/2012
3
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and
Options
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Controller Supported I/O
• Flexible I/O support:
– The C300 can support a number of IO modules
all of which can be mixed on the same C300.
– These IO modules can be any mix of:
• PMIO
• Series C I/O
• Series A Chassis I/O through the FTEB
module
• Series C FIMs
• Profibus Gateway Module (PGM)
– The C300 can support 64 I/O units
– The C300 is equipped with 2 IOLINK (IOL)
interfaces to connect to Series C and / or PM
I/O.
• Each IOL can support 40 I/O units
IOL
Connection
FTE
Connection
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Types of Series C I/O Modules
• Analog Input (AI) – 16 Channels
A Channel is one
Input (or output)
circuit.
– HART & non-HART
• Analog Output (AO) – 16 Channels
– HART & non-HART
• Digital Input (DI)– 32 Channels – 2 physical types
– Low Voltage – 24VDC Input
– High Voltage – 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC
• Digital Output (DO) – 32 Channels
– Optional Relay Extension Board
• Sequence Of Events (SOE) – 32 Channels
• Low Level Analog Input (LL) – 64 channels
– Thermocouple and RTD
• AI, AO, DI, DO and SOE are optionally redundant
• LL Inputs are not available in redundant configurations
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-Redundant Series C I/O Module
• IOM is physically placed on
an IOTA
• The IOTA has all the wiring
and power connections
• The IOM has the
electronics and diagnostics
I/O Link
Connection
I/O Module
Field
Termination
• AI, AO and LL modules
mount on a 6” IOTA
• DI/DO modules mount on a
9” IOTA
Calibration
Resistors /
Jumpers
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Series C I/O Support
Which of the following statements is true about C300 I/O Support?
A) Supports 2 I/O Link interfaces
B) Supports mix and match of I/O types
3
C) 64 primary IO units per C300, 40 per I/O Link
D) HLAI, HLAO, DI, DO and LL Mux
are all supported type Series C I/O's
E) All of the above
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of the
of the
above
above
statements
statements
are
You must answer the question before
are
true
true
about
about
Series
Series
Cthis
C
I/O
I/O
support.
support.
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Clear
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Redundant Series C I/O Module
• Same IO module as non-redundant
• AI, AO, DI, DO modules mount on a
12” IOTA
I/O
Module
I/O Link
Connection
Field
Termination
I/O Termination
Assembly
Redundant IOM
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Diagnostic LEDs
• Power and Status LEDs on the module itself
• Provides display of any failure conditions
• Power LED
– Off or On (green)
For detailed information,
search KB for:
Series C I/O LED Descriptions
• Status LED
– Off, Green, Amber, Red
– Steady, Flashing (1 sec), Flashing quickly (1/4 sec)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input
• 16 Analog Channels
• Supports Integrated HART
Communications
• 4 Analog Channels support
Voltage mode (device ground)
– System ground, all channels
support voltage mode, Special
wiring for ground
• Optionally Redundant
• 50msec Scan for 4-20ma input
• 4 configurable modems
• 250ms Loop Latency
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input – Non Redundant
I/O Link
Connections
Differential
Voltage Input
Channels 13-16
I/O Link
Address
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Series C I/O Support
Which of the these statements explains an IOTA?
A) The IOTA has all wiring and power connections
B) Power and Status LEDs are located on the IOTA
C) The same IOTA is used for non-redundant and
redundant IOM
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is: has
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
IOTA
IOTA
has
all the
all the
wiring
wiring
and
You must
answer
the question before
and
power
connections.
connections.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-power
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Clear
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
3
Analog Input
I/O Module
Honeywell
IOM Addressing and IOLINK
I/O Link
Connections
IOM Address, Pre-define
Address jumpers are
available
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Honeywell
HART Analog Input Wiring Options
Channels 1-12
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Channels 13-16
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Input –Redundant
I/O Link
Connections
3
Module
Fuse
I/O Link
Address
Analog Input
I/O Module
primary and
redundant
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
HART Analog Input – Detail Displays
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Output
• 16 Analog Channels
• Supports Integrated HART
Communications
• Optionally Redundant
• 250ms Loop Latency when
used with Series C HLAI
• 4 configurable modems
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Analog Output
Calibration
Voltage
Reference
I/O Link
Connections
I/O Link
Address
Analog Output
I/O Module
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
3
HART Analog Output –Detail Displays
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
49
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Non-HART Series C IO Modules
• Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
• These modules use the AI-HL and AO block
templates
• IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO
IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
Cx-PAIX01
AI-HL
High Level Analog Input
16
Cx-PAOX01
AO
Analog Output
16
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
New Non-HART Series C IO Modules (R311.2 on)
•
These Non-HART versions of both the AI and AO
contain no Hart functionality and are different from the
CC-PAIX01 and CC-PAOX01
•
•
•
They use different IOTAs:
AI IOTA – CC-TAIN01, CC-TAIN11 (red)
AO IOTA – CC-TAON01, CC-TAON11 (red)
•
These modules use the AI-HL and AO block templates
•
IO Unit Consumption remains the same as
the HART AI and HART AO
IOM Model
Names
IOM Block Name
Description
Number of
Channels
CC-PAIN01
AI-HL
High Level Analog Input
16
CC-PAON01
AO
Analog Output
16
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Low Level Inputs
• 64 Channel Low Level Multiplexer Analog Input
– Thermocouple (T/C) and RTD
• Uses only the New Solid State FTAs
– No plans to support the FTAs requiring the Power Adapter
• With the new Solid State FTAs:
– OTD before propagation of PV every 1 sec
– Does not require Power Adapter FTA
– Can be used with existing UCN/xPM installations
• With the existing FTAs:
– OTD propagates every 30 sec
• FTAs will require standard FTA Channel and cannot be mounted on
IOTA Carrier
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
LLMUX Solutions
Standard Solution
LL IN-CABINET CONFIGURATION
Power
Status
51304465-xxx Internal Cabinet Cable
CU/CC-TAIM01
PMIO LLMUX
VL/BS
C
CC-PAIM01
3
6C
on
d
LL TCMUX IOTA
uc
t
or
Ca
b
le
He
a
d
Max. Length
1000 ft.
B-Size
FTA Assemblies must be
installed in a cabinet.
LLMUX Models
MU/MC-TAMT04
MU/MC-TAMR04
MU/MC-TAMT14
New FTAs Only (no Power Adapter)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Input
• 32 Channels
• Two (2) Physical IOM Types
1. 24VDC
2. 100VAC/120VAC/125VDC/240VAC
• Three (3) Physical IOTA Types
1. 24VDC
2. 120VAC/125VDC
3. 240VAC
• Optionally Redundant
• 100ms Loop Latency
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Input, contd.
I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
I/O Link
Address
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Honeywell
Digital Input –Detail Displays
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Digital Input Sequence of Events Module (DISOE)
Honeywell
• 32 Channels
• 1ms Digital Input resolution for
SOE
3
• Time Correlation with other SOE
modules
– Within C300 view
– Over either I/O Link
– Works with PMIO SOE
• Input Channel scanning
– 20ms (SOE mode)
– 5ms (Low Latency mode)
– 1ms (SOE)
• Input channels are Isolated
– Selection for Internal or External
excitation power
• Optionally Redundant
Uses Same IOTA As DI24V (TDIL01 & TDIL11)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Honeywell
Digital Input – New DISOE Module
•
Existing DI Module
– 20ms scanning (Normal mode)
• Open Wire Detection
– 5ms scanning (Low Latency mode)
• Open Wire Detection disabled
•
New DISOE Module
– DISOE Module CC-PDIS01
– Uses Same IOTAs as DI
CC-TDIL01 & CC-TDIL11
– All DI Functions PLUS
• 1ms SOE resolution
• 20ms scanning (SOE mode)
Same IOTA
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
– Open Wire Detection disabled
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
24V Digital Input IOTA for DI & DISOE
CC-TDIL01
I/O Link
Connections
Digital Input
I/O Module
DISOE uses
the same
IOTAs as DI
(CC-TDIL01 &
CC-TDIL11)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
I/O Link
Address
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
Honeywell
Digital Input – Detail Displays
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output
• 32 Channels
• Same IOM used for 24VDC or
High Voltage Output
• IOTA Types
3
– Redundant and Non-redundant
– 24VDC Bussed Output
– High Voltage Relay Output
• 100VAC / 120VAC / 240VAC /
125VDC / 48VDC
• Utilizes Relay Extension Board
• Optionally Redundant
• 100ms Loop Latency
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
61
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output
I/O Link
Connections
I/O Link
Address
Digital Output
I/O Module
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Output Module – with relay extender
Relay Extension Panel
Digital Output IOTA
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Honeywell
Digital Output –Detail Displays
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
3
• Honeywell worked with MTL to manufacture
an IOTA for use when wiring into hazardous
locations (C1D1 / Zone 1).
• The IOTA will be larger than a standard
IOTA (approximately 9” wide)
• 1-, 2- and 4-channel isolators are available
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas, contd.
Standard
IOTA Footprint
Non-Redundant
IOTA + IOM
6.00”
Redundant
IOTA + IOM
I/S
IOTA Footprint
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C I/O in Hazardous Areas
Cabinet Layout – Wide Channel
• Supports mixture of IS and general
purpose signals within same cabinet
• Cables are segregated using hazardousarea trunking
• High vertical packing density
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Process Manager I/O
• No separate IOLIM needed, connects directly to IOLink
• PM I/O includes AI, AO, DI, DO, RTD, T/C, DI SOE
• PM I/O can be redundant
– HLAI, HLAIHART, STIM, AO, AO16HART, DI, DISOE, DO
– NOT: LLAI, LLMUX, and RHMUX
Direct connection
to C300 IOLINK
• FTA for I/O
• Remote I/O using Fiber Optic
PM I/O
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Honeywell DE Transmitters and C300
• Support is provided for Honeywell DE-based smart transmitters in C300
via existing PMIO modules:
• The (older) Smart Transmitter Interface (STI) module is not supported in
Experion
• The Experion Platform provides full integration of all DE information
(diagnostics, configuration, etc.) within the standard system displays.
• No additional Asset Management software (e.g., Asset Manager PKS or
Field Device Manager) is required to access the DE data.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
FTE Bridge in Series C
• FTE Bridge, as part of a Series C system
allows:
– A C300 Controller to use Series A chassis I/O
without the need for a C200/C200E
– A C300 to communicate (Exchange Block
peer-to-peer) with Rockwell devices like PLC5
and CL5550 using a bridge chassis with a
FTEB and downlink CNI
• The FTEB continues to operate at 10Mbps
after updating firmware to support C300
communication with Series A Chassis I/O
• C200/C200E with FTEB can be used for
Peer to Peer with a C300 Controller
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
3
– Smart Transmitter Interface – Multivariable (STI-MV)
Honeywell
Question 3: Series C I/O
Which of the following I/O’s are available in
a Series C type?
A) HLAI, HLAO, Profibus I/O, LL Inputs
B) DI, DISOE, DO, HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs
C) HLAI, HLAO, LL Inputs, Serial Interface
D) Serial Interface, DeviceNet, Pulse Input, HLAI
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
TheI/O's
I/O's
available
availableininaa
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Series C type are DI, DO, HLAI,
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did HLAO
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
ClickLL
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
Inputs.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
71
Clear
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 4: FTEB in Series C
Which of the following scenarios are available for a FTEB to publish I/O
data to a C300?
A) FTEB in redundant chassis connected to C300
B) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via Control Firewall
C) FTEB in a non-redundant chassis connected to
C300 via L1 or L2 switch
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
valid
validscenario
scenariofor
forFTEB
FTEBto
topublish
publishI/O
I/O
data You
to C300
" FTEBthe
in aquestion
non redundant
mustisanswer
before I/O chassis
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
connected to
C300 via Control Firewall."
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
72
36
Clear
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SERIES C
I/O
Family
I/O Type
HLAI
HLAI w/ HART
LLAI
LLMUX
RHMUX
STI
STI-MV
AO8
AO16
AO16 w/ HART
Serial Device
Serial
Pulse
DI
DI-24V
DISOE
DO16
DO32
Fieldbus
C300
Support
C200/C200E
Support
xPM
Support
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
C300
Support
I/O Type
HLAI w/ HART
LLMUX64
AO16 w/ HART
DI24D32
DI32
DO24D32
DO32
Fieldbus
√
√
√
√
√
C200/C200E
Support
I/O
Family
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
RAILSERIES A
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
C200/C200E
Support
HLAI
√
DI24D
√
DI120A
√
LLAI-TC
√
LLAI-RTD
√
AO
√
DO24D
√
DO120A
√
DO-Relay
√
AO16 w/ HART
√
I/O
Family
xPM
Support
C300
Support
I/O Type
RAIL –
SERIES H
PMIO
I/O
Family
I/O Type
C300
C200
xPM
Support Support Support
HLAI8
LLAI8
AO8
DI16
DO4
DI16
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
73
√
√
√
√
√
√
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
I/O Compatibility – Series A
CHASSIS SERIES A
I/O
Family
I/O Type
HLAI16
HLAI6
HLAI8 w/HART
LLAI-TC6
LLAI-RTD6
AO6V
AO6MA
AO8
AO8 w/HART
Pulse (612O)
DI120A16I
DI220A16I
DI120A8D
DI120A16
DI24D16I
DI24D16D
DI24D32
DO120/220A16I
DO120A8D
DO120/220A16
DO220A16-Relay
DO24D16I
DO24D16D
DO24D32
Serial
Fieldbus (FIM2)
Profibus DP
DeviceNet
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
xPM
Support
C300
Support
C200/C200E
Support
TC-IAH161
TC-IAH061
TC-HAI081
TC-IXL062
TC-IXR061
TC-OAV061
TC-OAH061
TC-OAV081
TC-HAO081
TC-MDP081
TC-IDK161
TC-IDW161
TC-IDX081
TC-IDA161
TC-IDJ161
TC-IDX161
TC-IDD321
TC-ODK161
TC-ODX081
TC-ODA161
TC-ORC161
TC-ODJ161
TC-ODX161
TC-ODD321
TC-MUX021
Model
Number
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
SST-PFBCLX
1756-DNB
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
√
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
74
37
xPM
Support
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
3
C300 I/O Compatibility
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Series C Input/Output Modules and Options
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
75
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
76
38
Describe Series C Input-Output Modules and Options
4/13/2012
3
Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series
C System
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
77
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO Topology Rules
• I/O Topology Rules:
– 2 IO LINKS
– PMIO and Series C I/O can be on the same C300
– Connect to series A I/O using an FTEB
– Connect to Allen Bradley PLCs using an FTEB
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
78
39
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules – IO Capacity
A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).
Series C IO and PM IO count as 1 IOU each.
Series C IO and PMIO are connected to C300 using
IO LINKS.
Series A I/O also consume IOUs, shown later.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
79
C300 Topology Rules – IOLINK Capacity
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs.
A C300 controller supports 2 IO LINKs.
An IO LINK can be configured for either Series C IO
(at 750 kb link speed) or PMIO (at 375 kb link speed).
An IO LINK cannot support both Series C IO and
PMIO on the same link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
80
40
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO and PMIO Mix
Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs
#2: PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 2
750 kbps
Link 1
375 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs
#3: Series C +PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 1
750 kbps
40 PRI
Series C IOMs
40 RED
Series C IOMs
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Link 2
375 kbps
40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs
#4: Series C +PMIO
TOTAL 64 IOUs
Link 2
375 kbps
Link 1
375 kbps
24 PRI
PM - IOPs
24 RED
PM - IOPs
40 PRI
PM - IOPs
40 RED
PM - IOPs
Link 2
750 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
81
C300 Topology Rules – FTEB Connections to CF9
Honeywell
A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs for interfacing with
supported Chassis I/O or AB PLC interface.
FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall
as the C300.
This limits the FTEBs to 6 per redundant C300
controller.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
82
41
4/13/2012
3
#1: Series C I/O
TOTAL 64 IOUs
Honeywell
C300 Topology Rules – Series A IOU Capacity
Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16
IOUs. The IOU count per module is:
Serial
Interface
8 per FTA
Profibus
Interface
4
DeviceNet Interface
4
Pulse Input
1
The FTEB used for Series A cannot be in a redundant
configuration.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
83
Honeywell
C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations
#5: Series C + PMIO + Series A
TOTAL 64 IOUs
C300
Capacity 3 – MIX #3
Link 1
Link 2
750 kbps
375 kbps
24 PRI
Series C IOMs
24 PRI
PM-IOPs
24 RED
PM-IOPs
24 RED
Series C IOMs
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
FTE
16 Series A IO
Units w/FTEB
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
84
42
4/13/2012
Honeywell
3
C300 Topology Rules – FTEB Limitations
Important limitations:
An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller.
You cannot have any other C200/C200E, IO or CNI
downlink modules in the FTEB chassis to connect to
other IO chassis.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
85
C300 Topology Rules – FTEB I/F Capacity
4/13/2012
Honeywell
CNI, ENET or
DHRIO only
FTEBs can be used to connect AB PLCs for Peer to
Peer, using Exchange Blocks. No IOUs consumed.
A maximum of 32 exchange blocks, and a maximum
of 8 PLCs can be connected.
The interface uses Control Net to the AB PLCs and
allows only the CNI, ENET or DHRIO.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
86
43
4/13/2012
C300 Topology Rules – Series C FIM Usage
Honeywell
A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.
A FIM needs to connect to a C300 if a combined
control strategy is needed.
A FIM4 counts as 4 IOUs; A FIM8 counts as 8 IOUs
A C300 can support 15 FIM4s, or up to 8 FIM8s
A mix of FIM4s & FIM8s is supported as long as the
total number of H1 links does not exceed 64
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
87
C300 Topology Rules – Series C FIM Capacity
Honeywell
An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.
A FIM supports 4 or 8 H1 links, with 16 devices per
link.
An Experion Server can support up to 12000
FieldBus devices!
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
88
44
4/13/2012
Honeywell
3
C300 Topology Rules – PGM Connection and Capacity
It is not necessary to connect a PGM to the same
CF9 as the C300 (but is a good practice)
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.
A PGM supports two ProfiBus links
Each ProfiBus Link supports up to 124 devices
Each device supports up to 16 I/O modules
IOUs consumed by a PGM must be calculated
(# Digital IO Points / 384) + (# Analog IO Points / 24)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
89
Honeywell
Question 1: IO Topology Rules
Which of the following statements is not true for Series C IO Topology
Rules?
A) Series C, PM and Series C A IO on the same
IO Link
B) Series C and PM IO cannot be on the same IO Link
C) FTEB connected chassis can allow connections to
only 1 C300 controller
D) Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support
up to 16 IOUs
Incorrect. Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same
Correct! Series C, PM and Series A IO on the same IOLINK
IOLINK is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK
is not true for a Series C IO Topology. An IOLINK cannot
cannot support both Series C IO and PMIO on the same
support
both
Seriesis:C IO and PMIO on the same link. An
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
link.
An FTEB
connected to the same Control Firewall as
FTEB
connected
to the
same
Control
Firewall as the C300
You
must
answer
the
question
before
the
C300
can
publish
Series
A IO data to the
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
notcontroller
-answer
answered
-can
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toA
continue
continue
completely
controller
publish
Series
IO data to the C300.
continuing
C300.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Submit
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
90
45
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Topology Rules
A project is required to use Fieldbus only control strategy for 1500 FF
devices. How many C300 controllers are required?
A) 2 C300 Controllers + 24 FIM Modules
B) 1 C300 Controller + 48 FIM Modules
C) No C300 Controllers are required, only 24 Series C
FIM Modules
Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
statement
is
is "No
"No C300
C300 controllers
controllers are
are
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerstatement
is:
required, only 24 Series C FIM Modules". Since the
project requires only Fieldbus control strategy the C300
You must
answer
the question
controller
is not
required.
Each FIMbefore
Module has 4 FF links
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and each link continuing
supports 16 FF devices. Hence 1 FIM
module can support a maximum of 64 (16*4) FF devices.
Hence only 24 (1500/64) Series C FIM Modules are
required.
Click anywhere to continue.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Submit
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
91
Honeywell
Question 3: Topology Rules
FTEBs can be used in the Series C topology under specific scenarios.
Which of these configurations is valid?
A) FTEB connected to AB PLC via Downlink CNI
B) FTEBs must be connected to the same Control
Firewall as the C300
C) An FTEB connected chassis can allow connections
to only 1 C300 controller
D) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
All All
of of
thethe
above
above
statements
statements
areare
correct
correct
for
You
must
answer
the
question
before
for
FTEBs
FTEBs
used
used
in
in
the
the
Series
Series
C
C
topology.
topology.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
92
46
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
•
There are 2 IO LINKS per C300
•
A C300 can support a maximum of 64 IO Units (IOU).
•
A C300 can support up to 7 FTEBs
•
•
•
•
A Series C FIM can be used with or without the C300.
– Mix and match of Series C I/O and PMIO is an option
– Same IO LINK cannot support both Series C and PM IO
3
– Each IO Link can support a maximum of 40 IOUs
– Each FTEB used to connect Series A IO can support up to 16 IOUs
– FTEBs must be connected to the same Control Firewall as the C300
– FTEBs interface with Series A I/O or AB PLC interface
– FTEBs cannot be in a redundant configuration
A C300 can support 15 FIMs.
An Experion Server can support up to 125 FIMs.
A C300 can support 2 PGMs.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
4/13/2012
93
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the I/O Topology Rules for the Series C System
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the IO Topology Rules for the Series C System
94
47
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Contents
3
Verify Series C Hardware Connections .................................................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Introduction
3
The following Lab will allow you to become more familiar with the Series C Hardware.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 1 of 2
Verify Series C Hardware Connections
Practice
Performance Review for C300 Cabinet
Please check off each item as you complete the task.
Your course manager may wish to observe you while you perform these tasks.
LEARN BY DOING

4
Step
Action
1
Go to the C300 cabinet, and locate the following items.
2
Locate the CF9 in the Cabinet.
3
Is uplink LED is blinking?
4
How many cables are connected to ports on the CF9?
5
How many LEDs are blinking on the CF9?
6
Locate the C300 Controller Module.
7
Locate the FTE Device Index rotary switches on C300 IOTA.
8
What is the Device Index set on rotary switches?
9
Is an IOLINK cable connected to the C300 IOTA?
10
On the CF9 IOTA, identify the Yellow & Green uplink cables.
11
On the C300 IOTA, identify the cables which are connected to the CF9.
12
Locate the ‘reset power’ solder pads on the C300 IOTA.
13
Locate the FTE A and FTE B status LEDs on the C300 module.
14
Is the C300 module status LED steady or blinking?
15
If the status LED is blinking, why is it blinking?
16
Identify the Power supply + and - cable on the bus bar.
17
Locate the address jumpers for the IO modules.
18
What is the IOM number on the Analog input module?
19
What is the IOM number on Digital input module?
20
What is the IOM number on Digital output module?
21
What is the IOM number on Analog output module?
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
4
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about the
purpose and use of the Control Builder
application.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
be able to:
– Open and navigate Control Builder
– Identify the toolbar icons and functionality
– Explain the purpose of the tabs in the
tree windows
– Describe the load functions available
from the Control Builder Project and
Monitoring tabs
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Starting Control Builder
• Control Builder Functions
• Control Builder Load Function
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder
Click to open
Configuration Studio
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder, contd.
Select the server.
Then, select the Connect button.
4
General rule:
Select the System.
Here we are selecting
the server.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Honeywell
User accounts
•
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Configuration Studio login is not required for integrated accounts or Users added
to Experion Install time groups
Windows user is part of
Experion groups
Windows user
created for
Windows login
•
Experion Install time groups include following
–
–
–
–
–
–
Product Administrators
Local Engineers
Local Supervisors
Local Operators
Local Ack View Only Users
Local View Only Users
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder, contd.
A logon window will appear only
when you have logged on to
Windows as a user who is not a
member of a pre-defined
Experion group
Change to
User Name: mngr
Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>
Careful, this user & password
may not work at your site.
In fact, you may not be required
to enter user name & password.
Control Builder Introduction
Click
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Start Control Builder, contd.
Select Control
Strategy
Select Configure Process
Control Strategies
Access level
This information is displayed
only if you connected to the
Server, not the System.
User name
Server name
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Starting Control Builder
• Control Builder Functions
4
• Control Builder Load Function
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Control Builder Introduction
9
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Toolbar
Not all toolbar icons will be available
until you open Control Builder items.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Toolbar, contd.
1 2
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
3 4 5
6 7 8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Open Tree Window
Close active Control Drawing
or Tree Window
Move to the Left
Move to the Right
Save the active Control Drawing
Delete the selected object
Copy selection and place on
clipboard
Paste clipboard contents
Print selected pages of active
document
Display program information
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
This is a good reference page,
you may want to “flag” it.
Display help information
Point Selection Command
Create a wire for connecting function
blocks
Create a Parameter Connector
Assign Modules to a Control
Execution Environment (CEE)
Module Containment
Load selected items
Upload selected items
Substitute Names
QVCS Manager
Toggle single item state
SCM Navigation
Fieldbus DD import
View error log
Change scale dimensions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Control Builder Introduction
25
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
11
Control Builder Status Line
Honeywell
Security level
Experion PKS server name
currently running as primary
‘Primary’ when connected to ServerB
‘Backup’ when connected to ServerA
(should always be Primary)
Shows ‘Sync’ when ERDBs on
ServerA and ServerB are
synchronized
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder System Preferences
4
• To establish IP addresses using the Embedded FTE tab on System
Preferences dialog:
• Click on the “Tools System Preferences” option to open Embedded
FTE Tab.
Click the Edit network parameters check
box to make address fields available for
editing.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Control Builder System Preferences
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Type applicable base address. Setting the Base IP
Address prompts a suggested Subnet Mask address.
Type applicable Subnet Mask address. An invalid
Subnet Mask address displays an error message.
Type applicable Default Gateway address.
Provide the procedure for establishing the NTP time
sources for the C300 and the Series C FIM. The FTE
Bridge Module does not use NTP.
Click OK, warning will be displayed that restart remote
Control builder session.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tree Windows
1 2 3
1. Clicking the Open Tree button will open a tree
window. Clicking the button again will open a
second tree window.
2. Clicking the Close button will close the selected
window.
3. Clicking the Open Library button will
open the Library window
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tree Windows
• Tabs appear at the bottom of each tree window.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs
• The Project Tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.
4
• The Project Tab is linked directly to the ERDB in the Experion Server.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs, contd.
• The Monitoring Tab:
– Displays all objects loaded to the control
processor module (CPM)
– Permits active modules to be viewed and
controlled during process operations
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Monitoring Tab
• To disable the online viewing of control
modules in the monitoring tab click:
Chart > Disable Chart Monitoring
– The Control Module (CM) window must
be open to make the change
• Selection are made per Control Module
• Disabling Chart Monitoring only lasts as
long as the CM window is open
– The next time the CM window is opened,
it will be re-enabled
• Generally, Chart Monitoring should be
Enabled
– When disabled, values shown on the
Monitoring Tab are from the ERDB (last
downloaded), not from the controller
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Tabs
• The Library Tab displays all available system function blocks grouped
into type categories.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Control Builder Functions
Control Builder is :
A) An online documentation tool for C200
controllers and Experion PKS servers
B) A tool used only for building graphics
C) A graphical tool used to design control
strategies for C200, C300, ACE and SCE
to save run time data
4
D) A graphical tool used to view plant graphics
Correct!
Incorrect.
Control
Control
builder
builder
is a isgraphical
a graphical
tooltool
used
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
to design
used tocontrol
designstrategies
control strategies
for C200,
for
C300,
C200,
ACE
You must answer the question before
C300,
and
ACE
SCE
and
and
SCE
save
and
run
save
time
run
data.
time
data.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Control Builder Introduction
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Clear
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Starting Control Builder
• Control Builder Functions
• Control Builder Load Function
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Load Function
Controller
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Control Builder Introduction
23
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Load Function, contd.
Project / Monitor Tabs
Update
Server
RTDB
Checkpoint
File
Monitor
Tab
Project
Tab
Load
Windows
Upload
Load (reload)
Checkpoint
Restore from
Checkpoint
Control
Controller
Processor
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Load Operation
During the load operation from the Control Builder project tab, control
strategies are downloaded:
A) Only to the C200 controller
B) To C200 memory, the monitor
tab and the server real time database
C) Only to the server real time database
D) Only to the C200 memory and monitor tab
Click anywhere to continue.
Control Builder Introduction
4
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
Incorrect.
During
During
the load
the
operation
operation
fromfrom
Control
Control
Builder
You must
answer
the load
question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did tab,
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
project
Builder
project
control
tab,
strategies
control
strategies
are
downloaded
are downloaded
to C200
continuing
tomemory,
C200 memory,
the monitor
the monitor
tab andtab
theand
server
the server
real time
real
time
database.
database.
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Clear
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• Control Builder:
a graphical, object-oriented configuration environment in Configuration
– IsStudio
used to design, implement and document control applications.
toolbar icons that become available when specific Control Builder items
– Has
are opened.
– Has tree window tabs to help you design control applications.
• The Project tab displays the CPM, IOMs, CMs and SCMs in the current
project.
• The Monitoring tab displays all objects that have been loaded to the
control processor module (CPM) and permits active modules to be
viewed and controlled during process.
• The Library tab displays all available system CMs and function blocks
grouped into type categories that can be used to build control strategies.
Control strategies download to C200, C200E, C300 memory, the monitor tab
– and
the server real time database.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe the Functionality of Control Builder
4/30/2012
4
Use Compare Parameters Options
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the compare
parameters functions in Control Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to:
– Compare system parameters
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• The Compare Parameters Function:
– Allows you to compare the parameters on function blocks in your ERDB with
parameters on the same function blocks loaded on your controller.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Comparing System Parameters
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Using Compare Parameters
4
Tools > System Preferences
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Control Builder Introduction
33
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Compare Parameters
CM_FV101RC loading from Project tab
Uncheck if PVHIALM is to remain at 87 -- be sure to perform an
Upload to Monitoring and an Update to Project!
This dialog box is displayed
at the time the download
operation is requested.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Comparing Parameters
When the Compare Parameters function is active:
A) The Compare Parameters checkbox in the
Tools > System Preferences window is checked
B) Control Builder will inform you of any parameter
discrepancies between the control module you are
loading and the control module which resides on the
controller
C) Control Builder will give you the option to keep
certain parameter values on the controller or
overwrite them with new values
D) All of the above
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No.You
All
Allmust
these
theseanswer
statements
statements
are
are correct
correct
when
when the
the
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Compare Parameters
function is active.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Control Builder Introduction
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Clear
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The Compare Parameters function in Control Builder:
parameters from function blocks in your ERDB with parameters
– Compares
from function blocks in your controller, giving you the opportunity to keep or
write over existing values.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Identify Functionality of Compare Parameters
4
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Use Compare Parameters Options
4/30/2012
Use Control Builder Search
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this section we will learn about Control Builder search enhancements
introduced in Experion R400
• At the end of this module you will be able to perform the functions such
as
– Navigation from hyperlinks
– Search, Sort and Filter Tags
– Search function blocks in chart
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder Navigation
•
Right-click a wire connector to locate the source and destination blocks
– Locate From Param option – source block
– Locate to Param option – destination block
– Navigation is available for connecting wires and not for block pins
Destination
Block.Parameter will
be highlighted
4
Source
Block.Parameter
will be highlighted
Hover mouse over wire
connector to view tooltip
indicating source and
destination blocks
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigate to Block in Chart
Double-click block in
tree view
Right-click block in
tree view and select
‘Locate in Chart’
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigation Using Hyperlinks
• Parameter Connector
• Cross Reference
• SCM step output or condition
OR
Right
Click
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Selecting Hyperlink Color
• The following parameters will be
displayed as hyperlinks
Hyperlink color set in
‘User Preferences’ will
override ‘System
Preferences’
– Parameter connectors, Crossreferences, SCM expressions
User Preferences are tied
to the Windows logon.
Config Studio logon and
Signon Mgr logon do not
make any difference.
• The hyperlink color can be
configured from System
Preferences or User Preferences
System Preferences
are copied to User
Preferences when a
new Windows user logs
on.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Hyperlink Color
Project Mode
Configured hyperlink
text color displayed in
Project mode
4
Monitoring Mode
Hyperlinks displayed
in normal text color
in Monitoring mode
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigation Scenarios
Target Parameter
Chart Navigates to
In same SCM handler
Corresponding Block/Parameter is selected
In different handler within
same SCM
SCM Handler shall be invoked and corresponding block /
parameter is selected
In different SCM
Chart for the particular SCM is opened and corresponding
block / parameter is selected
In CM
Chart is opened for the CM and corresponding block /
parameter is selected
Directly belongs to a CM
Chart of the tagged module is opened
Alias in the same SCM
Configuration form is opened with the Alias tab active
DATA block parameter
DATA block’s properties is opened with the Formula
Parameters/Report Parameters tab active
Tagged block which does not
have a chart
Configuration form shall be opened for the tagged block.
Block which does not exist
Tag name is displayed as ‘???’ and no hyperlink shall be
displayed
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Special Navigation Scenarios
Target Parameter
Chart Navigates to
OPC parameter
Configuration form of the OPC gateway shall be opened
Projected parameter
Configuration form for the CM/SCM/RCM shall be
opened with the Projected parameters tab select
Substitute Block
Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the
Substitute Blocks tab active
Substitute Parameter
Substitute Name List popup shall be opened with the
Substitute Parameters tab active
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Search Tags Toolbar
• Experion R400 provides a search toolbar to search for tags in Control
Builder
Project Window
Monitoring Window
Chart View
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Find Block in Chart
• Enter the block name in the chart toolbar and click ‘search’ option
– Block will appear selected in chart
4
Block Names only.
Wildcards not allowed.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigating Between Chart Pages
Select to close
the chart toolbar
Enter the page number
and press <Enter> key
or
button
Right-click chart empty
space and select ‘Display
Search Bar’
Page will be
visible in chart
view
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Navigating Between Chart Pages
Icon
Function
Navigate to the first page
Navigate to the previous page
Navigate to the next page
Navigate to the last page
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Search Tags Toolbar – Project, Monitoring Tab
•
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Search tags in Project tab
–
–
Select name of required strategy
Press Enter key or click and the
corresponding chart is opened
•
If user enters a tag name which
does not exist in the database,
an error message is displayed
•
If user enters a tag name that does
not have a chart
–
–
Enter initial
tag name
Configuration form is opened
Example, search for a controller in
Project mode, controller
configuration form is opened
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder List View
• List View available in Control Builder to search, sort and filter tags
4
– List View can be opened from both Project and Monitoring modes
– Cells are not editable in List View
• Filter row text is editable, for filtering text to be entered
• List View can be filtered for to view details of a particular tag
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Open List View
• Select the Project tree/Monitoring tree
– Select View  List View
– List View will open for Project/Monitoring
mode depending on selected tree view
OR
• Right-click empty space in tree view and
select ‘List’ View
Button to open
List View
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Default Columns in List View
• Default columns available in both Project and Monitoring List View
Columns
Description
Name
The name of the tag will be represented with an icon
Type
Represents type of module for example FTE ,CPM,CPM200s,IOLIMS,CEE,CM etc
Parent
Gives name of the parent block
Represents state of the block for example initial, loaded, changed (Project mode) or
active, inactive, error, database invalid (Monitoring mode)
State
Description
Gives description of the block
Parent Asset
Gives description of the parent asset associated with the block
Gives description of the date and time the last modification was made to the block's
configuration
Date Last Modified
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Control Builder Introduction
55
List View Toolbar – Assignment Parent, Column Organizer
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Used for navigation to
different controllers
Used to organize
the columns
Parent Item Name
Description
All Tags
Displays all strategies in the database. For example
controllers, CEEs, IOLINKs, CMs, SCM, RCM,
UCM, etc
Root
Displays elements directly below the root. For
example controllers, interface modules, unassigned
Controller
Displays all tagged blocks under the controller
Unassigned
Displays tagged blocks which are not assigned to
any particular controller
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
List View Toolbar Buttons
Functions
Clear Filters
Copy Selected
Rows
Refresh
Icons
Description
Clears all filters applied on the individual columns in List view
Copies selected rows along with the currently displayed parameters
Updates List View contents with the latest changes
Opens the previously saved filters from any particular location
Save Filters
Used to save the filter to an particular location
4
Open Filters
Change Context
Last Update
Control Builder Introduction
User can switch from Project mode to monitoring mode or vice versa
Displays the date & time when the contents of the List view were last updated
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• Hyperlinks are used to navigate to respective Control Strategies

• List View is available in Control Builder to sort, Search and filter tags

• Search Toolbar is added to search for tags in Control Builder

Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Use Control Builder Search
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Use Control Builder Search
4/30/2012
4
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
61
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to locate
information about Control Builder
components in Knowledge Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will
know how to:
– Find function block information and
theory in Knowledge Builder
– Find parameter information in
Knowledge Builder
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Knowledge Builder Location
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Function Blocks in Knowledge Builder
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Experion R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > Regulatory Control Blocks
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
PID Block Theory
Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control > PID Block
4
PID
Theory
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Reference
Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Question 1: Knowledge Builder Parameter Information
Honeywell
Where can you find information in Knowledge Builder for the CVEUHI
parameter on a PID function block?
A) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Reference> CXXXX Parameters
B) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Components Theory> CXXXX Parameters
C) Experion PKS> Reference> Control Builder
Parameter Reference> CXXXX Parameters
D) None of the above
No.
The correct
path
to find information for the CVEUHI
The
Your
correct
answer:
answerpath
is: to
Yes!
No.
The
The correct
correct
path
to find
find information
information for
for the
the CVEUHI
CVEUHI
parameter
onanswer
a PIDA the
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
You must
question
before
parameter
a
PIDA
function
block
in Knowledge Builder is
YouExperion
Incorrect
Correct
did You
noton
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
PKS>
Reference>
Control
Builder
Parameter
Experion PKS>continuing
Reference> Control Builder Parameter
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Reference> CXXXX Parameters
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Control Builder Introduction
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Clear
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• Read Knowledge Builder to learn about the components you’ll use to
create control modules including:
– Function block information and theory
 (Experion PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Components Theory >
Regulatory Control)
Parameter information
– (Experion
PKS R400 > Reference > Control Builder Parameter Reference)
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe How to Locate CB Information in KB
4
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Control Builder Introduction
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Describe How to Locate CB Concepts in KB
4/30/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Control Builder Introduction
Contents
4
Open and Operate Control Builder ........................................................................................................3
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder
Open and Operate Control Builder
Practice
The Purpose of this lesson is to demonstrate opening and operating Control Builder. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to:
•
Identify the tabs used to make structural changes to an existing Control Module.
•
Identify the tabs used to change parameters online.
•
An Experion PKS Server
•
The server name for your system (E20ESV##_Server), where the ## symbols represent your
team number; will be supplied by your instructor.
Introduction
•
Control Builder is one of the Experion PKS Engineering Tools.
•
Controllers can connect to a Server over FTE or over ControlNet.
•
Control Builder can run on the Server or an Engineering Workstation. If controllers are
connected to the server over FTE, then a maximum of 12 Control Builder clients can
connect to a single Experion server. If controllers are connected to the server over
ControlNet, then a maximum of 4 Control Builder clients can connect to a single Experion
server.
•
The devices, as well as control strategies, are created in Control Builder and downloaded to
the C200 Controller, C200E Controller, C300 Controller or ACE and the Experion PKS
Server.
•
Configuration Studio is required to launch Control Builder.
•
In this course you will use the Manager (mngr) account to log into configuration studio.
•
The user name entered when logging on to Configuration Studio determines the access level
of the user in Control Builder.
•
View Only  VIEW only
•
Ack Only  View and alarm acknowledgement
•
OPER & SUPV  Allow Operations
•
ENGR & MNGR  Allow Configurations
•
The Experion PKS Operator profile can use a Windows account ID and password
(Integrated Accounts).
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
4
Prerequisites
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder
•
On a system with only one EPKS server, the Configuration Studio Connect window will
show both a System and a Server. Connecting to the System allows access to Enterprise
wide configuration, while connecting to the Server only allows access to server specific
configuration. Generally, it is best to connect to the system rather than the server.
•
Identify the System and Server from the icon, as shown below. The server is also
categorized as Experion PKS Server in the Type column of the Connect window.
System/Server
4
Icon
Purpose
System
Use Configuration Studio to connect to a
system to access the Enterprise Model
Database.
Server
Use Configuration Studio to connect to a
specific server.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
Click Start > All Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS> Configuration Studio.
4
1
Action
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
2
Action
In the Connect window, from the Local Targets tab, select your Experion Server
(E20ESV##_Server).
(Note your server list may appear different than the one shown below)
ATTENTION
The display, as seen above might, be different on your
screen.
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.
Verify that the server name shown in the property
panel (in gray) is the same as the server name
selected in the list above.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
3
Action
Click Connect.
4
ATTENTION
Depending on the credentials used to logon to
Windows, it may not be necessary to provide
additional credentials (as shown) here.
In the Logon to window, enter the following information:
User name: mngr
4
Password: mngr1
Domain: <Traditional Operator Security>
5
4/30/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
Action
6
In the Configuration Explorer tab, in the left-side pane, expand your server (click the
“+” symbol next to the E20ESV##_Server – ServerName), to expand the corresponding
tree.
ATTENTION
For the class, the Server Name is E20ESV##_Server,
where ## is the Student number.
7
8
Select Control Strategy.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
Select Configure process control strategies.
4
8
Action
ATTENTION
The Control Builder application window will open.
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
9
Action
In the Control Builder application window, you will see a screen, as illustrated below:
Toolbar
Tree window
Your access level appears in the lower right corner as shown.
ATTENTION
The status line at the bottom of the Control Builder
application indicates:
1. Sync if the ERDBs are synchronized (only on
redundant servers. The example above is a
non-redundant server).
2. The ERDB to which Control Builder is
connected. This should always be ‘Primary’
which indicates that Control Builder is
connected to the B server (the primary ERDB
is always on the B server).
3. The Experion Server to which Control Builder
is connected.
4. The access level of the user.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
10
Action
The toolbar gives you a graphical interface for accessing the different tools available in
Control Builder. Some of the tools can also be found in the dropdown menus.
The details of the toolbar are as follows:
1 2 3 4 5 6
7 8 9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
27
1  Open Tree. Open Tree Window
2  Close. Closes the Tree Window that has focus in Control Builder
3  Open Library
4  Move to the Left
4
5  Move to the Right
6  Save. Saves the active Control Drawing
7  Delete. Deletes the selected Object
8  Copy. Copies the selection and places on the clipboard
9  Paste. Pastes the item from clipboard contents
10  Print. Prints the selected pages of active document
11 Displays Program information
12 Displays Help information
13 Point Selection Command
14 Wire Connector
15 Parameter Connector
16 Assign Module to Execution Environment
17 Module Containment
18 Load Parameters
19  Upload Parameters
20  Substitute Names
21  QVCS (Qualification and Version Control System)
22  Toggle single item state
23  SCM Navigation
24  Field Device Description Unit
25  Wireless Device Description Unit
26  View Error Log
27  Change Scale
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder
Using Tree Windows

Step
1
Action
If the tree windows are open, close them by clicking on the
corner of each window.
button on the right upper
ATTENTION
You can also close the Tree Windows by selecting the
tree window and then clicking the
toolbar.
12
button from the
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
Action
2
Select View > Project/Monitor Tree to open the first Project/Monitor tree view on the left
side of your screen. Repeat the same procedure to open a second Project/Monitor tree
view on the right hand side of the screen.
4
You can open a maximum of two Project/Monitor tree views at a time.
ATTENTION
Another way to open the Project/Monitor Tree Window
is to click the
3
button on the toolbar.
Select View > Library Tree to open the Library Tree Window. You can open only one
Library Tree View.
ATTENTION
Another way to open the Library Tree window is by
clicking the
4/30/2012
button from the toolbar
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

14
Step
Action
4
Click and Drag the divider bar to the right to increase the size of the Project-Assignment
window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
5
Action
There are 2 tabs in each Project/Monitor tree window: Project and Monitoring. Click
each tab to toggle between them.
4
Project Tab
The following tasks are performed in the Project tab:
4/30/2012
•
Create new CMs, SCMs and IOMs and define their parameters.
•
Design a Control Strategy through CMs and SCMs.
•
Save the Control Strategy.
•
Assign CMs and SCMs to the CEE (Control Execution Environment).
•
Load CMs and SCMs to the CPM (Control Processing Module).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
6
Action
Monitoring Tab
The following tasks are performed in the Monitoring tab:
16
•
Open CMs and SCMs for Online Monitoring.
•
Activate/Deactivate CMs and SCMs.
•
Change controller parameters and upload the changes.
•
Update changes to the Project database.
•
Change monitoring/configuration parameters on the faceplate of CM blocks.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
7
Action
Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C200/C200E:
1
2 3 4
5
6 7
1. Project Tree (gray)
2. Loaded, not monitoring (gray with black arrow)
3. Communication failure (red with black exclamation point)
4. Active (green)
5. Failed (red with white exclamation point)
6. Loaded, but no database (yellow with black exclamation point)
4
7. Idle / Inactive (blue)
ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on
color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
User’s Guide > Creating a Control module >
Control Builder block icon descriptions
8
Monitoring Tab Color Codes for C300:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
1. Project Tree (gray)
2. No Communication (red)
3. No Database (Yellow)
4. Run or OK (Green with dotted border)
5. Idle (blue)
6. Run soft fail or Ok soft fail (green with cross mark)
7. Idle soft fail (blue with cross mark)
ATTENTION
Refer to Knowledge Builder for more information on color codes:
Experion R400 > Configuration > C300 Controller User’s Guide
>C300 Controller Operation > Control Builder block icon
descriptions
4/30/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Control Builder Introduction
Open and Operate Control Builder

Step
9
Action
The Library Tree window has just a single tab named Library.
Library Tab
18
•
Lists devices, IOMs, PM I/O, Rail I/O, and Function Blocks.
•
Click the “+” icon against an item in the Library Window to expand and view the
blocks.
•
Drag the blocks into a CM or SCM as appropriate, to form a control strategy.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/30/2012
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to configure C200/C200E hardware and I/O
using Control Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Identify C200/C200E hardware, slot numbers and addressing
– Configure and download hardware configurations for these components
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
4/13/2012
5
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E
Hardware and I/O
Honeywell
Topics
• Hardware and Slot Numbers

• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

• Activating a CEE

Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
4/13/2012
3
Honeywell
C200/C200E Chassis Hardware
• Below is an example C200/C200E chassis configured with:
1
2
3
4
10-slot chassis
5
6
7
8
Power supply
ControlNet Interface (CNI)
or FTE Bridge
Control Processor (C200/C200E)
IO Link Interface Module
Fieldbus Interface Module
Redundancy Module
CNI to Remote I/O
1
2
3
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
4
5
6
7
8
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200/C200E I/O Slot Numbers
• To determine the slot location of C200/C200E related hardware you
must:
– Start counting at zero (do not count the power supply)
– Count from left to right
– Count both spaces if the module occupies two spaces
0
5
1
6
2
7
3
8
4
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
9
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Hardware and Slot Numbers
• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE

• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs
• Activating a CEE
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
4/13/2012
5
Power Supply
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB)
Honeywell
• Single-wide chassis module
• Connects to FTE cable A and B
• Supports chassis redundancy
• Can only be used for Supervisory
Control Network connection
• ControlNet and downlink CNIs
required for all I/O communications
including peer-to-peer to AB devices
• Rotary switch for FTE Node Number (1 to 99)
– The last octet of the IP address of the FTEB can be set to higher than 99 by
configuring the Base IP address accordingly in System Preferences.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
7
Fault Tolerant Ethernet Bridge (FTEB), contd.
Honeywell
• The FTEB can be used for FIM-only connections to the supervisory
network.
• In the Project and Monitoring tabs in Control Builder you will see the
FTEB as the root for the CPM.
• You will set up the FTEB using IP addresses.
• An FTE community can only have 99 FTEBs so you are limited to 49
redundant pairs and 99 single FTEBs in one community.
• The FTE connection to the FTEB is 10Mbps.
– 10Mbps is only supported in FTE for connection from an FTEB to a switch
and nowhere else
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a FTEB
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
9
Honeywell
Question 1: FTEB Index Numbering
Which of the following is not a valid FTEB device index number?
A) 15
B) 99
C) 110
D) 1
TheIncorrect.
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Correct.
‘110'
‘110'isis
not
notaavalid
validFTEB
FTEBindex
index
number.
The answer
last octet
the FTEBbefore
IP address
You must
theofquestion
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
answer
answered
Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
can be set to higher
than 99 by configuring the
continuing
base IP address accordingly in System
Preferences in Control Builder.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
4/13/2012
5
Must match the hardware switches
found on top of the FTEB card.
Honeywell
Configuring a C200
Follow these steps to add a
new control processor
module (CPM) from the pulldown menus.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 – CPM Main Tab – ControlNet
• Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise
Tag Name & Item Name
ControlNet
Driver Name
CNI slot #
Slot number of CPM
MAC ID of CNI Card
connected to server
Alarm reporting by CEE
Check for the redundant controller and
then enter its name.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 – CPM Main Tab – Ethernet
• Data entry details
will be provided in
the lab exercise
Ethernet Network
Driver Name
Slot Number
The “This Controller is Redundant”
option is selected when building the
FTEB
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Redundant Controller &
Name
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
13
Configuring a C200 – Server History Tab
Honeywell
• History parameters and control level required to operate this CPM
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
4/13/2012
5
When the “Driver Name”
selected is an FTEB:
Honeywell
Configuring a C200 – Group and Trend Assignment
Point, group, trend and associated
displays (that reside on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab.
Select OK to close and save the new
controller.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
15
Honeywell
Question 2: Supervisory MAC Address for a CPM
When configuring a ControlNet connected
control processor module (CPM) in Control
Builder, which MAC address is entered as
the Supervisory MAC address?
A) The device index of FTEB card
B) The MAC address of the PCIC card
C) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to the I/O rack
D) The MAC address of CNI card
connected to server
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must
answer
the question
beforeisisthe
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
Supervisory
Supervisory
MAC
MAC
address
theMAC
MAC
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
toaddress
continue
continue
completely
continuing
address of the CNI
card connected to the server.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a C200E
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Honeywell
Configure C200E – Main Tab
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
4/13/2012
5
Follow the Step to configure
new C200E controller
C200E Configuration – Simulation Tab
Honeywell
• To create either a C200E or a SIM-C200E
– File > New > Controllers > C200E – Control Processor Module (16M)
Select the check box for
simulation Node Configuration
Select the check box , if the node
is connected to ControlNet
Network
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
19
Initiating the Configuration of the CEE
Honeywell
• The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution
Environment (CEE) are configured but not yet downloaded.
Click the + sign to expand
the CPM in the Project tab.
Double-click the CEE to
open its configuration
form.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
4/13/2012
CEE – Main Tab – Name, Base Execution Period
Honeywell
• The Main tab configuration of the CEE block.
System assigned or user configured unique
name (consisting of up to 16 characters and
at least one letter A-Z)
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
21
Main Tab – C200 CEE Command State
Honeywell
• The Main tab is used for the configuration of the CEEC200 block.
Select the command to change the
CEESTATE parameter; options are:
IDLE, COLDSTART, WARMSTART
Indicates the current state of the CEE
Select the user level required to
perform a coldstart or a warmstart
Select the user level required to
Idle the CEE
Determines whether program access is
allowed to command the CEE from Idle
to Run and from Run to Idle
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
4/13/2012
5
Indicates the base execution
period for the CEE block
- 5 ms (non-Redundant)
- 50 ms (non-Redundant or
Redundant)
Honeywell
Main Tab – C200 Alarm Info
Indicates if an alarm has been
detected with this function block
Allows user to set the alarm reporting
function used when an alarm condition
is detected by the function block
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
23
Main Tab C200E CEE – Simulation, State, and Time Info
Honeywell
Select the CEE state after
a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm
Indicates Simulation State of
C200E controller in Monitoring
Shows the time zone offset value
for the controller location
Explained later
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Restart Initialization Delay
• Integer configuration value establishes an initialization delay, in
seconds, to be applied to all CMs within the CEE following a restart
– RSTRTINIDLY allows CMs within CEE to come into alignment with the
process following a RAM Retention Restart or a Checkpoint Restore
– Default value is 10 seconds
– When CEE restart occurs, CEE.RSTRTINIDLY and CM.RELOADINIDLY are
used to compute starting value of CM.CURRELINIDLY as follows
• CM.CURRELINIDLY = CM.RELOADINIDLY + ( CEE.RSTRTINIDLY /
CM.PERIOD)
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Batch Tab
• Applies to: C200, C200E, C300, ACE
Indicates the buffer size allocated for batch
events generated by SCM/RCM.
Options are:
None, Small, Medium, and Large
Small = 120 events
Medium = 240 events
Large = 720 events
This item can be
changed only from
the Project tab.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
4/13/2012
5
• Applies to: C200E, C300, ACE
Server History and Server Displays Tabs
Honeywell
• Server History Tab -- Access Levels, History Configuration
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Hardware and Slot Numbers
• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
• Configuring IOMs

• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs
• Activating a CEE
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)
• Three methods to add an IOM:
– From the Library:
• Drag and drop onto the CEE
• Drag and drop onto a blank area
– From the Menu:
• File>New>I/O Modules>IOMODULE>
1
2
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
29
Honeywell
Different Actions Based on Method Used
Method Used
Name New
Dialog?
Drop on CEE
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes
Depending on the method
used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it
may be put in Unassigned.
Depending on the method
used to add the IOM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Put in
Unassigned?
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
4/13/2012
5
3
Honeywell
Configuring an IOM
Module slot number
MAC address of the remote
rack’s CNI card
0 if IOM is in CPM chassis
Double
Click
Slot number of the CNI in
the processor rack through
which this card will
communicate.
Zero if IOM is in CPM chassis
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Assigning IOMs
Required if the “menu” method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.
1b
3
1a
Assigned
to CEE
2
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Configuring an IOM
Before loading an IOM, it must be:
A) Activated
B) Assigned
C) Renamed
D) Validated
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
Before
you
you
can
can
load
load
IOMs,
they
theymust
mustbe
be
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notBefore
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
toIOMs,
continue
continue
completely
continuing
assigned to the Control Execution Environment.
Click anywhere to continue.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Hardware and Slot Numbers
• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs

• Activating a CEE
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
4/13/2012
5
Submit
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs
Honeywell
Right
Click
Not yet
loaded
Load:
C200 & CEE
Load with Contents:
C200 & CEE & IOMs
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs, contd.
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Verify that the
items to load are
checked.
Note:
You can decide to have the
modules go to the active state
automatically by clicking this
checkbox, with the Post Load State
selected, to be “Active.”
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Hardware and Slot Numbers
• Configuring the FTEB, Controller, and CEE
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the Controller, CEE, and IOMs
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
37
Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy
Double-click CEE
This can be done only
from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select “Change
State”.
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Select COLDSTART
or WARMSTART
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
4/13/2012
5
• Activating a CEE

Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy, contd.
Click Yes
Blue:
The object is not running (inactive)
Green:
Red:
The object is running (active)
Communication failure
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
39
Honeywell
Summary
•
When configuring and loading C200/C200E hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:

– To determine the IOM slot number of hardware in the C200 chassis, start counting at
zero, but do not count the power supply, count from left to right and count both spaces
if the module occupies two spaces.
– An FTEB Index number can not be set to higher than 99.




• However, the last octet of the IP address can be higher than 99
– The Supervisory MAC address of the CPM is the MAC address of the CNI card
connected to the server.
– C200E has a separate Simulation Tab to configure a simulated C200E
– Before loading the Control Processor Module (CPM), its Control Execution
Environment (CEE), and I/O modules (IOMs):
• Configure the CPM, its CEE and I/O modules (IOMs)
• Assign the IOMs to the CEE
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Configuration of C200 Hardware and I/O
Completion
Certificate
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C200/C200E Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the Configuration of C200/C200E Hardware and I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
4/13/2012
5
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to configure a C300 Controller and
Series C I/O.
• PMIO configuration will be discussed in a separate lesson.
• The steps for configuration are similar to the C200/C200E configuration:
– Add a new Controller to the Project hierarchy
• Control Builder adds the CEE and two IOLINK modules
– Configure the Controller
– Configure the CEE
– Configure the IOLINKs (PMIO or Series C IO)
– Configure the IOMs
– Assign the IOMs to the IOLINKs
– Load the Controller, CEE, IOLINKS, and the IOMs
– Activate the CEE
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring the C300 and CEE
• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
• Activating the C300
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller
Follow these steps to
add a new controller
from the pull-down
menus
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller – Main Tab
Data entry
details will be
provided in the
lab exercise.
Name
Check for
redundant controller
Device index
Number of C300
This number must
match the number of
the switches on the
C300 IOTA.
Select to
Configure a
SIM-C300
Enter details of Simulation
Environment Node
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a Controller – Server History Tab
History parameters and control level required to operate this C300
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Configuring a Controller – Group and Trend Assignment
Honeywell
Point, group, trend and associated
displays (residing on the server) are
defined on the Server Displays tab
Select OK to close and
save the new controller
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 View in Control Builder
C300, CEE, and
IOLINKs
Redundancy
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CEE
For C300, the options for
Base Execution Period are:
50mS and 20mS
20mS is selected only
for the Turbo Machinery C300
Data entry details will
be provided in the Lab
exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Main Tab – C300 CEE RAM Retention
• Main Tab – Powerup Restart Settings
Shows the CEE state after
a RAM retention restart
Options: Idle, LastCold,
LastWarm, LastTimeout
Shows the power down timeout that indicates whether the
CEE block executes a warm or cold restart upon power up
Only used if LastTimeout was selected for the CEE State
Shows the time zone offset value
for the controller location
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell
Question 1: C300 Configuration
Which of the following statements is not true for C300 configuration?
A) Device Index number on the C300
IOTA needs to be specified
B) 2 IOLINKs are automatically created
C) Only one IOLINK is automatically created for
Series C I/O
D) 50ms Base Execution Period is supported for
non-redundant C300 configuration
The
answer is:
Yourcorrect
answer:
Incorrect.
falsethe
statement
"Only one
You mustThe
answer
questionisbefore
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
You
did You
not
answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
Correct
-automatically
anywhere
to
Correct!
IOLINK
is
When
acontinuing
C300
controller
created
for
is created
Series C
in
Control
I/O".
I/O".When
When
Builder
aa C300
C300
2 IOLINKS
controller
controller
are is
automatically
is created
created in
in
added. are automatically
Control Builder 2 IOLINKS
added.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Clear
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring the C300 and CEE
• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
• Activating the C300
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK Configuration – Link 1
I/O family selection
I/O Link number 1 Cable - Gray
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK Configuration – Link 2
I/O Link number 2 Cable - Violet
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell
Configuring C300 Hardware
• The Control Processor Module (CPM) and its Control Execution
Environment (CEE) are now configured but not yet downloaded.
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: IOLINK Configuration
Which of the following items are specified during IOLINK configuration?
A) Series C or PM IO, one type on each IOLINK
B) Series A I/O type
C) Whether Series C and PM IO are to be used on
the same IOLINK
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Correct!
When
configuring
an
only
Incorrect.
When
configuring
anIOLINK
IOLINK
onlyone
one
You must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
type of IO
family
can
becorrectly!
connected
to each
continuing
IOLINK i.e. Series C or PM IO, one type on each
link.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Clear
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring the C300 and CEE
• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
• Activating the C300
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
17
Honeywell
Methods to Add Input/Output Modules (IOMs)
• Three methods to add an IOM:
– From the Library:
• Drag and drop onto an IOLINK
• Drag and drop onto a blank area
– From the Menu:
• File>New>I/O Modules>SERIES_C_IO
1
2
3
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell
Different Actions Based on Method Used
Method Used
Name New
Dialog?
Put in
Unassigned?
Drop on IOLINK
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes
Depending on the method
used to add the IOM, your
IOM may be automatically
assigned to your IOLINK, or it
may be put in Unassigned.
Depending on the method
used to add the IOM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring an IOM
IOM number
Double
Click
This number must
match the number of
the jumper plug on
the IOTA
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Assigning IOMs
Required if the “menu” method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.
1b
3
1a
2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring the C300 and CEE
• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
•
Loading the C300, IOLINKs, and IOMs
• Activating the C300
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Assigned
to IOLink
Honeywell
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs
Click
Right-Click
Not yet
loaded
Load:
C300, CEE, IOLinks
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Load with Contents:
C300, CEE, IOLinks, IOMs
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Loading the Controller, CEE and IOMs – Post Load State
Honeywell
Verify that the items
to load are
checked.
Note:
You can decide to
have the modules go
to the run state
automatically by
clicking this checkbox
with the Post Load
State selected to be
“Run”.
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: IOP Configuration
Assigned Series C I/O modules appear under:
A) The Unassigned tree in Project tab
B) Their associated IOLINK tree in Project tab
C) Directly under the CEE tree in Project tab
The correct
Your
answer:answer is:
Correct! The assigned I/O modules appear
You must
answer
the question
before
Incorrect
-Click
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
answered
correctly!
Incorrect.
assigned
I/O
modules
appear
Correct
-The
anywhere
continue
You
did
notthe
answer
thisthis
question
completely
under
IOLINK
tree
into
Project
tab.
continuing
under the IOLINK
tree in Project tab.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring the C300 and CEE
• Configuring IOLINKs
• Configuring IOMs
• Loading the C300, IOLINKs and IOMs
• Activating the C300
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Clear
Honeywell
Activating a Control Strategy
This can be done only
from the monitoring
tab (not the Project tab).
Another method is to
right-click on the CEE
and select “Change
State”.
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Select WARMSTART
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Changing the State of a Controller – Confirming Change
Honeywell
Click Yes
Blue: The object is not running (inactive)
Green: The object is running (active)
Red: Communication failure
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• When you configure and load C300 hardware and I/O in Control Builder,
remember:
C IOM number is set on the IOTA of the corresponding IOM using a
– Series
numbered jumper plug.
– The device index of C300 can be found on the rotary switches located in
 front of the C300 board.
– Before loading the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE)
 and IOLINKs:
• Configure the Controller, its CEE and IOLINKs
• Define the I/O Family type on each IOLINK
• Assign the IOMs to the respective IOLINKs
the C300 controller, its Control Execution Environment (CEE) and
– Load
IOLINKs
– Activate the C300 from the CEE.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe C300 and Series C I/O Configuration
4/13/2012
6
C300 Hardware Configuration Concepts
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in
Control Builder
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
Introduction
7
• In this lesson you will learn how to
import and export control strategy
configurations from one server to
another.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
– Describe how to export control
strategy configurations from a
Control Builder project.
– Describe how to import control
strategy configurations into a
Control Builder project.
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
2
1
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• The Export function lets you • The exported portions or all of the
ERDB are stored in the Ixport folder at
export all or a portion of the
the directory location:
ERDB viewed in the Project
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Tree to the Ixport folder or a
Experion PKS\Ixport
user-defined location.
Control Builder - Export
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
4/13/2012
3
Honeywell
Control Builder - Import/Export
CM, SCM and hardware configurations (IOMs) can be moved between
servers using the Import/Export function
Control Builder
(Server 1)
Control Builder
(Server 2)
Control
Strategy
Configuration
Control
Strategy
Configuration
Project
Tree
Ixport Directory
Import
Data
Export
Data
Controllers, CEEs,
IOLINKs should be
built “from scratch”,
not exported/imported.
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Project
Tree
The servers must be
running the same
release.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
4
2
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder - Export
• In Control Builder, select File > Export to call up the dialog box shown:
All items in current
project use selection
buttons (or use
<Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to
export specific CMs
from the point
window)
All items in Current
project
Import\Export text
files target location
List of items to Export
based on selections
from window
(Export.sl)
Select to start export
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
5
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder - Export
7
Exporting Data Dialog Box
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
6
3
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Control Builder - Import
• In Control Builder, select File > Import to call up the dialog box shown:
Use selection buttons
(or use <Ctl> + mouse
select or <Shift> +
mouse select to import
specific CMs from the
Point window)
All items in Current
Import/Export text Files
location
List of items to Import
based on Selections from
Window (Import.sl)
Import\Export text Files
target location
Import and Assign
Select to start Import
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
The export function
automatically creates
an ‘export.sl’ file.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
4/13/2012
7
Honeywell
Question 1: Importing and Exporting
Which of the following statements best describes the import/export function?
A) Only the hardware configuration
can be moved between servers
B) CMs, SCMs and the hardware
configuration can be copied and
restored to another server
C) Only CMs can be moved between
servers
D) None of the above
Yourcorrect
answer:
The
answer is:
You
mustCMs,
answer
theand
question
before
Correct!
CMs,
SCMs
and
the
the
hardware
hardware
Correct
anywhere
to
Incorrect
-Click
ClickSCMs
anywhere
tocontinue
continue
YouIncorrect.
did You
not -answer
answered
thisthis
question
correctly!
completely
continuing
configuration can
be copied and restored to
another server.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
8
4
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The Import/Export function in Control Builder:
you to copy CM, SCM and hardware configurations from one
– Allows
server’s ERDB to another server’s ERDB
• The ‘export server’ and the ‘import server’ must be running the same
release
• Controllers should be built “from scratch”, not exported / imported
– Includes CEE and IOLinks
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
9
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
7
Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure C200 Hardware in a Simulation Control
Environment (SCE) and Import the Remaining I/O Modules into the SCE
lab exercises
Control Builder Import / Export Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the Import/Export Procedure in Control Builder
10
5
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Controller Hardware Configuration
Contents
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware ....................................................................................3
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E ............................................................5
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE ...................................................................29
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300 ................................................................37
8
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300 .............................................................................49
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the ‘Controller Hardware Configuration’ lab.
Procedure

Step
1
Action
Select ONLY one of the following:
Read the IMPORTANT information below.
In class, students can choose to configure hardware and points for either a C200E, or a
C300. It is not possible for students to complete labs for both. Therefore, each student
must decide whether they will configure hardware and points for a C200E, or a C300.
There are several reasons that only one or the other can be done: Time allocated to the
course (1 week), Tag names cannot be duplicated on a server, the AC “simulator” Excel
spread sheet, the AC HMI Web pre-built displays, etc.
Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:
2
_______
C200E (and Series A I/O modules)
_______
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)
If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first two sections):
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
8
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second two sections):
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO Modules into the SCE
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Controller Hardware Configuration
Instructions for: Configure Controller Hardware
This page was intentionally left blank.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn to create a SIM-C200E. You will also learn that an associated Control
Execution Environment (CEE) block represents an installed SIM-C200E controller in the Project
Tree. The CEE supports execution of Control Modules (CMs) for simulating control applications.
The CEE runs in the SCE controller as a software layer built on top of the control software
infrastructure.
Objective
•
Configure a SIM-C200E (Simulation Control Environment) Controller in Control Builder
•
Configure a CEE in Control Builder
•
Configure Input Output Modules. (3 Analog Input modules, 2 Analog Output Modules, 1
Digital Input Module, 2 Digital Output modules)
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run SCE controller
Note:
8
You must note the names, for the SIM-C200E, CMs, and FBs used in Control Modules and IOMs,
in your lab exercises. These are the names used, in the Excel tie back sheet, for simulation purpose.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder
Create an SIM-C200E

Step
Action
1
Launch Control Builder Application from Configuration Studio
2
Add a new Simulation Controller
With the Project Tab selected, select File > New > Controllers > C200E
ATTENTION
C200E and SIM-C200E share the same template
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
3
Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter for Main tab
Name: SCE59 and Item Name: SCE59_item
The name can be up to 16 characters
4
Alarm Enabled: Ensure this checkbox is checked to enable alarming for this SCE
Let all other values on this tab remain at the defaults
Select Load to simulation Environment.
8
5
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
Action
6
ATTENTION
Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server
(E20ESVxx) and press Enter. The Host IP Address
should automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.
Host Name – Simulation node name
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
7
Action
Click the Server History Tab. Keep the default values on this tab
A
B
A) Control Level: The minimum control level (between 0 and 255) required to
perform supervisory control on this point. The default is 200. Keep the default.
8
B) History Configuration Grid: Supports the configuration of associated point
parameters for history collection. Leave it blank.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
8
Action
Click the Server Displays Tab. Keep the default values.
A
B
A) The Point Detail Display is used to show detailed point information. If you leave the
value as (default), the standard detail display is used for the point type. You can
create your own point detail display and enter the display name here.
B) The Group Detail Display is used to display point information when the point is part
of a group. If you leave the value as (default), the standard group display is used.
Accept all the defaults on this tab
9
10
Click the OK button
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
10
Action
Click the PLUS sign “+” to the left of SCE59
• Notice that SCE/CEESCEFB blocks are created in Project tab
ATTENTION
The Name of CEESIMC200FB_135, as shown in the above display,
may be different than your CEE.
Right-click your CEE and select Module Properties
8
11
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
12
Action
Change the Tag Name to CEESCEFB61 and the Item Name to CEESCEFB61_item
• Click Help for additional details of each parameter
• Click OK
This completes configuring the CEE for SCE Controller
13
14
15
12
In the Project Tree window, select SCE59.
Click the
button on the Control Builder toolbar to download the SCE59 controller
Click Continue in the Load window
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
16
Action
Click OK in the Load Dialog window
ATTENTION
8
If any error message displays while downloading,
contact your course manager.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
17
Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:
Monitoring Window
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
18
Action
In the Monitoring Tree, expand all items
ATTENTION
The SCE59 block appears as a blue icon indicating it
is loaded to the database but not yet active.
The CEESCEFB61 block also appears in blue
indicating it is loaded into the database but not yet
active.
Right-click CEESCEFB61, and Select Module Properties
8
19
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
20
Action
Select WARMSTART from the drop down list for CEE Command
TIP
Performing a Warm start, all strategies retain old values (values prior
to controller power loss). This is also called RAM Retention Restart
(RRR). To perform a Warm Start, the battery must be in good
condition.
Performing a Cold start, all strategies are initiated with default values.
16
21
Select YES
22
Click OK
23
SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 should now be green (active).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E
Configure C200E Racks and Rail I/Os
This section familiarizes you with the different types of available C200E IOMs (Input/Output
Modules). Configure IOMs according to the instructions in the following steps. Use the names
provided in the lab exercise for the I/O Modules.

Step
1
Action
Choose one of the following options, depending on your preference:
1. Open two Project/Monitor tree windows. On one of the windows, select the
Project tab. On the other window, select the Monitoring tab
2. Open only one Project/Monitor tree window. Select the Project tab or the
Monitoring tab as needed
Option 1 is shown here:
Project Tree
window
Monitoring Tree window
Library Tree window
4/13/2012
Return to the Project Tree Window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
8
2
17
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
3
Action
Select File > New > I/O Modules > IOMODULE in the Control Builder menu.
• This gives the list of all available C200E IO Modules
NOTE: The system being built will have architecture, as shown below.
Built
Manually
Imported
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
4
Action
Select TC-IAH061 – Analog Input Module, 6 Channel, 10V/ 4-20mA, Isolated.
A
B
C
D
E
A) Change the Module Name to AI_3_4_4.
Enter the Item Name AI_3_4_4_Item
B) Enter Module Description as “Isolated Analog I/P in Slot 3 CNI MAC 4”.
C) Enter the IOM Slot Number as 3. This is the Physical slot number of the I/O
module being configured.
D) Enter the Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4. This is the MAC address of the
CNI Card from the I/O Rack where this IOM resides.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
8
E) Enter ControlNet Module Slot Number as 4. This is the slot number of the CNI
card in the control rack to which the I/O chassis communicates. This value is
zero for local IOMs.
19
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
5
Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter Group # as 100, Pos # as 1.
•
6
20
Click the point selection button in the Group Parameter column
In the Point Selection Window
•
Select the module AI_3_4_4
•
Select CEESTATE from the Parameters window
•
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
In the IOMODULE dialog box, click OK.
8
7
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
8
Action
Expand the Unassigned section, to view the AI module.
• The module appears in the Unassigned section, as shown below.
9
10
22
Select AI_3_4_4
Click the
controller.
button on the Control Builder toolbar to assign the IOM to the SCE59
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
Action
11
Select AI_3_4_4 from the ‘Available Modules’ list, select CEESCEFB61 from the ‘Assign
To’ list, and click the Assign button to assign this IOM to CEESCEFB61.
ATTENTION
8
Since you can have up to 20 controllers associated
with one Experion Server, there could have been
several controllers (each with its own CEE) listed, in
which case you would pick the CEE to which you were
assigning the IOM. In the lab exercise we are building
one C200E; therefore, only one CEE will be shown in
the “Assign To” list.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

24
Step
Action
12
AI_3_4_4 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as shown below.
13
Click Close.
14
If required, expand SCE59 and CEESCEFB61 by clicking on the
project tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
buttons in the
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
15
Action
Expand the I/O.
8
• The AI_3_4_4 IOM can be seen under the tree of CEESCEFB61
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
16
26
Action
Add a Digital Input module.
•
Click File > New> I/O Modules > IOMODULE
•
Select the module TC-IDD321 – Digital Input, 32 ch, 24V DC
•
Enter the Module Name as DI_10_4_4 under the main tab
•
Enter the Item Name as DI_10_4_4_Item
•
Enter the Module Description as “Digital Input in Slot 10 CNI MAC 4”
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

Step
17
Enter the I/O Rack Addresses for this IOM, as follows:
•
IOM Slot Number as 10
•
Remote IO Chassis MAC Address as 4
•
Control Net Module Slot Number (connected to I/O Chassis) as 4
Select the Server Displays tab.
•
Enter the Group # as 100, Pos # as 6, Group Parameter as
DI_10_4_4.CEESTATE
•
Click OK
8
18
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C200E Controller and Series A IOM in SIM-C200E

28
Step
Action
19
Click the OK button, and the module DI_10_4_4 will be added in the Unassigned list, as
shown below
20
Assign the DI_10_4_4 module to CEESCEFB61. Refer to the steps above, if any help is
required
21
Verify that the DI module is now assigned to the SCE59 controller, as shown above
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE
Practice
Objective
•
Import the remaining hardware modules
•
Observe the operation of the Import/Export function
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an SCE controller
Introduction
•
To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs into
the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from one
project to other
•
A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another
•
“Import” copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:
8
C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE
Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder

Step
1
Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.
•
Browse to: C:\Users\Public\ Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A and click OK in the ‘Choose folder’ window.
•
After selecting a directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box. The following Import dialog box example
contains only Control Modules (CMs)
ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
2
Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
1. AI_5_4_4
2. AI_8_4_4
3. AO_4_4_4
4. AO_7_4_4
5. DO_6_4_4
6. DO_9_4_4
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.
•
Keep the option “Import CEE Assignments” selected
ATTENTION
8
This option imports and assigns the above items to the CEESCEFB61.
If this option is not selected, then the imported function blocks are
imported as unassigned blocks. The assignment option can be used
because the items being imported are being assigned to the same
“named” SCE/CEE from which they were exported.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
Action
3
Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.
ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
4
Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below
5
6
Click the
button and download all the I/O modules.
Click Continue in the Load window.
8
7
Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules one by one.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

34
Step
Action
8
Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.
9
Click OK to start the download.
10
Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE

Step
Action
11
Start Station if not already open.
12
To call the Group display, press <F6> and enter 100 in the message zone.
13
Click OK.
8
1. The status of all IO modules is displayed.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series A IO Modules into the SCE
This page was intentionally left blank.
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn how to configure a simulated C300, referred to as a SIM-C300. The SIMC300 supports full simulation of the C300 controller including load and execution of all function
blocks supported by the C300 controller, a CEE executing with the same base execution cycles,
blocks executing with the same block execution period selections, and interaction with Series C I/O
and PM I/O.
Objective
Configure a SIM-C300 Controller in Control Builder
Configure a SIM-C300 CEE in Control Builder
Configure the 2 IOLINKs
Configure Series C IOM
Download and activate the SIM-C300, CEE, and IOM
Verify online SIM-C300 controller in Control Builder
Verify online SIM-C300 CEE Statistics in Control Builder
8
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Procedure
Complete the Following Steps in Control Builder
Add a New SIM-C300 Controller

Step
Action
1
Open the Control Builder if not opened.
2
Click FileNew  Controllers  C300 – Controller (2 I/O Links)
ATTENTION
C300 and SIM-C300 share the same template
38
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
3
Action
Enter the Data for each configuration parameter as shown below.
The figure shows the configuration for SIM-C300 controller.
Name – Enter the name as SIM_C300
Item Name - Enter SIM_C300Item
Select the check box option “Load to simulation Environment”
Host Name – Simulation node name
ATTENTION
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
8
Enter the Host Name of your Experion Server and
press Enter. The Host IP Address should
automatically be entered. If it is not, get the IP
address from your course manager.
39
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
Action
4
Keep all the other settings as default.
5
Click the OK.
6
ATTENTION
The following ‘Form Validation’ error is expected. For
a SIM C300, a device index is not necessary, and was
not entered. On a real C300, it would have been
necessary to enter a device index.
Click “Close” on “Form Validation” screen
7
40
Double click the CEE to open Module Properties.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step
Action
8
Change the name to SIM_CEEC300, and change the Item Name to SIM_CEEC300Item.
Keep all the other settings as default and Click OK
9
Double click the first IOLINK to open Module Properties.
8

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
10
Action
Change the name to Series_C_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to
Series_C_IOLINKItem.
Select the I/O family as SERIES _C_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and
Click OK.
11
Double click second IOLINK to open Module Properties.
12
Change the name to PMIO_IOLINK, and change the Item Name to PMIO_IOLINKItem.
Select the IO family as PM_IO_TYPE. Keep all other settings as default and Click OK.
ATTENTION
This PMIO Link configuration is required to be done in
class for PM IOP configuration on the last day of this
course as part of optional PMIO Lesson.
42
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
Action
Configure IO Modules for Series C IO.
Click File  New  I/O Modules  Series_C _IO  AI-HL High Level Analog Input
8
13
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
14
Action
Tag Name – Enter the name as C_AI_1
Item Name - Enter C_AI_1_Item
IOM Number - 1.
Keep all other settings as default and click OK.
15
Configure a Series C type Digital Input module- DI-HV- High Voltage digital Input, 32
channels
Tag Name – Enter the name as C_DI_6
Item Name - Enter C_DI_6_Item
IOM Number – 6
Keep all other settings as default and click OK.
16
Assign C_AI_1 and C_DI_6 to Series_C_IOLINK.
17
Select SIM_C300 in Project tree.
18
44
Click on
icon on the control builder tool bar to download the SIM-C300.
19
Click Continue, and click OK in the Load Dialog window.
20
Click the Monitoring tab and note that SIM_C300 blocks appear with “S” and it is blue
indicating that it is loaded, but is not active.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step
Action
21
Right-click SIM_CEEC300 and select Change State. This will open Request Value
Change dialog box
22
Select the CEE Command WARMSTART, and select Yes when prompted for Change
Online Value
8

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300

Step
Action
23
ATTENTION
The IOLINKs do not contain IOMs, so you have to load
IOMs separately.
Click on one of the IOMs in the Project window and click on the
Builder tool bar to download the IOM.
46
icon on the Control
24
Download both C_AI_1 and C_DI_6
25
Click the Monitoring tab. IOMs appear in blue indicating as loaded and inactive
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
Step
Action
26
Right-click on each IOM and select Activate  Selected Item(s). Select Yes when
prompted for change state.
27
The IOMs are green indicating that they are active.
28
The SIM C300 configuration is complete.
8

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
47
Controller Hardware Configuration
Configure C300 Controller and Series C IOM in SIM-C300
This page was intentionally left blank.
48
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Practice
Objective
•
Import the remaining hardware modules.
•
Observe the operation of the Import/Export function.
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server setup and configured to run an C300/SIM C300 controller.
Introduction
•
To study the Import/Export facility of Control Builder, we will import the other IOMs to
create in the database. Using the Import/Export functionality, you can copy/paste items from
one project to other.
•
A Project file can contain many items such as IOMs and CMs. From Control Builder you
can use the Import/ Export tool to copy part or all of one project to another.
•
“Import” copies designated function blocks from the Import/Export files located in the
directory shown in the Import form to the Control Builder Project. In this lab we will Import
the remaining Input/Output modules into the Project. These IOMs are pre-configured,
already exported and located in the following directory:
8
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
49
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300
Complete the Following Steps Using Control Builder

Step
1
Action
In the Project window select File > Import to call up the import box.
•
Browse to: C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
•
After browsing to the directory location, all the objects available for import are
displayed in the Object list box.
ATTENTION
When the dialog box opens, the Project Tree window
closes automatically.
Your list may be different and contain additional items.
50
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step
2
Action
Select only the following Blocks from the Object list:
C_AI_2
C_AI_3
C_AO_4
C_AO_5
C_DO_7
C_DO_8
Selection can be done with the <SHIFT> button or the <CTRL> button.
•
Keep the option “Import CEE Assignments” selected
ATTENTION
8
This option imports and assigns the above items to the
SIM_CEEC300. If this option is not selected, then the
imported function blocks are imported as unassigned
blocks. The assignment option can be used because the
items being imported are being assigned to the same
“named” SCE/CEE from where they were exported.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
51
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step
Action
3
Click the Import button. The following dialog box will appear, indicating the status of the
import.
ATTENTION
After a successful Import, this dialog box closes.
52
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

Step
4
Action
Open the Project Tree window, if not already open.
1. After importing all required modules, the I/O listed will appear similar to the
illustration below
5
6
Click the
button and download all the I/O modules to the database.
Click Continue in the Load window.
8
7
Press and hold the <CTRL> key and select all the I/O modules which have not yet been
downloaded.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
53
Controller Hardware Configuration
Import the Remaining Series C IO in to SIM-C300

54
Step
Action
8
Verify that the checkboxes, shown below, are selected.
9
Click OK to start the download.
10
Click Continue if a Warning message is displayed.
11
Click the Monitoring tab and verify that all the IOs are loaded and active (green).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its
Connection Rules
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
Topics
Overview
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module
Topology – Series C IOM, PM IOP
Topology Type – Daisy Chain, Star, Tree
Distance Limitation
Cabinet Layout
Specifications
9
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
2
1
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
• The C300 controller can now be connected remotely to Series C I/O or
PMIO through the use of an I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender (FOE)
module.
• The same FOE cannot be used for Series C and PMIO connections
concurrently
• Each FOE can connect to two remote sites:
– Two fiber optic ports sets, FO1 and FO2
– Ports have both receive (Rx) and transmit (Tx)
• Mounting options:
– IOTA
– Din Rail
– Stand Alone
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
3
Series C I/O Link Fiber Optic Extender Module
24V DC
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOLINK cable
COMMON
Carrier
Mounting
Screws
Fiber Optic
Extender IOTA
Fuse
LED Indicators
FOE to IOTA
Mounting Screw
FOE to IOTA
power
connection
Fiber Optic
ports
I/O Link
Connector
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4
2
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology – Series C IOM
IO Link
Cable
IOM
C300
Remote
Site A
1.5 Km Max.
1.5 Km
Max.
Fiber Optic
Cable
Remote
Site B
•
•
IOM
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
4 KM Max. (requires
IOLE every 1.5 km)
1.5 max between FOE with Standard Cable
Possible Configurations are:
Star
Daisy chain
Series C IOM
Tree (Star + Daisy chain)
Series C IOM
Series C IOM
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4/13/2012
5
Honeywell
Topology – PM IOP
IO Link
Cable
1.5 Km Max.
C300
1.5 Km
Max.
Fiber Optic
Cable
8 Km Max.
(requires
IOLE every
1.5 Km)
PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP
PM IOP
With IOLink Extender IOP
IOLink Extender
pair MC-IOLX02
Remote Site B
9
Remote Site A
1.5 Km
Max.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
6
3
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Type – Daisy Chain
IOM
C300
IO Link
Cable
Main
Location
Remote
Site 1
Remote
Site 2
FOE
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Fiber Optic
Cable
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4/13/2012
7
Honeywell
Topology Type – Star
IO Link
Cable
FOE
Main
Location
Fiber Optic
Cable
Remote
Site 3
Remote
Site 1
IOM
Remote
Site 2
•
Remote
Site 4
It is possible to have multiple fiber-optic extenders in any location, provided distance
limitations are observed and no more than 40 IOMs are on a single I/O Link.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
8
4
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topology Type – Tree
IO Link
Cable
C300
FOE
Fiber1
Fiber2
Fiber3
Fiber1
IOM
Fiber2
Fiber3
IOM
Main
Location
Remote
Site 1
Remote
Site 2
Fiber Optic
Cable
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
4/13/2012
9
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C
Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1
C300
IOM
IOM
d2
Remote
Site#3
Remote
Site#2
d4
Remote
Site#4
d3
IOM
IOM
IOM
•
Maximum distance of any single fiber-optic segment must be less than 1.5 km:
•
Maximum distance of any single “leg” must be less than 4.0 km. In above figure:
 d1, d2, d3, d4 <= 1.5 km
9
 0.25 + d1 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
 0.25 + d2 + 0.25 + d3 + 0.25 + d4 + 0.25 <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
10
5
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C – Example 1
Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1 = 1.5 km
C300
IOM
IOM
d2 = 1.0 km
Remote
Site#2
d3 =
1.0 km
Remote
Site#3
IOM
Remote
Site#4
d4 =
1 km
IOM
IOM
• The connections shown in figure above will work because:
– d1(1.5), d2(1.0), d3 (1.0), d4(1.0) <= 1.5 km
– 0.25 + d1(1.5) + 0.25 = 2.0 <= 4.0 km
0.25 + d2(1.0) + 0.25 + d3(1.0) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 4.0 <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Distance Limitations with Series C – Example 2
Main
Location
Remote
Site#1
d1 = 2.0 km
C300
IOM
IOM
d2 = 1.5 km
Remote
Site#2
d3 =
1.5 km
Remote
Site#3
IOM
d4 =
1 km
Remote
Site#4
IOM
IOM
• The connections shown in above figure will not work because:
– d1(2.0) which is not <= 1.5 km
– 0.25 + d2(1.5) + 0.25 + d3(1.5) + 0.25 + d4(1.0) + 0.25 = 5.0 km
which is not <= 4.0 km
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
12
6
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Cabinet Layout
C300
Controller
FOE can use
either Violet
or Grey IOL
Control
Firewall
FOE – A
I/O Link
Extender for
Link A
Digital Input
Card
FOE – B
I/O Link
Extender for
Link B
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
13
Honeywell
Specifications
•
Power Supply Options
•
Distance
4/13/2012
– 20 to 30V @ 200mA
– Segment distance between FOE:
• With Standard Cable: 1.5 Km
• With Premium Cable: 2.0 Km
– Total maximum IOLink length
• Series C IO: 4 Km
• PM IO: 8 Km
– Propagation delay: Each FOE fiber optic converter subtracts a certain value from the
total IOLink length.
• Series C IO: 0.25 Km per FOE
• PM IO: 0.5 Km per FOE
•
Fiber-Optic
Fiber type: Multimode
Fiber core diameter: 62.5 mm
Fiber cladding diameter: 125 mm
Fiber connectors: ST type
Power budget: 8 db min, 15 db typical
9
–
–
–
–
–
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
14
7
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe the Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection
Rules
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
15
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe Fiber Optic Extender and Its Connection Rules
16
8
4/13/2012
Describe the Control Firewall Connections in
the Series C System
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
17
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
• Topology rules pertaining to the Control Firewall
9
• Overview of FTE limits
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
18
9
4/13/2012
C300 Topology Rules – Control Firewall
Honeywell
C300, Series C FIMs must be connected to the Control
Firewall.
The C300 and any FTEBs assigned to it must be on the same
control firewall.
No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs,
Stations or Servers can connect to the Control Firewall with the
exception of devices qualified for Peer Control Data Interface
like Safety Manager and Modbus Gateway’s (Explained in
Advance Course).
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
19
C300 Topology Rules – Control Firewall
4/13/2012
Honeywell
The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or
L2 switch. Connections can be Fiber Optic or STP
Cable.
Fiber Optic: 2 KM multi mode or 15 KM single mode.
STP cable: CAT 5 up to 100 M.
Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
20
10
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail – Series C Control Firewall
Fiber Uplink
STP Uplink
FTE Yellow/A
FTE Green/B
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
21
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Control Firewall
100Base-FX
Uplink
(Media Converter
not shown)
10/100Base-TX
Ports
Control Firewall
Module
9
100Base-TX
Uplink
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
22
11
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C Control Firewall Module
• Diagnostic LEDs
• 24VDC Power Present
• Status/Alarm LED (bicolor blink when the alarm
occurs)
• Activity LEDs for all ports
Activity LEDs
for Ports
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
23
How Many FTE Nodes Do You Have?
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• An FTE Community can have no more than 330 FTE Nodes calculated
as follows:
– Max. 125 Redundant FIMs per Server = 125 x 2 = 250
– Max. 20 Redundant C300s per Server = 20 x 2 = 40
– Max. 2 Redundant PGMs per Server = 2 x 2 = 4
– Max. 40 Stations = 40
– Max. 1 Redundant Server Pair = 2
– Max. 7 ACE = 7
– GRAND TOTAL: 343
• If any FTEBs are present in the Community, the limit is 200 FTE Nodes.
• “Embedded FTE” which is used in the C300, Series C FIM, and PGM is
at the MAC layer; therefore, “yellow” and “green” have same IP address.
• Starting in R400, Servers and Workstations require only one IP address.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
24
12
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Control Firewall
Which of the following is not a valid connection to a Control Firewall?
A) Series C FIM
B) C300 Controller
C) FTEB for specific Series A IO
D) FTEB for C200
Incorrect.
Correct! FTEB
FTEBfor
forC200
C200controller
controllerisisnot
notaavalid
validdevice
deviceto
to
connect to Control Firewall. No device such as FTEB for
C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or Servers, can connect to
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
the Control Firewall
Correct
Incorrect
You
Youmust
did
- Click
not
-answer
Click
answer
anywhere
anywhere
thethis
question
to
before
You answered this correctly!
question
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click
anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
4/13/2012
25
Honeywell
Summary
• C300 and Series C FIM must be connected to the Control Firewall.

– No other device, such as FTEB for C200, Ethernet PLCs, Stations or
Servers can connect to the Control Firewall (with the exception of devices
qualified for Peer Control Data Interface like Safety Manager and Modbus
Gateway’s – to be explained in the Advance Course).
• C300 and FTEB (for specific Series A IO and AB devices) associated to

it must be on the same Control Firewall.
9
• The Control Firewall is connected by uplink to a L1 or L2 switch.

• Control Firewalls cannot be cascaded.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
26
13
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe the Control Firewall connections in the
Series C System
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
27
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Describe
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International
Inc. the Control Firewall Connections in the Series C System
28
14
4/13/2012
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Putting the Pieces Together
RED
CF9
Series C IO
C300
FIM
RED
FIM
PMIO
9
Series A IO
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
C300 Controller I/O Link Configurations
Honeywell
IOLINK 1 and 2
FTE Yellow and Green
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
How a Cabinet is Wired
Typical
I/O Link
Cable
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C C300 Controller
IOTA
I/O Link # 1
FTE Device
index
C300 Controller
Module
I/O Link # 2
FTE
Battery connection
from power system
GPS Time Sync Input
(Future)
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Private path
redundancy (shielded
Twisted pair)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail – Series C FIM
FTE Yellow/A
FTE Green/B
Fieldbus Links
9
Connection to
Fieldbus power
supply
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wiring Detail – Series C Analog Input
IOLINK
Input Signal wiring
Shield Terminations
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Connectivity
A C300 Controller has PM IO connected to both IO LINKs. Some of the
data is obtained from a remote monitoring system 5 km from the C300
cabinet. Which of the following is the correct option?
A) Extend the PM IO using IO Link Extender
B) Series C FIM
C) Series C IO
Correct!
Incorrect.
To get
Todata
getis:
from
data the
fromremote
the remote
vibrating
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
vibrating
monitoring
monitoring
system
extend
system
the
extend
PM IO
the
using
PM IO
You must
answer
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notusing
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
Link
IO Link
Extender.
Extender.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Clear
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• C300 controllers, Series C FIM, and FTEB for Series A IO are

connected to the Control Firewall.
• Series C and PM IO are connected to the C300 controller by the two IO

LINKs on the C300 Controller IOTA.
– Series C and PM IO cannot be mixed on the same IOLINK
• Remote PMIO is implemented using the PM IO Link Extender.

• C300 can be associated to Series A IO directly via FTEB.

C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
Completion
Certificate
9
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
C300 Controller Architecture - Part 2 of 2
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Define a Typical Series C Configuration
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Describe Performance Calculations
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
• Each controller can be configured and used differently – Ex:
– Base execution period of the CEE
– Number, type, execution period of CMs
– Number, size of SCMs
• Controller configuration determines its:
– Processor loading
– Memory used
• Controller performance is expressed in units:
– C200 & C200E:
• Processing Units (PU)
• Memory Units (MU)
– C300 Execution Units (XU)
• Control XU – same idea (and sometimes referred to) as PU
• Communication XU (peer-to-peer, display communication)
• IO XU – (IOLink – sometimes referred to as Link Units)
• Memory Units (MU) (C200/C200E/C300)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell
Processing Unit (PU)
• The measure of a controller’s capacity to execute control strategies
– Quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to complete a logic
execution
• Items consuming PUs include: CMs, SCMs, Series A IOMs
– Series C IOMs and PMIO do NOT consume PUs
• PU specifications are defined based on a typical Control module types
– Example:
• A “typical” regulatory control (PID) CM consumes about 3 PUs
• A Redundant C200’s capacity is 1600 PUs
– Approximately 530 Reg. Ctl CMs (executing once per second)
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Execution Unit (XU)
• Because a single Processing Unit specification is not possible for a
C300 controller:
– The concept of an Execution Unit (XU) is introduced to model how a C300
controller’s processing power is spent.
• Execution Unit (XU) is specific to the C300 controller and is required
because the C300 controller performs multiple functions such as:
– Control – CPU time used to execute control strategies (similar to PUs of a
C200).
– IO – CPU time used to support and communicate with IO on the two IO Links
and with ControlNet-resident Series A IO which is connected via FTEB
modules.
– Communication – CPU time used for communicating with peer nodes (e.g.
C300s, C200s, ACEs, FIM4s, etc.) and displays.
• Execution Unit (XU) is a measure of C300 processing capability per
second:
– 1 XU of a C300 is logically equal to 1 PU of a C200/ACE.
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Communication XU
• Execution Units (XU) required to support the specified communications
are calculated automatically from the following inputs:
– Number of Peer Connections (node type is not critical) – nodes considered
as peers include C300, C200/C200E, ACE, FIM4
– Number of Console Stations associated with Experion Server/cluster
– Number of Parameters per second for display throughput
– Number of Messages per second
• Number of Messages/second is calculated from the number of
Exchange blocks, Push block stores, and SCM block stores that initiate
and respond to requests.
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C200 & C200E Resource Usage
• ‘Base’ represents “Overhead” processing done by the controller
• ‘Free’ is the recommended unused CPU capability
– 40% for 50ms C200/E, 60% for 5ms C200 (N/A for C200E)
• “Spend” the CPU resources available in each C200 / C200E
– Depending on requirements
16000 MU
100%
Free
PU Capacities:
50ms non-redundant – 3600 PUs
50ms redundant – 1600 PUs
5ms non-redundant – 2400 PUs
C200 Only
4000 MU
Control
PUs
For user
Base
0%
C200E
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
C200
Honeywell
C300 Resource Usage
• XU indicates the processing
power of the C300
– Control (Control XU)
– IO (IO XU)
– Communication (Comm XU)
100%
Free
Comm
16000 MU
Control
• Decide how to “Spend” the
CPU and memory resources
available in each C300
Controller
5500
XUs
For user
IO
– Depending on requirements
Base
0%
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
7
Honeywell
PU and MU Table for C200/C200E
Typical Module Types
Processing Resource
Consumption (per module)
Memory
Resource
Usage
50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)
50ms CEE
Non-Red
(PU/Module
Execution)
50/5 ms CEE
Non-Red
(MU/Mod)
Typical IO Module (Average consumption
of available IOMs)
0.3
0.19
0.6
Analog Data Acquisition Module
2.9
3.8
7.4
Small Analog Data Acquisition Module
0.47
0.43
1.0
Regulatory Control Module
2.8
2.8
3.9
Auxiliary Function Module
4.2
5.1
13.1
Digital Data Acquisition Module
1.2
1.2
3.1
Device Control Module
1.3
1.3
3.1
Logic Control Module
1.0
1.0
3.5
SCM
2.0
3.0
28.9
Small Digital Data Acquisition Module
0.22
0.14
0.6
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PU and MU Table for C300
Typical Module Types
Processing Resource
Consumption (per
module)
Memory
Resource
Usage
50ms C300
(PU/Module
Execution)
50 C300
(MU/Mod)
Typical IO Module (Average consumption of
available IOMs)
0.2
0.5
Analog Data Acquisition Module
4.2
7.3
Small Analog Data Acquisition Module
0.5
1.0
Regulatory Control Module
3.1
3.9
Auxiliary Function Module
0.7
6.4
Digital Data Acquisition Module
1.3
2.0
Device Control Module
1.2
2.5
Logic Control Module
1.4
3.9
SCM
5.0
27.9
Small Digital Data Acquisition Module
0.2
0.5
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Honeywell
PU and MU Calculation Example
•
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Processing Units (for a C200/Control XU for C300)
– For a given Control Module
–
PU = (PU per cycle) / (cycle time, Sec)
– Total for Complete Control Strategy
–
Total PUs = (No. of modules) x (Module PU) / (execution period, Sec) for each CM
•
Memory Unit
•
Processing Unit and Memory Unit calculation example for:
–
Memory Unit = (No. of modules) x ( Module MU)
– Regulatory Control Modules = 2
– Execution Period = 0.5 sec
Typical calculation for Regulatory Control module
(1 CM,1 AI Channel, 1 Data acquisition, 1 PID, 1 AO channel, 6 Logic)
PU
MU
Total PU
Total MU
C200/C200E
2.8
3.9
(2) x (2.8) / (0.5) = 11.2
(2) x (3.9) = 7.8
C300
3.1
3.9
(2) x (3.1) / (0.5) = 12.4
(2) x (3.9) = 7.8
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell
Correlation of PU/XU and % CPU loading
•
The following table shows an estimate of the number of PUs / XUs that will
cause 1% CPU loading
Correlation Table for 1% CPU loading
Controller
Number of PUs/XUs(~)
C200 (Non-Redundant)
50-60
C200 (Redundant)
20-30
C300
80-90
•
Note: All the values listed are approximate
•
Example: For a C300, control strategy using 2000 PU will amount to a % CPU
usage of 22.22%
– Calculated by formula 2000 PU /90 = 22..22%, seen at CPUCYCLEAVG[40]
– Free CPU would be approximately 77% (100% – 22.22%), seen at CPUFREEAVG
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Monitor CPU % Loading
• XU of C300 and PU of C200/C200E/C300 are not shown directly
– Inferred in terms of CPU Usage and CPU Free
• Recommended CPU free: C300: 20%, C200: 50ms: 40%, 5ms: 60%)
– Displayed on faceplate of C200/C200E/C300 controller within Station
– Within Control Builder for C300, this same information is on the statistics tab
of the controller template
• For a C200/C200E this information is available on the statistics tab of
the CEE template
• Minimum CPU Free (%)
– Indicates ‘minimum’ value recorded, since the controller power up or a last
statistics reset
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 CPU Free Alarms
• If the average free CPU available is lower than the limits (below), then
the following alarms are initiated
• CPU Free Low
– Threshold defaults to 20% and is user configurable
• On the C300 properties – Main tab
– An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than the threshold
• Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
• Priority - LOW
• CPU Free Low Low
– Threshold is fixed at 10% and is not user configurable
– An alarm is generated when CPU Free is less than 10%
• Displayed on the System Alarm Summary
• Priority – HIGH
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Honeywell
Execution Cycles (Phases)
• Execution period and phase = execution cycle
CEE
0
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
CM
PHASE (cycle)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
37 38 39
0
1850
1950
1900
2000
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)
This CEE base execution
period has 40 timing cycles
(phases) of 50 ms each
• Example:
– A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of
0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell
CPU Loading Tab – Cycle Loading Table
• The CPU Loading tab is one of two tabs containing CPU statistics used
for maintenance and performance monitoring of the CEE
• View the average CPU (CPUCYCLEAVG) and maximum CPU
(CPUCYCLEMAX) usage for a given control cycle (0 -39)
– “Cycle 40” is the overall average (or max)
• Data shown is since last power up (or manual statistics reset)
Shows the historical
maximum of Central
Processor Unit (CPU)
processing power used
per cycle
Average percentage of
Central Processing Unit
(CPU) processing
power used per cycle
Data is shown only
when accessed from
the monitoring tab
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Loading Tab Parameters
• Recommendations for C200s and C300s with 50 ms execution period
Parameter
CPUCYCLEAVG[40]
CPUCYCLEAVG[0..39]
CPUCYCLEMAX[40]
CPUCYCLEMAX[0..39]
Description
Recommended
Average CPU used across all 40 CEE
execution cycles
<60%
Average CPU used for individual cycles
Units are percent of 50 ms cycle. Index
corresponds to the cycle (phase)
number.
<60%
Maximum of CPU used for all 40 CEE
execution cycles
<85%
Historical maximum of the CPU used by
each execution cycle. Units are percent
of 50 ms cycle. Index corresponds to the
cycle (phase) number.
<85%
• For C200 5ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 40%
• For C300 20ms, CPU Cycle average values should be less than 50%
• More details: Experion PKS Control Builder Components Theory manual
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Overrun
• An overrun occurs when any container blocks assigned to a cycle fail to
execute within the cycle
– Indicates the CPU is scheduled to perform more tasks than can be
completed within a base cycle
• Overruns are diagnostic events reported by the CEE as ‘CPU cycle
overruns‘
• Getting an overrun occasionally (may not be bad)
– Ex: an overrun occurred when downloading a large number of CMs
• Getting overruns periodically (this is bad)
– The CPU is routinely deferring execution 1 (or more) CMs to the next cycle
– Needs to be fixed
• Note the cycle numbers
• Load balance
• Possibly remove control
Data is shown only
strategies (CMs, SCMs, etc.)
when accessed from
the monitoring tab
from the CEE
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Cycle Overrun Alarm Conditions
• The conditions for reporting and clearing overrun alarms are
summarized below.
• A CEE configuration that causes regular overruns should be changed by
reducing the total load or rebalancing the load across timing cycles.
If Controller is . . .
CEE reports alarm if . . .
CPM (50 ms
BASEPERIOD)
Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive
2000 milliseconds have at
intervals of 2000
least one cycle overrun.
milliseconds have no
cycle overruns.
ACE (500 ms
BASEPERIOD)
Two consecutive intervals of Four consecutive
intervals of 20 seconds
20 seconds have at least
one cycle overrun.
have no cycle overruns.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
CEE clears alarm if . . .
Honeywell
Load Balancing
• Procedure by which overruns are eliminated or minimized by
automatically assigning scheduling parameters to container blocks.
• Scheduling parameters
– Period - The amount of time between two consecutive executions of a CM or
SCM block
– Phase - Determines the set of cycles in which a container block executes
– Execution Order - The time sequence in which container blocks execute
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory Units
• Memory Unit (MU)
– The units used to define the amount of memory used by control strategies
(CMs, SCMs, etc.)
• The Memory tab indicates
– Total user memory
– Currently used memory
– Currently Free memory
C200E,
C300
C200
Data is shown only
when accessed from
the Monitoring tab.
Total User Memory Units in Kb
Currently Used Memory
Currently Free Memory
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory usage exceeds limits
• Memory usage exceeds limits
– ‘Currently Free Memory’ becomes negative.
– Diagnostic alarm generated
• Priority - Low
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Main Tab – C300 Memory Exceeded Alarm
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Memory Exceeded Alarm is
generated if Currently Free
Memory is less than zero
(indicates a negative value)
Enable Memory Limit
Exceeded Alarm
If, during any 2-second interval, the maximum
count of redundancy bytes transferred each
cycle from primary to secondary C300 reaches
this value, a high-priority alarm is reported by the
CEE block
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell
EXECTIMER
• Execution Timer Block (EXECTIMER)
– Used to measure execution timing of Control Modules, SCMs, RCMs, UCMs
– Used to measure the timing of individual basic blocks or groups of basic
blocks within Control module
– Used to measure the execution time for Control Strategy to be reused
• Supported controllers
– C200E, C300, ACE, with their simulation environments and C300 20 ms
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
EXECTIMER – Configuration and Limitations
•
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
EXECTIMER is used by creating two
instances
– One instance marks beginning of
time interval
– Other instance marks the end of a
time interval
•
Connect the output parameter of
beginning EXECTIMER to input
parameter of end EXECTIMER
•
Limitations: EXECTIMER cannot be
used for any of the following
purposes
– Measuring timing effects between
Different execution Environments
– Measuring timing effects between
Execution Environment and IO
– Measuring timing effects between
Execution Environment and OPC
gateway or OPC server
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• A Processing Unit (PU) is defined as a platform independent entity
which quantifies the amount of processing time necessary to perform a
specific control processing task in a C200 or C200E.
• An Execution Unit (XU) represents the same amount of processing
resources in a C300.
• The amount of I/O Link bandwidth available for I/O scanning per second
is divided into 1000 units called Link Units (LU).
• A Memory Unit (MU) represents 1 kilobyte or 1024 bytes.
– C200 has 4000 MUs
– C200E, C300 have 16000 MUs
• EXECTIMER blocks are used to measure execution time of basic blocks
or groups of blocks
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Performance Calculations
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Performance Calculations
4/13/2012
10
Performance Calculations and Monitoring
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• This lesson introduces you to the control modules you will build later in
the course using Control Builder.
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Data Acquisition – TI20
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Honeywell
PID – FC01
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
PID Split Range Outputs – PC16
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Honeywell
Cascade PID – LC14 and FC17
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with 2 Secondaries LC 14 , FC17 and FC18
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Device Control - Pumps
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
Device Control - Fans
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Process Simulation for Lab Exercise
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Identify the Debutanizer Lab Sequence
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
12
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for
Labs
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
•
In this lesson, you will learn how
the Excel Data Exchange program,
a licensed Honeywell option, works
with the Excel simulation
spreadsheet and process simulator
used in this course.
•
At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
– Identify the two function block
parameters available only in the
simulated control execution (SCE)
environment
– Identify the three simulation modes
available in the SCE environment
– Explain the purpose of closing and
reopening the spreadsheet after
configuring and loading new tags
to the system
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SIMVALUE and SIMMODE
• SIMVALUE AND
SIMMODE are only
available for the SCE
environment.
• SIMMODE provides three
modes:
– NONE
– DIRECTSUB
– SIMVALSUB
• SIMVALUE substitutes
the PV when the simmode
is in SIMVALSUB
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
EXCEL Simulation
3
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Simulation Spreadsheet
EULO
Tag
Function block
parameter
=G7
EUHI
Mode
select
Not<EULO
Not>EUHI
OP
Result of
two left
columns
The new PV
OP/100SPAN+EULO
Current
mode
Mode change
permit
Excel must be open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
• Some of these tags will be built as a part of the lab and some imported.
• There are tags configured in the spreadsheet which do not exist in the
Experion server at the start of the class.
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Enabling Excel Simulation
• To make Excel Spreadsheet Write enabled , uncheck “Disable Writes
Via the Network API” option
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
12
Honeywell
Simulation Spreadsheet
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Excel Simulation Used for Labs
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
EXCEL Simulation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the EXCEL Simulation Used for Labs
4/13/2012
13
Describe the Procedure to Build Control
Modules
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about
Experion control modules.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will be able to:
– Build and edit control modules
– Load, activate and monitor
control modules
– Insert an OLE object in a control
module
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Building and Editing Control Modules
• Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules
• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Methods to Add a New Control Module (CM)
• Three methods to add a CM:
– From the Library:
• Drag and drop onto a CEE
• Drag and drop onto a blank area
– From the Menu:
• File>New>Control Module
1
3
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
2
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Different Actions Based on Method Used
Name New
Dialog?
Put in
Unassigned?
Drop on CEE
Yes
No
Drop to Blank
Yes
Yes
Menu
No
Yes
Depending on the method
used to add the CM, your
CM may be automatically
assigned to your CEE, or it
may be put in Unassigned.
Depending on the method
used to add the CM, you
may or may not be presented
with this dialog box.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Data Acquisition Control Module
13
Method Used
5
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Assigning Control Modules to a CEE
Required if the “menu” method
was used, or if the IOM was
dropped onto a blank area.
1b
3
1a
2
Assigned
to CEE
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Opening Chart View to Configure a Control Module
Honeywell
Double
Click
When the “File Method” is
used to add a new Control
Module, the Chart View
window is automatically
opened.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Data Acquisition Control Module
7
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add Function Blocks
• Add Function Blocks from the library to the CM
• Add them in the order in which they should execute
– Ex: AI, DACA, PIDA, AO
Series A
2
3
TIP:
After adding function blocks,
save your CM. This allows
the point picker to display
the new function blocks.
1
Series C
4
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Provide Automatic ORDERINCM
– Displays Order in CM on the top left corner of all applicable Function Blocks
by default
– Reduces engineering efforts required earlier in exposing this parameter on
Function Blocks
Series A IO channel function
blocks have an ORDERINCM,
Series C IO channel function
blocks do not.
Display Order in CM
option is selected
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Function Block Execution Order in the CM
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
13
• System Preferences within Control Builder has an option to display
Order in CM on Function Blocks
Adding IO Channel Function Blocks to the Control Module
Honeywell
• A IO channel can be added to the CM by either dragging it from an IOM
in the Project tab, or by dragging it from the Library
– When added from an IOM in Project, the channel is automatically assigned
to a specific channel on a specific IOM
Only available
for SeriesC
channels
Drag and
Drop
Drag and
Drop
This method is available
for all channel types.
The channel must be
manually assigned
later.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Data Acquisition Control Module
11
Manually Assigning a SeriesC Channel
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
X
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Adding and Manually Assigning a Series A Channel
Honeywell
13
Drag &
Drop
Double
Click
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Configure the CM and Each Function Block
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Double click on a blank space to configure the properties of the CM
• Double click on each function block to configure its properties
• The properties of the CM will be covered in coming slides
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Displaying the Control Module’s Properties
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Name and item name
•
Parent asset
•
Execution period
–
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CM – Main Tab
•
Honeywell
CEE ‘base execution
period’ = 50 ms
• 50 ms to 2 sec
• Default = 1 sec
–
CEE ‘base execution
period’ = 5 ms
• 5 ms to 200 ms
• Default = 200 ms
•
Execution order in CEE
and Execution Phase
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configuring a CM – Execution Cycle
• Execution period and phase = execution cycle
13
This CEE base execution
period has 40 timing phases
(cycles) of 50 ms each
0
PHASE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
37 38 39
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600
TIME (ms)
•
0
1850
1950
1900
2000
Examples:
– A CM with a one second execution period (1000 ms) and a phase of
0 would execute at phase 0 and again at phase 20
– A CM with an execution period of 200 milliseconds and a phase of 1
will execute in cycles 1, 5, 9, ... 37
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
CPU Loading
CEE
detail
display
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1 : CM Period and Phase
Together, the CM execution period and phase define the:
A) Execution cycle
B) Execution phase hour
C) Execution phase minute
D) Execution order
Your answer:
You did not answer this question
You answered
this correctly!
Correct - Click anywhere
to
completely
Youanywhere
must
answer
Incorrect
Click
to the question
continue
before continuing
The correct answer
is:
continue
Submit
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Clear
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Reload Initialization
• Reload Initialization
parameters on the CM
provide additional
control over the
behavior of CMs
• In Execution Cycles
• These parameters are
supported by
– C300
– C200E
– ACE
• Details on the next
slide
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Reload Initialization Parameters
– Initialization delay (integer value to define number of CM execution cycles)
– When CM is reloaded, and the RELOADINIDLY is set to non-zero value
• CM parameters are not visible to local and peer pull clients
• Local and Peer pull clients hold last fetched output until initialization
delay has expired
– Default value is 2 execution cycles
• Depending on CM configuration, user can assign more than 2 execution
cycles
• CURRELINIDLY
– Indicates the count of execution cycles before initialization delay expires
– When a CM is reloaded
• CURRELINIDLY is set to RELOADINIDLY
– When a CM is activated
• CURRELINIDLY will begin countdown to zero
– When CURRELINIDLY is zero
• Local and Peer pull clients can view parameters from the reloaded CM
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Connecting Function Blocks with the Wiring Tool
Honeywell
Not yet
connected
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
13
• RELOADINIDLY
Honeywell
Example Analog CM – CM, Blocks, Par. Conn, XRef, etc.
Analog Loop CM
1
5
2
3
5
4
3
3
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example CM – Device Control
Device Control CM
Expanded to
show
function
blocks
Inputs
Outputs
Logic/interlocks
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Permissive/Interlocks
13
Device Control Detail Display
2-state
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Execution Order in a CM
Which of these is a definition of
the Execution Order in a CM?
A) All function blocks with the same
execution order in multiple CMs
are executed in parallel
B) The execution cycle of the CM
in the CEE
C) The execution phase of the
function block in the CEE
D) The sequential execution order
of function blocks in a CM
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
No. "Execution
Yes!
No.
"Execution Order
Order in
in aa CM"
CM" is
is the
the sequential
sequential
You must answer the question before
execution
order
ofthis
function
blocks
in aa CM.
CM.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
question
correctly!
to
toblocks
continue
continue
completely
execution
order
of
function
in
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click
Data Acquisition Control Module
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Clear
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Building and Editing Control Modules
• Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules
• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Data Acquisition Control Module
27
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initiating Load of CMs
1
3
Right-click
2
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Loading CMs – First Time
13
Check the appropriate
boxes
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Loading CMs Which Had Previously Been Downloaded
Honeywell
• If a CM had previously been downloaded, it must be inactivated prior to
being re-loaded
– Can be done manually from the Monitoring tab BEFORE the load is initiated
– Can be done as part of the load process by selecting the checkbox
Before inactivating a CM,
MAKE SURE:
Operations personnel are aware
Process is in the proper state
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Activating/Inactivating CMs
Right-click
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Monitoring CMs – Scale Factor
Monitoring/Chart Visualization
Scale Factor
Icon
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Loading Control Modules
Which of the following is not a way to load a control module?
A) Select the corresponding CM in the
Project tab and then select
Controller > Load
13
B) Select the CM in the Project
tab and select the down arrow
C) Select the CM in the
Monitoring tab and select the
down arrow
D) Left-click the CM in the
Project tab and select Load
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
must
not-answer
-Click
answer
Clickanywhere
anywhere
the
thisquestion
question
to
to
You answered this correctly!
before
completely
continue
continuing
Submit
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Clear
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Building and Editing Control Modules
• Loading, Activating and Monitoring Control Modules
• Inserting an OLE Object in a Control Module
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Inserting an OLE Object in a CM – Ex: Word Document
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Viewing the OLE Object
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
– A new CM is automatically assigned a unique, sequential name.
– The execution phase and period of the CM defines the execution cycle.
Cycle overruns can occur when the scheduled processing for a cycle does
– not
finish by the start of the next cycle.
blocks execute in ascending order beginning with the block having
– Function
the lowest execution order value.
You can load a CM from the Project tree using the Control Builder Controller
– menu.
You can view an activated CM in the Monitoring tree of Control Builder or in
– the
associated detail display in Station.
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Data Acquisition Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the Procedure to Build Control Modules
4/13/2012
13
• When building, loading, activating and monitoring a CM in Control
Builder, remember:
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Data Acquisition Control Module
Contents
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module .................................................................................3
Configure Series C IO Channel ...........................................................................................................19
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module ..................................................................................33
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
13
Configure Series A IO Channel .............................................................................................................5
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
Introduction
This portion of the lab describes how to follow the ‘Data Acquisition Control Module’ lab.
Procedure
Step
1
Action
13

Select ONLY one of the following:
Read the IMPORTANT information below.
Please select whether you will be performing labs for the C200E (and Series A I/O
modules) or for C300 (and Series C I/O Modules). Select only one of the following:
2
_______
C200E (and Series A I/O modules)
_______
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules)
If you selected:
C200E (and Series A I/O modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the first and third sections):
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
C300 (and Series C I/O Modules):
Complete ONLY the following portions of this lab (the second and third sections):
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Data Acquisition Control Module
Instructions for: Data Acquisition Control Module
This page was intentionally left blank.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure Series A IO Channel
Practice
•
Configure a Control Module (CM)
•
Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module
•
Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point
13
Objective
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
SIM-C200E/C200E controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet
Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.
The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Configure a Control Module (CM)

Step
1
Action
Read the attention box.
ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C200E (and Series A I/O Modules).
2
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.
•
Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.
Project Tree window
Monitoring
Tree window
Library Tree
window
3
Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:
C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
From Control Builder, expand System in the Library tab, as shown below:
13
4
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
5
Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.
ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
6
Action
Enter the following information:
Destination Tagnames:
11_TI20 (name of the new CM)
Destination Item Names:
11_TI20_Item.
13
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the
letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the
CM sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16character unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers
generated by Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in
this picture may be different than yours.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

10
Step
Action
7
Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.
8
Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.
•
Right-click 11_TI20
•
Select Module Properties
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.
Name:
11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
Description:
T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)
Parent Asset:
Level_C11.
Eng Units:
Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
13
9
Action
ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
10
Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.
ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.
12
11
Click OK.
12
Assign the CM to the Controller CEESCEFB61.
on the toolbar to open the
•
With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button
Execution Environment Assignment screen
•
If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.
•
Select CEESCEFB61 in the Assign To window
•
Click the Assign Button
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.
13
13
Action
Click the Close Button.
14
4/13/2012
11_TI20 is assigned to CEESCEFB61, as indicated below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel
Add Function Blocks to a CM
Use the IOMs, configured in the lab “Configure C200E Hardware”, here.

Step
1
Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.
ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.
•
Click the Library Tree window
•
Expand the IOCHANNEL, by clicking the ‘+’ sign adjacent to it
•
Select the AICHANNEL block
13
2
Action
3
4
4/13/2012
Drag and drop the AICHANNEL to the 11_TI20 chart view.
Click the
icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
5
Action
Configure AI Channel parameters.
•
6
16
Double-click on the AICHANNELA to open the Block Properties
Enter the following details, as given below:
Channel Name:
TI
Module Name:
AI_8_4_4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
7
Action
Enter the following details as given below:
Select Channel Number: 1
13
Click the Assign Channel Block button.
ATTENTION
The Module Type displays automatically when
selecting the module name.
11_TI20.TI is assigned to the channel number 1 of AI_8_4_4, as seen in the Channel
Number/Channel Name list.
8
4/13/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series A IO Channel

Step
Action
9
ATTENTION
You have completed this section of the lab. Go to the
third section of this lab which is titled ‘Configure the
Data Acquition Control Module’.
Do NOT perform the section titled ‘Configure Series C
I/O Channel’.
10
18
Save and close 11_TI20.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure Series C IO Channel
Practice
•
Configure a Control Module (CM)
•
Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module
•
Configure an indicator Control Module for an analog input point
•
Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs section in Appendix for IO
channel assignment.
13
Objective
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet
Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.
The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel
Configure a Control Module (CM)

Step
1
Action
Read the attention box.
ATTENTION
This section should be done only by students who
have selected C300 (and Series C I/O Modules).
2
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.
•
Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.
Project Tree window
Monitoring
Tree window
Library Tree
window
3
Open the Excel spread sheet by double-clicking on:
C:\Users\Student\Documents\Tie_back_NEW.xls
(or by double clicking the shortcut on the desktop if it is available).
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
From Control Builder expand System in the Library tab, as indicated.
13
4
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
5
Action
Select and drag the CONTROLMODULE into a blank area in the Project tree.
A dialog box, as seen below, will appear.
ATTENTION
If you have a problem finding blank space which will
allow you to drop the CM, collapse the trees in the
Project window.
It is important to use the CM names given in this
document, because they are used in the Excel
simulation.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
6
Action
Enter the following information:
Destination Tagnames:
11_TI20 (name of the new CM)
Destination Item Names:
11_TI20_Item.
13
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
In this tagname, the character after the letter T is the letter I.
When adding a new CM, Control Builder numbers the CM
sequentially, by default. You can assign any 16-character
unique Project name to the CM.
It is important to use the CM names, given in this document,
because they are used in the Excel simulation.
The Source Names contain random numbers generated by
Control Builder. Therefore, the ones in this picture may be
different than yours.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

24
Step
Action
7
Verify 11_TI20 is added to the Unassigned section in the Project Tree window.
8
Configure the parameters for 11_TI20.
•
Right-click 11_TI20
•
Select Module Properties
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
Enter parameter details, in the Main tab, as given below.
Name:
11_TI20 (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
Description:
T-100 Bottom (Maximum 24 characters allowed)
Parent Asset:
Level_C11.
Eng Units:
Deg C (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
13
9
Action
ATTENTION
If you want help on any of the parameters in this form,
press <F1> or click the Help button located at the
bottom of the form.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
10
Action
Click the Server Displays tab, and enter the display details, as shown below.
ATTENTION
This lab uses the standard Honeywell analog point detail and group
display for the point 11_TI20 in Station.
26
11
Click OK.
12
Assign the CM to the Controller SIM_CEEC300.
on the toolbar to open the
•
With 11_TI20 selected, click the Assign Button
Execution Environment Assignment screen
•
If not already highlighted, select 11_TI20 in the CM/SCMs tab.
•
Select SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To window
•
Click the Assign Button
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
Assigned Modules will show 11_TI20.
13
13
Action
Click the Close Button.
14
4/13/2012
11_TI20 is assigned to SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel
Add Function Blocks to a CM
Use the IOMs, configured in the lab “Configure C300/SIM C300 Hardware”, here.

Step
1
Action
Double click 11_TI20 in the Project Tree window to open the chart view.
ATTENTION
Your screen may vary from the example shown.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
Add Function Blocks to CM 11_TI20.
•
Select the Series_C_IOLINK Link
•
Expand the C_AI_3, by clicking the ‘+’ sign adjacent to it
•
Select the AICHANNEL_01 block
13
2
Action
ATTENTION
You can add Series C IO function blocks to a CM in two ways:
1. The Project Tree method.
2. The Library Tree method (Covered in Describe C300 and
Series C IO configuration Presentation)
We will use the Project Tree method. This method uses the
fact that Series C IO modules contain their own configuration
databases. Therefore when you add an IOM, its configuration
parameters are available from project.
In this case, select the first AI channel from your AI IOM.
Refer Guide to Debutanizer model for C200/C300 Labs
section in Appendix for IO channel assignment
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel

Step
3
4
5
Action
Drag and drop the AICHANNEL_01 onto 11_TI20 chart view.
Click the
Configure AI Channel parameters.
•
6
icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.
Double click on the AICHANNEL_01 from the chart view of 11_TI20.
Enter the following details, as given below:
Channel Name:
TI
ATTENTION
IO Channel is automatically assigned to the IOM when you drag and
drop it from the IOLINK.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel
Step
7
Action
Click on the Configuration tab and enter the Channel PV Ranges details as given
below:
•
PV Extended High Range:
267.54
•
PV High Range:
260
•
PV Low Range:
0
•
PV Extended Low Range:
-7.54
13

ATTENTION
In all Labs, you need to configure the Channel PV
Range parameters for all Analog Input Channel
blocks; it should match with DACA block Process
Variable details.
Click OK
8
Save and close 11_TI20.
9
TIP
In the future, when building Control Modules, follow the
steps above.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure Series C IO Channel
This page was intentionally left blank.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Practice
•
Configure a Data Acquisition Control Module (CM)
•
Understand the naming of the Control Module and the function blocks within the Control
Module
13
Objective
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
SIM C200E/C200E, or C300/SIM-C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange configured and loaded with the simulation spreadsheet
Introduction
To create a Control Strategy, you must first create a Control Module, and then insert and connect
function blocks into the Control Module. The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have
alarming and be in a group and detail display. 11_TI20 will also be historized.
The Control Module is built, loaded and activated. The CM is linked to a Microsoft Excel
worksheet for process simulation. The remaining Control Modules of a similar type are then
imported into the project.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Add Function Blocks to a CM
Use the IOMs, configured in the lab “Controller Hardware Configuration”, here.

Step
1
Action
Read the attention box.
ATTENTION
This section should be done ALL students (C200E &
C300).
2
Open Control Builder and open 11_TI20 to the chart view.
3
Add a DACA Function Block to CM 11_TI20.
•
Click the Library Tree window
•
Expand the DATAACQ, by clicking the ‘+’ sign adjacent to it
•
Select the DATAACQ block
•
Drag and drop the DATAACQ block on the 11_TI20 chart view.
ATTENTION
For more information on adding function blocks to a
CM, refer to the Control Building Guide in Knowledge
Builder along the path,
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
users Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block.
34
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Maximize the chart view by clicking the
icon.
13
4
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
5
Action
Arrange the blocks as shown below.
ATTENTION
In this lab the screen capture is shown for
SIMC200E/C200E, if you are using SIMC300/C300 the
AI channel will be different from Series A.
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Click the
icon on the toolbar to Save your CM to the Project database.
13
6
Action
7
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block that was just added to the CM.
8
Enter the following information :
Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Bottoms
Engr Units:
Deg C
ATTENTION
This block must be named DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied analog point detail display will
function properly when called from Station.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
9
10
38
Action
Enter the Process Variable details, as given below:
•
PVEU Range Hi:
260
•
PVEU Range Lo:
0
•
PV Extended Hi Limit:
267.54
•
PV Extended Lo Limit: -7.54
•
Low Signal Cut Off:
NaN
Enable Clamping Option.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Action
11
ATTENTION
13
The PV High must set before the PV High High will
appear.
Configure Alarms for the CM.
12
4/13/2012
•
Click the Alarms Tab of the DACA Block
•
Enter the information as given below :
Trip Point
Priority
PV High High
260
URGENT
PV High
234
HIGH
PV Low
13
LOW
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
Connect Function Blocks
After adding the Function Blocks, connect them together to form a control strategy. Connect Blocks
together anytime, before or after configuring block parameters.

Step
1
Action
Select Chart > Insert > Wire or click
icon in the toolbar.
•
Cursor changes to PLUS “+” sign inside the Project chart window
•
Click the PV Pin of AICHANNEL block (TI)
ATTENTION
Note the change in color for the PV pin of block TI.
This indicates the block pin is selected.
40
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Click the P1 pin of DATAACQ Block DACA.
13
2
Action
Connection
established
3
4/13/2012
Save the CM by clicking the
icon on the toolbar.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
4
42
Action
To show the cross reference connections made between function blocks:
•
Click Tools > System Preferences to open the window, as shown in the display
below
•
Select the Display Cross-References checkbox under the General tab.
•
Click OK
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Click OK. (Your dialog box may not look exactly like this one.)
13
5
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
6
Action
The display below shows cross references.
TIP
This cross reference may not be shown on a C300
Control Module
44
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
History collection.
•
Double-click CM 11_TI20 in the white space to open the configuration form
•
Click the Server History tab. Verify that the Control Level is 200
13
7
Action
8
4/13/2012
Select the parameters for historization.
•
Click the blank Row 1 under the Parameter column in the History
Configuration table
•
Click the Point selection button
to open the Point Selection form
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
9
Action
The Point Selection form appears, as shown below.
Select Point 11_TI20 DACA, as indicated below.
Select parameter PV from the Parameters of 11_TI20.DACA list.
Click OK to close the Point Selection form.
10
46
11_TI20.DACA.PV appears in the History Configuration table.
•
Select the FAST and STD history checkboxes
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
11
Action
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following information, to add the CM to a
Trend and Group.
13
Number of trends
to be entered
Enter Trend #, Pen
color, Parameter and
Description.
Enter Group #, Position
of the tag in the group,
Parameter and
Description.
ATTENTION
You can also do this, by entering the trend/group
number and the pen/ position, in the trend and group
window, after building the control strategy in the CM.
12
4/13/2012
Click OK to close the Control Module Properties window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
47
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
13
Action
Save the CM 11_TI20 and close the chart window.
•
14
48
This CM now appears with the symbol “
been loaded to the controller
“indicating that the CM has not yet
Download this CM.
•
Select 11_TI20
•
Click the
•
Select Continue in the Load Box
button on the toolbar
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Action
15
Select the ‘Automatically change All control elements to the state selected in “Post
Load State” after load is completed’. The Post Load State is selected as ACTIVE by
default.
Click the OK button.
13
•
16
A Load dialog box appears, as shown below, that automatically closes on a successful
download.
ATTENTION
In the Project window, notice there is no “
front of 11_TI20.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
” sign in
49
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
17
Action
Click the Monitoring Tree window to verify that 11_TI20 is green, which means it is
active.
1
2
18
If active (green) skip the next step
If inactive (blue) perform the next step
Activate the CM. To activate a CM, right-click and select “Activate > Selected Items”
or select 11_TI20, and click the Toggle State button on the toolbar.
1
The following screen appears
Click Yes.
2
19
50
Notice 11_TI20 is now green
Open Station, if not already open.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Call up Debutanizer_123 on Station, as shown below.
13
20
Action
The 11_TI20 point is at the bottom of the T-100 tower.
In this example, the temperature shown is approximately 85.00 DegC.
If you click the parameter block in your graphic, point parameter, details appear in the
message zone: E20ESV##_Server:11_TI20.DACA.PV with real-time value and the CM
description.
ATTENTION
If you do not see the value for 11_TI20 varying, then
close and open the Tie_back_new.xls file.
Use this file for simulation purpose.
E20ESV##_Server is the server alias name defined
for this class. In real environment this will be a different
name specific to your site requirements.
The ## is the student number
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
51
Data Acquisition Control Module
Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module

Step
Action
21
ATTENTION
The actual value may be different on your screen.
If the 11_TI20 CM is inactive, the value in the
parameter box is NaN.
If a point is not properly built and you select the
parameter block, the following message appears in the
message zone: “Selected object not found”.
If the point is not loaded and you select the parameter
block, the following message appears:
11_TI20.DACA.PV=??().
52
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
14
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn to use the Bulk Build tool in
Control Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe how to
quickly build multiple control modules of the same type using the
Bulk Build tool.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Bulk Build Procedure Overview
• Bulk Build Procedure
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
3
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview of the Bulk Build Procedure
1
Create
Typical(s)
2
Select Typical(s)
Tool: Create Bulk Build List
3
For each typical:
Determine the number of &
the names of the copies
4
For each typical:
Select the parameters to
be changed on the copies
5
Create the Bulk Build file
.mdb, .csv, .xls
Edit the Bulk Build file –
parameters to change on
the copies
6
7
Read the Bulk Build file
Tool: Read Bulk Build List
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Build Copies
8
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Features of the Bulk Build Tool
•
Bulk Build:
– Productivity tool used to generate large quantities of control strategies
outside of Control Builder
– This tool is a licensed option
•
Bulk Build supports the following components:
– Control modules
– Sequential control modules
14
– Fieldbus devices
– I/O modules
– User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Bulk Build Procedure Overview
•
Bulk Build Procedure
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create the Bulk Build List
Tools > Bulk Build > Create Bulk Build List
Invoke Create
Bulk Build List
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select a Typical Control Strategy
Set copy name
and count
Select a typical
control strategy
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Set the Number and Names of the Copies
Use Alpha Sequence –
Add letter to each
block name
Ex: PIC0102A, B
Selected Typical
Add Underscore
Separator –
Ex: PIC0102_X
Number of copies to create
Base Name
14
Add Leading Zeros –
Ex: PIC0102001, 002
(cannot be used with
‘Use Alpha Sequence’)
Add prefix or suffix,
then start number and
increment amount
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Number of Copies is Updated
Result is updated
Select block
parameter for
Bulk Build list
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select Parameters
Select block
Parameters of
selected block
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Parameters selected
for typical control
strategy
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Number of Parameters is Updated
Result is updated
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
14
Modify Parameters in Excel
Make modifications
as desired in the
required CM
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
Open the ‘Read Bulk Build List’ Tool
Tools > Bulk Build > Read Bulk Build List
Invoke Read
Bulk Build List
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Read Excel File and Validate Control Strategies
Select to replace
existing, when desired
Validation ensures that
the Typicals being copied
are present and are
structurally consistent
with the spreadsheet
Select Validate
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Validation Report
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build Control Strategies
Validated….
Build OK….
14
Build and Assign OK….
Select Build
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build Report
View report
after Bulk Build
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
New CMs
New CMs available
in the Project
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Bulk Build Tool
Use the Bulk Build tool to:
A) Create EB files for C200/C300
control modules
B) Generate large quantities of
control strategies outside Control
Builder
C) Export control modules to other
ERDBs
D) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must answer the question before
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Build
Build
tool
tool
is
iscontinue
used
used
to
togenerate
generate
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
notThe
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
completely
continuing
multiple control strategies outside Control Builder.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Clear
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The Bulk Build tool:
multiple copies of a typical control strategy to an Excel spreadsheet
– Exports
where each copy can be modified.
the edited Excel spreadsheet back into Control Builder which applies
– Imports
the normal configuration checks and creates the individual control strategies.
– Supports the following components
• Control modules
14
• Sequential control modules
• Fieldbus devices
• I/O modules
• User templates (instances of templates and templates themselves)
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Bulk Build Functionality
4/13/2012
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn how to use the bulk edit parameters tool in
Control Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to
use the tool to:
– Export tags and parameters from
a Control Builder project to an
Excel spreadsheet
– Modify the parameters in an
Excel spreadsheet
– Read the parameters into a
Control Builder project
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create Bulk Edit List
• Bulk Edit Parameters
– Utility which allows you to change the value of multiple parameters in a
single operation by importing a prepared list of edits
14
• Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create Bulk Edit List
• The Show All Points button is used to populate the "Available Points"
selection list with the names of all points in the database.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Select the Parameters Which Will be Changed
Honeywell
• Select the points and parameters
All parameters that
exist on any selected
block in the “Available
Points” field will appear
in the “Available
Parameters” field.
The selected points
The parameter(s)
to be modified
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Create Bulk Edit List
• Build the Excel file
Browse to
desired
output path
Select the output
file type
Name the
output file
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Save
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Edit Parameters
•
Open the created BulkEdit.xls file in Excel
14
Edit the parameters
as necessary
Do not change or
add tag names.
Keep columns in order.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Use the single quote
before numbers ‘100
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Honeywell
Read Bulk Edit List
Select Update
Monitor or Project
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Select Start
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Bulk Edit Parameters Tool
Use the bulk edit parameters tool:
A) As an online tool to activate or inactivate multiple
control modules at once
B) To copy the control module to the monitoring tab
C) To export selected control modules
D) To change selected parameters in selected control
modules
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Bulk
Bulk
Edit
Editis:
Parameters
Parameters
tool
tool
isisused
usedto
tochange
change
YouThe
must
answer
the question
before
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
selected
parameters
in
selected
control modules.
continuing
Submit
Click anywhere to continue.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Clear
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• You can use the Bulk Edit Parameters tool to:
tags and parameters from a Control Builder project to an Excel
– Export
spreadsheet.
– Modify the parameters in an Excel spreadsheet.
• Do not change or add tag names
• Keep columns in order
• Use the single quote before numbers ‘100
– Read the parameters into a Control Builder project.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
14
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Bulk Edit Parameters Functionality
4/13/2012
Describe the Block Name References in CM
and SCM
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn about:
– Block name references in CMs and SCMs
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Reference a parameter in CMs
– Reference a parameter in SCMs
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Name References
• Generally, name references take the following form:
– CM_Name.BlockName.Parameter
• EX: 11_PC15.PIDA.SP
– SCM_Name.Parameter
• Ex:
SCM_D100.ModeAttr
• Name references exist in:
– Parameter references
14
– Expressions used in SCMs
– Expressions used in Calc Blocks
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
System Preferences – Relative Reference Display Option
Honeywell
• Tools>System Preferences
• The ‘Relative Reference
Display Option’ allows
references to be:
– Full Name
– Short Name
• Enter less information
• Use less area on
chart view
• Fewer characters in
expressions
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Short Name – Block Name References – Control Modules
• When ‘Short Name’ is selected, the entries for name references depend
on the location of the reference relative to where the entry is made
– Reference to a parameter on a block in another CM
• Name References take the form: CM.Block.Parameter
– Reference to a parameter on another block in the same CM
• Name References take the form: Block.Parameter
– Reference to a parameter on the same block
• Name References take the form: Parameter
• Only the parameter name must be entered
CM2
BLK2
CM1
BLK1
PARb
PARa
CM1.BLK1.PARa
BLK2.PARb
PARc
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Short Name – Block Name References – SCMs
BLK3
PARc
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• When an expression in an SCM includes a reference to another SCM,
the full name reference must be used – even if “Short Names” is
selected
– SCM_Name.Parameter
• References to the same SCM use a “$”
– $.Parameter
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
14
Expression Example - SCM
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Honeywell
Parameter Connector Example - CM
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Reference Example - CM
Different Block
Same Block
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Short Names
Which of the following statements is true about Short Names?
A) Optional setting
B) Applies to parameter connector and parameter
references
C) Applies to expression used in SCM and all Calc
Blocks
D) Reference to a container parameter will be displayed
as "$.parameter" in the expression present in the
step of a SCM
E) All of the above
No. The
The
No.
The
correct
answer
is
"All
of
the
above".
All
Yes!
correct
answer
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". All
All
No.
correct
answer
The
correct
answer
is: is
Your
answer:
ofYou
these
statements
arequestion
correct about
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
about
Short
of
these
statements
are
correct
must
answer the
beforeShort
Correct
Click
anywhere
to
continue
You
Incorrect
did You
not -answer
Click
anywhere
this
question
to
continue
completely
Names.
Names.
Names.
answered
this correctly!
continuing
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Click
anywhere
to
continue.
Click
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Clear
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The block name references function in CMs and SCMs allows you to:
14
– Shorten parameter reference in CMs
– Shorten parameter reference in SCMs
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure the Data Acquisition Control Module
lab exercise and the lab exercises that follow it
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe the Block Name References in CM and SCM
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Contents
14
Export/Import a Control Module .............................................................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module
Export/Import a Control Module
Practice
Objective
•
Use the Import and Export functionality of Control Builder to incorporate parts from one
Control Builder Project into another Project
•
Export the Control Module 11_TI20
•
Import Analog Indicator points
•
Use Bulk Edit Parameters to change parameter values
14
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
•
11_TI20 CM configured in Control Builder
•
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
•
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
•
Control Builder running with at least one Project/Monitor tree window open
•
SIM_C200E/SIMC300 Controller and IOMs configured
Introduction
A Project file can contain many items, such as IOMs and CMs, for up to 20 controllers. From
Control Builder, use the Import/Export tool to copy some or all of one project to another.
•
Export - copies the designated portion of a project from Control Builder to a specified
directory
•
Import - copies the designated CMs into Control Builder’s Project Tab
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module
Procedure
Export Function Block Configuration

Step
1
Action
In Control Builder, click on the Project window then from the menu bar select File >
Export, to call up the dialog box, as shown below.
•
Select 11_TI20
ATTENTION
Your point list may be different. The point list contains
all items in the current project.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
11_TI20 now appears in the Point Name field.
14
2
Action
Browse to the path of:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export
•
4/13/2012
Double-click Export and click OK
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3
Action
Click the Export Button.
The Exporting Data dialog box appears
•
ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes if there were no
errors during the export.
4
Open Windows Explorer and navigate to the exported CM location:
•
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Export
•
The following files are generated:
Module Name.bcd (In this case, module name is 11_TI20.)
Module Name.cnf.xml
Export.sl
global.gui
global.snl.xml
•
The Export.sl is the successful list file. It contains a list of all the exported
objects
ATTENTION
Here, 11_TI20 was successfully exported. You can
import this CM to any other Project with the Import
facility.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module
Import a Control Module
Import copies designated Control Modules from the Import/Export files located in the specified
directory (shown in the Import form) to a Control Builder Project.
In this lab, import the Analog Indicator points. These are pre-built CMs and already exported into
the following directory:
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C200E available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
•
Exported files of the Analog Indicator CMs for SIM C300 available in the path:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
14
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
1
Action
From Control Builder, select File>Import to call up the dialog box, as shown below.
All items in
current
Import/
Export Text
Files
Selection tools
List of items
to import
based on
selections
from window
Import /
Export Text
Files
Location
Selection List
When
enabled,
select your
own list of
items to
import
Start Import
ATTENTION
When the above dialog box opens, the Project Tree
window automatically closes.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
2
Action
Click the Browse button and change the Import path to the following folder:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
TIP
Make sure “Series_A” (or _C) is in the ‘Look in’ field
before clicking OK.
14
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3
Action
Import the Analog Indicator points listed below.
Selection can be made with <SHIFT> select (for contiguous items) or <CTRL> select (for
noncontiguous items).
ATTENTION
Select only the following, from the list, to import:
11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26
and 11_TI40.
4
Maintain the Import CEE Assignments checkbox selection. This checkbox imports and
assigns the above CMs to the CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
•
10
If this option is NOT selected, then the imported items are imported as
Unassigned
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
5
Action
Click the Import button.
The following dialog box appears:
14
•
ATTENTION
This dialog box automatically closes after a successful
Import.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
6
Action
Open the Project Tree window and expand the Project.
•
12
CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300) with all the imported CMs appears, as shown
below
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module
Use Bulk Edit Parameters

Step
1
Action
Open the Bulk Editor.
14
• Click Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Create Bulk Edit List
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
2
14
Action
Click on Show All Points button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
3
Action
Select 11_TI21.DACA from the Available Points window then
button
•
Click the arrow
•
11_TI21.DACA now appears in the Selected Points window
14
Similarly, select 11_TI22.DACA, 11_TI23.DACA, 11_TI24.DACA and 11_TI26.DACA
and move them to the Selected Points window
ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple points.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
4
Action
In the Available Parameters window, find and select PVEUHI and PVEXHILM. Select
the arrow
button.
ATTENTION
Press <CNTRL> key for selecting multiple parameters.
5
For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):
From ‘Available Points’, select and move the following to ‘Selected Points’:
11_TI21.TI, 11_TI22.TI, 11_TI23.TI, 11_TI24.TI, 11_TI26.TI
6
For C300 students only (C200E students skip this step):
From ‘Available Parameters’ select and move the following to ‘Selected Parameters’:
PVEXEUHI
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
Click the Browse button for the Output Directory.
•
Select C:\Users\Student in the ‘Browse for Folder’ window
•
Click OK
14
7
Action
8
Select Excel Spread Sheet [.xls] from the Select File Type pull down menu.
Click the Save button.
ATTENTION
If the file already exists in the folder, a prompt will appear
asking you to overwrite the existing file. Press YES.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

18
Step
Action
9
Click OK.
10
Close the ‘Create Bulk Edit List’ window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
Open Windows Explorer and navigate to C:\Users\Student
•
Double click the BulkEdit.xls file
•
Result: Excel opens displaying the points as shown below
14
11
Action
Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
12
Action
In the PVEUHI column, select each 100 value and change it to ‘260
In the PVEXHILM, select each 100 value and change it to ‘260.
ATTENTION
Be sure to put the single quote “ ‘ “ before 260. This
tells Excel that this value is text.
For C300 students only:
Enter the PVEXEUHI as 260 for each Series C Analog
Input channel.
Screen capture shown for SIMC300. You will see this only when using SIMC300.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
13
Action
Save and close the Excel spreadsheet.
14
Accept the default “C:\Student” file location.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
14
Action
In Control Builder, select Tools > Bulk Edit Parameters > Read Bulk Edit List.
•
22
Result: the Read Bulk Edit List tool opens
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
15
Action
Click the Browse button.
From the “C:\Users\Student”, select the BulkEdit.xls file.
14
Click the Open button.
16
Select the Update Project option.
Click the Start button.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
Action
17
Click the OK button to acknowledge the warning.
18
Close the Bulk Edit tool.
19
In Control Builder, verify that PVEUHI changed (to 260) for the five points above
(11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI26).
ATTENTION
If necessary, open the Project Tree, and expand the
Project.
24
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
Select the 11_PI14, 11_TI21, 11_TI22, 11_TI23, 11_TI24, 11_TI25, 11_TI26, and
11_TI40 points.
14
20
Action
Click the Download button.
Click Continue on the Load dialog window.
Select the checkbox with Automatically change… in the Load dialog box, and click OK
to begin the download.
After a successful download, go to the Monitoring Tree window, expand your SCE/CEE
and verify that the CMs are activated (green).
ATTENTION
Your Project screen may appear slightly different than
the example above.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
Action
21
In Station, open the Debutanizer_123 graphic and verify that the downloaded points are
displaying values. If Debutanizer_123 is already displayed, refresh the display.
•
26
11_TI40, 11_TI21, and 11_TI23 are shown below
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module

Step
•
11_TI25, 11_TI24 and 11_TI21 are shown below
14
22
Action
•
11_TI22 is shown below
ATTENTION
Your displays may differ.
If values for 11_TI20 are not updating, close and reopen Tie_back_new.xls and verify the following is
selected:
Tools >
Microsoft Excel Data Exchange >
Recalculate Every 5 seconds
This file is used for simulation purposes.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Productivity Tools in Control Builder
Export/Import a Control Module
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about the engineering repository database
(ERDB) and how to administer it.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Identify the purpose and location of the ERDB
– Open the Database Administration (DBAdmin) tool for the ERDB
– Describe the DBAdmin functions for the ERDB
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
Describe ERDB Administration
Honeywell
Topics
• Introduction to the ERDB
• Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Description
• The ERDB:
– Contains logic CMs/SCMs
from the C200 and C300
controllers
– Is created and referenced
via Control Builder and
DBAdmin tasks
– Is a purely SQL server
database
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Location
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Files
ERDB database file
QVCS database
Warning!!!
Even though the database files
have an .mdf extension, they are not
Microsoft Access database files.
Attempting to open these files with any
program may corrupt the entire database.
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
Program Files > Honeywell > Experion PKS > Engineering Tools > system > ER
Honeywell
Redundant ERDB Servers
ERDB_A - Secondary
ERDB_B - Primary
Replication Status:
No-Sync
Sync
Sync-fail
Synching
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: The ERDB
Which statement about the engineering repository database (ERDB) is
false?
A) It can be redundant
B) It contains logic CMs/SCMs
from C200 controllers
C) It is created through Control Builder
D) Its .mdf files can be opened with
any database program
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis"Its
"Its.mdf
.mdffiles
filescan
canbe
be
Your
answer:
The
correct
is:
opened
withanswer
any database
program ."Attempting to open
You
must
answer
thecorrupt
question
before
the
.mdf
files
may
the
entire
database.
You
did You
not -answered
answer
this
question
completely
Incorrect
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to continue
this
correctly!
Correct
continuing to continue
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Clear
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Introduction to the ERDB
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Opening DBAdmin for the ERDB
• DBAdmin (ERDB) is opened through Configuration Studio
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
• Opening and Navigating the DBAdmin Tool for the ERDB
Honeywell
DBAdmin Window Panes
Tree pane
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
View pane
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
The result is nine
different choices for the
content of the view pane
Click the PLUS sign ( + ) to expand
DbAdmin and Experion Node
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
• ERDB Host Information
– General information about the server appears in the view pane
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
• A lock dialog box will appear when you attempt to open a locked CM in
Control Builder after an abnormal application termination.
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
– Use the Tools menu to refresh status
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
• ERDB Active Locks allows you to open a locked CM
– CMs in Control Builder that are locked appear in the view pane
– Use the Tools menu to clear all locks
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
• CAB Active Locks also allows you to open a locked CM
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
ERDB Admin Tasks for Redundant Servers
• The following tasks are only available for redundant servers
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
• ERDB Admin Tasks displays the ERDB administration tasks
Honeywell
DBAdmin Functions for the ERDB
• Version control system (VCS) Admin Tasks
Synchronize VCS - Synchronizes the Qualification and Version Control System
database with the Engineering Repository database and clears any QVCS locks.
Backup VCS Database - Creates a backup copy of the current QVCS database as a
".bak" file under the user-specified name and in the user-selected directory location.
Restore VCS Database - Restores the user-selected backup QVCS database
(.bak) in the primary ERDB through the Restore From dialog box.
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DBAdmin Wireless specific Functions
• Wireless Key Server and HART Parameter DB Admin tasks
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: DBAdmin Tool
The DBAdmin tool is:
A) Used for organizing excel
spreadsheets
B) A tool used by operators as
a search engine
C) A utility for maintaining the
ERDB
D) Use to modify tuning parameters
on PID control loops
Correct!
Incorrect.
The
The
DBAdmin
DBAdmin
tool
tool
is aisutility
a utility
for
Incorrect.
The DBAdmin
tool is a utility for
The
correct
answer
is:
Your
answer:
for
maintaining
maintaining
the
the
ERDB.
ERDB.
The
The
ERDB
ERDB
maintaining the ERDB. The ERDB Administrative
Administrative
tasks
are
carried before
out
You must answer
the
question
tasks
out
using
the
DBAdmin
tool.
Incorrect
Correct
-answer
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
to
tocontinue
continue
You
did are
not carried
thisthis
question
completely
You
answered
correctly!
using
thecontinuing
DBAdmin
tool.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Clear
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• The engineering repository database (ERDB):
– Contains control strategies for the C200, C200E and C300 controllers
– Is created through Control Builder
located at Program Files>Honeywell>Experion PKS>Engineering
– IsTools>system>ER
– Is administered through DBAdmin, a Configuration Studio utility
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
15
Submit
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe ERDB Administration
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
ERDB Administration and Other Tools
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe ERDB Administration
4/13/2012
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control
Builder
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn the purpose and use of the checkpoint
function in Control Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to:
– Locate the checkpoint file
– Save a checkpoint file
automatically or manually
– Restore a checkpoint file
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Introduction
• The Checkpoint Function:
– Allows you to save and restore operational and configuration data
associated with a control strategy
– C200/C200E, C300, ACE, series CI/O & PM I/O (when used with C300)
– LIOM
– OPC gateway on ACE
– Helps minimize downtime caused by a process or hardware anomaly
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Locating the Checkpoint File
• Saving Checkpoint Files
• Restoring Checkpoint Files
• Checkpoint Support
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint File Location
• The checkpoint file is created on the local server path
• Folders are created for each node
– In Checkpoint and in CheckpointBase
• Folders under Checkpoint contain the actual
checkpoint files
– Latest (most recent) checkpoint is stored directly
in the node folder (ex: SIM_C300)
– Manual checkpoints are stored in the folder
named Manual
– User created tasks (manual or auto) save
checkpoints in folders whose name is the same
as the name of the task (ex: CheckpointAll)
• Folders under CheckpointBase contain
configuration information, and file management
information
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint Base Folder
Attribute and Snapshot
file which contains the
configuration information,
and file management
information
Separate folders
for the controllers
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Checkpoint Folder
• Each .cp (checkpoint) file contains all files of the CheckpointBase folder
in a compressed format supplemented with the saved real-time data for
that instance.
• Sub directories are created for Automatic and Manual scheduled task
checkpointing and Manual Save operation.
Contains the checkpoint
files which are saved
manually
Contain the checkpoint
files which are saved by
user created tasks –
Automatic or Manual
Latest checkpoint file of
the Controller named
SCE59 using the Syntax
ControllerName_Latest.cp
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Checkpoint File Location
Where is the Checkpoint File stored?
A) C:\Documents and Settings\All
Users\ApplicationData\Honeywell\Checkpoint
B) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS
C) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\ExperionPKS\Data
D) C:\ProgramData\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint\Att
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
No.
The
correct
answer
is
No.
The
The the
correct
correct
answer
answer
is
is
You mustYes!
answer
question
before
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
You
Incorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
C:\Documents
and
Settings\All
Users\Application
continuing
Data\Honeywell\Experion
PKS\Checkpoint
Data\Honeywell\Experion PKS\Checkpoint
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue
continue
Click
Submit
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Clear
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Locating the Checkpoint File
• Saving Checkpoint Files
• Restoring Checkpoint Files
• Checkpoint Support
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Checkpointing
Controller > Checkpoint > Schedule Checkpoint Task
Select to schedule checkpoint
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Checkpoint Task – Manual
Name of the task
Select Manual
Select Controller(s)
Assign Controller(s)
Add comments
if desired
Click
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint Task – Automatic – Schedule
Select automatic
Select the date
and time for the
first checkpoint
Select interval
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Checkpointing
Add number of version to
be retained
NOTE: The number of versions is grayed
out in this case because the QVCS option
was included with this system.
QVCS permits only one version to be retained.
Add comment
Click
13
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Automatic Checkpointing
• Checkpoint Scheduler
Start
Stop
Define Task
Refresh Contents
Delete Task
Edit Task
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing
Select Save Checkpoint
Manually
Must be initiated from
the Monitoring tab.
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing – By Node
Lists the nodes for
which checkpoint is to
be saved
Lists the Nodes
available - but
not selected to be
saved
The file name is
automatically generated
based on the:
1. Node “To be Saved”
2. Date & Time.
File Name and
Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created
If multiple nodes are
selected, the port
changes to “File Path”
and points to the
Checkpoint folder.
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Manual Checkpointing – By Task
Lists the nodes to be
saved as defined by
the selected task (or
first task listed if none
are selected – as here)
Lists all Checkpoint
Scheduler tasks which
have type=Manual
File Name (or Path)
and Comments of the
checkpoint file which
is to be created
Comments entered
when the task was
defined
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: Saving a Checkpoint File
Which statement about saving a checkpoint file is false?
A) If your system has the QVCS option, you will only
be able to save 1 version of the checkpoint file
automatically; otherwise, you can specify the
number of versions to save
B) The checkpoint scheduler shows a list of the
automatic and manual checkpoints that have been
saved
C) You can save a checkpoint file manually for only one
project node
D) When you save a checkpoint file automatically you
must specify the start date, start time and interval
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
YouCorrect!
must
answer
the
questionis
No.
No. The
The
The
false
false
false
statement
statement
statement
isbefore
is
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
"You
"You can
can save
save aacontinuing
checkpoint
checkpoint file
file manually
manually
for
for only
only one
one project
project node."
node."
Click
Click anywhere
anywhere to
to continue.
continue.
Checkpoints
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Clear
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Topics
• Locating the Checkpoint File
• Saving Checkpoint Files
• Restoring Checkpoint Files
• Checkpoint Support
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Checkpoints
19
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Restore from Checkpoint
Displays a list of ALL nodes
and shows which node(s) are
selected for restore
Location where the
checkpoint file for the
node is saved
Used to select the
Restore scope (only
available for C300)
List of files available
for restore
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Files to Restore
Multiple parent
Nodes selected
Hardware children in
Multiple parent
Hardware children in
Single parent
Single Parent
Node selected
Available for selection
Unavailable for selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Locating the Checkpoint File
• Saving Checkpoint Files
• Restoring Checkpoint Files
• Checkpoint Support

Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Checkpoint support for C300, Series C I/O, & PM I/O
Honeywell
• C300 target and save granularity
– C300 CEE with Series A modules supported on C300
– Series C I/O
– PMIO supported on C300
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 Restore
• Restore from single “C300 Checkpoint file”
C300 selected for restore
with “Restore Selected
Node & its associated
hardware” option selected
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
C300 and Series A IO Modules Restore
C300 selected for restore
with “Restore selected
Node” option selected
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Series C IO and PM IO Restore
One IOM or IOP selected
More than one IOM or IOP selected
One or more SeriesC IOMs
and/or one or more PM
IOPs selected for restore
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
C200 and Series A IO Modules Restore
• C200 Save
– Series A I/O
– PM IO
C200
Series A I/O
C200_latest.cp or previously saved
compatible file
PM IO
C200 selected for
restore. Restore scope
option is not available
for selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Checkpoints
27
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
LIOM Checkpoint Support
• LIOM Controller
– Redundant or Non-Redundant configuration
– LIOM Block, the LIOM CEE, 621 IOMs, and its contained CMs
Save / restore
Latest.cp
LIOM
Checkpoints
621 IOM
621 IOM
621 IOM
621 IOM
During restore, the
Restore scope option
will not be available for
selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
OPC Gateway Checkpoint Support
• The OPC Gateway is a CPM-like Function Block that resides on an ACE
Node and provides configuration parameters necessary for OPC
connections from ACE CEEs.
• If the ACE Node that hosts the OPC gateway should fail, the OPC
Gateway Checkpoint file can be used to restore these configuration
parameters.
OPC gateway
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Checkpoints
29
OPC Gateway latest.cp
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Checkpoint Functions
Which of the following statements are true about Checkpoints?
A) C300 checkpoints are stored in a single file
B) PM and Series C IOM can be restored individually,
when connected to C300
C) C200 checkpoints if used, restores the C200 and all
IOMs
D) Series A I/O connected to C300 cannot be restored
individually
E) All of the above
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No. All
All of
of the
the above
above statements
statements are
are true
true
You must answer
the question before
about
Checkpoints.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Clear
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Restore
ACE
Detail Display
Honeywell
• The System Status Display supports direct navigation to the detail
display for a selected node
– Checkpoint save and restore operations from the checkpoint TAB in the
detail display
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Checkpoints
31
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Save Failed Status
• Checkpoint save failed status
–
Checkpoints
Alarm is generated for Checkpoint save failed (System Status Display)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Checkpoint File Needs the ERDB
• A checkpoint file works together with the ERDB to restore data
– The checkpoint file by itself cannot be used to restore data
• A checkpoint file (.CP) can only be restored when EXACTLY the same
version of the ERDB exists on the server as when the checkpoint was
taken
– Example:
• Time 1:
• Time 2:
• Time 3:
• Time 4:
A new CM is downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)
A manual checkpoint is taken
An automatic checkpoint is taken
A CM is modified and downloaded (and a checkpoint is taken)
– Only the checkpoint made at Time 4 is available to restore this controller
• Checkpoint files and the ERDB should be backed up together
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Downloading Causes a Checkpoint Status of Incomplete
Honeywell
• When downloading modules (CMs, SCMs, etc.), a checkpoint is taken
– Controller data is not uploaded for the modules being downloaded
– Checkpoint ‘Entirety’ = Incomplete
• Shown in ‘Restore from Checkpoint’ dialog
– Checkpoint Status = “ “
• Shown on the detail display of the controller (checkpoint operations tab)
• Details of the ‘Incomplete’ state show which modules are incomplete
– Display the ‘Restore from Checkpoint’ dialog
– Select the checkpoint whose ‘Entirety’ = Incomplete
– Click the ‘Details’ button
• If this CP is used to restore, only configuration checkpoint data (CCD)
will be restored for modules which have an incomplete status
– Operational checkpoint data (OCD) will not be restored
• Performing a separate checkpoint after the download will create a
“complete” checkpoint
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
16
Checkpoints
Honeywell
Summary
• The Checkpoint function in Control Builder:
– Saves and restores operational and configuration data
– Speeds recovery from process or hardware anomalies
– Can be done manually or automatically at set intervals
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Open and Operate Control Builder lab exercise.
Checkpoints
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe Checkpoint Settings in Control Builder
4/13/2012
Topic: Checkpoints
Contents
Perform Checkpoint Save ......................................................................................................................3
16
Perform Checkpoint Restore .................................................................................................................7
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save
Perform Checkpoint Save
Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint save operation
Prerequisites
SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded
16
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save

Step
Action
Save Checkpoint Manually
1
4
On the Monitoring tab, right-click on the controller (SCE59 or SIM_C300) and select
Checkpoint > Save Checkpoint manually…
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save
Step
Action
2
Click Save to save the checkpoint file.
3
On the Save Checkpoint message window click OK.
16

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Save

Step
4
Action
On the Save Checkpoint Manually window click Close.
ATTENTION
The status of the checkpoint save can be confirmed
from the Event Summary page in Station as shown
below
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Practice
Introduction
In this lab, you will learn the Checkpoint Restore operation
•
Checkpoint restore from Control Builder
•
Checkpoint restore from Station
Prerequisites
•
SIM_C300 / SCE59 must be configured and loaded
Note:
16
1. On completion of this lab, the SIM_C300 / C200E, and the associated I/O and strategies will
be restored.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step
Action
Restore From Checkpoint
1
To change the status of the controller to ‘Fail’, open the Services window and restart the
Experion CDA-SP service.
ATTENTION
To open Services window, click StartRun and type
Services.msc and click OK
To restart the Experion CDA-SP service, right click on
the service and select Restart
2
8
Open Control Builder, if not already open. The status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 has
changed to idle and the CEE and I/O status changed to fail.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step
4/13/2012
Action
3
Right-click on SIM_C300 / SCE59 in Monitoring tab. Select Checkpoint > Restore
from Checkpoint.
4
Verify that the Latest checkpoint status is ‘Complete’ (in the ‘Entirely’ column).
5
Select the ‘Latest’ Checkpoint file from the list and click Restore.
6
Click Continue in the Restore from Checkpoint message window
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
16

9
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step
Action
7
You should get a message indicating that the ”Restore completed successfully”
8
Close both ‘Restore from Checkpoint’ windows.
9
On to the Monitoring tab, check that the status of the controller and all the other items
under it appear in healthy status (green or blue).
10
Change the state of the CEE to WARMSTART.
11
Verify that all of the IO modules and Control Modules are active.
Restore Checkpoint From Detail Display
10
12
Repeat Step 1 to change the status of SIM_C300 / SCE59 to Fail.
13
Open the Station application.
14
Open the Detail Display for SIM_C300 / SCE59.
15
Click Checkpoint Operations tab in the detail display
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step
4/13/2012
Action
16
Change the Security Level to ‘mngr’. Click Restore from checkpoint.
17
Repeat earlier steps to restore the checkpoint of SIM_C300 / SCE59
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
16

11
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore

Step
18
12
Action
Open the detail display of SIM_CEEC300 / CEESCEFB61 and change the state of CEE
to WARMSTART
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
Step
Action
19
Go back to Control Builder Monitoring tab and verify that the status of SIM_C300 /
SCE59 controller and its I/O’s are healthy. Activate the I/O modules and Control Modules
if not active.
16

ATTENTION
Checkpoint Save and Restore for Series C I/O, and
PMIO when used with C300, is supported from both
Control Builder and Station point Detail Displays
The screen might look different, if you are using SIMC300
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Checkpoints
Perform Checkpoint Restore
This page was intentionally left blank.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization
Fundamentals
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
• Topics
– PV Tracking
– Mode behavior after IOL / IOP communication error
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
17
– Initialization
Honeywell
Introduction
• PV Tracking sets the SP equal to the PV when automatic control is
disabled (e.g. cascade is broken or the mode is Manual)
• Setpoint (SP) tracks Process Value (PV) to avoid output bumps when
automatic control is re-established
• Setpoint Limits are still enforced when automatic control is disabled and
PV tracking is enabled
– If the PV is greater than SPHI, then the SP will be set equal to SPHI
– If the PV is less than SPLO, then the SP will be set equal to SPLO
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking
• The PV tracking option is typically configured for PID blocks in a
cascade configuration
– Allows the PID block to resume control with no error after initialization or
when it is taken out of Manual mode
– PV tracking option sets SP equal to PV when the cascade is broken due to
function block initialization, an operator action, or a program action (such as
setting the mode to Manual)
• The PV Tracking option is enabled on the SetPoint Tab of a PID block
PV Tracking
PV Tracking when
block is Initializing
and mode is Auto
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking Options
• If the first PV tracking option is enabled (and PV Tracking in Auto/Init is
not enabled), the function block will set the SP equal to the PV (subject
to SP limits) when the PID loop is set to Manual mode.
• Note 1: PV tracking will not occur on recovery from a bad PV
• Note 2: PV tracking will not occur if a block is in the Auto mode. If a PID
is in Auto mode, it means the SP value is normally stored by the user; if
PV tracking was available for Auto mode, the user SP would be lost
– The first PV Tracking option will not work when the block is Initializing and
the mode is Auto
• PV Tracking in Auto Initialize mode
– When checked, PV Track in Auto/Init is enabled and provides PV Tracking
when the block is in Auto mode and it is undergoing initialization (INITMAN
is On)
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking
17
• After enabling the PV Tracking option
SP is equal to PV when mode is
in MAN
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PV Tracking in Auto/Init
• When the mode is changed from CAS in a secondary controller,
INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller
• If the option Enable PV Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track
the PV if INITMAN is ON, even if the mode of the primary controller is
Auto
SP tracks PV when
block is in an Initialize
state and in Auto mode
Mode is
AUTO
Block is in
Initialize State
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization Propagation
• Initialization propagation
– Occurs when control blocks check the downstream blocks for broken loop
– In case of a broken loop, each block will initialize itself and provide an
initialization request and initialization value to its primary (upstream) block
– Initialization starts at the final control element and propagates upstream
• In a Cascade control loop
– Secondary controller block initializes itself and sends an initialization request
to Primary controller when its MODE is changed from CAS
– Initialization does not occur when Secondary controller mode is changed
from AUTO/MAN to CAS
• Initialization requests are brought in from downstream blocks using the
implicit BACKCALC connection for each output
• Downstream block may propagate one shot initialization requests to an
upstream block
– Occurs when a block is activated or returning from bad control
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization (Cascade Control Loop)
• When the mode of a secondary controller is changed from CAS,
INITMAN is turn ON in the primary controller
• INITMAN parameter indicates the initialization status
Primary Controller
Secondary Controller
INITMAN is ON
for Primary
Controller
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Initialization Parameters
• When INITMAN is ON
17
– Function block is in Initialization Manual
– Either a cascade is broken (i.e., secondary controller mode is not Cascade),
or initialization is requested by a secondary downstream block
• INITMAN is available in following blocks
– All RegCtl blocks, DevCtl, Pulse Count Control, Pulse Length Control,
HTmotor, LTmotor, Solenoid, ValveDamper
• Secondary Initialization Option
– When enabled, a Regulatory Control function block ignores initialization
requests from the secondary
– There is one SECINITOPT parameter for each secondary
• Number of secondary connection depends on the function block type
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Enable Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPTENB)
Honeywell
• When communication to the Input Output Processor (IOP) is lost:
– Mode is set to MAN
– Mode attribute is set to OPERATOR
– Initialization (this block & upstream)
• Available in all regulatory control blocks
• Applicable for the following I/O:
– PM I/O
– Series C I/O
– Series A and H (except Fieldbus, Profibus, and DeviceNet on Series A I/O)
• Disabled by default
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT)
• BADOCOPT = NaN
– Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately
– No mode shed occurs
• BADOCOPT = 0 sec (same as BADOCOPTENB = Disabled)
– Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately
– Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR immediately
– User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored
• BADOCOPT = 1 to 60 sec
– Initialization request (this block & upstream) occurs immediately
– Mode & ModeAttr = MAN & OPERATOR after BADOCOPT seconds
• Or during the next CM execution after BADOCOPT seconds
– Communication restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
• Normal operation is automatically restored without user intervention
– Communication NOT restored within BADOCOPT seconds:
• User must restore mode after the communication with the I/O is restored
Bad Output Connection Option:
Nan, 0, 1-60
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Bad Output Connection Option (BADOCOPT) Diagrams
• BADOCOPT
Lose communication to IOP
Communication restored
Time
= NaN
Init. Request
No Mode Shed
• BADOCOPT
= 0 sec (same
Normal operation restored automatically
Lose communication to IOP
Communication restored
Time
Init. Request
Mode Shed
as BADOCOPTENB
= Disabled)
User must restore mode
Communication restored
• BADOCOPT
= 1 to 60 sec
Lose communication to IOP
Communication restored
BADOCOPT Seconds
Time
Init. Request
Mode shed
User must restore mode
Normal operation restored automatically
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
RegCtl Block Detail Display
17
• Bad Output Connection Options (BADOCOPT) is available on Main tab
of detail display
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Uncommanded Mode Change Alarm
• Alarm indicates a mode change due to the ‘Bad Output Connection
Option’
– Only available when BADOCOPTENB is enabled
• Alarm returns to normal when the user restores (changes to) any mode
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
What Causes an I/O Communication Failure?
• The following result in an I/O communication failure:
–
–
–
–
–
–
Removing the physical card from the rack
Loss of communication on the I/O link
Power cycle of the remote chassis which has an AO or DO card
The diagnostic failure of an individual slot
Failure of the I/O processor
Removing the local or remote CNI card or removing the ControlNet cable or
FTE cable connecting to the IOLIM
• Items which do NOT cause the RegCtl block to shed mode:
– Activating or inactivating an IOM function block
– Activating or inactivating a CEE that contains an IOM block
– Activating or inactivating a CM which has an AO or DO channel associated
with an IOM function block
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
•
PV Tracking
– PV Tracking (when enabled) locks the SP to the PV -- the SP remains equal to the PV
(subject to SP limits) as long as the mode is Manual
– PV Tracking in Auto/Init -- when the mode of a secondary controller is not in CAS, the
parameter INITMAN is turned ON in the primary controller. If the option Enable PV
Tracking in Auto/Init is checked, the SP will track the PV even if the mode of the
primary controller is Auto.
•
Initialization
•
Mode Behavior after IOL or IOP communication error
– Initialization occurs in a cascade loop when the mode of a secondary controller is not
in CAS, which causes the INITMAN parameter to turn ON in the primary controller. In
a single loop, initialization can be caused by a problem with a secondary downstream
block. Any block that can be initialized has an associated BACKCALC variable.
– Initialization requests from a point’s secondary or downstream block are brought in
through the implicit BACKCALC connection for each output.
– Eliminates user intervention to restore regulatory control block mode, when
communication failure is restored very quickly
– Provides a new parameter option (BADOCOPT) in regulatory control block to allow
users to select the mode behavior
– Provides Access Lock to configuration parameters to prevent unauthorized user
access to the functionality
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
17
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a PID Control Module lab exercise and
the lab exercises that follow it
PID Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe PV Tracking and Initialization Fundamentals
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: PID Control Module
Contents
Configure a PID Control Module ............................................................................................................3
17
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300) .............................37
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Practice
Objective
•
Configure a Control Module
•
Use the naming conventions for the Control Module and function blocks within the control
module.
•
Configure a Control Module with a single PID loop
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or Client machine loaded with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This will be required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with the Project and Monitoring tree windows open
•
SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange open and loaded with the simulation spread sheet
17
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Introduction
The Heavy Feed Flow FC01 is built in this lab. This PID loop requires bumpless Auto – Manual
transfer with alarms, groups, and historization enabled.
The PID loop will be built, loaded and activated. The remaining Control Modules, of a similar type,
are imported into the project.
To create a control strategy, a Control Module 11_FC01 must be built and function blocks inserted
and connected. Once the Control Modules are built or imported, you can test them with the
simulation.
In this lab, you will build a control module for a simple PID loop 11_FC01 for the heavy feed to the
debutanizer tower T-100.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Create a Control Module (CM)

Step
1
Action
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.
•
Open one or two Project/Monitor tree windows as desired.
Project
Tree
window
Monitoring
Tree
window
17
Library
Tree
window
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

6
Step
Action
2
Select File > New > Control Module.
3
Double-click the blank chart background.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
4
Action
On the Main properties tab enter the following:
•
Name:
11_FC01
•
Item Name:
11_FC01_item
•
Parent Asset:
Analyser_C11
•
Description:
Heavy Feed To Debutanizer (Maximum 120 characters)
•
Click the OK Button
•
Save and close 11_FC01
ATTENTION
17
Control Builder numbers all new CMs sequentially.
You can use any 16-character unique name for the
CM in Project.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
5
For this Lab, use the specified CM names, because this allows you to test the CMs with
the pre-configured Excel spreadsheet, used for simulation.
•
CM 11_FC01 is added to the Unassigned node in Project window
ATTENTION
Your Project window may differ. Verify that 11_FC01 is
in the Unassigned node.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
6
Configure the Parameters for 11_FC01.
•
If the Main property page is not open, right click 11_FC01
•
Select Module Properties
Enter the following parameter details in the Main tab.
•
Engr Units:
m3/hr (Maximum 16 characters allowed)
•
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on the Main tab
17
7
Action
ATTENTION
The name of every CM must be unique server wide.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
8
Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
Enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtlPIDA
Click the OK button.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_FC01 in Station will be
directly picked from the type of Point detail display
specified.
You can directly add a CM, to a Trend and Group by
entering trend/group numbers and the pen/position in
Trends and Groups windows, here or after building the
control strategy in the CM.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Assign the CM to the controller CEESCEFB61 (For SIM C200E) or SIM_CEEC300
(For SIM C300)
•
(Assign) button on the toolbar,
With the CM 11_FC01 selected, click the
to open the Execution Environment Assignment dialog.
•
Select 11_FC01 in the CMs/SCMs tab in Available Modules list box
•
Select CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300 in the Assign To list box
•
Click the Assign button
•
11_FC01 is added to Assigned Modules list box
•
Click the Close button
17
9
Action
•
11_FC01 is now assigned to CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, as indicated below
For SIM-C200E
4/13/2012
For SIM C300
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Add Function Blocks to a CM
After creating a CM, you must design the control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks
and control blocks such as PIDs, device control or logic blocks.
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step
Action
1
Double-click 11_FC01 in the Project window to open the chart view, and then maximize
the view.
2
Add Function Blocks to the CM
•
From the Library tab, expand the IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or
Series_C_IO  AI-HL (For Series C I/O)
•
Select AICHANNEL
For Series A I/O
12
For Series C I/O
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
3
Drag AICHANNEL into the 11_FC01 Project chart view.
4
Drag the following Function Blocks from their respective block Libraries and add to the
CM.
Block Family
Block
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
REGCTL
PID
IOCHANNEL (For Series A I/O) or
SERIES_C_IO  AO (For Series C I/O)
AOCHANNEL
ATTENTION
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Add the blocks in the order specified above. For more
information on adding function blocks to a CM, refer to
the Knowledge Builder along the path
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building
User’s Guide > Creating a Control Module >
Creating an Instance of a Basic Function Block
13
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.
For SIM-C300
For SIM-C200E
6
Configure AIChannel parameters:
•
Double-click the AICHANNEL block to open the AI parameter configuration
form.
•
Enter the Channel Name as FI.
For Series C I/O
For Series A I/O
TIP (Only for Series C IO Channels)
Channel PV Range parameters can be configured in
Series C AI Channel block
Therefore, PV ranges for Analog Inputs must be
configured for both the Series C AI Channel block and
the DACA block
7
For C300s ONLY:
Change the ranges of the FI block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 600.9
14
PV High Range
600
PV Low Range
0
PV Extended Low Range
-6.9
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
8
Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AI channel (FI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close FI properties.
For C300:
Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FI:
Module Name:
17

Channel Number:
4/13/2012
2
Click the OK button to close FI properties.
3
Right-click the AI channel (FI block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
9
Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block. Double-click the Data Acquisition Block, to open
the configuration form, and enter the following:
Name:
DACA
Description:
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
Engr Units:
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi: 600
PVEU Range Lo: 0
PV Extended Hi Limit:
600.9
PV Extended Lo Limit:
-6.9
Clamping Option: ENABLE
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
ATTENTION
You must name this block DACA so that the
Honeywell supplied Analog Point Details display
functions properly when called from Station
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module

Step
Action
10
Select the Show Parameter Names checkbox located at the lower left corner. Note that
the parameter names now appear in place of the parameter descriptions.
17
Configure a PID Control Module
ATTENTION
This displays the parameter names instead of
parameter descriptions.
11
4/13/2012
Uncheck the Show Parameter Names checkbox.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
12
Action
To Configure Alarms, select the Alarms tab.
Enter the following:
PV High:
500
Priority: HIGH
PV Low:
0
Priority: Low
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters.
13
18
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
14
Action
To Configure a PID Block:
Double click PIDA.
Enter the following:
Name:
Description:
Engineering Units:
PIDA
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi:
600
PVEU Range Low:
0
Select the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkbox.
17
Normal Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.
ATTENTION
This block must be named PIDA for the Honeywell supplied
standard PID Point Detail Display to function properly.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
15
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form and enter the following
Control Equation type:
Integral Time (T1):
Linear Gain Options:
Overall Gain:
EQB
0.2
LIN
0.40
ATTENTION
The Algorithm form allows you to configure PID control
equation types, associated PID equation parameters
and gain options for the PID block.
16
Click the SetPoint Tab and enter the following:
High Limit:
600
Low Limit:
0
Ensure Enable PV Tracking is selected.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
17
Action
Click the Alarms tab of PID and enter the following:
Type: OP High
Trip Point: 95
17
Priority: LOW
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
18
Action
To add or remove Block Pins in a Functional Block :
Click on the Block Pins tab.
In the ‘Selected Parameters’ portion of the window, for the PV parameter, change the
location to ‘Left’ by:
Click on the “TOP” value on the PV parameter Location column.
Select LEFT from the drop down combo box.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
19
As a result of the previous change in pin location, the PV pin shifted to the left side of the
PID block faceplate, as indicated below.
Click OK.
20
Configure the AO Block.
Double-click the AOChannelA Block and enter the following:
FV
17
Channel Name:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
21
Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AO channel (FV block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close FV properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC01.FV:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
2
Click the OK button to close FV properties.
3
Right-click the AO channel (FV block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module
Connect Function Blocks
After adding the Function Blocks, wire them together to form a Control Strategy. You can wire
Blocks together anytime you choose, before or after configuring block parameters.

Step
From the Main Menu, Select Chart > Insert > Wire, OR Click the
toolbar.
button in the
•
The cursor changes to a PLUS (+) sign inside the Project chart window
•
Click the PV pin displayed in the AICHANNEL (FI) block and then click the P1 pin
in the DATAACQ (DACA) block
•
These function blocks are now connected
17
1
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
2
Repeat the above steps to connect PV pin of DATAACQ (DACA) to the PV of PIDA.
3
Connect the PIDA OP pin to the OP pin of AO.
•
4
26
Your CM should be similar to the one shown below.
Select File > Save.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
Configure History Collection, Trends and Groups.
Double-click in the white space of the chart view of 11_FC01 to open its configuration
form. Select the Server History tab.
In the History Configuration section, in the Parameter column, row 1, click the
Selection) button to open the Point Selection form.
(Point
Select the row having Point name 11_FC01 and Block Name PIDA, as shown in the
screen capture.
Select OP for the Parameter.
6
4/13/2012
17
Click OK to close the Point selection form.
11_FC01.PIDA.OP appears in the History Configuration table.
•
Click to select the FAST (Fast History) and STD (Standard History) options
•
11_FC01.PIDA.OP will now be historized
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
7
Repeat the above steps to configure History Collection for 11_FC01.PIDA.PV in row 2 of
the Parameter column.
8
Add Point Parameters to Trends.
Click the Server Displays tab in the configuration form.
In the Trends section, in row 1, specify Trend # 1 as the Trend number.
In row 1, Pen column, click to select 1 from the drop-down menu.
In row 1, Enter 11_FC01.PIDA.PV as the Trend Parameter.
•
You can also select the parameter with the help of Point selection list, as shown in
an earlier step.
In the Groups section, row 1, specify Group # 11, Position # 1 and Group Parameter
11_FC01.PIDA.PV.
Click OK.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
9
Click File > Save.
10
Close the 11_FC01 Project chart window.
•
•
This CM is located under CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300, which means it is
assigned to that execution environment
•
The symbol “
controller
“indicates that the CM has not yet been downloaded to the
The color gray of the connection icon indicates the CM is in Project mode.
ATTENTION
17
The screen capture might look different if you are
using SIM-C300
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
11
12
30
Action
Download this CM.
•
Select 11_FC01
•
Click the
•
Click Continue on the Load window showing the warning
•
Select the Automatically change… checkbox.
This ensures that the post load state is automatically set as ACTIVE
on the toolbar
Click OK.
•
A Load dialog box appears and closes on a successful download
•
In Project, notice that there is no “
“ symbol in front of 11_FC01
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
13
Action
Click the Monitoring tab to verify that 11_FC01 is active (green).
•
If the CM is active (green) skip the next step
•
If the CM is inactive (blue) perform the next step
ATTENTION
17
The screen capture might look different if you are using SIM-C300
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
14
Action
Activate the CM (right-click 11_FC01 and select “Activate”) or select 11_FC01 and click
the
(Toggle State) button from the toolbar, to open the following.
Click Yes.
•
Notice that the 11_FC01 changes to green indicating it is now active
Monitoring tree status information is indicated by different symbols and colors,
as shown below:
CPM/SCE Symbols
1
32
2
3 4
5
6
7 8
1
Grey - As seen in project tree.
1
Grey – Project tree
2
Grey - Loaded not monitored
3
Red - Communication failure
4
Yellow - Not used
5
Green - Active
6
Red - Failed
7
Yellow - Not Loaded
8
Blue – Loaded
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
CEE/ CEESCE Symbols
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
Grey - As seen in project tree
2
Grey - Loaded not monitored
3
Red - Communication failure
4
Blue - Inactive
5
Green - Active
6
Red - Configuration Error
CM Symbols
1
3
4
5
1
Grey - As seen in project tree
2
Grey - Loaded not monitored
3
Red - Communication failure
4
Blue - Inactive
5
Green – Active
Open Station, access and refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.
•
Change the 11_FC01 controller to AUTO mode
•
Click the SP value and enter 400 in the 11_FC01 faceplate.
17
15
2
ATTENTION
Open the Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet to observe the values for PV
and OP.
If the PV value for the point is not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New
Excel spreadsheet. This spreadsheet is used for simulation purposes.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
16
Action
To watch the trend in Station:
Click the
button in Station.
Enter 1 in command line. Change the trend interval, if necessary.
Zoom the line trend to get a closer display.
17
34
To see the CM in the Group display:
•
Click
•
Type 11 and press the Enter key.
button on Station.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
18
Action
From the Group Display, change the MD to MAN.
Change the OP to 30.
19
•
The PV will change because the OP changed. The SP follows the PV because PV
tracking is enabled
•
This tests your CM 11_FC01
In Control Builder, import (with CEE assignment) 11_FC02, 11_FC28 and 11_PC15 from
the following location:
17
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C).
ATTENTION
If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for
importing the above CMs.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300, the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\
Honeywell\Experion PKS\Ixport\Student_DB\Series_C
20
4/13/2012
From Project, download (with activation) the CMs imported in the previous step.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
PID Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module

Step
Action
21
Verify that the three CMs are active (green) in the Monitoring tab.
22
Open Station and access the Debutanizer_123 graphic.
ATTENTION
Verify that the imported CMs have values. (If
necessary, place the imported loops in AUTO mode
and provide suitable SP values to see a PV response.)
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID Control Module
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200
& C300)
Practice
Objective
•
To calculate the Processing Units and Memory units for given blocks for C200E, and C300.
Prerequisites
•
Knowledge of Memory Units and Process Units in C200E, and C300.
Introduction
This exercise will allow you to determine about Memory Units and Process Units used in
C200E, and C300.
17
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
PID Control Module
Calculate Performance Statistics of the Configuration Performed (C200 & C300)
Procedure
Control Module Calculation

38
Step
Action
1
Calculate MU and PU for C200E, and C300.
2
If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA, 1PID, and 1AO, 6 Logic FBs, total Memory Units
consume is______?
3
If CM is build using 1AI, 1DACA FB, Total Memory Units Consume is ______?
4
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Regulatory control CM with Execution
Period of .5 Sec _____?
5
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Period of .5 Sec _____?
6
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 20 Analog Data Acquisition CM with Execution
Period of .1 Sec _____?
7
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 40 Regulatory control CM with Execution Period of
.5 Sec _____?
8
Where do you verify the Memory Units (MU) consumption in C300? _______
9
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for a typical Device control CM with Execution Period of
.1 Sec _____?
10
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 50 Device control CM with Execution Period of .1
Sec _____?
11
Calculate Processing Units (PU) for 4 SCM with Execution Period of .1 Sec _____?
12
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 40 Regulatory control CM _____?
13
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 5 Auxiliary Function CM _____?
14
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Analog Data Acquisition CM _____?
15
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 100 Device control CM _____?
16
Calculate Memory Units (MU) for 10 Logic control CM _____?
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Topic: PID with Split Range Control Module
Contents
18
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs ...................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs
Practice
Objective
•
Configure a Split Range Control Module.
•
Configure an AUTOMANUAL and FANOUT block.
Prerequisites
Knowledge of Configuration Studio.
•
Experion PKS Server or client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded.
•
The Debutanizer_123 graphics loaded on the Server. (This will be required at a later time to
check the control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two tree windows open.
•
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured.
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded.
18
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs
Introduction
A reflux drum D-100 has a split range pressure controller 11_PC16. It controls the pressure on D100 by split range action on two valves, PV16A and PV16B, where PV16A is reverse acting and
PV16B is direct acting.
The following table illustrates how valves PC16A and PC16B open with the split range signal.
Valve PC16A is the valve on the line bypassing the debutanizer overhead condenser E-110. Valve
PC16B is on the line connecting D-100 to the compressor interstage drum, which provides a back
pressure of 240 kPag (35 psig). The flare has a backpressure of 14 kPag (2.0 psig).
Signal from 11_PC16
Valve
Condition
0
PC16A
Fully Open
50
PC16A
Closed
50
PC16B
Closed
100
PC16B
Fully Open
You will first import 11_HC41 (D-100 Overhead to Flare) and 11_HC44 (D-100 Bypass from
Compressor Interstage Drum), which are hand-control valves (Analog Output points).
The 11_PC16 control module is then built, and you can test the logic with simulation.
CM Name
Action to be taken
11_HC41 and 11_HC44
Import the CMs from existing database.
11_PC16 Split Range PID Control
Module
Configure PID block, Auto Manual (AUTOMAN)
block and FANOUT block.
Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs
Procedure
Configure Split Range Control Loop

Step
1
Action
Import valves.
From Project, Import (with CEE assignment) the hand control valves 11_HC41 and
11_HC44 from the following location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents \Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
18
If needed, follow the steps in the Import/Export Lab for
importing the above CMs.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
2
Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window.
Drag here
3
6
In the Name New Function Block(s) window, enter:
Destination Tag Name: 11_PC16
Destination Item Name: 11_PC16_item
Click Finish
This adds 11_PC16 in the assigned tree in the Project Tree window.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
4
Action
Expand the tree and double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view.
Double-click the white space to open the Parameter Configuration form.
Enter the following details in the Main tab:
Parent Asset:
Tank_C11
Description:
Tank Pressure Controller
Engr Units:
KPaG
Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters on this tab.
5
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtlPIDA
Click OK.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_PC16 in Station will be
selected based on the type of Point detail display
specified
6
Design a control strategy by adding function blocks in the following sequence:
Block Family
•
Block Type
Block Name
Layout Key
IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
SERIES_C_IO  AI-HL (Series C)
AICHANNEL
AICHANNELA
(A)
•
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
DATAACQA
(B)
•
REGCTL
PID
PIDA
(C)
•
REGCTL
FANOUT
FANOUTA
(D)
•
REGCTL
AUTOMAN
AUTOMANA
(E)
•
IOCHANNEL (Series A) or
AOCHANNEL
AOCHANNELA
(F)
AOCHANNEL
AOCHANNEL _1 (G)
SERIES_C_IO  AO (Series C)
•
IOCHANNEL or
SERIES_C_IO  AO (Series C)
Letters in the layout key column correspond to the following diagram.
18
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
7
Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as follows:
A
E
D
G
B
C
F
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are
using Series C I/O
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
Action
A
AICHANNELA – is the pressure input channel.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
B
DATAACQA – block provides the signal conditioning for the input signal.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
C
PIDA – the PID controller for taking the control action.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
D
FANOUTA – block is a single X1 input and up to 8 outputs (Regulatory Control
block). The block applies a user-specified gain and bias along with a
calculated floating bias for each of up to 8 initialized outputs to guarantee that
each output is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
1) In this CM, we are using the FANOUT block to send the same input
(11_PC16.PIDA.OP) to two outputs valves; PV16A and PV16B.
E
AUTOMANA: The (Auto Manual) block applies a user-specified gain and bias
along with a calculated floating bias to the output to guarantee that the output
is "bumpless" following initialization or mode changes.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
2) In this CM, we are using AUTOMANA to reverse the output to the
PV16A which is a reverse acting valve.
8
F
AOCHANNELA – is the output signal to valve PV16A.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
G
AOCHANNELA_1 – is the output signal to valve PV16B.
Configuration details will be provided in the following steps.
Configure the AI Channel (A).
Double-click the AICHANNELA block to open the AI parameter configuration form.
Enter following details:
PI
18
Channel Name:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
9
Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AI channel (PI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close PI properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
10
2
Click the OK button to close PI properties.
3
Right-click the AI channel (PI block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
10
11
Action
For C300 only, set the range of 11_PC16.PI as follows:
PV Extended Hi Range
1800
PV High Range
1750
PV Low Range
0
PV Extended Low Range
0
Configure the Data Acquisition Block (B).
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Enter following details:
Name:
DACA
Description:
D-100 Pressure Controller
Engr Units:
kPag
PVEU Range Hi:
1750
PVEU Range Lo:
0
PV Extended Hi Limit:
1800
PV Extended Lo Limits:
0
Accept the defaults for the remaining parameters.
18
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
12
Action
Configure the PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Enter following details:
Name:
PIDA
Description:
D-100 Pressure controller
Engineering Units:
kPag
PVEU Range Hi:
1750
PVEU Range Low:
700
Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:
Select this option
Normal Mode and Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all remaining values on this tab.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
13
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form.
Enter following details:
Control Equation Type:
EQB
Control Action:
Direct
Integral Time (T1):
.2
LIN
Linear Gain Options :
.5
Overall Gain:
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.
14
SP
700
High Limit:
1750
Low Limit:
700
Click the Alarms tab and enter the following details.
OP High Trip Point:
90
Priority: High
OP Low Trip Point:
5
Priority: Low
18
15
Click the SetPoint Tab and enter following details:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
Action
16
Click OK.
17
Configure FANOUT Block (D):
Double-click on the FANOUTA block and enter following parameters:
Name:
FANOUTA
Description:
Split range Selection
Engineering Units:
kPag
High Limit:
100
Low Limit:
0
Normal Mode and Mode:
CAS
Normal Mode Attribute and Mode Attribute:
Operator
Accept the defaults for all remaining parameters on this tab.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
18
Action
Click the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location of the X1 pin to LEFT
Change the Location of the OP[1] pin to RIGHT
18
Change the Location of the OP[2] pin to RIGHT
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
19
Action
Click the Common Output tab.
In Output Limits section, enter the following values:
High Limit (%) : 100
Low Limit (%) : 0
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
20
Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Enter the following:
Output #1 and Output #2 Gain:
2
Output Bias for Output #2:
–100
Ensure that the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for Output #1 and
Output #2 are selected.
Deselect the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes for all other Outputs.
TIP
Each output of the FANOUT block is calculated per the
following equation:
CV(n) = X1*K(n) + [OPBIAS(n).FIX +
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT]
Where
X1 = input value
18
K(n) = gain of output CV(n) (user specified)
(n) = Output channel (number 1 to 8)
OPBIAS(n).FIX = fixed bias for output CV(n)
(user specified)
OPBIAS(n).FLOAT = floating bias for output
CV(n) (calculated)
Click OK to close the FANOUT block.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
21
Action
Configure AUTOMANA block (E):
Double-click the AUTOMANA block and enter the following:
Name:
AUTOMANA
Description:
Split Range for PV16A
Engineering Units:
kPag
Normal Mode and Mode:
CAS
Normal Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
22
Action
Click the Output tab.
Enter the following details:
Output Limits section:
High Limit (%) :
100
Low Limit (%) :
0
Gain and Bias section:
Output Bias:
100
Gain(K):
-1 (Note: you will get an error until the low limit is changed)
Gain High Limit:
10
Gain Low Limit:
-5
18
Accept the defaults for all other parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
23
Action
Click on the Block Pins tab.
Change the Location X1 pin to LEFT.
Change the Location OP pin to RIGHT.
Click OK.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
24
Action
Configure one of the AO Blocks (F):
Double-click the AOChannelA block and enter the following:
PVA
Name:
25
Click on the Block Pins Tab.
18
Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
26
Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
Click on the Main Tab.
3
In the properties of the AO channel (PVA block), use the
pull-down list to select the module name.
4
Select the channel number.
5
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
6
Click the OK button to close PVA properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVA:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
22
2
Click the OK button to close PVA properties.
3
Right-click the AO channel (PVA block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
27
Action
Configure the other AO Block (G)
Double-click the AOChannelA_1 block and enter the following:
PVB
Name:
28
Click on the Block Pins Tab.
18
Change the Location OP pin to LEFT.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
29
Action
Assign the AO Channel to an AO Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
Click on the Main Tab.
3
In the properties of the AO channel (PVB block), use the
pull-down list to select the module name.
4
Select the channel number.
5
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
6
Click the OK button to close PVB properties.
For C300:

Step
5
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_PC16.PVB:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
6
Click the OK button to close PVB properties.
7
Right-click the AO channel (PVB block) and select Function
Block Assign.
8
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
30
Action
Wire the connections as shown below :
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.
ATTENTION
31
4/13/2012
18
The screen capture might look different if you are
using Series C I/O
Save the Project chart form.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
32
Action
Configure the History collection.
Double-click in a blank space of the 11_PC16 project chart to open the configuration
form.
Click the Server History Tab.
1.) Historize the following parameters as shown below:
11_PC16.PIDA.PV; 11_PC16.PIDA.OP; 11_PC16.PVA.OP & 11_PC16.PVB.OP
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
33
Action
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click Server Displays and add the following data:
Trend #
3
Pen # 3
Trend Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV
Group #
13
Pos # 3
Group Parameter: 11_PC16.PIDA.PV
Click OK.
35
Save and close the CM 11_PC16.
Select 11_PC16, 11_HC41, and 11_HC44 in the Project tree window and click the
button.
36
Click Continue in the Load Window.
37
Select the Automatically change ………. checkbox in the Load dialog box.
18
34
ATTENTION
The Post load state is selected as ACTIVE by default.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
38
Action
Click OK to download.
ATTENTION
The download window closes automatically if the
configuration contains no warnings or errors.
39
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station.
40
Verify the 11_PC16 controller is in AUTO mode and enter a set point of 1170.
Select 11_HC41 and 11_HC44 and enter a 1 in the value input box.
ATTENTION
If the value of PV is not changing to the new SP, close the
Tie_Back_New Excel spreadsheet and re-open it.
Notice 11_PC16 SP is 1170 and the PV value is adjusting to the SP.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
Go to Group 13 to view the details of 11_PC16:
18
41
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
42
Action
Change the SP to 1180.
The controller takes the new SP value and increases the PV towards the SP as shown
below:
You can watch the change by going to Trend number 3 on Station.
43
30
Change the SP to 935 and let 11_PC16 control to the new SP.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
44
Action
Open Control Builder in the Monitoring Mode.
Double-click 11_PC16 to open the chart view as shown below:
In the above example, PIDA OP is 51.73, that is, it’s between 50 and 100%.
Based on the logic, PVA is CLOSED (OP= 0)
PVB is OPENED (OP = 3.47)
18
ATTENTION
Values seen in this figure may differ from that seen on
your screen
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
PID with Split Range Control Module
Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range Outputs

Step
45
Action
Change PIDA to MAN Mode and change OP to 50%.
•
PVA and PVB are both closed.
Change PIDA OP to 0%
•
PVA will OPEN 100%.
•
PVB is CLOSED.
Change PIDA OP as 100%
46
32
•
PVA will CLOSE.
•
PVB will OPEN 100%.
Change the PIDA mode back to AUTO.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Topic: Cascade PID Control Module
Contents
19
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module ............................................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Practice
Objective
Configure a cascade controller for the T-100 bottom level control.
Prerequisites
Experion PKS Server or a Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
The Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SIM-C200E/C200E, or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
19
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Introduction
The first Cascade loop built is 11_LC14, the T-100 bottom level control. Although the loop has two
secondaries, 11_FC17 and 11_FC18, in this lab the cascade is built with just 11_FC17. 11_ FC18 is
configured in the next lab.
The P&ID shows that this loop has an interlock with the bottom safety valve and is the primary to
both outlet streams (11_FC17 and 11_FC18).
LSD15 is driven by interlock logic. The interlock (11_LSD15) will be imported into the project.
The cascade loop, with 11_LC14 as primary and 11_FC17 as secondary, will be built, and
downloaded in this lab. However, the functionality will be tested after the next lab when 11_FC18
is added to project. The loops require a bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO to CAS.
.
The following CMs will be configured:
CM Name
Action to be taken
11_LC14 & 11_FC17
Configure as a simple cascade loop.
11_LSD15
Imported from:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or
_C)
Modify 11_LC14
Add logic to check when level goes above 5%.
Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Procedure
Create a Control Module (CM)
Step
Action
1
Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
2
Open the Project tree window in the upper left hand corner and the Library tree window
in the lower left hand corner.
19

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
3
Action
Build a new CM.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project window
Drag here
ATTENTION
This creates a new Control Module and also assigns the CM
to the CEE.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4
Action
Enter 11_LC14 in the Destination Tagnames textbox and 11_LC14_Item in the
Destination Item Names textbox.
19
Click Finish.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
Configure the parameters for 11_LC14.
Open 11_LC14 in Chart View.
Double-click the chart view to open the configuration form.
Enter the following details under the Main tab.
Name:
11_LC14
Item Name:
11_LC14_item
Parent Asset:
Level_C11
Description
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Lvl Controller
Engr Units:
%
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
6
Click the Server Displays tab and enter the following display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtlPIDA
Click OK.
ATTENTION
The Group detail display for 11_LC14 in Station will be directly
picked from the type of Point detail display specified.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Add Function Blocks to a CM
After creating the CM, design a control strategy by adding relevant Input/Output blocks and Control
blocks (like PID, device control, or logic blocks).
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM / Configure C300 Hardware and
Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step
Action
1
Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
sequence shown below.
Block
Family Block
IOCHANNEL or
SERIES_C_IO  AI-HL AICHANNELA (A)
•
DATAACQ
DATAACQ
(B)
REGCTL
PID
(C)
CM 11_LC14 should resemble the following diagram:
A
B
19
C
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
2
Action
Configure the AI Channel.
Double-click the AI Channel block to open the configuration form
Enter following details:
LI
Name:
3
Assign the AI Channel to the AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AI channel (LI block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close LI properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_LC14.LI:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
10
2
Click the OK button to close LI properties.
3
Right-click the AI channel (LI block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4
Action
Configure a Data Acquisition Block (B).
Double-click the Data Acquisition Block to open the configuration form.
Enter following details:
Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level
Engr Units:
%
PV Character
LINEAR
PVEU Range Hi:
100
PVEU Range Lo:
0
PV Extended Hi Limit:
102.9
PV Extended Lo Limit:
-2.9
Clamping Option:
ENABLE
19
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
Configure Alarms for the DACA Block.
Click the Alarms tab.
Enter the following:
PV High Trip Point:
98
Priority: HIGH
PV Low Trip Point:
1
Priority: LOW
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
6
Action
Configure a PID Block (C).
Double-click PIDA.
Enter the following details:
Name:
PIDA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer Bottom Level
Engineering Units:
%
PVEU Range Hi:
100
PVEU Range Low:
0
Enable Secondary
Initialization Option checkbox:
Check
Normal Mode:
AUTO
Normal Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
19
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
7
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID configuration form
Enter the following details :
8
Control Equation Type:
EQB
Control Action:
DIRECT
Integral Time (T1):
0.4
Linear Gain Options:
LIN
Overall Gain:
0.4
Click the SetPoint tab.
Enter the following details :
14
High Limit:
100
Low Limit:
0
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
9
Action
Click the Alarms tab.
Enter the following details:
OP High Trip Point:
98
Priority:
HIGH
OP Low Trip Point:
1
Priority:
LOW
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
10
Click the Output tab
In the Control Variable section enter the following:
CVEU Range Hi:
385
CVEU Range Low:
0
−
For a primary loop the CVEU limits are the range limits of the secondary
controller PV.
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
11
Action
Arrange the function blocks as shown.
If necessary, change the block pin positions from the Block Pin tab in the Configuration
detail form of each block.
Connect the block pins as shown.
Save and Close 11_LC14.
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are using Series C I/O
12
Configure 11_FC17.
The following procedure configures 11_FC17 by copying then modifying 11_LC14.
Right-click 11_LC14 in Project tree.
Select the Copy option.
Enter:
Destination Tagnames:
11_FC17
Destination Item Names: 11_FC17_item
Click Next (or Finish).
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
13
Action
A message opens indicating that the channel assignment will not be retained.
(You may or may not get this dialog box.)
Click Finish.
ATTENTION
Copying a CM retains all the blocks and connections except channel
assignments.
14
Assign 11_FC17 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
Hint: Use the
(Assign) button
15
Double-click 11_FC17 under CEESCEFB61 (For SIM-C200E) or SIM_CEEC300 (For
SIM-C300) to open the chart view.
16
Double-click the AICHANNEL (LI) block.
Enter the following:
FT
Name:
17
For C300s ONLY:
Change the ranges of the FT block as follows:
PV Extended High Range 390
385
PV Low Range
0
PV Extended Low Range
-9.6
19
PV High Range
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
18
Action
Assign the AI Channel to an AI Module.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AI channel (FT block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close FT properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FT:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
18
2
Click the OK button to close FT properties.
3
Right-click the AI channel (FT block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
19
Action
Configure the DACA Block.
Double-click the DACA block.
Enter following:
Name:
DACA
Description:
T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank
Engr Units:
m3/hr
PV Character:
None
PVEU RangeHi:
385
PVEU Range Lo:
0
PV Extended Limits Hi:
390
PV Extended Limits Lo:
-9.6
Clamping Option:
ENABLE
19
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
20
Action
Click the Alarms tab.
Change the alarm setting as given below :
PV High Trip Point: 375
Priority: LOW
Click OK.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
21
Action
Configure a PID function block.
Double-click PIDA.
Enter following details:
Name:
PIDA
Description:
T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank Flow
Engineering Units:
m3/hr
PVEU Range Hi:
385
PVEU Range Low:
0
Enable Secondary Initialization
Option checkbox:
Check
Normal Mode and Mode:
CAS
Normal Mode Attribute:
NONE
Mode Attribute :
OPERATOR
19
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
22
Action
Click the Algorithm tab in the PID confiuration form.
Enter following details:
23
Control Equation Type:
EQB
Control Action:
REVERSE
Integral Time (T1):
0.8
Linear Gain Options:
LIN
Overall gain:
0.22
Click the SetPoint tab.
Enter following details:
24
High Limit:
385
Low Limit:
0
Click the Alarms tab.
Enter the following details:
OP High:
98
OP Low:
0
Leave the priority settings unchanged.
Click OK.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
25
Action
ADD an AO Channel from the Library tab
IOCHANNEL > AOCHANNEL (Series A) or
SERIES_C_IO  AO (Series C)
Double-click AOCHANNELA.
Enter the following:
FY
19
Channel Name:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
26
Action
Assign the AO block to an AO channel.
For C200E:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments’ at the
end of Appendix for the following information on
11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
2
In the properties of the AO channel (FY block), use the pulldown list to select the module name.
3
Select the channel number.
4
Click the ‘Assign Channel Block’ button.
5
Click the OK button to close FY properties.
For C300:

Step
1
Action
Refer to ‘Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments’ at the end
of Appendix for the following information on 11_FC17.FY:
Module Name:
Channel Number:
24
2
Click the OK button to close FY properties.
3
Right-click the AO channel (FY block) and select Function
Block Assign.
4
In the ‘Function Block Assignment Dialog’, select the
appropriate channel (use the Module Name (IOM Name),
and the Channel Number from above), and click the Assign
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
27
28
Action
Wire 11_FC17.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.FY.OP.
Select Chart > Insert > Parameter Connector or click the
button on the toolbar.
Add 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with a parameter connection as shown
below.
For detailed instructions, go to Knowledge Builder:
Experion R400 > Configuration > Control Building User’s Guide > Control Builder
Operations >Creating a control module>Connecting and Disconnecting Blocks >
Connecting Blocks with Parameter Connector Option.
•
This connection configures the 11_FC17 controller as a secondary controller
receiving the set point from the primary controller, 11_LC14. That is why the normal
mode of the 11_FC17 PID block is defined as cascade
19
ATTENTION
The screen capture might look different if you are
using Series C I/O
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
Action
29
Save 11_FC17.
30
Configure History collection.
Double-click in the blank space of the 11_FC17 Project chart window to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History tab.
Historize the following parameters :
11_FC17.PIDA.PV
11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Enable the checkboxes FAST and STD history for the point parameters.
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
31
Action
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click the Server Displays tab.
Configure the following:
Trend # 4, Pen 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.PV
Group # 11, Pos # 4, Add parameter 11_FC17.PIDA.OP
Click OK.
Save and Close 11_FC17.
19
32
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
Add Logic to 11_LC14 to check if the level is greater than 5%
Logic blocks are added to 11_LC14 to check if the level in T-100 is greater than 5%.

Step
Action
1
Open 11_LC14 in chart view.
2
Add the following function blocks from the Library tab of Control Builder according to the
following sequence:
•
•
3
Block Family
Block
LOGIC
GE
(D)
UTILITY
NUMERIC
(E)
(D) = GE: This Greater than or Equal to block checks if the designated input (IN[1]) is
greater than or equal to a second input (IN[2])
−
Use the GE to check if the T-100 level is greater than 5% by checking the
level with a fixed value of 5 given in the numeric block
−
The output of GE is further used in the interlock logic of 11_LSD15, which is
imported later
(E) = NUMERIC: This NUMERIC block stores up to 8 bytes of floating point values
within a defined upper and lower limit for use in a control strategy. We will use the
numeric to hold a fixed value for the GE block to use as an input
Configure the GE block.
Double-click the GE function block.
Verify the parameters as shown below. Accept the defaults for any remaining
parameters.
Click OK.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
4
Action
Double-click the NUMERICA function block.
Enter the following:
Name:
LL_Comparator
Actual Value:
5
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
5
Action
Arrange the parameter connector wire, 11_LC14.DACA.PV, to IN[1] in the GEA block
Arrange the PV pin wire of the NUMERICA block to the IN[2] of the GEA Block.
•
6
30
When 11_LC14.DACA.PV is >= 5, the OUT pin of GEA block is set ON. This pin is
used in the logic of 11_LSD15 to reset an Open/Closed flag
Save the CM.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
7
Action
Configure History Collection.
Double-click a blank space in the 11_LC14 Project chart window, to open the
configuration form.
Click the Server History Tab.
Historize the following parameters:
11_LC14.PIDA.PV
11_LC14.PIDA.OP
11_LC14.GEA.OUT
8
Configure Trends and Groups.
Click the Server Displays tab.
Trends section
Trend # 1, Pen 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.PV
Groups section
Group # 11, Pos # 3, Add parameter 11_LC14.PIDA.OP
19
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
Action
9
Save and Close 11_LC14.
10
Import (with CEE assignment) CM 11_LSD15 from:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS
\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
In the next lab, you will import a calculation Control Module that
will provide additional process connections and the simulation
required for 11_LC14.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
11
Open the Project tree, select 11_FC17, 11_LC14, and 11_LSD15 with the <CTRL> key
and click
32
in the toolbar to download the three CMs.
•
Click Continue in the Load window
•
Select the Automatically change……. checkbox and click OK.
•
After downloading, select the Monitoring tab and verify all the CMs are active
(green)
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
12
Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic in Station and observe the T-100 bottom level
points.
•
Using the ‘Open HV39’ combo box, select ON. This will allow the 11_LSD15 valve to
open when the level is greater than 5%.
19
13
Change the mode of 11_LC14 to Normal and then observe the changing PV
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Cascade PID Control Module
Configure a Cascade PID Control Module

Step
14
Action
Change the 11_FC17 flow controller to MAN mode and double-click the SP value of
11_LC14 to open the Point Detail page.
Observe that the Primary Controller 11_LC14 has now changed to INIT (the indication
appears next to the OP value, as shown below). Whenever the Secondary Controller is
not in Cascade Mode, initialization will be indicated as shown on the Primary Controller.
34
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Topic: Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Contents
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
20
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries ...........................................................................3
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Practice
Objective
•
Configure a Cascade Loop with one primary and two secondaries for T-100 bottom level
control
•
Configure a FANOUT block to connect the primary controller’s output to the setpoint of
two secondary controllers
•
Configure an Auxcalc function block to calculate the flow at the outlet of T-100
•
Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
20
Prerequisites
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Introduction
In this lab, the 11_FC18 loop is added as a secondary to the 11_LC14 loop built in the previous lab.
Similar considerations of operation apply; the loops require bumpless transfer from MAN to AUTO
or CAS.
• In addition, the ratio of the flow of 11_FC17 and 11_FC18 is 70:30
• The Control Module built in the previous lab will be modified, downloaded, and tested
• The remaining Control Modules will then be imported into Project, downloaded and activated
The following CMs will be configured:
CM Name
Action to be taken
11_LC14
Modify this CM to add a FANOUT block, used to connect the
output to two secondary controllers and maintain a fixed flow
ratio between the two controller outputs.
11_FC17
Connect parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(1) to
11_FC17.PIDA.SP.
11_FC18
Copy and modify 11_FC17 as 11_FC18 and connect
11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP(2) to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP.
Add an Auxcalc block for adding the flow through 11_FC17 and
11_FC18.
11_AC12; 11_FC15;
11_FC19; 11_FC20;
11_LC16; 11_TC10
4
Import these CMs from:
C:\Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Perform the following procedures in Control Builder.
Create a Control Module (CM)

Step
Action
1
Open Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
2
Double-click CM 11_FC17, to open the chart view in the Project window.
3
Delete the the wiring which connects 11_LC14.PIDA.OP (Parameter Connector) to
11_FC17.PIDA.SP.
11_FC17 will be as follows:
ATTENTION
This is to facilitate the connection of the FANOUT
block to the 11_LC14.PIDA.OP.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
20
The AI and AO channel block might look different if
you are using Series C I/O
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
Action
4
Save and Close 11_FC17.
5
From the Project tab, double-click 11_LC14 to open the Chart view.
6
Select the Library Tree window.
7
Add the following block to CM 11_LC14.
8
Block Family
Block
REGCTL
FANOUT
Double-click the FANOUTA block.
Enter the following details in the Main tab:
6
Name:
FANOUTA
Description:
T-100 Debutanizer bottoms
High Limit:
385
Normal Mode:
CAS
Mode:
CAS
Mode Attribute:
OPERATOR
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
9
Action
Click the Individual Output tab.
Enter the following details:
Output #1 Gain:
0.7 (Op1 will be 70% of the input signal.)
Output #2 Gain:
0.3 (Op2 will be 30% of the input signal.)
Verify the Enable Secondary Initialization Option checkboxes are selected for Output
#1 and Output #2.
Clear the checkboxes for all other outputs.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
20
Output Gain values are not accessible through
graphics. If they need an online change, use the
Monitoring mode in Control Builder. This is explained
later in this module.
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
10
Action
Wire 11_LC14.PIDA.OP to 11_LC14.FANOUTA.X1.
•
CM 11_LC14 should appear similar to the one shown below
•
Change the Block pin positions, if required
ATTENTION
In this picture the GEA and Numeric block are not shown.
8
11
Save and Close the CM.
12
Double-click 11_FC17 to open the Chart view.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Step
4/13/2012
Action
13
Wire parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP[1] to 11_FC17.PIDA.SP with the parameter
connector, as shown below:
14
Save and Close 11_FC17.
15
Right-click 11_FC17 in the Project tab and select copy.
•
Enter the Destination Tagname 11_FC18 and Destination Item Names
11_FC18_Item
•
Click the Next button.
•
Copying retains all the function blocks and parameters except the Input and
Output channel assignments (you may get a dialog box indicating the “NonRetained items”).
•
If the following error appears, Click Close.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
20

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
16
Action
Assign 11_FC18 to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
ATTENTION
When copying a CM, the new CM gets put in ‘Unassigned’.
17
Open chart view for 11_FC18.
18
Configure the AIChannel block.
Double-click the AIChannel named FT
Enter following details:
Channel Name:
19
FI
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FI block.
Assign 11_FC18.FI to the appropriate module and channel.
20
Configure the AOChannel block.
Double-click the AOChannel named FY
Enter following details:
Channel Name:
21
FV
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_FC18.FV.
For C200E:
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the FV block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the FV block.
Assign 11_FC18.FV to the appropriate module and channel.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
22
Action
Modify the PID block.
In the Algorithm tab, change T1 to 0.9 and the Overall Gain to 0.2
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
23
24
25
Wire the parameter 11_LC14.FANOUTA.OP [2] to 11_FC18.PIDA.SP with a parameter
connector, as shown below.
Click
icon to Save 11_FC18 CM.
Add an AUXCALC block to 11_FC18.
4/13/2012
Block Family
Block
AUXILIARY
AUXCALC
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
20
Select the Library tab and add the following function block.
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
26
Action
Double-click the AUXCALCA block.
Enter following details:
Name:
FLOW_CALC
Description:
T-100 Bottom Flow
Engr Units:
m3/hr
Assignable Outputs PV Selection : C[1]
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
27
Action
Add new pins to the FLOW_CALC block.
Click the Block Pins tab.
Select P from the Parameters window.
Select the Pin Position as Input.
Select the Array Indices as 1 for P[1] and then Add parameter P[1], as shown below.
Select the Array Indices as 2 for P[2] and then Add parameter P[2], as shown below.
Change the Location of the Pins, as shown in the display.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
20
The AUXCALC block evaluates user-defined expressions
and conditions for calculations. You can write up to eight
expressions. Each expression can contain any valid
combination of inputs, operators and functions, and may
perform arithmetic or logic operations. Optionally, the
AUXCALC can accept up to six inputs. In this lab, the
block provides a total flow value.
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
28
Action
Add the following parameter connectors to the Flow_Calc block.
11_FC17.DACA.PV to P[1] pin.
11_FC18.DACA.PV to P[2] pin.
ATTENTION
The AUXCALC block has access to all parameters for all
points, so the above two parameters were not needed as
inputs to the AUXCALC Block. The parameters could have
been referenced directly by the expression. The inputs
were added only so they would be visible from the chart.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
29
Action
Add expressions to the block.
Double-click Flow_CALC.
Select the EXPRN #1 tab.
Enter the following expression, using the Points button, to open the Point Selection
dialog:
11_FC17.DACA.PV + 11_FC18.DACA.PV
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Save and Close the CM.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
20
30
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
Action
31
Download and activate 11_FC17, 11_FC18 and 11_LC14.
32
In the Monitoring tab, open chart view for 11_LC14.
33
Double click on the FANOUTA block to open the parameter configuration form and verify
that the gain values under the Individual Output tab are as shown:
Output#1 = 0.7
Output#2 = 0.3
If not, change the values as above.
Click OK.
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
34
Action
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphic on the Station. If it is already open, refresh the
display by clicking the Reload Page
button at the top of the Station application
window.
Find the T-100 bottom level control loop and valves.
•
Set the 11_LC14 controller to NORMAL mode.
•
Set 11_LC14 SP = 60. After stabilizing (about 5 minutes), 11_LC14 is controlling
the level of T-100.
•
In the above example, the SP of 11_FC17 is 119.78 and the SP value of 11_FC18 is
51.33.
119.78 + 51.33 = 171.11
119.78 / 171.11 = 0.7
51.33 / 171.11 = 0.3
Click the SP value of 11_LC14 to call up the faceplate.
Double click on 11_LC14 faceplate to open the detail display.
Click on the Chart tab to see the CM logic.
Observe the PIDA.OP value.
ATTENTION
The Tie_Back_New excel sheet should be open to observe the values
for PV, SP.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
20
If the values are not updating then restart the Tie_Back_New excel
sheet. This sheet is used for simulation purposes.
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
35
36
18
Action
•
The 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is divided in a ratio of 70:30 between OP[1] and OP[2] of the
FANOUT block
•
In the display shown below, the Output of 11_LC14.PIDA.OP is 44.4559 and OP[1]
is 31.1204 and OP[2] is 13.3368
•
In either Station (detail display) or Control Builder Monitoring tab, open the chart
view for 11_FC17 and observe the SP as shown below:
•
In the above example, the SP is 119.7865, which is 70% of the required flow
169.0143
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries
Step
37
38
4/13/2012
Action
•
Similarly, observe the details of the 11_FC18 controller as shown below
•
In this example, the SP is 51.3326, which is approximately 30% of the required flow
169.0143
Change the SP of 11_LC14 to 62 and observe the effects on the three controllers as
shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
20

Cascade PID with Two Secondaries
Configure a Cascade PID CM with Two Secondaries

Step
39
Action
Import (with CEE assignment), download, and activate the following CMs:
11_AC12
11_FC15
11_FC19
11_FC20
11_LC16
11_TC10
•
These CMs are the remaining “pre-built” Cascade Loops shown on the
Debutanizer_123 graphic. They can be imported from the following location:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you
need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database
is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\
Experion PKS\IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag
Indication Options
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
4/13/2012
1
Honeywell
Big Picture – CTLACTN and OPTDIR
PV
ATO
(Fail Closed)
SP
CtlActn
CV
OP
OPFinal
OptDir
ATC
(Fail Open)
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
2
1
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Big Picture - OUTIND
PV
ATO
(Fail Closed)
SP
CtlActn
OP
CV
OPFinal
OptDir
OutInd
ATC
(Fail Open)
OP
DirectDispInd
OP = 100%
ReverseDispInd
OP = 100%
OP = 0%
OP = 0%
Direct
OP = 100%
CV = 100%
CV = 0%
Reverse
OP = 100%
OP = 0%
CV = 0%
CV = 100%
OP = 0%
Operator
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
SCM
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
3
Output Parameter Selections Depend On
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Process
– Ex: controlling level by controlling feed flow or drain flow?
• Type of final control element
– Ex: ATO or ATC? What position is “safe”?
• Desired representation of valve on screen
– Ex: Valve OPEN shown as 0% or 100% ?
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4
2
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Introduction
• OUTIND parameter for RegCtl blocks
– OP indication can be visible on detail display pages and on faceplates
OP Indication
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
5
4/13/2012
Honeywell
OUTIND Values
• The following table shows the possible values of OUTIND
Direct
No value reversal; No display indicators
Reverse
Value reversal; No display indicators
DirectDispInd
No value reversal; Shows display indicators with 0% as ‘closed’
and 100% as ‘open’
ReverseDispInd
No value reversal; Shows reverse display indicators with 0% as
‘open’ and 100% as ‘closed’
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
6
3
4/13/2012
Honeywell
DirectDispInd
• OUTIND = DIRECTDISPIND
–
–
–
–
DirectDispInd
No value reversal
Display indicators shown
100% indicates  Open (Hollow)
0% indicates  Closed (Filled)
• Example:
–
–
–
–
–
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
PID OUTIND: DirectDispInd
AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA)  valve Open
PID OP 0% (4 mA)  valve Closed
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Closed
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
7
Honeywell
ReverseDispInd
• OUTIND = REVERSEDISPIND
ReverseDispInd
–
–
–
–
No value reversal on bar
Display indicators shown
100% indicates  Closed (Filled)
0% indicates  Open (Hollow)
• Example:
–
–
–
–
–
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
PID OUTIND: ReverseDispInd
AO Channel OPTDIR: Direct
PID OP 100% (20 mA)  valve Closed
PID OP 0% (4 mA)  valve Open
Unpowered state of AO results in 0 mA
and the valve will be Open
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
8
4
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Affected Regulatory Control Blocks
• OUTIND is specific to the blocks shown
Blocks affected
AUTOMAN, FANOUT, ENHREGCALC, OVRDSEL, PID, PIDPL, PIDER,
PIDFF, RAMPSOAK, RATIOBIAS, RATIOCTL, REGCALC
Reverse OUTIND option
is NOT supported by
RAMPSOAK, PIDER
• OUTIND has no affect on a block’s control operation
– CTLACTN: Control Action still specifies the output direction of a PID
function block
– OPDIR: Defines the output action to be applied to the conversion of OP to
OPFINAL
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
9
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Affected Parameters
• OUTIND = Reverse
OUTIND = Reverse,
affects OP-related
parameters
OP, OPEU, OPHILM, OPEXHILM, OPLOLM, OPEXLOLM, OPHIALM.TP,
OPLOALM.TP, OPHIALM.PR, OPLOALM.PR, OPHIALM.FL, OPEXHIFL,
OPLOALM.FL, OPEXLOFL, OPHIFL, OPLOFL, OPHIALM.SV, OPLOALM.SV,
OPHIALM.TM, OPHIALM.DB, OPHIALM.DBU, OPLOALM.TM,
OPLOALM.DB and OPLOALM.DBU
Reversal supported for
additional parameters
SAFEOP, OPROCPOSFL, OPROCNNEGFL
STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)
STOPVAL (Only when STOPOPT is FixedOp)
HOLDVAL (Only when HOLDOPT is FixedOp)
• Parameters NOT affected when OUTIND = Reverse
– Anti-Reset Windup Status on Output (ARWOP)
– Windup parameters (ARWNET/ARWNETIN/ARWOPIN)
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
10
5
4/13/2012
Honeywell
OP Limits - Direct
OP Indication: Direct
• When OUTIND = Direct
–
–
–
–
OPHILM = 102.00
OPEXHILM = 102.90
OPLOLM = -3.00
OPEXLOLM = -5.90
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
11
Honeywell
OP Limits - Reverse
OP Indication: Reverse
• When OUTIND = Reverse
–
–
–
–
OPEXHILM = 100.00 – Actual OPEXLOLM 
OPHILM = 100.00 – Actual OPLOLM 
OPLOLM = 100.00 – Actual OPHILM 
OPEXLOLM = 100.00 – Actual OPEXHILM 
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
[100.00 –
[100.00 –
[100.00 –
[100.00 –
(-5.90) = 105.90]
(-3.00) = 103.00]
(102.00) = -2.00]
(102.90) = -2.90]
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
12
6
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
OP Alarm Limits - Direct
OP Indication: Direct
•
When OUTIND = Direct
– OPHIALM.TP = 98.00
– OPLOALM.TP = 12.00
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
OPHIALM.PR = LOW
OPLOALM.PR = HIGH
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
13
Honeywell
OP Alarm Limits - Reverse
OP Indication: Reverse
• When OUTIND = Reverse
– OPHIALM.TP = 100.00 – Actual OPLOALM.TP  [100.00 – 12.00 = 88.00]
– OPLOALM.TP = 100.00 – Actual OPHIALM.TP 
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
[100.00 – 98.00 = 2.00]
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
14
7
4/13/2012
Other Parameters Affected When OUTIND=Reverse
Honeywell
Parameter
Value when OUTIND = Reverse
OPHIFL & OPLOFL
Reverse of actual OPHIFL & OPLOFL
OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.PR; OPHIALM.SV
OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.PR; OPLOALM.SV
OPHIALM.FL
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.FL
OPLOALM.FL
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.FL
OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM
Reverse of actual OPHIALM.DB/DBU/TM
OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM
Reverse of actual OPLOALM.DB/DBU/TM
OPROCPOSFL
Reverse of Actual OPROCPOSFL
OPROCNNEGFL
Reverse of Actual OPROCNNEGFL
STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)
100 – Actual STOPVAL
STARTVAL (Only when STARTOPT is FixedOp)
100 – Actual STARTVAL
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
15
Honeywell
Experion OP Alarms
•
OUTIND = Direct
•
OUTIND = Reverse
4/13/2012
– Alarm Summary shows the limit and value that were reversed
– OP values are reversed when displayed
– Values of high alarms and low alarms are swapped
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
16
8
4/13/2012
21
Applications Affected When OUTIND = Reverse
Honeywell
• The following applications are affected when OUTIND = Reverse
–
–
–
–
Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)
Custom Algorithm Blocks (CAB)
HMIWeb Displays
Server Scripts
• The following applications need modification since they obtain the
reversed or swapped OP values when OUTIND = Reverse
– SCMs, CAB programs, Schematics, and Scripts obtain data from the CEE
– Applications and Schematics that use the OP alarming parameters
– Application interfaces using Control Environment OP alarm dead-band and
timer values
– Peer-to-peer communication
• Applications and schematics that only use ARWOP do not need to be
modified
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
17
RedTag
Honeywell
•
RedTag:
– Set from the Point Detail Display
– Shows that the function block is
“out of service”
– Indicates that the FB or
associated control strategy
needs repair or maintenance
Requires
ENGR access
– Freezes the output and mode
from Operator access
RedTag
indication on
faceplate
– Callout Message zone displays
“FB is Red Tagged” if user tries
to change the output
– Supported in CEE and EHG
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
18
9
4/13/2012
Primary Indication of RedTag on Secondary
Honeywell
• If Primary loop is cascaded and the Secondary loop is RedTagged, the
Primary loop indicates a Red Lock Symbol with a Plus Sign
– Indicates that the secondary loop is “Out of service”
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
4/13/2012
19
Honeywell
OperatorTag
• OperatorTag:
– Allows an Operator to indicate
that the loop is under repair or
having maintenance performed
– Does not freeze the output or
mode from Operator action
– Gives a description of up to 15
characters while loop is tagged
– Is indicated by a graphical
symbol adjacent to OP
– Supported in CEE
OperatorTag
description
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
20
10
4/13/2012
21
Honeywell
Summary
• OP indication can be visible on detail displays and faceplates
– OUTIND (Output Indication) added to Regulatory Control Points to indicate
valve direction. Specifies how the OP parameter is accessed and whether
display indications will be shown on the block’s faceplate (DirectDispInd)
– OUTIND can reverse the OP related values read and displayed when set
to Reverse (ReverseDispInd)
• RedTag functionality is supported in EHG and CEE blocks
– RedTag indication is shown when the function block is “out of service” and
freezes the output and mode from Operator access
• OperatorTag functionality is supported in CEE blocks
– Operator Tag can be set by an operator to indicate there is maintenance
on-going for a loop but does not freeze the output or mode
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
21
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Output Reversal and RedTag
Indication Options
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a Control Loop for RedTag Indication
lab exercise
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.Describe Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication Options
22
11
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Topic: Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Contents
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications .........................................................................3
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication ................................................................................11
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications
Practice
The Purpose of this Lab is to see the results of configuring the Output Indication (OUTIND)
parameter for RegCtl Blocks.
Prerequisites
•
Experion engineering and Server Node.
•
FTE Topology
•
SIM-C200E/C200E or SIM-C300/C300 Controller and IOMs configured
•
Experion PKS Software Package.
Introduction
An Output Indication (OUTIND) parameter is added in RegCtl for indicating faceplate Display as
Direct, Reverse or not indicated in any Special manner. It provides consistency with reverse output
parameter
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications
Procedure
Create configuration for Reverse Input

Step
1
Action
In order for this lab to work, the Tie_Back_New.xls file will need to be modified as
follows:
The cell which reads (gets) 11_FC02.PIDA.OP (Cell D9) needs to be modified to get
FV.OPFINAL (It currently gets OP) as shown below:
=getpointvalarray(1,G4,B9,"FV.OPFINAL","V")
2
Open Control Builder (if it is not already open).
3
From the Project tab, open chart view for 11_FC02.
4
Double click on the PIDA block to open the properties window. Go to the Output Tab
and enter the Output Limits as shown below:
5
Go to Alarms tab, note the OP High Trip Point and Priority.
Trip Point
Priority
OP High:
4
6
Go to Monitoring Parameters tab, add OUTIND as a monitoring parameter.
7
Click OK to close the PIDA Properties window.
8
Save and Close 11_FC02.
9
Download 11_FC02. In the load window, be sure to check the box to automatically
activate the control module.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step
4/13/2012
Action
10
After downloading, click the Monitoring tab and verify that 11_FC02 appears green. If
you are using Series C I/O, ensure the I/O channels are also active.
11
Open Station if not already opened. Go to the Detail Display of 11_FC02.
12
Change the station security level to MNGR.
13
Change the mode to AUTO, and change the SP to 9.3.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

6
Step
Action
14
Go to the PV & OP tab and verify that the Output configuration values match the values
shown here.
15
Go to the Alarms tab and verify that the Trip Point and Priority configuration values
match the values shown here.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step
Action
16
Go to the Chart tab. On the PIDA block, double-click on OUTIND and change the value
to REVERSE.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step
Action
17
Go back to the PV & OP tab and observe that the Output configuration values have been
“reversed” as shown here.
ATTENTION
The Output Limits are different for Direct and Reverse.
However, if OUTIND = DIRECTIND or OUTIND =
REVERSEIND, then the Output limits will remain the
same as when OUTIND = Direct.
In other words, the Output Limits do not change when
OUTIND = Direct, DirectInd, or ReverseInd. The
Output Limits only change when OUTIND = Reverse.
18
From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.
19
Observe that the point has no OP alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:
20
From Control Builder Monitoring tab (chart view), or from the detail display of 11_FC02
(chart tab), change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.
21
Observe that the point still has no OP alarm. When the OP is reversed, the OP alarm
limits are also reversed. If the OP alarm limits were not reversed, the point would have
gone into alarm. Make note of the following:
OP High:
OP:
OP Low:
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step
Action
22
Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Direct.
23
With 11_FC02 in Auto, change the SP to 50 to generate an OP High Alarm. Do not
acknowledge the alarm, but observe the alarm indication in the Alarm Summary. Make
note of the following:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:
24
Change 11_FC02.OUTIND = Reverse.
25
Observe the change in condition on the Alarm Summary page. Make note of the
following for the new alarm:
Condition:
Trip Value:
Live Value:
Also make note of the following for the previous alarm:
Status of the OP High Alarm:
ATTENTION
The OP High Alarm is still shown (because it had not been
acknowledged), but is shown as returned to normal.
An OP Low Alarm is generated with a new Trip Value, and a
new Live Value.
4/13/2012
26
Acknowledge all alarms.
27
Change the 11_FC02.SP = 30 to remove all alarms.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for OP Reversal Indications

Step
Action
28
ATTENTION
The screen captures below are for demonstration only.
Notice the graphical indications on the faceplate when OUTIND = DIRECTIND or
OUTIND = REVERSEIND.
Reverse OUTIND
Direct OUTIND
29
Change OUTIND back to Direct before starting next lab.
30
In Control Builder, on the Project tab, for 11_F02.PIDA, restore the output limits as
shown below:
OPHILM
= 105
OPLOLM
= -5
OPEXHILM = 106.9
OPEXLOLM= -6.9
31
10
Save and download 11_FC02 (with activation).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Experion Software Installation Server
The Purpose of this lesson is to see the affects of enabling Red Tag and Operator Tag. After you
complete this lesson you will be able to check:
•
Red Tag and Operator Tag
Prerequisites
•
Experion Server running
•
Control Builder database loaded and running
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication
Procedure
Perform Task in Station

12
Step
Action
1
In Station, invoke the detail display of 11_FC02.
2
Change the mode of 11_FC02 to MAN.
3
Change the station security level to MNGR
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
4
Action
On the Main tab, check the ‘RedTag’ Checkbox.
ATTENTION
When the RedTag option is enabled, a red color lock
will appear to the right of the OP.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
5
Action
Try to change both the Output and the Mode. Observe the information displayed in the
tool tip.
ATTENTION
The tool tip indicates that the function block is Red
Tagged. Therefore, the operator can not make
changes to OP or MODE’
6
14
Uncheck the ‘RedTag’ Checkbox.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
21
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

Step
7
Action
Check the ‘OperatorTag’ checkbox to enable Operator Tag.
Enter Operator Tag Description as “Maintenance” and press Enter.
ATTENTION
The OperatorTag option allows an operator to tag the block for “operator
maintenance” or a similar condition
Enabling the OperatorTag option does not lock the point's OP and MODE
parameters
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Output Reversal and Red Tag Indication
Configure a Control Loop for Red Tag Indication

16
Step
Action
8
When the OperatorTag option is enabled, a flag will appear to the right of the OP.
9
Move the mouse over the flag which is shown to the right of the OP, and read the tool tip.
10
Clear the ‘Operator Tag’ checkbox.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
22
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name
List
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Device Control Module
1
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Big Picture – Device Control Point
Output Truth Table and State Names
Input Truth Table and State Names
State
State Name
DI
State
State Name
DO
State 1
START
1
State 1
START
1
State 0
STOP
0
State 0
STOP
0
DI
Device Control Module
DO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Some Device Control Block Configuration
• See Appendix (last book) for more details
• Up to 3 States
• Up to 4 Inputs
• Up to 3 Outputs
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Simple Device Control Block with One Input, One Output
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Honeywell
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
•
•
Interlock Strategies are implemented using Permissives, Override Interlocks,
and the Safety Interlock
Permissive P(0-2)
– There is a Permissive for each state
– Normally ON
– Operator can select the state if it’s
Permissive is asserted (ON)
– Can be Bypassed
•
P(1)
ON
Override Interlock OI(0-2)
– There is an Override Interlock for each state
– Normally OFF
– When an Override Interlock is asserted (ON)
the Output is forced to it’s state
– Can be Bypassed
•
P(0)
ON
OI(1)
OFF
OI(0)
OFF
SI
OFF
Safety Interlock SI
– Normally OFF
– Sets the Output to the Safe State when asserted (ON)
– Cannot be Bypassed
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Honeywell
Device Control Block with Logic
Device Control Module
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Device Control with Permissives and Interlocks
Honeywell
Project Parameters and Add Block Pins
• Project Parameters
– Select parameters of each block which will be available outside of the
template (ex: FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2] )
– Give each projected parameter a name (ex: Temp_Num)
• This will be accessed by FAN_LOGIC.Temp_Num
• Add Block Pins for the
projected parameters
FAN_LOGIC
Temp_Num
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Instantiate the Template (Create Instances)
HS_A
FAN_LOGIC
HS_B
HS_H
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Instance of
the template
HS_A
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn how to use
templates and the substitute name list
to streamline the production of control
modules.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you
will know how to:
– Build control modules using templates
– Load and verify templates
– Build control modules using the
substitute name list
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Control Module with Template Added
Honeywell
Topics
• Building Control Modules Using Templates
• Loading and Verifying a Template
• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Device Control Module
11
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Templates are control modules created in Control Builder
• Once created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired
control strategies
• Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child
• Templates can contain other templates, up to five levels
Template
GEA
Temp_Num
IN[2]
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
• In the Library tab, under System,
right-click Control Module
• Select Make Template
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build the Control Strategy
• Build the control strategy and configure parameters
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Make a Template
Honeywell
Identify Projected Parameters
• Define custom parameters for your control module
• Connect your custom parameters to exposed pins
Template
Temp_Num
GEA
IN[2]
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add Block Pins For Projected Parameters
• Add a block pin for each
projected parameter which will
be wired
Template
Temp_Num
GEA
IN[2]
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
• Instantiate makes a useable version of the template for project
• Make Template makes a new template in the library (child of the
original)
The name this template
will have in project
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Insert a Template
Insert the template into a CM
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Use Template
Honeywell
Complete CM with Template
• Complete the CM with a template
Template
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Device Control Module
19
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Template Use
Templates are best used:
A) For control modules containing one function block
B) For complex graphics
C) Where a complex control strategy is used in multiple
control modules
D) As a tool to prioritize the alarm sequence
Template
GEA
Temp_Num
IN[2]
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Templates
Templates
arebest
bestused
usedbefore
where
whereaacomplex
complexcontrol
control
You must
answerare
the
question
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
strategy is
used in multiple control modules.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Clear
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
• Building Control Modules Using Templates
• Loading and Verifying a Template
• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Device Control Module
21
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Templates in the Monitoring tab
• Containment view / Assignment view
Templates
shown at root
Templates shown
as contained
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Topics
Honeywell
Chart View of a CM with a Template
Green indicates that the template is active
Blue indicates that the template is inactive
Red indicates that the template has failed
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Device Control Module
23
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Template in Chart View
Double-click the template in the
Monitoring Tab
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Which statement about templates is false?
A) A blue border on the bottom and right hand side of
an instance of a template in the Control Builder chart
view tells you the instance is active
B) In Control Builder containment view, a template
appears as a function block in the control module
C) In the Control Builder assignment view, a template
appears as a control module in the CEE simulation
D) None of the above
Correct!
Incorrect.
A blue
A blue
border
border
on the
on the
bottom
bottom
andand
the the
rightright
hand
side
hand
ofside
an instance
of an instance
of a template
of a template
in the Control
in the Control
Builder
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:
chart
Builder
view
chart
tells
view
youtells
thatyou
the that
instance
the instance
is inactive
is inactive
and not
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
and
active.
not
active.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Device Control Module
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Clear
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Building Control Modules Using Templates
• Loading and Verifying a Template
• Building Control Modules Using a Substitute Name List
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Question 2: Loading and Verifying Templates
Honeywell
Build Templates using Substitute Name List
Create the substitute names
Connect them to function block types
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Build Templates using Substitute Name List
Use the parameter connection tool
Select the substitute name as a connection
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
• The substituted names can be resolved to a function block parameter
when the template is instantiated.
Resolved
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Substitute Name List
You may create templates to be:
A) Instantiated as stand-alone
control modules using your
substitute name list
B) Embedded control modules
using projected parameters and
block pins
C) All of the above
Yes!
No. The
The correct
correct answer
answer is
is "All
"All of
of the
the above".
above". You
You may
may
create
templates
The
correct
answerto
is:be instantiated as stand -alone
control
modules
or
embedded
control
modules
using
You must answer the question before
Your
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
answer:
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
projected
parameters.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Clear
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Honeywell
Build Templates using Substitute Name List
Honeywell
Summary
• When using templates, remember:
– Templates are built in Control Builder.
created, templates may be used to build multiple copies of desired
– Once
control strategies.
– Templates allow for change to propagate from parent to child.
may create templates to be instantiated as stand-alone control modules
– You
using your substitute name list or embedded control modules using
projected parameters and block pins.
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a Device Control Module – with Logic and
Configure a Device Control Module – with Interlock lab exercises
Device Control Module
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Templates and the Substitute Name List
4/13/2012
22
Topic: Device Control Module
Contents
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic ...................................................................................3
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock ............................................................................39
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
22
Objective
•
Configure a Device Control Module for Fans on the Heat Exchanger E-110 of the
Debutanizer Model
•
Configure basic Logic Blocks: NOT, AND, GE (Greater than or equal to)
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or a client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools loaded
•
Debutanizer graphic (debutanizer_123.htm) loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later
time to check the control strategy built in this lab.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SCE Controller and IOMs configured
•
Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Introduction
The control logic for switching the fans on Condenser E-110 is developed in this lab.
Operationally, the cooling fans are turned on in case the top temperature of 11_TI25 is greater than
a specified value. The Operator initiates the start command and each additional fan starts as the
temperature increases. When the temperature reaches 260 Deg C then 11_TI25 resets and the fans
turn OFF automatically.
•
The module will be built, loaded and tested
•
The implementation is as follows:
The DEVCTL (Device Control) block is a multi-input, multi-output function that provides an
interface to discrete devices such as motors, solenoid valves, and motor-operated valves. This block
provides built-in structures for handling interlocks and supports the display of interlock conditions
in group, detail, and graphic displays.
In this lab, Device Control points are used to control the cooling fans of the heat exchanger
E-110. When the temperature of T-100 overhead (11_TI25) goes above 55 Deg C, then FAN A
(11_HS14A) is started.
Similarly, FAN B (11_HS14B) is started only if the temperature goes above 60 Deg C and the other
fans are started sequentially according to the temperature of the tower top (11_TI25).
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Procedure

4/13/2012
22
Create a Template
Step
Action
1
Launch Control Builder from Configuration Studio, if not already open.
2
Create a Template.
•
Click the “+” icon adjacent to System in the library
•
Right click CONTROLMODULE
•
Select Make Template
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
3
Action
Configure CM Parameters.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view of the new Template form.
Enter FAN_LOGIC in the Name field.
Enter FAN_LOGIC_ITEM in the Item Name field.
Enter FAN TEMP CONTROL in the Description field.
Enter FANS_C11 in the Parent Asset field (use browser to select parent asset).
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
4
Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
22

Enter the following display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtldevctlA
ATTENTION
The Group Detail Display will be selected based on the
type of Point Detail Display specified.
These are the standard Honeywell Device Control
Point Detail and Group Detail Displays.
5
4/13/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Adding Function Blocks to a Template

Step
1
Action
In the chart view of FAN_LOGIC, add Function Blocks from the respective Library
families, according to the sequence below and the diagram displayed in step 2.
Block Family
Block
LOGIC
GE
(A)
LOGIC
NOT
(B)
LOGIC
AND
(C)
DEVCTL
DEVCTL
(D)
ATTENTION
When the blocks are inserted according to the above
sequence, each one is assigned an execution order
(ORDERINCM) automatically, increasing in multiples
of 10. ORDERINCM determines the relative execution
order of blocks within the CM in ascending order. This
parameter can be changed as required. This field can
accept any number from 0 to 65535.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
2
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown.
22

The explanation of each block is given below.
A
D
B
C
(A) GEA:
This block compares the Value in a Numeric Block (NUMERICA, added later) with the
actual temperature (PV of) 11_TI25.
(C) ANDA:
This block is a gate that provides the Start command to FANA if:
1. The temperature is greater than 55 Deg C and
2. The Operator has entered the start command.
(B) NOTA:
This block is a gate that inverts the signal from the ANDA gate and sends the signal to
the input OI(0) of the DEVCTLA block. This is the stop command for FAN A.
(D) DEVCTLA:
This block is the Device Control Block that provides the operator interface to the digital
I/Os.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
3
Action
Configure the Device Control Block.
Double click the Device Control Block (DEVCTLA.)
Enter the following details in the Main tab:
4
Name:
DEVCTLA
Description:
Fan A Start in E-110
Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as follows:
Number Of Inputs:
1
Number Of Outputs:
1
Number Of States:
2
Enter the State Names as follows:
State 1 Name:
START
State 0 Name:
STOP
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
5
4/13/2012
Action
On the Inputs tab, enter following details:
Number of Digital Inputs:
1 (default)
Input 1 unchecked Box :
STOP
Input 1 checked Box:
START
•
A selected checkbox means Input 1 is in an ON condition
•
Input 1 is the feedback from the field device (FANA)
•
The above entries (illustrated below) indicate that when the device is in the Start
State, Input 1 is ON
•
When the Device is in the Stop State, Input 1 is OFF
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
22

11
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
6
Action
On the Output tab, enter the following data:
Number of Digital Outputs:
1 (default)
Output State checkboxes:
State 1
State 0
START:
STOP:
Selected
Not Selected
Select the Seal In Option.
•
See Online help (with option selected press F1 key) for Seal In Option details.
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
7
Action
On the Alarms tab, enter following data:
Time to
STOP
4/13/2012
Time to
START
Priority
Severity
Command Disagree
10
10
LOW
0
Command Fail
5
5
HIGH
0
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
22

13
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
8
Action
On the Block Pins tab:
Remove the SI pin.
•
Select SI in the Selected Parameters Table, click the Remove button
Add pins OI[0] and OI[1] as inputs on the left.
•
Select Input and Left / Right
•
Click the Add button
Click OK.
9
14
Connect 11_TI25.DACA.PV to the IN[1] pin of the GEA block with a parameter
connector, as shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
10
Action
Arrange the Blocks and connect them as shown below.
22

ATTENTION
Change the pin positions as shown in the above figure using the
Block Pins tabs of each function block configuration form.
11
Save FAN_LOGIC.
12
Open the properties of FAN_LOGIC by double-clicking the blank space of the chart.
Select the Projected Parameters tab.
In the first Parameter Name location type Temp_Num.
In the Origin column, click the point selection (…) buton and in the Point Selection
dialog, select FAN_LOGIC.GEA.IN[2].
Click Insert Row to add a new row.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

16
Step
Action
13
Using the procedure in the previous step, insert new rows and complete connections as
indicated in the table below:
Parameter Name
Origin
Fan_Switch
FAN_LOGIC.ANDA.IN[2]
D_In
FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DI[1]
D_Out
FAN_LOGIC.DEVCTLA.DO[1]
14
Add pins and configure the Block Pins as shown below:
15
Click OK to close the parameters of Fan_Logic.
16
Save and Close FAN_LOGIC.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
1
22
Create a Device Control Module
Action
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details
Name:
11_HS14A
Item Name:
11_HS14A_item
Description
E-110A FAN
Parent Asset
FANS_C11
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
4/13/2012
2
Click OK to close the properties of the new Control Module.
3
Save the CM and close the chart window.
4
Assign the CM 11_HS14A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
5
Action
Open CM 11_HS14A in chart view and add the function blocks from the respective
library families, according to the table below:
Block Family
Block
Sequence
C200E:
DICHANNEL
(A)
UTILITY
NUMERIC
(B)
UTILITY
FLAG
(C)
C200E:
DOCHANNEL
(D)
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO  DI-HV
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO  DO-24B
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
6
Action
After adding the blocks, arrange them as shown.
22

A
B
C
D
ATTENTION
The DI and DO channel in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
7
Action
In the Library tree, click on the “+” icon adjacent to USER to expand the tree.
Right click on FAN_LOGIC.
Select Instantiate.
20
8
Change the Destination Tag Name to HS_A and the Destination Item Name to
HS_A_item.
9
Click Finish.
10
Assign the HS_A to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
11
4/13/2012
Action
Drag HS_A from the project tab into the 11_HS14A chart.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
22

21
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
12
Action
Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data:
Channel Name
13
HI (the letter I)
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS14A.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
14
Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data:
Channel Name:
15
HS
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14A.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HS block.
Assign 11_HS14A.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
16
Action
Double-click the NUMERICA block.
22

Enter the following:
NUMERICA
Name:
PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:
45
Actual Value:
55
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
17
Double-click the FLAGA block.
Enter the following details:
Name:
FLAGA
Description:
Operator cmd to turn ON/OFF Fan
Accept the default for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
18
Action
Arrange and wire the blocks as shown below.
Change block pin locations, as necessary.
Save and Close 11_HS14A.
24
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
1
22
Copy Control Modules with Templates
Action
Right-click 11_HS14A in project view.
Select Copy.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
Action
2
Change the CM Destination Tag Name to 11_HS14B and the Destination Item Name to
11_HS14B_Item.
Change the Template Destination Tag Name to HS_B and the destination Item Name to
HS_B_item.
Click Next.
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
Action
22
3
ATTENTION
This step is necessary only for C200E.
Click Next.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
4
Action
Leave the ‘Before’ and ‘After’ entries as 11_TI25.DACA. (The GEA blocks of ALL
Device Control CMs will be comparing to the same temperature.)
Click Finish.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module

Step
Action
5
Select 11_HS14B and HS_B in the Unassigned section of Project Tree and Assign both
tags to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
6
Double-click and open 11_HS14B in chart view.
7
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HI.
22
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
Action
8
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS14B.HS.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HS block (double click on it).
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS14B.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
9
Double-click NUMERICA to open the parameter configuration form.
Ensure the following values are specified:
PV High Limit: 95
PV Low Limit:
45
Actual Value:
60
(note: this is 5 more than the actual value for 11_HS14A)
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK
10
30
Save and Close the Chart view.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
11
Action
Build six more CMs 11_HS14C through 11_HS14H. Following the same procedure you
just used to build 11_HS14B and the configuration information in the tables below.
22

Templates Tag Names And Item Names
CM
Destination
Tag Name
CM Destination
Item Name
Template
Destination
Tag Name
Template
Destination
Item Name
11_HS14C
11_HS14C_item
HS_C
HS_C_item
11_HS14D
11_HS14D_item
HS_D
HS_D_item
11_HS14E
11_HS14E_item
HS_E
HS_E_item
11_HS14F
11_HS14F_item
HS_F
HS_F_item
11_HS14G
11_HS14G_item
HS_G
HS_G_item
11-HS14H
11_HS14H_item
HS_H
HS_H_item
NUMERICA Configuration
CM Name
NUMERICA
PV HIGH
LIMIT
NUMERICA
PV LOW
LIMIT
NUMERICA
ACTUAL
VALUE
11_HS14C
95
45
65
11_HS14D
95
45
70
11_HS14E
100
70
75
11_HS14F
100
70
80
11_HS14G
100
70
85
11-HS14H
100
70
90
IO Module and Channel Assignment
ATTENTION
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the
end of Appendix to determine the correct module and
channel for each Control Module.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
12
Action
From the Library tab, expand the User function block, then right-click the FAN_LOGIC
template.
Select Module Properties.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
13
Action
Select the Block Preferences tab.
22

Click Block Faceplate Color button.
Pick your favorite color from the resulting palette.
Click OK.
Open a few of the new CMs in chart view in project tree (11_HS14A through 11_HS14H)
and check that the color change propagated from the parent FAN_LOGIC to the child
templates.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Load and Validate Control Modules

34
Step
Action
1
Select and load CMs 11_HS14A though 11_HS14H and CMs HS_A through HS_H.
2
If the CMs were not activated when they were loaded (if the “Automatically change…”
checkbox was not checked), activate the CMs from the Monitoring tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module

Step
Action
3
In the Monitoring window right-click the white space in the background of the monitoring
tree.
22
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Select Assignment View or Containment View to toggle between views.
Select the + sign next to one of the new CMs.
ATTENTION
In Containment view, the contained CM is found under
the Container CM. In Assignment view, the Template
appears as any other CM in the tree.
Assignment View:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
4
5
36
Action
Containment View:
Open Station and recall/refresh the Debutanizer_123 graphic.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic
Step
6
Action
Check the Fans status and the value of 11_TI25 as indicated below.
22

Click the Fan Control button to call the faceplate popup: The FANS are currently OFF.
4/13/2012
•
Use the Fan Control button to set all the fans to the ON state.
•
Wait until all fans turn off. This will happen just after the temperature
11_TI25 reaches 260 and is reset back to 0.0.
•
As the temperature of 11_TI25 rises, observe the logic allowing the
appropriate fans to turn on. See the following reference section.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Logic

Step
7
Action
Green indicates that the Fans are in the RUN state. Red indicates that the Fans are in
the STOP state.
Reference
Temperature value of 11_TI25 and the state of the Fans.
38
Temperature
11_TI25
FAN
A
FAN
B
FAN
C
FAN
D
FAN
E
FAN
F
FAN
G
FAN
H
55 to 60
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
60 to 65
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
65 to 70
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
70 to 75
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
75 to 80
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
80 to 85
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
85 to 90
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
OFF
90 to 95
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
22
Practice
Objective
•
Configuring a Device Control Module for reflux pumps P62 and P63, and feed pumps P68
and P69
•
Use the Permissive and Safety interlocks of the Device Control Block
•
Understand block name references in CM and SCM
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server or Client machine with Experion PKS Engineering Tools
•
Debutanizer_123 graphic loaded on the Server. [This is required (at a later time) to check
the control strategy built in this lab.]
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SCE Controller and IOMs configured
•
Configure Data Acquisition Control Module and configure PID Control Module labs are
completed
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Introduction
•
In this lab, the control for a pair of pumps, P62 and P63, is developed.
•
The Operator provides a Start command for Pump P62
•
If P62 does not start within 20 seconds from the Start command, then P63 will start
•
At any time, only one pump can be running
•
This strategy will be built, loaded, and tested
•
Device Control modules for the other pumps are then imported into the project
The three interlocks used for Device Controls are listed below.
•
The same logic is repeated for the Feed pumps P68 (11_HS68) and P69 (11_HS69)
1. Process Permissive Interlock (PI[0..2]
2. Process Override Interlock (OI[0..2]
3. Safety Interlock (SI)
40
•
These interlocks are associated with Device Control Block status values; that is,
State 0 and 1 for 2-state devices and State 0, 1, and 2 for 3-state devices
•
The Safety Interlock has the highest Priority and CANNOT be bypassed, while Process
Permissive Interlocks have the lowest priority
•
Override Interlocks OI[0..2], when active, force the commanded output (OP) to the
respective state regardless of the condition of the Permissive Interlocks. The operator cannot
command OP to a different state when the Override Interlock is active.
•
When BYPPERM is ON, an operator is able to change the OP regardless of the state of the
Override interlocks (BYPASS = ON). This does not affect the Safety Override Interlock
(SI). An Operator cannot bypass the Safety Interlock to change the OP. When you reset
the BYPASS parameter to OFF, any existing Override Interlocks, OI[0..2], take effect
immediately. Note: The default is OFF (unchecked - we are not using the Bypass option
here.)
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Procedure

22
Create a Control Module
Step
Action
1
ATTENTION
The screen captures for this lab assume the use of
Series A IO. If you are using Series C IO, please be
aware that you will be using the PV parameter for all of
your Series C DI connections and NOT the PVFL
parameter.
Create new Control Module and configure CM parameters
Create a new Control Module.
Double-click the blank space in the chart view
Enter the following details in the Main Tab.
Tag Name:
11_HS62
Item Name:
11_HS62_Item
Parent Asset:
Pumps_C11
Description:
P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump
Accept the default for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
2
Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
Enter the following Display details:
Point Detail Display:
sysDtldevctla
Click OK
ATTENTION
The Point Detail display 11_HS62 in Station will have
a standard Honeywell Device Control Point faceplate.
3
Save and close 11_HS62.
Assign 11_HS62 to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
42
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
22
Add Function Blocks to a CM
The IOMs configured in the Configure C200E Hardware and Series A IOM/Configure C300
Hardware and Series C IOM lab are used here.

Step
Action
1
Double-click the CM 11_HS62 in the Project window to open the chart view.
2
In the chart view of 11_HS62, add Function Blocks from the respective Library families
according to the following sequence:
Block Family
Block
Sequence
C200E:
DICHANNEL
(A)
LOGIC
OR
(B)
UTILITY
FLAG
(C)
DEVCTL
DEVCTL
(D)
C200E:
DOCHANNEL
(E)
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO  DI-HV
IOCHANNEL
C300:
SERIES_C_IO  DO-24B
ATTENTION
For more information on how to add function blocks to
a CM, refer to the Knowledge Builder, Experion
R400 > Configuration > Control Building User’s
Guide > Creating a Control Module > Creating and
saving a Control Module> Creating an instance of
a basic function block.
When you insert the blocks, one by one, according to
the above sequence, each one is assigned an
execution order (ORDERINCM) automatically,
increasing in multiples of 10. ORDERINCM determines
the relative execution order of the block within the CM
in ascending order. You can change this parameter, if
required. Enter a number from 0 to 65535 in this field.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
3
Action
After adding all the blocks, arrange them as shown below.
• The explanation for each block follows:
A
C
B
D
E
ATTENTION
The DI and DO channels in the screen capture might
look different if you are using Series C I/O
(A) DICHANNELA: This block provides feedback from the field for pump P62 indicating the
actual field state of P62 as follows:
DICHANNELA Status
P62 State
ON
START (i.e., Running)
OFF
STOP
(B) ORA – allows either a signal from FLAGA or HS63 to force the pump off.
(C) FLAGA – Used to give a manual Start command to the pump P62.
(D) DEVCTLA – Device Control Block that provides the user-friendly interface to the digital I/Os.
(E) DOCHANNELA – the actual signal to pump P62 in the field for the START/STOP command.
44
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
Action
4
Save 11_HS62.
5
Double-click the DICHANNEL to open the DI parameter configuration form.
22

Enter the following data:
Channel Name
6
HI (the letter I)
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HI.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS62.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
7
Double-click the DOCHANNEL to open the DO parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data:
Channel Name:
8
HS
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS62.HS.
For C200E:
Assign 11_HS62.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Close the properties of the HS block.
Assign 11_HS62.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
9
Action
Configure the Device Control.
Double-click the Device Control Block.
Click the Main tab.
Enter the following:
46
Name:
DEVCTLA
Description:
P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
10
Action
Enter the Block Sizing parameters in the Main tab as:
Number Of Inputs:
1
Number Of Outputs:
1
Number Of States:
2
22

Enter the State names in the Main tab as:
State 1 Name:
START
State 0 Name:
STOP
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
47
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
11
Action
Click the Inputs tab.
Enter the following details:
12
Number of Digital Inputs:
1 (default)
Input 1 unselected checkbox:
STOP
Input 1 selected checkbox:
START
Click the Output tab.
Enter the following data:
Number of Digital Outputs:
1
Outputs State 1 checkbox:
Selected
Outputs State 0 checkbox:
Not Selected
Select the Seal In Option.
•
See online help for additional information on the Seal In Option
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters on this tab.
48
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
13
Action
Click the Alarms tab.
22

Enter the following data:
Time to
STOP
Time to
START
Priority
Severity
Command Disagree
20
20
LOW
0
Command Fail
10
10
HIGH
0
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
4/13/2012
14
Click OK.
15
Click File > Save to save the CM 11_HS62.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
49
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
Action
16
Double-click the Device Control block and select the Block Pins tab and add pin OI[1]
as Input Left.
Click OK.
50
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
17
Action
Double-click the FLAG block.
22

Enter the following details:
Name:
FLAGA
Description:
Turn Reflux Pump ON
Click OK.
18
Double-click the ORA block.
Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
51
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
Action
19
ATTENTION
This step is optional. Use either the Full Name option,
or the Short Name option as desired.
Click Tools  System Preferences. In the ‘Relative Reference Display Option’ field,
select Short Name so the user does not have to enter more information than required.
Click OK.
The following message requesting to close all other (remotely opened) Control Builder
sessions appears.
Click OK on the message box.
52
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
20
Action
Arrange and connect the blocks as shown below:
22

ATTENTION
For details of each block connection, refer to the chart
in the next step.
A
D
B
C
E
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
53
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
21
Action
Connection Chart for 11_HS62
PIN
TO FUNCTION
BLOCK
PIN
PVFL
ORA
IN[2]
PVFL
DEVCTLA
OI[1]
IN[1]
(CONNECT
LATER)
OUT
DEVCTLA
SI
HI
PVFL (PV for C300)
DEVCTLA
DI[1]
DEVCTLA
DO[1]
HS
SO
FROM
FUNCTION
BLOCK
FLAGA
ORA
22
Save and close CM 11_HS62.
23
Copy 11_HS62 as 11_HS63.
11_HS63 will be present in the Unassigned section in the Project tree window. Assign
the CM to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300).
24
Open 11_HS63 in chart view.
•
11_HS63 contains the same blocks and wiring as 11_HS62. Only the HI
(DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) have no channel assigned
ATTENTION
The following steps will complete the configuration of 11_HS63.
Those steps will:
25
•
Assign HI (DICHANNEL) and HS (DOCHANNEL) to channels.
•
Modify the logic in 11_HS63 so that pump P63 will only start if
P62 fails to start within 20 sec after receiving the Start
command from the FLAGA block.
•
Because there can be only one FLAG block for the
START/STOP command on both pumps, the FLAGA block
must be deleted from 11_HS63.
To Delete the FLAGA block.
Select FLAGA.
Press the Delete button.
•
54
FLAGA and associated connections are deleted
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
26
Action
Drag and drop the following function blocks to 11_HS63.
Block Family
LOGIC
LOGIC
27
22

Block
ONDELAY
AND
Configure the ONDELAY gate.
Double-click the ONDELAYA Block.
Enter following details:
Name:
ONDELAYA
Delay Time:
20 (Delay time is in seconds)
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
The ONDELAY block delays the Start command to
Pump P63 by 20 seconds.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
55
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
28
Action
Configure the ANDA gate.
•
This block sends the Start command, to pump P63 (delayed by 20 sec), if
pump P62 has not started
Double-click the ANDA function block.
Enter ANDA in the Name field.
Invert the input IN(2) by selecting the checkbox for item 2.
When finished, click OK to close the ANDA function block.
•
29
This option inverts the P62 Start signal. So if P62 has not started after 20 sec,
then only P63 will start
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HI.
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS63.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HI block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS63.HI to the appropriate module and channel.
56
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module

Step
Action
30
Refer to the appropriate (C200E or C300) table at the end of Appendix to determine the
correct module and channel for 11_HS63.HS.
22
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
For C200E:
Display the properties of the HI block.
Assign 11_HS63.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
Close the properties of the HS block.
For C300:
Assign 11_HS63.HS to the appropriate module and channel.
31
Wire the blocks as follows:
Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI.PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[2] pin of the ANDA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire the Out Pin of the ONDELAYA block to the IN[1] pin of the ANDA block.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN pin of the ONDELAYA block with a
parameter connector.
•
4/13/2012
The ANDA gate output is true if ANDA receives the TRUE signal at IN(1) and a
FALSE signal at IN(2) as IN(2) is inverted
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
57
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
Action
32
Wire parameter 11_HS62.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] pin of the ORA block with
a parameter connector.
Wire parameter 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL to the IN[2] pin of the ORA block with a
parameter connector.
Complete the remaining connections as shown below.
•
58
The ANDA gate sends the START command to the Pump through OI[1] only if
P62 does not start after 20 sec
33
Save and close 11_HS63.
34
Open CM 11_HS62 to configure the SI interlock (as shown in the following steps).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock
Step
35
Action
22

Wire parameter 11_HS63.HI. PVFL (PV for C300) to the IN[1] of ORA.
36
Save and close 11_HS62.
37
From the Project Tree window, import (with CEE assignment) CMs 11_HS68 and
11_HS69. Import from:
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A (or _C)
ATTENTION
Follow the procedures in the Import/Export Lab, if you need a refresher.
If you are Using SIMC200E/C200E the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_A
If you are Using SIMC300/C300 the path for Database is
C:\ Users\Public\Public Documents\Honeywell\Experion PKS\
IXPORT\Student_DB\Series_C
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
59
Device Control Module
Configure a Device Control Module - with Interlock

Step
Action
38
Open the Project Tree window and verify that the Parent asset of 11_HS68 and
11_HS69 is Pumps_C11. If not, change it to Pumps_C11.
39
Download (with activation) 11_HS62, 11_HS63, 11_HS68, 11_HS69.
40
Use the Monitoring Tree window to verify all the CMs are active (green).
41
Open the Debutanizer_123 graphics on Station. If the graphics already loaded then
reload the page so that new points are recognized.
•
42
60
All four pumps are OFF (Red)
Select the ON command for the pumps in the combo box.
•
P62 and P68 are ON (green)
•
If P62 and P68 fail – which they will after sometime (up to 60 seconds) because of
the simulation in Tie_Back_New, then P63 and P69 will be commanded to start
•
After P62 and P68 have been commanded to start, it will be at least 20 seconds
before P63 and P69 are commanded to start because of the OnDelay function
blocks in P63 and P69
•
Therefore, after P62 and P68 turn on, it can be from 20 to 80 seconds (plus
screen update) before P63 and P69 turn on.
•
This happens because P62 feedback indicates that DI(1) is not ON within 20 sec
after the Operator issues a start command
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
23
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks
– AUXCALC block
– Counter Block
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Auxiliary Blocks
• Auxiliary blocks perform mathematical functions
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
AUXCALC Block
• Previously, the AUXCALC block was used for performing more
complicated mathematical functions
• The AUXCALC block has mathematical and logical capabilities
– The AUXCALC block uses a lot of memory (2452 bytes according to the
CEE Detail page)
• Simpler calculation blocks have been developed
–
–
Use less controller memory
Ensure optimum use of memory
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
AUXCALC Block Constants
• In R400, a ‘Constants’ tab was added for calculator blocks
23
– Can enable and enter values for up to 8 constants
– Can define the access level required to change the constants
– Can be used in expressions or as inputs or outputs
Constants used in
Expressions
Constants used as
inputs and outputs
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• In this lesson, you will learn about different Auxiliary Blocks
– AUXCALC block
– Counter Block
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Block Overview
• Provides a way to count events
– Counts up based on CNTUPFL
– Counts down based on CNTDNFL
– Outputs are: Count and “count limit reached” flags
• “Count Limits” determined by equation (Eq A to Eq H available)
• Can be implemented in the following CEE environments
– C200E, SIM-C200E, C300, SIM-C300, ACE, SIM-ACE
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Block Functions
• The counter can be reset to 0 (RESETFL), paused (PAUSEFL), or set to
a specific value (LOADFL, ININT32)
• Output flags (QUFL, QDFL) are turned on or off based on:
– Input (ININT32)
– Count (OUTINT32)
– Algorithm configured (Eq A to Eq H)
• Ex: Eq A: QUFL is true if OUT ≥ IN; QDFL is true if OUT ≤ 0
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Count on Level vs. Count on Transition
If both CNTUPFL and CNTDNFL are ON
(or both transition to ON), or if both are
OFF (or both transition to OFF), then the
count does not change.
– Count inputs are evaluated as edge-triggered quantities
– Value increments / decrements if the input has changed from OFF to ON
t
• Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) – checked
– Count inputs are evaluated as level triggered quantities
– Value increments / decrements on every execution cycle while the input is ON
t
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Inputs
• Accepts Integer 32, Float 64, and Boolean inputs
• Selection of the input format is based on the ‘Input Selection Specifier’
(SELINT32FL) parameter
– If checked, input format selected is INT32
– If unchecked, input format selected is FLOAT64
• If the selected input format is FLOAT64, the
Input Clamping Option (INCLAMPOPT)
determines if special handling is required
for out of range or invalid input values
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
23
• CNTUPFL causes the count to increment
• CNTDNFL causes the count to decrement
• Count on level flag (CNTVLVFL) – unchecked
Honeywell
Float 64 Input Conversions
•
Value clamping, or substitution for invalid or out of range values
Value fetched or
attempted to store
INCLAMPOPT
IN.FLOAT64 value
Value for Counter Load
Operation
Value for Limit
Checking
Value > 2,147,483,647.0
TRUE
2,147,483,647.0
2,147,483,647
2,147,483,647
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE
Truncated Integer value
Value > 2,147,483,647.0
FALSE
NaN
Value will not be loaded.
Previous Counter value is
retained
Value within
−2,147,483,648.0 to
+2,147,483,647.0
TRUE / FALSE
Floating point value
truncated to integer
equivalent
Truncated Integer value
Value < −2,147,483,648.0
TRUE
−2,147,483,648.0
−2,147,483,648
−2,147,483,648
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE
NaN. Comparison is always
FALSE
Value < −2,147,483,648.0
FALSE
NaN
Value will not be loaded.
Previous Counter value is
retained
NaN
TRUE / FALSE
NaN
Value will not be loaded.
Previous Counter value is
retained
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Counter Equations
Equation
Counter
Overflow
Counter
Underflow
QUFL (TRUE)
QDFL(TRUE)
A
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= IN
OUT <= 0
B
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= IN
OUT =
-2,147,483,647
C
+2,147,483,647
0
OUT >= IN
OUT = 0
D
IN
0
OUT >= IN
OUT = 0
E
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT >= 0
OUT <= IN
F
+2,147,483,647
- 2,147,483,647
OUT =
+2,147,483,647
OUT <= IN
G
0
- 2,147,483,647
OUT = 0
OUT <= IN
H
0
-IN
OUT = 0
OUT = IN
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
Function blocks provide a variety of configurable functions for
• Auxiliary
conditioning, calculating, and compensating PV data in support of
Experion PKS R400, the Constant tab and Expression Description
• Inparameters
are added to calculator blocks
can be used to provide most features available in PLC
• Counters
counters
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Auxiliary Function Blocks
4/13/2012
23
Regulatory Control Functions
Describe MATH Function Blocks
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn about
– Overview of MATH function blocks
– Rolling Average Function block
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Math Blocks
• Math blocks perform simple mathematical
functions
23
• Use these blocks rather than the AUXCALC
block when performing simple math
– More efficient use of memory
– AUXCALC block uses 2452 bytes
– Math blocks use 50 – 600 (see next page)
Mathematical function blocks provided
under the MATH Library
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
17
Honeywell
Library of Math Blocks
• Math blocks provide efficient usage of memory
Block Name
ADD (8 input connections)
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Function
Sum of n arguments
1 MU = 1000 bytes
Memory Used
Approximately 110 bytes
SUB (2 input connections)
Subtraction
Approximately 60 bytes
MUL (8 input connections)
Product of n arguments
Approximately 110 bytes
DIV (2 input connections)
Division
Approximately 60 bytes
MOD (2 input connections)
(x MOD y)
Approximately 60 bytes
ABS (1 input connection)
Absolute value
Approximately 50 bytes
POW (2 input connections)
(x^y)
Approximately 60 bytes
EXP (1 input connection)
e to the power of x
Approximately 50 bytes
SQRT (1 input connection)
square root
Approximately 50 bytes
LN (1 input connection)
Natural logarithm of a number (log to the base of e)
Approximately 50 bytes
LOG (1 input connection)
Base 10 logarithm of a number
Approximately 50 bytes
NEG (1 input connection)
-(x)
Approximately 50 bytes
TRUNC (1 input connection)
Round down to nearest integer value
Approximately 50 bytes
ROLLAVG
Rolling Average
Approximately 600 bytes
ROUND (1 input connection)
Rounded up to nearest integer value
Approximately 50 bytes
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Introduction of Rolling Average block
Honeywell
• Calculates a rolling average of values collected over a specified period
of time
– Similar to the Rolling Average Algorithm available in the AM (TPS)
• Available in the C200E, C300, ACE (and their simulated environments)
• ROLLAVG function block is added from the MATH Library in Control
Builder
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Honeywell
Rolling Average Block Algorithm
•
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
The Rolling Average Calculation
–
–
–
Collect samples in buffer at specific frequency
Save the samples to the buffer
• Mark samples as OK (good) or Bad
Calculate the average of the collected samples
Output = Sum of all samples (Good values) in buffer
No. of good samples in buffer
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Frequency of Sample Collection
• The frequency of sample collection
is defined by two configurable
parameters
23
• ROLLFREQ
– Defines the number
• ROLLFRBASE
– Defines the time base:
• Seconds, minutes, or hours
• Sample Period (Frequency)
– Defined by ROLLFREQ and ROLLFRBASE
• Example: if ROLLFREQ is ‘4’, and ROLLFRBASE is ‘seconds’ then
samples are collected every 4 seconds
– Must be a multiple of the period of the containing CM
• Example: if CM Period is 2 seconds, the sample frequency can be a
multiple of 2 i.e. 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on…
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
21
Load Time Error if Sample Period is Not a Multiple of CM
Honeywell
• The collection frequency of the
ROLLAVG block must be a
multiple of the period of the
containing CM
–
–
If not, a load error will occur
The output (rolling average)
of the block will be NaN
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Error message at time
of download
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Length of Time for Which Samples Will Be Collected
Honeywell
• ROLLBUF: Defines the period for which samples will be collected
• ROLLBFBASE: Defines the unit of time for the collection buffer
• Length of time samples will be collected
– Example: if ROLLBUF is ’20’ and ROLLBFBASE is ‘seconds’ then samples
are collected for 20 seconds
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Number of Samples Collected – Buffer Size
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Rolling average size (ROLLAVGSZ)
– The number of values that will be stored by the Rolling Average function
block
ROLLAVGSZ =
ROLLBUF
ROLLFREQ
• The maximum size of the buffer is 3800 samples
• When the buffer is full, the next sample will overwrite the oldest sample
in the buffer (FIFO)
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Rolling Average ‘OK’ and ‘BAD’ Value Count
Honeywell
• ROLLAVGOK
– The number of good samples in the buffer
• Included when calculating rolling average
23
• ROLLAVGBAD
– The number of bad samples in the buffer
• A bad sample is one whose value is NaN
• Excluded when calculating the rolling average
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
25
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example: Calculate Rolling Average
• Consider the following values for calculating the rolling average
–
–
–
–
–
CM Period =
ROLLFREQ =
ROLLFRBASE =
ROLLBUF =
ROLLBFBASE =
2 seconds
6
seconds
24
seconds
• Number of samples collected = 4
• Values of samples collected: 4, 6, Nan, 8
• Rolling Average (output) is 6
– OUT = (4+6+8)/3=6
• Block displays the good and bad values as
– ROLLAVGBAD =
– ROLLAVGOK =
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
1
3
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Example: Calculate Rolling Average
ROLLAVGOK = 7
ROLLAVGBAD = 3
Number of good samples
when calculating the rolling
average
Number of bad samples
excluded from calculating the
rolling average
Sum of all good samples
Number of good samples
4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9
NaN 4.6 NaN 4.7 4.8 NaN 4.5 4.6 4.5 4.5
ROLLAVGSZ = 10
ROLLAVG.OUT
= 4.6
4.5 4.6 4.5 4.9
Values stored in
buffer
Number of FLOAT64 values that will
be collected in the Average Rolling
function block
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Resetting the Rolling Average
• ROLLAVGRST
– Used to restart the rolling average
– Can be done without inactivating the
CM
• When ROLLAVGRST = ON
–
–
–
–
–
–
Sets all values = 0
Sets ROLLAVGOK = 0
Sets ROLLAVGBAD = 0
Turn the ROLLAVGRST to OFF
Restart sample collection
Restarts the calculation
• Can be done by an engineer, SCM,
or CAB
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
23
Describe MATH Function Blocks
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe MATH Function Blocks
4/13/2012
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Contents
Use Rolling Average Function Block .....................................................................................................3
23
Use Counter Function Block ................................................................................................................13
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Use Rolling Average Function Block
•
Configure Rolling Average block
•
Navigate through different parameters of Rolling Average block.
23
Objective
Prerequisites
•
Knowledge of Configuration Studio.
•
Knowledge of Control Builder
•
Knowledge of navigating through Control Builder
•
Knowledge Builder access
•
C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E created and loaded in Control Builder.
TIP
The Rolling Average block can’t be assigned to
C200/SIM-C200 CEE.
Introduction
•
4/13/2012
In this lab, you will learn the configuration and working of the Rolling Average block. The
Rolling Average block will calculate the rolling average of the Numeric output.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Complete the following steps in Control Builder

Step
Action
1
Open Control Builder through Configuration Studio.
2
Click File > New > Control Module.
3
Double click on the chart to open properties window of control module.
On Main tab enter following:
Tag Name: CM_RollAvg
Item Name: CM_RollAvg_Item
Description: <Your choice>
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK.
4
4
Add a NUMERIC block from the UTILITY library to CM_RollAvg.
5
Add a ROLLAVG block from the MATH library to CM_RollAvg.
6
The CM will look as shown below:
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
7
Action
Double Click on ROLLAVGA block to open properties window.
Rollavg frequency -time span
:
4
Rollavg frequency -units of time
:
SECONDS
RollAvg collection -time span
:
40
RollAvg collection -units of time
:
SECONDS
23
On the Main tab, enter the following:
Click OK.
ATTENTION
Rollavg frequency -time span (ROLLFREQ) should be
a multiple of the CM period. In this case, the
execution period of the CM period was left at
DEFAULT which is 1 second (default = 1 second for a
50 ms CEE). 4 seconds (the ROLLFREQ) is a
multiple of 1 second (the CM period).
Rollavg collection -time span (ROLLBUF) is configured
to be 40 seconds. This will cause a buffer size of 10
(ROLLBUF/ROLLFREQ). Therefore, 10 samples will
be used to calculate the rolling average.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

6
Step
Action
8
Connect the function blocks as shown.
9
Save, close, and assign the CM to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM_C300).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
Action
10
Load and activate CM.
11
Open CM_RollAvg in the monitoring mode.
23
Observe that the ROLLAVGSZ (Roll average buffer size) parameter is 10 and the
ROLLAVGBAD parameter is incrementing.
ATTENTION
ROLLAVGBAD is the number of bad samples that
have been put into the rolling average buffer. This
number is incrementing because the input to the block
is NaN (Not a Number). The rolling average
calculation uses only good values. In this case, the
input has always been NaN (since the CM was
activated). Because there have not been any good
values at the input, there are no values contributing to
the rolling average, and so the output is also Nan.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

8
Step
Action
12
Enter a value in the NUMERIC block (into the ‘Actual Value’ field).
In the example shown value entered is 896.
You can enter any value.
13
Observe as the rolling average block gets the good samples it starts calculating the
rolling average.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block
Step
Action
14
Observe that ROLLAVGOK is incrementing and that ROLLAVGBAD starts
decrementing. After some time, the buffer will be filled with good values. When that
happens, ROLLAVGOK will be 10 and ROLLAVGBAD will be 0.
15
Enter different values into the NUMERIC and observe that the output of the ROLLAVG
block changes accordingly.
23

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
16
Action
Reset the rolling average by double-clicking on ROLLAVGRST and turning it ON.
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog.
17
10
Observe that the rolling average block restarts the calculation. Also ROLLAVGOK
becomes zero and starts incrementing to represent the number of good samples in the
buffer.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
18
Action
Change the PV of the numeric block to NAN.
Observe that the output of the ROLLAVG block shows the average of only good values
received. NAN values are omitted from the calculations.
23
When the ROLLAVGBAD becomes equal to 10 the rolling average calculated becomes
equal to NAN.
ATTENTION
When ROLLAVGBAD becomes 10 it indicates that the
buffer has only NAN values and there is not a single
good value. Therefore, the rolling average becomes
equal to NAN.
19
Open the control module in project tab.
Remove the connection between the NUMERIC block and the ROLLAVG block.
20
Using a parameter connector, connect any 11_PC15.DACA.PV to the input of
ROLLAVG.
21
Save, Close, Load and Activate the CM.
22
Open the CM in monitoring mode.
Reset the ROLLAVG block.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Rolling Average Function Block

Step
23
Action
Observe the changes in the OUTPUT of ROLLAVG block.
In the example shown 11_TI21.DACA.PV is used.
ATTENTION
Make sure the TIE BACK excel sheet is running.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block
Use Counter Function Block
Objective
•
The objective of this lab is to configure and use the Counter function block
•
Knowledge of Configuration Studio.
•
Knowledge of Control Builder and navigating through Control Builder
•
Knowledge of configuring and loading the Control Modules
•
C300/SIM-C300, C200E/SIM-C200E is created and loaded
23
Prerequisites
TIP
The Counter block can’t be assigned to C200/SIMC200 CEE.
Introduction
•
At the conclusion of this lab, you will be able to do the following:
o Configure a counter function block
o Use the CNTUPFL,CNTDNFL,RESETFL,PAUSEFL,LOADFL flags
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block
o
Complete the following steps in Control Builder.

Step
Action
1
Open Control Builder if it is not already opened.
2
Create a new Control Module with the following properties:
Tag Name: CM_Count
Item Name: CM_Count_Item
Description: CM for Counter
Parent Asset: <Any Existing Asset>
Click OK in the configuration properties and save the Control Module.
3
Save the Control Module and assign it to the CEE of SCE59 (or SIM-C300).
4
In the Library tree, expand the AUXILIARY library. Drag and drop a CTUD block onto the
CM.
5
Double Click the CTUD block to open the block properties.
From the Block Pins Tab, remove the INFLOAT64 pin and add the ININT32 pin as an input on
the left.
6
From the Utility library, Drag and Drop the following blocks onto CM_Count:
FLAGARRAY
NUMERIC
TYPECONVERT
7
Double Click on FLAGARRAY to open the block properties.
On the Main tab, change the Number of Flag Values to 5.
8
14
On the Block Pins Tab, add 5 PVFL pins as outputs on the right.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block
Step
Action
9
Arrange and Connect the blocks as shown below:
10
Double click the CTUDA block to open its configuration properties.
23

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block

Step
11
Action
Enter the following in the configuration properties of the CTUD block:
Name: Counter
Description: Count Up or Down
Select the Count on Level Flag and Input Selection Specifier checkbox .
Leave other values to default and click OK.
TIP
If the Input Selection specifier is checked, then the
input format used in Counter block is INT32.
If the Count on Level Flag is selected, then the
counter increments or decrements the value as level
triggered quantities once every execution cycle.
16
12
Save and Close CM_Count.
13
Load and activate CM_Count.
14
In the Monitoring tab, open CM_Count.
15
Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag array block which is connected to the CNTUPFL (Count
Up Flag) pin.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block
Step
Action
16
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is incremented once every execution cycle.
17
Turn on the PVFL[4] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to PAUSEFL. Observe
OUTINT32 value is not getting incremented (or decremented ).
18
Turn off PVFL[4] pin of Flag Array block. Observe OUTINT32 value again starts incrementing.
19
Open the properties of the NUMERICA block. Enter 25 in the Actual Value column and press
enter. Click Yes in the Change Online Value dialog box.
20
Turn on PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to LOADFL pin.
23

Verify that the value of OUTINT32 is changed to 25 and that QUFL is ON.
21
Turn off PVFL[5] pin of Flag Array block. Observe that OUTINT32 is incrementing and QUFL
is still ON.
22
Turn off PVFL[1] pin of Flag Array block.
23
Turn on the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to CNTDNFL. Observe
that OUTINT32 is getting decremented once every execution cycle.
Observe that QUFL is OFF.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block

Step
Action
24
When OUTINT32 value reaches 0 QDFL is ON.
25
Observe that OUTINT32 is decrementing and that QDFL is still ON.
26
Turn off the PVFL[2] pin of the Flag Array block.
27
Turn ON the PVFL[3] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to RESETFL pin. You
will observe that the value of OUTINT32 is set to 0.
28
Turn off the PVFL[3] pin .
29
Open the properties of the NUMERICA block and enter an actual value of 2147483645.
Leave the other values to Default and click OK.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block

Step
Turn ON the PVFL[5] pin of the Flag Array block which is connected to the LOADFL pin.
Verify that the value of OUTINT32 was changed to 2147483645.
23
30
Action
Turn off the PVFL[5] pin.
31
Turn ON the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block connected to CNTUPLVL. When the value of
the OUTINT32 crosses 2147483647, an overflow occurs and the counter value changes to
-2,147,483,648 and continues counting .
TIP
Based on the value of the Counter Equation
(CNTEQN) parameter, the Overflow and Underflow
action varies.
For Equation C, if the Counter overflows from
+2,147,483,647, OUTINT32 changes to 0
32
4/13/2012
Turn OFF the PVFL[1] pin of the Flag Array block.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Math and Auxiliary Function Blocks
Use Counter Function Block

Step
33
20
Action
Close the CM_Count control module.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
24
Describe Search Functionality
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• Search engine is embedded in Configuration Studio
• Search Utility is used to:
– define the search criteria and initiate a search
– search system databases, folders and files to determine where specific
strategies, templates, displays, and assets are used in the system
– search for specific parameters that exist (defined) though they may not be
used
– display detailed search results
– save search criteria for future reference and use
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Search Types
• The Search Utility supports
two query options:
– Where Used
– Parameter Search
• Search Utility provides the
ability to navigate between
these search options
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
System Search
• The Search Utility can be launched at either the system level, or the
server level
– When launched as a system task, the search will allow one or all DSA
servers in the system to be searched
– When launched as a server task, the search will allow only the connected
server to be searched
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Server Search
• Search scope covers the entire Experion System
– The Search Utility supports searching Assets/Alarm Groups
24
• Search Utility, when launched as a Server task, will search the EMDB
(assets / alarm groups), but will search the folders (displays), QDB
(SCADA points), and ERDB (process points) only on the Server from
where it was launched
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search
• “Where Used” search option will list all the information regarding the
usage of:
–
–
–
–
Control Strategies/Templates in the ERDB (project!)
HMIWeb Displays and shapes in the HMIWeb Display Builder files
Asset and Alarm Groups in the Enterprise Model Database (EMDB)
SCADA Points in the QDB
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search - User Interface
Search Query Pane
Search Results Pane
Status Bar
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Search Query Pane Options
New - Clears the “Search For” and “Look
In” fields
Load - Loads saved search criteria
Save - Saves the search criteria as an XML file
Help - Launches a simpler version of
Knowledge Builder for search tips
Enter the object’s name to search for
Refines a search by defining search
criteria (selecting specific data repositories and
file folders). Select double arrow for text input
boxes. A Browser Point Picker is available at
the right corner of all text input boxes
Launches a simpler version of Knowledge
Builder with tips on how to search
Switch to Parameter Search
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Select Server Combobox
• Select the name of the Server(s) that will be searched when a search
query is started
24
– If the Search Utility is launched at the system level, the ‘Select Server’ dropdown box will list all Servers that are configured in the Enterprise system
model
– When the Search Utility is launched at the Server level, the ‘Select Server’
drop-down box will list only the Server that is currently connected to
Configuration Studio
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used Search – Default
• ‘Where Used’ search opens “All” search options by default
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Where Used Search – Specific Search
Honeywell
• An introductory Search Query
pane is accessed when the
Back button is selected in the
“All” Search window
– It also appears when “Where
Used” link is selected in the
“Parameter” search query pane
• Where Used search has four
search options:
–
–
–
–
Process Points
Display Shapes
Assets/Alarm Groups
All/Any
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Honeywell
Look In Options
Database Search
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
24
Look In Options for Where Used Search
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Results Toolbar and Menu
• Results Toolbar and Menu
– Provide options to sort and filter search results
Simple text string search
on the search results
Specify the filter criteria
and click “Filter” to
view specific rows
Exports search results
(all/filtered) along with any
data in hidden columns into
.xml or .csv file formats
Print the Search results
in Report form
Select Columns in the
Results pane for clarity and
comparison
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Where Used - Process Points
• Searches for usage of a given Control
Strategy/Template/Objects defined in the
Engineering Repository Database (ERDB)
• Searches Process Point references in
Display Files and Alarm groups
• The instances of data objects that are
searched includes usage as:
– a pin for a connection
– a block reference
• Instantiation, Derivation and Assignments of
function blocks and their parameters are
displayed in the results for a given strategy or
template when queried as ‘Where Used’
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Where Used – Displays, Assets/Alarm Groups, All/Any
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Displays Shapes
– Search for information on the usage of display shape references in Displays
and Shape files
• Assets/Alarm Groups
– Search for Asset and Alarm Group references defined in the Enterprise Model
Database (EMDB), ERDB, Display files and the Quick Builder file
• All/Any
– Search for data matching the text string specified in the ‘Search For’ textbox
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Parameter Search
• Search for Strategies/Templates based on Parameter names and values
24
– Searches the ERDB and gets the information for all the Parameters with the
specified search criteria
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Search Query Pane – Parameter Search
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Similar to “Where Used” Search Query Pane
– Has only Process Points listed since
parameter query only searches the ERDB
– Advanced Option is used to add specific
search criteria which helps refine the search
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Search Option
Used to define specific search
criteria (explained later)
Add the search criteria to
the Search Criteria List
Window at the bottom
Conditions used to combine
individual criteria to form a
complex search option
Used to move/delete/clear the
criteria in the Search Criteria
List Window
Search Criteria List Window
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Database Search
19
Advanced Option – Parameter Search
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• “Field” Textbox:
– Specifies a Parameter to be used by the search criteria
• A Browser Point Picker button is available to provide a list of parameters
• “Condition” Combobox:
– Used to select specific conditions for the search criteria
– Shows only valid options based on the parameter type (String, Boolean or
Other)
String --
Other -Boolean --
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Advanced Option – Parameter Search
Honeywell
• “Value” Textbox:
24
– Specify a valid value for the particular parameter type which is shown in the
‘Field’ textbox
– Based on parameter type, a combobox or textbox will be available
• If parameter type is Boolean, the options are TRUE/FALSE
– A combobox displays the appropriate options
• For Enumeration parameters, a combobox will list the appropriate
enumeration values
• For other data types, an edit box is displayed where the value for
comparison is specified
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Example – Parameter Search Results
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• PVEUHI is searched for values between 80 and 110
– Search Results pane shows 74 points meet the specific search criteria
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Context Menu
• Search Results Pane
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Wild Card Usage – Special Characters
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Wild card characters such as an asterisk ‘*’ and question mark ‘?’ can be
used in the Look In search option when specifying the item name
– ‘*’ implies one or more characters where as “?” implies only a single
character
• Generic entries are supported as “Search” attributes
– Examples used in search criteria: ex*, CM_?
• ex* will return search results ex1, ex2, example_cascade
• CM_? will return search results CM_1, CM_2, CM_A (single character
replacement)
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Wild Card Usage
• If just an asterisk ‘*’ is used as the “Search For” attribute:
24
– The search is performed on all Strategies/Templates, their Contained Blocks
and their parameters defined in ERDB
– An ‘*’ search on Display Files will search all points referred to in the files
specified
– For Assets/Alarm Groups, the EMDB is searched for all Assets/Alarm
Groups defined and referenced
– For SCADA Points, a search will be performed for Asset reference on all
points defined in the Quick Builder repository
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Search and Engineering Tools Operation
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Avoid conducting engineering tool operations and search queries
simultaneously
– Both activities often require significant CPU and memory resources which
reduces system performance
– When a query is started, the Search Utility searches the ERDB for
strategies, templates, parameters that meet the criteria specified in the
Search Query pane
– Engineering operations performed in Control Builder, such as
Load/Create/Delete/Import/Bulk Build/Opening charts, also access
information in the ERDB
– If engineering operations are performed simultaneously with search
operations, both compete for system resources in the SQL Server
– Search queries, where the search criteria uses symbols (such as * or ?),
impose a high CPU and memory usage on the Server
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Multiple Instance of Search Utility
• Each Configuration Studio instance (on the same or different Servers):
– Creates a separate instance of the Search Utility
– Can create multiple instances of the Search Utility when launched at the
System level
• One instance of the Search Utility may be opened for the System and for
each configured Server in Configuration Studio
• Note:
– Parameter Search and Where Used search cannot be simultaneously
performed on the same Server when connected at the Server level
– Either a Parameter or Where Used search may be performed at the Server
level while a different search can be performed on the same Server by
connecting at the System level
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Database Search
27
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Search Functionality
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Perform Parameter Search lab exercise.
Database Search
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Search Functionality
4/13/2012
Topic: Database Search
Contents
Perform Parameter Search ....................................................................................................................3
24
Perform Where Used Search ................................................................................................................9
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search
Perform Parameter Search
Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson you will be able to search for parameters using the ‘Parameter Search’
function.
Introduction
24
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you about the usage of Parameter Search in
Configuration Studio
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step
1
2
4
Action
Open Configuration studio if not already open. Select Your Server. Select Search for a
parameter in the system (Parameter Search) from the Search heading
In the Search For Parameter text box, click on the Point picker
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
button.
4/13/2012
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search
Step
Action
3
In the ‘Browser Point Picker’ dialog box, select PVEUHI (High Range in EUs) parameter
and click OK.
24

4
5
6
4/13/2012
Display the Advanced options by clicking on the double arrow
In the Advanced options, click on the Point picker
Range in EUs) parameter, and click OK.
.
button, select PVEUHI (High
In the Advanced options, click on the Condition drop down list (just to the right of the
point picker).
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step
Action
7
In the ‘Select Parameter’ dialog box, select PVEUHI (High Range in EUs) – 64 bit
parameter, and click Select.
8
In the Condition Combo Box, select >=
ATTENTION
The last few steps may need to be repeated to make
the Condition Combo Box display the >= selection.
9
6
Click in the Value combo box (to move your cursor into the field) and enter 90 into the
text box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

Step
Click the Add
added.
button. The Search Criteria List window shows the criteria which is
24
10
Action
11
Click the AND operator and repeat the steps above to add a criteria PVEUHI <= 110.
ATTENTION
Be sure to make this condition <= (less than or equal),
and make sure the value entered is 110. Therefore,
the condition will be PVEUHI <= 110.
12
4/13/2012
Click on the Search button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Database Search
Perform Parameter Search

8
Step
Action
13
The Search Results Pane lists Control Strategies and Templates in the ERDB which
have a PVEUHI parameter value between 90 and 110
14
Look on the status bar (at the bottom of the window) for the status of the search, the
number of points found, and the time taken to do the search.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Database Search
Perform Where Used Search
Perform Where Used Search
Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson you will be able to search for a point using the Where Used search
Introduction
24
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you about the usage of the Where Used search in
Configuration Studio
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Database Search
Perform Where Used Search

Step
1
Launch Configuration Studio, connect to your system, and provide credentials of a user
with mngr security level.
2
In the Tree pane (left side), select your system. Click on the task Determine where an
object is used in the system (Where Used).
3
Type 11_FC01 in the ‘Search For’ text box.
4
10
Action
Expand Displays by selecting the double arrow
next to the Displays option.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Database Search
Perform Where Used Search
Step
Action
5
Select the Point picker in the text box, expand items, check the DisplayShare2 option
(path) and click OK.
6
Click the Search button.
24

4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Database Search
Perform Where Used Search

Step
7
Action
The Search Results Pane lists the usage of 11_FC01 in Process points, Displays and
Asset / Alarm Groups
ATTENTION
Search will take some time based upon your database
size
12
8
Look on the status bar for information about the search (including the status of the
search).
9
View both the Displays tab and the Process Points tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Introduction
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• In this lesson you will learn about sequential control modules (SCMs).
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Build and edit SCMs
– Configure transition and
step function blocks
– Configure step timing
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
Introduction
Honeywell
• SCMs:
– Provide phase-level batch functionality
– Command regulatory and discrete function blocks, contained within control
modules in a defined order, to accomplish higher-level tasks (for example,
boiler startup).
– Contain the following function blocks:
• Transitions that determine when to proceed
• Steps that take action
• Handlers for specified exceptions
• Synchronization for parallel execution
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Topics
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Rules for Building SCMs
• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing and Configuration
• SCM Code Examples
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Rule 2 – SCMs can have multiple endings.
Candy Step
Ship It
Add
Chocolate
Add Grape
Flavor
END
END
END
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
• Rule 1 – Every SCM begins with an Invoke Transition.
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
Honeywell
• Rule 3 – Generally logic shall be made with Transitions and Steps in
alternate in SCM; however,
• Step to Step connection is allowed in SCMs in R300 and later.
• Transition to Transition Connections are still NOT allowed.
Red “!” when
activated indicates
an error
(This is Elaborated
in the next slide)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
A Failed SCM is indicated by a red “!”
The error exists at the start of main. Here the
INVOKE MAIN TRANSITION block is missing
Steps and Transitions are
shown in alphabetical
order, not in “flow” or
execution order.
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
A SCM with a severe warning is indicated
by a blue “!”
The error exists within main
A TRANSITION block to a TRANSITION
block connection is not allowed, even with
a SYNC block acting as an Intermediary.
In this case, execution of the SCM
will stop at the first of the two
transitions and will not continue –
even if all conditions are true.
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Rules
An SCM with a normal warning is
indicated by an inverted “!”
The error is within main, and
represents either a Transition
condition or a Step output failure
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
Ex: Transition configured with only
one condition, but several Primary
gates.
Sequential Control Modules - Example
Honeywell
Transition
Step
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Building an SCM
An SCM begins with:
A) A project identification number
B) An END statement
C) An invoke transition
D) A transition
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! SCMs
SCMsbegin
beginwith
withinvoke
invoke
You must answer
the question before
transitions.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Clear
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Rules for Building SCMs
• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing and Configuration
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Sequential Control Modules - Transitions
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Transitions:
– Evaluate if the sequential control module is ready to advance to the next
step
– Ask questions
?
• You can define:
Logic
Gates
– Up to 10 conditions per transition
– 4 logic gates per transition
• 3 primary
• 1 secondary
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
• SCM Code Examples
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Transitions
Transition condition
descriptions
Selectable
Transitions determine when to proceed
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Sequential Control Modules - Transitions
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Transition conditions
(code)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Fetch Enumeration
• Some of the parameter values used in SCM Condition and Output
expressions require enumeration
– Enumeration is a set of numbers corresponding to the parameter values
– For example, the Mode parameter has an enumerated value set of 0 to 5
representing the possible modes
Select
Point.Parameter
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Why Use Fetch Enums?
• Data type for all enumerated parameters used in Condition and Output
expressions is numeric
– Hence it is necessary to enter a specific number corresponding to the
specific parameter state
– For example
• For Mode parameter
– MAN (0)
– AUTO (1)
– CAS (2)
– BCAS (3)
– None (4)
– Normal (5)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
Drop down displays the
possible Enumeration
for selected
point.parameter
Click
Fetch Enums
Honeywell
Topics
• Rules for Building SCMs
• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing and Configuration
• SCM Code Examples
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Steps
• Steps perform actions and send output commands to control module
function blocks
• Note: the control module’s mode attribute must be “Program”
• You can define up to 16 individual outputs/actions per step
• Minimum and maximum wait times are supported
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Steps
Step output
descriptions
Selectable
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Steps
Step outputs
(code)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
Steps take actions
Honeywell
Question 2: Transition vs. Steps
Transitions and Steps:
A) Are identical to PID function blocks
B) Generally alternate in an SCM, if
required, Step to Step connection
is valid
C) Cannot be used in an SCM
D) Are built using Quick Builder
Incorrect!
Correct! Generally,
Generally,Transitions
Transitionsand
andSteps
Stepsare
areto
to
alternate within the SCM. However, in Experion
Release 300, step to step connection is allowed. But
transition to transition connections are still NOT
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
allowed.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
Clickcontinuing
anywhere to continue.
Submit
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Clear
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Rules for Building SCMs
• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing and Configuration
• SCM Code Examples
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Modules – Step Timing
Honeywell
The step timer begins
when the execution of
the step begins.
Maximum
Active Time
Minimum
Wait Time
• Min Wait Time (in execution periods)
– Specifies how long to delay evaluation of succeeding Transition block after
step outputs are stored. If Execution period is 50 milliseconds and Min Wait
Time is 100, the start of succeeding Transition is delayed by 5000 ms (5 s)
• Max Active Time
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Sequential Control Modules – Step Timing
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Enter times in number
of execution periods.
Ex: An entry of 600
is = 300 seconds
(exec. per. = 500ms)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
– The maximum number of execution periods that the steps can be active
before an SCM Step Alarm is generated
• Configure the alarm priority on the SCM properties, not on the individual
step output properties
Honeywell
STEP Expression – DELAY
• DELAY is the period, in seconds, for which the output will pause before
its expression execution – ie. before processing this output
– Value is rounded up to the next multiple of the SCM period
• For example with an SCM PERIOD of 10 secs, a value of 15 stored to
OP(i).DELAYTIME will be rounded up to 20
– Value range is 0 to 25000000 seconds
– Only applicable to Automatic outputs that have expressions configured
– If a non-zero Step Output Delay time is entered for an Output with only an
instruction, the delay time will have no effect
A Step’s active time should not be smaller than the largest output Delay
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Difference between ‘=’ and ‘:=’ in an SCM
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Transition block is used to evaluate if a SCM is ready to advance to the
next step
– ‘:=‘ is not supported in Transition condition expressions
– ‘=‘ is used to compare or evaluate that a condition has been met or satisfied
• STEP block performs actions and sends output commands to Control
Module function blocks
– ‘:=‘ is used to set the value of a point parameter
– ‘=‘ is not supported in STEP output expressions
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Rules for Building SCMs
• SCM Transitions
• SCM Steps
• Step Timing and Configuration
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Commanding Device
Control Block outputs from
SCMs
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
• SCM Code Examples
Using Logic and Override/Interlocks
Honeywell
Logic and Override/Interlocks were
used to drive the Device Control
block output in the course labs – as
in the case of the template
FANLOGIC
In a simple example:
An SCM could write to a flag in the
logic which could assert an
Override/Interlock forcing the output
to the associated state.
The following slides show several other methods for an SCM to
command Device
Control Module outputs:
1) Generic OP – GOP
2) Output Command - OPCMD
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Generic OP - GOP
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
The SCM writes to the GOP parameter on the device control block.
This is the most commonly used device control command
• Pros
– Simple direct programming of devices allowing flexible easy to understand
designs
• Cons
– Programming must be structured to prevent step output failures for device
control blocks with Override/Interlocks asserted or in Operator MODEATTR
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Output Command - OPCMD
Honeywell
Output command parameters OPCMD[0..2] on the device control block can
be commanded directly from an SCM.
• Pros
– SCM writes to a flag (logic associated with the device control block)
– Commanding a device with an active interlock will not cause an SCM failure
– Commanding a device in operator MODEATTR will not cause a failure
• Cons
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Common Device CM Configuration
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
– Requires logic associated with the device control block (see next slide)
– Action upon transition to Program or interlock clear will not always be apparent
and may be confusing for operators:
– Device will return to the last requested state on interlock clear
– The last requested state will be executed when the device control block
MODEATTR is set to Program
Honeywell
Additional Code Examples
• 11_AC12.PIDA.SP:=SCM_D100 .RECTARGET[3]
• MESSAGES.XFERB.SENDFL[3] := 1
• 11_PC15.PIDA.SP := (1050.0 - (11_PC15.PIDA.PVEUHI 11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO) * (FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO
• 11_PC15.PIDA.SP:=(SCM_D100.RECTARGET[2]+700)
• CM456.PIDA.SP := (CM456.SPREC1FLAG.PVFL) ?
SCM457.RECTARGET[1] : NOP
If / Then
No Operation
(do nothing)
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
35
Honeywell
SCM State Change Diagram
INACTIVE
RESUME
(1st State After Download)
ACTIVE
IDLE
RESET
START
RESET
RUNNING
ABORT
RESET
COMPLETE
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPTING
INACTIVE
STOP
STOPPED
RESET
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
HOLD
VALIDATED
ABORTED
RESTART
HOLD
STOP
ABORT
HELD
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Summary
Honeywell
• A Sequential Control Module (SCM):
–
–
–
–
–
Commands regulatory and discrete function blocks contained within Control
Modules in a defined order to accomplish higher-level tasks.
Begins with an Invoke Transition
Can have multiple endings
Generally have alternating Transitions and Steps, if more than 16
outputs/actions are required, then Step to Step block connection is valid
Contains:
• Transition function blocks that evaluate, if the Sequential Control Module
is ready to advance to the next step
–
Can have min and max wait times added to steps. Remember, wait times
are in execution cycles of the SCM itself and NOT in minutes or seconds.
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the Configuration of Sequential Control Modules (SCMs)
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the Configuration of SCMs
4/13/2012
25
• Step function blocks that perform actions and send output commands to
Control Module function blocks
This page was intentionally left blank.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
Topic: Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Contents
25
Configure a Sequential Control Module.................................................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Objectives
•
Create an SCM
•
Configure SCM components
•
Download an SCM to the controller
•
Monitor an SCM online
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with Configuration Studio installed
•
Debutanizer_123.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check
the control strategy.)
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet open
•
All the previously built points loaded and active
25
Introduction
The requirement is to pressurize the Debutanizer T100 tower at startup prior to starting the feed.
The fans of the heat exchanger are started and the feed begun.
•
Open HC44, PC15, and PC16, and back pressure the debutanizer (PI14) with natural gas
imported from the compressor interstage drum.
•
When the tower is pressurized, the following steps are completed:
1. Set bypass HC44 valve to 20 percent
2. Set PC15 at 1240 kPag and PC16 at 1170 kPag in automatic
3. Send the following message to the Operator:
Pressure stabilization SCM complete
•
4/13/2012
A CM named FLAGS needs to be built to facilitate the operation of the SCM. The following
CMs and SCMs will be built in this lab:
NAME
Action to be taken
CM > FLAGS
Configure 3 Flag blocks and one
Message block to facilitate the SCM
operation.
SCM > SCM_Pressure
Configure step sequences, to operate
11_HC44, 11_PC15 and 11_PC16 to
pressurize the T-100 tower, before
starting the feed.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Perform the following steps in Control Builder.
Create a SCM

Step
1
Action
Build a new CM named FLAGS and assign it to your CEE.
Drag a Control Module from the Library tab to the CEE in the Project tab.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
2
Action
Enter FLAGS in the Destination field as shown below.
25
Click Finish.
3
Find the Flags CM in the Project tree and double-click it to open in chart
view.
Double-click anywhere on the blank background to open the CM
properties.
On the Main tab, enter the information as follows:
Name:
FLAGS
Item Name:
FLAGS_Item
Parent Asset
C11
Leave all other entries as default.
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
4
Action
Add a Flag function block to this CM.
Expand the Utility block in the Library tree window, and select the FLAG block,
as shown below.
Drag the FLAG block to the FLAGS chart window, which is open.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
5
Action
Double-click the FLAGA block to open the configuration form.
Enter the details in the Main tab, as follows:
Name:
C
Description:
Press Stabilization
Click OK.
Repeat the previous steps to add two additional Flag function blocks, as
follows:
Name
4/13/2012
25
6
Description
A
FLW & Bottom Heat
B
Debutane S/D start Flag
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
7
Action
Configure a Message Block.
A MESSAGE block provides up to 16 user-configurable messages
(MESSAGE[n]) that can be triggered by a client of the block. Here "n"
is the message number. A client can see the output from a Step block
in a Sequential Control Module, logic, or a manual command
Click the MESSAGE block in the Utility group.
Drag the Message function block to the open chart window.
A Message function block is shown below.
8
•
When a trigger is sent to the flag (SENDFL[n]) input, the
corresponding message (MESSAGE[n]) is sent to the Message and
Event Summary displays in Station
•
For example, when the SCM triggers the SENDFL[0] pin, then
Message[0] is sent to the Message and Event Summary in Station
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
8
Action
Double-click the Message block to open the configuration form.
Enter MESSAGEA in the Name field.
Select INFO from the first (0) Message Type drop-down list.
25
9
Type Pressure Stabilization SCM Complete in the Message Text list.
Select INFO from the #1Message Type drop-down list.
Type SCM in ABORT State in the Message Text list.
Click OK to close the Message function block.
ATTENTION
Message #1 is needed in the next SCM SCM_Presure.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
10
Action
Save and close the Flags CM.
−
11
There is no need to wire any block since they are operated using
SCM commands
Right-click Flags CM in the Project window and select the Load option.
The Load dialog box appears.
12
Select the Automatically change ...after load is completed option.
Click OK.
This loads and changes the CM to ACTIVE
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
13
Action
Configure an SCM for the Debutanizer Tower Top Pressure Stabilization.
Open Control Builder and select:
25
File > New > Sequential Control Module
The following chart view of the SCM opens
NOTE: Control Builder names The SCM sequentially, by default.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
14
Action
Double-click a blank area within the SCM chart window to open the
configuration parameters window.
Enter the following details on the Main tab:
Name:
SCM_Pressure
Item Name: SCM_Pressure_Item
Description: Pressure on T-100
Engr Units: KPAG
Parent Asset C11
Accept the defaults for any remaining parameters.
Click OK.
ATTENTION
For additional field information, use the <F1> key to
access context sensitive help.
15
Save and close the SCM.
16
The SCM named SCM_Pressure appears under the unassigned modules in
the tree view of the Project tab.
17
Assign the SCM to CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300).
SCM_Pressure now appears under CEESCEFB61(or SIM_CEEC300) in
the Project tab
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
18
Action
Double-click SCM_Pressure to open the project chart window.
B
C
D
A
NOTE:
19
25
By default, the Main Handler (A) and the Invoke Transition (B) are added
to the SCM chart, as shown
Each transition has three primary logic gates (C) and one secondary logic
gate (D)
The SCM waits at a transition until the logic in that transition becomes true
(=1). (Logic can be a combination of primary and secondary gates.)
Once the transition is true, the SCM continues to execute
10 conditions can be placed in one transition
Conditions are logically connected using the three primary logic gates and
one secondary gate
An SCM remains in the idle state until it receives a manual START
command or the Invoke Main transition becomes true. After that, the
SCM changes to the running state
Add a Transition condition.
Click the Add Button.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
20
Action
Double-click the Transition Condition to open the transition configuration
form.
Enter the following details in the Main tab.
21
Name:
Start
Description:
Start Condition
Select Cond. #1 Tab.
Enter Start in the description field.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
22
Action
The next few steps will add a logical expression for the condition. When the
expression is true, it will cause the SCM to begin execution automatically. The
expression will be true when Flag C (of the Flags CM) is ON.
25
Click the Points Button to browse for Control Modules to use in the expression
field.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
23
Action
Select the FLAGS C entry from the Point Selection list.
Select PVFL in the Parameters of FLAGS.C list box.
Click the OK button.
ATTENTION
This condition is in the invoke transition (the first
Transition). When this condition becomes TRUE
(Flags.C.PVFL = 1), the SCM will start executing
automatically.
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
24
Action
The point parameter FLAGS.C.PVFL is now in the expression field, as
indicated below.
25
Click the “ = “ sign and then type “1” that is the entered condition is
FLAGS.C.PVFL = 1
ATTENTION
You can use the Expression Builder Buttons to build
expressions.
You can also enter Expressions through the keyboard.
This first Expression is placed in the first primary gate
(GATEP1), by default.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
25
Action
Click the Gates tab to specify a gate for the condition.
Select CONNECT from the Primary Gate (P1) Type drop-down list.
Select CONNECT from the Secondary Gate (S) Type drop-down list.
Click OK.
The Transition Condition displays in the Expression view, as shown
ATTENTION
All transition conditions appear in two views in the
SCM:
1. The Description view: Displays descriptions
entered in the Configuration form
2. The Expression view: Displays expressions
entered in the Configuration form
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
26
Action
To open the Description view.
Right-click the Transition.
Select SCM Transition Object > Toggle Description/Expression
25
The Transition condition will display in the Description view, as shown.
•
27
Or, you can click once on the top line
Information regarding SCM steps:
A Step contains one or more executable output statements. Up to 16
outputs can be part of a single step
If the step block is too close to the surrounding blocks, Control Builder
does not permit you to enter more outputs in the step. To ensure that
you can enter all the output statements, add outputs before adding the
next transition
Step outputs appear in two views similar to the Transition Condition:
1. The Description View
2. The Output View
You can change between the two by clicking the Step heading
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Action
28
Drag a Step block from the SCM library to your SCM chart window.
29
Double-click the Transition End arrow (your pointer turns to a “ + “ sign) and
then move the cursor to the starting line of the Step and click.
This physically connects the transition and the step, as shown below
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
30
Action
Double-click the step to open the Step Parameter configuration form.
Enter the following data on the Main tab:
Name:
Step1
Description:
Build Pressure in tower
Enforce Order Option:
AllOutputs
25
Keep all other parameters as default.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Action
31
Click OK.
32
Click the ADD button to add step output 1.
33
Double-click the blank STEP 1.
Enter the following information:
Description
HC44 Modeattr = program
Output Expression:
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 2
ATTENTION
You can use the Points selection list for creating
output expressions or enter the expression through the
keyboard.
Click OK.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
34
Action
Click the Add button again to add Output Expression 2.
Double-click the step to open the configuration form and enter the details
below:
Description:
Expression:
HC44 Mode = Man
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODE:= 0
25
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Action
35
Repeat step 33 to add the following output expressions 3 through 12 according
to the configuration details displayed below for each new step.
36
24
No.
Description
Expression
3
Open HC44
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.OP := 100.0
4
HC44 Mode Attribute in
Operator
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 1
5
PC15 Mode attribute in
Program
11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2
6
PC15 Mode = manual
11_PC15.PIDA.MODE := 0
7
PC15 valve open
11_PC15.PIDA.OP := 100.0
8
PC15 Mode attribute in
Operator
11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1
9
PC16 Mode attribute in
Program
11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2
10
PC16 Mode = manual
11_PC16.PIDA.MODE:= 0
11
PC16 valve open
11_PC16.PIDA.OP := 100.0
12
PC16 Mode attribute in
Operator
11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1
The Expression/Step Outputs view appears once you finish entering the
information.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
37
Action
Click the top Step header to view the Description.
25
Click again to toggle between the Expression and Description views. This
way, operators can quickly access either view
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
38
Action
Add Transition number 2.
Select the SCM group in the Library view and drag a transition to the
SCM_Pressure chart view.
Connect Step 1 to TransitionA.
Click ADD to add a condition.
Enter the details of the Transition2 block, as shown below.
Double-click the blank Transition 1 and enter the details as described below.
Main Tab
Name:
Transition2
Description:
PC15 >= 49.0 Kpag
Cond#1 Tab
Description:
Expression:
Tower Top PC15 GT 49.0
11_PC15.PIDA.PV >= 49.0
Gates Tab
Primary Gate (P1):
Secondary Gate (S):
CONNECT
CONNECT
Click OK.
39
Add Step2 (by dragging a step block from the Library view.)
Connect TRANSITION2 to STEP2.
Wire the step to the previous transition.
Configure STEP2 with details given below.
Main Tab
Name:
Description:
26
STEP2
Stabilize Pressure in twr
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module
Step
40
Action
Add outputs as necessary and enter the following step output expressions:
No.
Description
Expression
1
HC44 Mode attribute in
Program
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 2
2
HC44 Mode = Man
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODE := 0
3
HC44 set to 20
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.OP := 20.0
4
HC44 Mode attribute in
Operator
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.MODEATTR := 1
5
PC15 Mode attribute in
Program
11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2
6
PC15 Mode = Auto
11_PC15.PIDA.MODE := 1
7
PC15 SP = 1240
11_PC15.PIDA.SP := 1240.0
8
PC15 Mode attribute in
Operator
11_PC15.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1
9
PC16 Mode attribute in
Program
11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 2
10
PC16 Mode = Auto
11_PC16.PIDA.MODE:= 1
11
PC 16 SP = 1170
11_PC16.PIDA.SP := 1170.0
12
PC16 Mode attribute in
Operator
11_PC16.PIDA.MODEATTR := 1
13
Send SCM Completed
Message
FLAGS.MESSAGEA.SENDFL[0] :=1
25

STEP2 after completion is shown below.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
41
Action
Save and close the SCM project chart window.
The SCM appears in the Project window with this symbol
This symbol indicates that this SCM has not yet been downloaded to the
controller
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Right-click the SCM and select Load.
25
42
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
43
Action
Click Continue and OK.
The SCM is downloaded to the controller as well as to the Server
database
44
30
Click the Monitoring tab and select SCM_Pressure.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
45
Action
Activate this SCM by right-clicking and selecting Activate > Selected Item(s).
25
Click Yes at the “change state” confirmation window.
The color of the SCM changes from blue to green indicating the Active
state. Now if the Invoke Transition condition becomes true, the SCM
will start to execute.
4/13/2012
46
Before starting to test your SCM, verify that all points are active and the
simulation spreadsheet is running.
47
Navigate to Station and recall (or refresh) the Debutanizer_123 display.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
48
Action
On the Debutanizer123 graphic, find the following items and change the Start
SCM pressure flag to ON (this sets Flag.C.PVFL = 1). This causes the SCM’s
invoke transition to be true and will automatically start SCM_Pressure.
View the SCM in chart view in the Monitoring tab of Control Builder
Transition1 changes to blue when satisfied
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
49
Action
On the Debutanizer_123 graphic -- note the status of HC44
11_PC15
The PV of PC15 is controlling toward the SP (1240)
25
11_PC16
The PV of PC16 is controlling toward the SP (1170)
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
50
34
Action
Click the SP value of 11_PC16 in the Debutanizer_123 to open the faceplate,
as shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Similarly click 11_PC15 to open that faceplate.
25
51
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
Action
Open the Monitoring view of the SCM chart. The toolbar has a combo box
giving zooming facility, select 50%
The SCM is complete and all steps and transitions are blue
The SCM “COMPLETE” status is shown on the title bar, as illustrated
below
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module

Step
52
Action
The Message tab in the Status line of Station starts flashing green.
Click the Message Field to open the Message Summary window.
Acknowledge the message.
53
54
Turn off the Start SCM pressure flag. This will turn off the flag that triggers
SCM_Pressure.
In the Monitoring tab, open the SCM.
25
Double-click in a blank area.
Click the Status tab.
Change the Command to Reset (which takes the SCM State to Idle).
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Sequential Control Module - Concepts and Use
Configure a Sequential Control Module
This page was intentionally left blank.
38
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to add functionality to Sequential Control
Modules (SCMs)
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to describe the purpose
and operation of:
– Branching and looping functionality
– Parallel execution functionality
– Exception handlers
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Topics
Honeywell
• SCM Branching and Looping

• SCM Parallel Execution

• SCM Exception Handlers

• SCM Retry Option

Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
3
Sequential Control Modules – Branching
Honeywell
Example of SCM Branching
Alternate paths.
Only one executes.
If multiple transitions
are true, the leftmost
executes
NEXTCOMP
PINS
STEP
(1)
TRANSITION A
(2)
(3)
TRANSITION B
TRANSITION C
STEP
Up to 10 branches can
be added to a step.
TRANSITION
STEP
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Modules - Looping
Honeywell
Example of SCM Looping
• Recommended
– End with a Transition then loop back
into a Step/Phase
STEP
• Not recommended
– Loop from Step/Phase back to always
true transition
– Loop back to the default invoke transition
– Loop from a parallel section to non
parallel section
– Loop from a non-parallel section to a
parallel section
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
STEP
TRANSITION
A Phase block is available
in an RCM, but not in an SCM.
RCMs are beyond the scope
of this class.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: SCM Branching
At which SCM function block
does branching occur?
A) Handler
B) Step
C) Synchronization
D) Transition
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! Branching
Branchingoccurs
occursat
ataastep.
step.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Clear
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
STEP
Topics
Honeywell
• SCM Branching and Looping
• SCM Parallel Execution

• SCM Exception Handlers
• SCM Retry Option
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
7
Parallel Step Execution
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
NEXTCOMP
PINS
SYNC
STEP
Parallel paths.
All paths execute.
STEP
STEP
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
STEP
STEP
STEP
TRANSITION
SYNC
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Synchronization Block
Honeywell
• A synchronization (sync) block
begins and ends a parallel step
execution.
TRANSITION
• The end synchronization block:
SYNC
STEP
– Monitors the execution status of
each parallel path
STEP
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
STEP
STEP
– Terminates the thread when the
execution of the path completes
– Starts one or several new threads
when all the preceding parallel
paths complete execution
SYNC
9
Synchronization Block
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
TRANSITION
• A synchronization block can have
a maximum of 10 threads.
SYNC
• Nested synchronization blocks are
permitted.
– Nested levels are limited to 9 due
to the limit of 10 threads per
synchronization block.
STEP
STEP
TRANSITION
TRANSITION
STEP
STEP
SYNC
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
• When Sync is followed by
Transitions, ALL must be true
before execution of any path
begins execution
• When Sync is followed by Steps,
each path executes independently
(until the “end Sync”)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell
Question 2: Parallel Step Execution
Parallel step execution begins with which of the following blocks?
A) Handler
HANDLER
B) Step
STEP
C) Synchronization
D) Transition
SYNC
TRANSITION
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
Parallel
Parallelstep
stepexecution
executionbegins
beginswith
withaa
You must Synchronization
answer the question
before
block.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Topics
Clear
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• SCM Branching and Looping
• SCM Parallel Execution
• SCM Exception Handlers

• SCM Retry Option
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Modules - Exception Handlers
Honeywell
• Exception handlers are transitions and steps that run only after specified
conditions have been met
• An SCM can have multiple handlers but only one handler of each type
may be active at any given time
• Handler types, in priority order, are:
– Abort
– Stop
– Hold
Handler priority
– Restart
– Interrupt
– Check
– Main
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
13
Sequential Control Modules - Exception Handlers
Honeywell
• Handlers can be classified into three categories:
– Internal (Null, Edit)
– Normal (Main, Check, Interrupt)
– Abnormal (Restart, Stop, Hold, Abort)
CHECK
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
MAIN
HOLD
STOP
RESTART
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
INTERRUPT
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Interrupt Handler
Honeywell
• Interrupts the activity of the main handler, acting like a subroutine of the
main handler
• When it completes, the program activity returns to the last step in the
main handler that had the Update Restart Address option ON
Used for normal process handling
Example: Making tomato soup –
tomatoes have an unknown cook time
due to variations in water content
Interrupt trigger condition - viscosity < 55
Handler - heat till viscosity > 60
HOLD
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
CHECK
Interrupt
MAIN
STOP
RESTART
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Hold and Restart Handlers
• The hold handler preempts the activity of the main and/or interrupt
handlers.
– The stop and abort handlers can preempt the hold handler.
– From the hold handler you can go to the restart, stop, or abort handler.
• The restart handler can only be initiated from the held state.
– It returns the activity to the main/interrupt handler at the last step with the
Update Restart Address checked.
CHECK
MAIN
Hold
Restart
STOP
INTERRUPT
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Used for an abnormal process condition
Example: Loss of steam
Hold trigger condition - wax temperature < 120
Handler – pump tank contents to preheat tank
Restart – preheat tank temperature > 125
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Restart Address
Program execution will begin at the last checked Update
Restart Address (step) when returning from a interrupt or
hold/restart handler call.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Abort Handler
•
•
•
Preempts the activity of the main, interrupt, restart, hold, or stop handlers
Cannot be preempted
From the abort handler, you can only return to the check handler.
Used for an abnormal process condition
Example: milk overheated
Abort trigger condition – milk temperature > 198
Handler – dump tanks to waste
CHECK
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
MAIN
HOLD
STOP
Abort
RESTART
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
INTERRUPT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Stop Handler
Honeywell
• Preempts the activity of the main/interrupt, restart, or hold handler
• Abort handler can preempt the stop handler.
• From the stop handler, you can go automatically to the abort or check
handler or by command to the hold handler.
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
CHECK
MAIN
HOLD
INTERRUPT
Stop
RESTART
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Check Handler
• The SCM executes the check handler just before entering the IDLE
state.
• On initial entry to the SCM, the check handler is executed as soon as
the SCM is activated.
• The SCM also returns to the check handler after a RESET command or
when the conditions for the check handler are met after the stop handler,
main handler, or abort handler is completed.
• A configured check handler can be used to initialize process equipment
and/or reset values for a new activity.
Check
Example:
Reset totalizers, historize values, etc.
MAIN
INTERRUPT
This drawing does
not show all
possible paths
HOLD
STOP
RESTART
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Exception Handlers
All of these are abnormal handlers except:
A) Abort
B) Hold
CHECK
C) Stop
MAIN
D) Main
HOLD
INTERRUPT
STOP
RESTART
ABORT
Incorrect.
Correct!
All
Allare
areabnormal
abnormalhandlers
handlers
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
except "Main".
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Topics
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• SCM Branching and Looping
• SCM Parallel Execution
• SCM Exception Handlers
• SCM Retry Option

SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Clear
Honeywell
Retry Option
• Starting in R400, a new
configuration option has been
added: Retry Option
– Specifies the number of retries
a step block will perform for a
failed step output
– Available on the main tab of
the SCM/RCM
– Cannot be changed in
monitoring
RetryN – N defines number of
retries for a failed output
Default – Performs endless retries
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
23
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Affect Of RETRYOPT In Various Operational Scenarios
Honeywell
Operational Scenario /
RETRYOPT
Default
Retry0
Impact of output errors on
normal execution
(MODE=AUTO)
Step never
completes as long as
at least one output
has an error
Step completes
immediately after all
outputs are processed
one time, regardless of
their success.
Step completes after N failed retries or after
success , whichever comes first.
Automatic recovery of
output and step if Retries
have not Expired
Step will always
recover automatically
if the condition
causing the output
store error has been
corrected (e.g.
destination had
wrong MODEATTR
and MODEATTR
was changed to
PROGRAM )
Not applicable
Step will recover automatically if the condition
causing the output store error has been
corrected (e.g. destination had wrong
MODEATTR and MODEATTR was changed
to PROGRAM ) , while retries have not
expired.
Operator can bypass
the output. This will
cause the step to
complete ( if no other
errors are present ).
Not required. Bypassing
will have no effect.
Automatic recovery of
output and step if Retries
have expired
How can an operator
work around failed
outputs
(MODE=AUTO)
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
RetryN ( N > 0 )
Step will not automatically recover from errors
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Bypassing the outputs is possible as long as
the Retries of the outputs are not expired.
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Summary
Honeywell
• Functionality you may add to an SCM includes:
which occurs at a step and allows the SCM to take different
– Branching,
paths based on the first true transition found
step execution, which begins and ends with a synchronization (sync)
– Parallel
block
• The end synchronization block starts one or several new threads
• When all the preceding parallel paths complete execution.
handlers, which are transitions and steps that run only after
– Exception
specified conditions have been met
supports a Retry Option, wherein a SCM will retry for specified number
– SCM
of times before declaring a particular Step output / Step as failed
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Identify SCM Programming Techniques
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Explain the Operation of SCMs
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about the
operation of SCMs.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you
will be able to:
– Describe the recipe and history data
that can be stored for an SCM
– Explain the process an SCM follows
when it is activated
– Describe the operation of an SCM as it
appears in the station chart tab
– Identify the SCM execution modes
– Identify the SCM event options
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
SCM Recipes and History
SCM Activation and Operation
SCM Modes and Event Options
SCM Force and Bypass operations
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Recipes
• A maximum of 50 recipe values can be stored for an SCM
• Recipe data can include:
– Descriptors
– SP, PV access locks
– Scaling options
– High and low limits
– Default values
– Display and print options
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
•
•
•
•
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - History
• A maximum of 50 history parameter values can be stored for an SCM.
• Process data can be collected and stored during SCM operation.
• History data will include:
– Parameter descriptor
– Parameter types
– Parameter value
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: SCM Recipes and History
Process data can be collected and
stored during SCM operation:
A) Using a maximum of 50
history parameters
B) Using a maximum of 500
parameters
C) To send information to the
SCM prior to execution
D) To upload recipe values
when an SCM runs to
completion
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Yes!
No.
Process
data
data can
can
be
collected
collected
and
and
YouProcess
must answer
thebe
question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did
You
not
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
stored during
SCM
operation
using
a
continuing
maximum of 50 history parameters.
Click anywhere to continue.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Clear
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• SCM Recipes and History
• SCM Activation and Operation
• SCM Modes and Event Options
• SCM Force and Bypass operations
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
33
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - SCM Activation
INACTIVE
RESUME
(1st State After Download)
ACTIVE
IDLE
RESET
START
RESET
RUNNING
ABORT
RESET
COMPLETE
INTERRUPT
INTERRUPTING
INACTIVE
STOP
STOPPED
RESET
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Explain the Operation of SCMs
HOLD
VALIDATED
ABORTED
RESTART
HOLD
STOP
ABORT
HELD
ABORT
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
EXP2001R400
Explain the Operation
- EPKS CEE
of SCMs
R400
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization
Honeywell
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Transition Blocks
Entity
Representation
Color
Description
Transition
Condition
White
False Condition
Transition
Condition
Green
True Condition
Transition
Condition
Red
Communication
Error
Transition Block
Grey
Execution pending
Transition Block
Green
Under Execution
Transition Block
Blue
Successfully
executed
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Modules - Chart Visualization
Honeywell
• Step Blocks
Representation
Step Output
Step Output
Step Output
Step Output
Step Block
Step Block
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Color
Description
Green
Under Execution
Blue
Successfully
Executed
Red
Communication
Error
Yellow
Out of Range
Operation
Green
Under Execution
Dark Green
Successfully
Executed
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: SCM Activation and Operation
Which statement is false? When
operating an SCM, you must always:
A) Reset to return to Idle
B) Return to Idle before Inactive
C) Invoke an exception handler
from Running
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
Thefalse
false
statementisis""When
When
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:statement
operating an SCM, you must always invoke
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
didexception
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
an
handler
from
running".
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Clear
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
Entity
Honeywell
Topics
• SCM Recipes and History
• SCM Activation and Operation
• SCM Modes and Event Options
• SCM Force and Bypass operations
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Sequential Control Modules - Modes
•
•
•
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Execution Modes
– Automatic
• Run to “Complete”, with normal interventions
– Semi-automatic
• Pause after each step, wait for Resume command
and execute the next step
• Obeys Transitions
– Single step
• Pause after each step, wait for Resume command
and execute the selected Target Step(s)
• Ignores Transitions
– Safe step
• Like Single step, but allows “jumping” only to predefined areas
Manual Mode stops SCM execution
Normal Mode used with operator or GUS keyboard NORM
key to go to an SCM’s configured execution mode
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Sequential Control Modules - Event Options
• SCM Alarm and Event tab:
• Step Alarm and Event tab:
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: SCM Modes
Which mode pauses the SCM after each step,
waits for the resume command and, upon resuming,
completes the next step?
A) Automatic
B) Normal
D) Semi-Automatic
C) Single Step
Incorrect. The 'Semi-Automatic'
'Semi-automatic' mode pauses the
Incorrect.
The 'Semi-Automatic'
mode pauses the
The
Your
correct
answer:
is:
SCM
after answer
the completion
of each step and waits
SCM
after
the
completion
of eachbefore
step and waits
Correct
You
must
answer
the
question
for
the
resume
command,
upon
resuming,
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
to
continue
continue
completely
for
the
resume
continuing
completes
the next step.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Clear
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell
Topics
• SCM Recipes and History
• SCM Activation and Operation
• SCM Modes and Event Options
• SCM Force and Bypass operations
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
SCM Transition Condition Force Requests
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• A condition in the SCM transition block can be forced to On or Off, if the
Force Permit flag is ON
• SCM Transition condition Force Permit is used
– To override a false condition, or
– To stop SCM execution when the invoke transition is always true and the
SCM is designed in a continually executing loop
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Transition Force
To force a condition, first Enable the
Force Permit checkbox
Then select an option from
the drop down list:
ToOff : Force to turn OFF
ToOn : Force to turn ON
None : No Force
* Allowed online
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Transition Force Request Status
• Transition condition Force Request state is reflected on that specific
Condition’s properties form
– Execution Status of that condition can be viewed while the SCM is executing
Force
Request set
Execution Status
shows “Bypass”
Indicates Force State
“1” If Forced to turn ON
“0” If Forced to turn OFF
“-” If not Forced
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell
SCM Execution Status Bypass
• SCM Execution Status indicates Bypass if any condition of any transition
is forced (ToOn, or ToOff)
Invoke
Step
Forced
Trans
Step
Trans
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
47
Honeywell
Bypass Cancel Option
• Bypass Cancel Option on SCM Main tab can cancel or clear Transition
Force permit/Force Request conditions
– Applies to all transitions of all handlers contained in SCM
– Can be changed while the SCM is executing
Select the appropriate Bypass Cancel
Option:
None - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are not canceled/cleared
OnSCMReset - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are canceled/cleared on SCM
Reset command
OnTransEnd - Bypassed/forced Transition
Conditions are canceled/cleared when the
Transition evaluation finishes (Transition
changed from Enabled to Disabled state)
* Allowed online
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Step Output Force Request
• Unlike SCM Transition conditions, the SCM STEP Output expressions
cannot be Forced to On or Off
– SCM Step Output can be Skipped
Select Skip to
bypass the
execution of STEP
condition
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Step Force Request – Skip
• If the Step Output processing cannot complete, then using the Force
Request:
– Will let the Step proceed, as if the Output completed immediately and
successfully
– This is most useful for allowing Steps with failed Outputs to proceed
Invoke
Step
Trans
Step
Skip
Output # 1
Output # 2
Output # 3
Trans
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell
Enforce Sequential Order
• Enforce Order Option is configured to enforce how the STEP output
execution order would occur in a Sequential Control Module
– When enforced, the required order is from Output #1, #2 … up to Output #N
• Possible values for the Enforce Order Option are:
– None
– CnfmInstrs
– AllOutputs
• Outputs are always started in the order specified, even if Enforce Order
Option is set to “None”
• Using “AllOutputs” may slow down step execution significantly if the
destination parameters are not in the same controller (for example, peer
controllers or OPC references)
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Enforce Order Option – ‘None’
• All Step output expressions are started in the same cycle, in the order
specified
– Different delays may lead to a different effective order
Delay times of all outputs
will begin at the same
time.
• Confirmable Instructions can be acknowledged randomly in any order
– Step execution will complete only after all Confirmable Instructions are
acknowledged
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Enforce Order Option – ‘CnfmInstrs’
Honeywell
• If CnfmInstrs is selected, the order of Confirmable Instructions is
enforced
– All outputs are started at the same time
• All Output expressions are processed and executed
– Output expressions with Confirmable Instructions must be acknowledged in
a sequential order
Delay times of all nonconfirmable outputs
will begin at the same
time.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Enforce Order Option – ‘AllOutputs’
• Order of all Outputs is enforced; an output is executed only after the
previous output has completed execution including all delays and
instruction confirmations
– Step active time cannot be smaller than the total sum of all output delays
Delay time of each step
output does not begin
until the previous output
completes.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell
Enable Step-level Confirmation of Instructions
• Specifies whether a Step-level confirmation of all Confirmable
Instructions is enabled for the Step
– Step-level confirmation is possible only when this option is selected and
when the Enforce Sequential Order option is not equal to AllOutputs
With ‘CnfmInstrs’ selected
With None selected
In this case, the checkbox
will have to be checked
three times once for each
confirmable instruction.
In this case, the
checkbox will only
have to be
checked once.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• An SCM:
–
Can contain up to 50:
• Sets of recipe parameters, such as descriptors and SP and PV access
locks, which are accessible from the SCM detail display once the SCM is
active.
• History parameters including parameter descriptors, types and values
that are collected and stored during SCM operation.
–
Status is indicated using state descriptors such as inactive, idle, running and
stopped for which specific paths must be followed.
–
Can be viewed and operated from the station chart tab which shows the
status of transitions and steps using colors such as blue which indicates a
transition is complete.
–
Has modes of operation that include automatic, semi-automatic, single step,
manual and normal.
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 1 of 7
Configure a Sequential Control Module (SCM)
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 2 of 7
• Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
•
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 3 of 7
• Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 4 of 7
• Configure SCM Abort Sequence
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 5 of 7
Use a Step to Start another SCM
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
61
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 6 of 7
• Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
VALVE_CHECK
CIRCULATE2
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
26
•
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 7 of 7
• Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
VALVE_CHECK
CIRCULATE2
PROCESS
RUN_PROCESS
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Explain the Operation of SCMs
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure a Sequential Control Module - Basic and Configure
Sequential Control Modules - Advanced lab exercises
SCMs - Programming Techniques, Operation
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Explain the Operation of SCMs
4/13/2012
Topic: Sequential Control Module - Lab
Contents
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control ....................................................................................3
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition ..............................................................................5
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence ....................................................................................................19
Use a Step to Start Another SCM........................................................................................................25
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow ...........................................................................................31
27
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox ...........................................................................................35
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Objective
•
Add five flag function blocks and one numeric function block to the existing Flags CM
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
Introduction
In this lab, you will add five flag function blocks and one numeric function block to the existing
FLAGS CM for later use in the SCM program labs.
NOTE: You will be given the following:
Action to be taken
FLAGS
Add five Flag Function Blocks and one Numeric Function Blocks to
the existing Flags CM.
27
BLOCK NAME
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Add Function Blocks for SCM Program Control
Procedure
Add Function Blocks to FLAGS

Action
Step
1
Open the Chart view of the CM called FLAGS in project window.
2
Add five Flags and one Numeric to the existing FLAGS CM.
Name the new flags P_START, F_MESSAGE, READY, P_ABORT and
PROCESS.
Name the numeric FLOW.
Save and close FLAGS.
Load and activate FLAGS.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Objective
•
Configure recipe values for later use in setting minimum flow level
•
Configure the invoke transition
•
Configure a step to turn on the Warning message
•
Use a transition to check the Ready flag
•
Configure a verify step, for later use, to allow the SCM to take separate paths
•
Configure a Sync to allow the SCM to follow parallel paths
•
Check and verify SCM program operation to this point
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs built and loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the control
strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with simulation spread sheet loaded
•
Previous SCM lab in this section complete, tested, and verified
Introduction
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM features.
•
Write a sequence that will do a fan switch check.
•
Write and verify that the SCM will follow either of two routes based on the fan switch
selection
•
Use a set of Sync blocks to set up parallel sequence paths
•
NOTE: You will configure the following:
BLOCK NAME
SCM_D100
4/13/2012
27
In the first portion of this SCM program you will:
Action to be taken
Write a step sequence to start circulation, and then initiate full process
flow.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Create a SCM
Action
 Step
1
a. Build a new SCM into your project.
b. Open the SCM in project chart view.
c.
Open the configuration parameters window for this SCM.
d. Enter the following details on the Main tab:
2
Name:
SCM_D100
Item Name:
SCM_D100_Item
Description:
Circulate / Process
Parent Asset:
C11
On the Recipe Tab, right-click in the blank recipe area and select Append Row).
Add three rows (recipe values) and configure them as follows:
Index
Parameter Descriptor
1
CIRCULATE_LOW_FLOW
2
3
Target Hi
Target
Value
Target lo
47
100
0
CIRCULATE_LOW_FLOW_2
850
1750
0
CIRCULATE_LOW_FLOW_3
1
6
0
Accept the defaults for any other remaining parameters.
Click OK.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
3
a. Add one condition to the Invoke Transition.
b. Open the Transition for edit.
Enter the following:
Transition Name:
Start_Check
Transition Description:
Start Check
Condition 1 description:
Check Start Flag
Condition 1:
FLAGS.P_START.PVFL = 1
Primary Gate:
Connect
Secondary Gate:
Connect
Click OK
Condition
27
Description
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
4
a. Drag a STEP from the library into your project.
b. Add two Step outputs.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
M_ON
Step Description:
Message On
Output 1 Description:
ABORT FLAG OFF
Output 1 Expression:
FLAGS.P_ABORT.PVFL := 0
Output 2 Description:
START MESSAGE ON
Output 2 Expression:
FLAGS.F_MESSAGE.PVFL := 1
Click OK.
Wire the Transition above to this Step.
ATTENTION
From now on wire the Steps and Transitions, as
needed.
Output Expressions
Output Descriptions
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
5
a. Drag a Transition from the library into your project.
b. Enter the following:
Transition Name:
Check_Ready
Transition Description:
Check_Ready
Condition:
Create an expression that checks to see if FLAGS.READY is on.
Hint: See The Start_Check Transition in an earlier step for an example expression.
Description:
Check Ready Flag
Primary Gate:
Connect
Secondary Gate:
27
Connect
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
6
a. Drag a new STEP into your project.
b. Enter the following:
Step Name:
VERIFY
Step Description:
VERIFY
ATTENTION
Use this Step only as a decision point. No expression
needed. One branch will continue to follow the process
and the other branch will lead to an abort sequence.
7
a. Select the Block Pins Tab.
b. Add a second NEXTCOMP[2] pin at the Bottom.
c.
Select the Block Preferences tab.
d. Check the View Pin Labels option.
e. Click OK.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
 Step
8
Action
a. Drag a Sync block into your project under the VERIFY step.
b. Wire from VERIFY NEXTCOMP[1] pin to the input of the Sync block.
27
c. Leave all parameters on the Sync block as default.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
9
a. Drag two new Transitions into your project. Arrange them side by side under the
Sync block. (See Step 13.)
b. Add four Expressions to each transition.
c.
Enter the following in the left transition:
Transition Name:
CHECK_FANS
Transition Description:
CHECK_FANS
Create four conditions as described below:
Condition Description:
CHECK HS14A(through D).FLAGA = ON (Add similar descriptions to all four
expressions).
Condition:
Create four expressions that check to see if
11_HS14A(through D).FLAGA.PVFL = ON (=1).
Primary Gate:
AND (all four expressions to P1)
Secondary Gate:
Connect
Click OK.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
10
Enter the following in the right transition:
Transition Name:
CHECK_FANS2
Transition Description:
CHECK_FANS2
Create four conditions as described below:
Condition Description:
CHECK HS14E(through H).FLAGA = ON (Add similar descriptions to all four
expressions).
Condition:
Create four expressions that check to see if
11_HS14E(through H).FLAGA.PVFL = ON (=1)
Primary Gate:
AND (all four expressions to P1)
Secondary Gate:
Connect
Click OK
11
a) Add a step under each of the transitions.
b) Add one output to each step.
c) Enter the following in the left step:
Step Name:
M_OFF
Step Description:
MESSAGE OFF
27
Output 1 Expression:
Write an expression that will turn Flags.F_MESSAGE OFF
Output 1 Description:
Warning message flag off
d) Enter the following in the right step:
Step Name:
S_FLAG_O
Step Description:
START FLAG OFF
Output 1 Expression:
Write an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_START OFF
Output 1 Description:
Start Flag Off
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
12
a. Drag another Sync block into your project under the two Steps.
b. Make the name of this Sync block: SYNC_1
c.
Remove NEXTCOMP[2] pin from the output of this Sync block.
d. Leave all parameters on the Sync block as default.
13
14
Wire the function blocks together, as shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
At this point, your SCM should look similar to the following:
27
14
TIP
For easier branch viewing zoom out to 50%.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
15
Check the program.
a. Save the SCM, assign it to your CEE (CEESCEFB61 or SIM_CEEC300) and load
SCM_D100.
b. Select the monitoring tab and make SCM_D100 active.
c.
Make sure all CMs are loaded and active.
d. Verify the simulation spread sheet is running.
e. In Station, call up the graphic D_100.
16
Change the CIRCULATE combo box to ON (this sets Flags.P_Start.PV = ON. This also
causes PVFL to be ON which makes the condition for the invoke transition of SCM_D100 to
be true).
At the bottom of the display you should see that the Active Handler is SCM_D100.Main and
the Active Step is SCM_D100.M_ON.
You should also see the Warning message in the lower right corner of the display.
Click the Fan Control button.
You should now see the Fan Control Panel pop up display.
Leave any one fan switch in the OFF position and turn the rest of the fan switches to ON
position.
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
17
Select the SAFE combo box and change it to ON (this sets Flags.Ready.PV = ON. This
also causes PVFL to be ON).
The Program Active Step should now be SCM_D100.VERIFY.
18
Open Control Builder and view SCM_D100 in Monitoring mode and perform the following:
•
Verify that there are no red Steps or Transitions.
•
Verify that all the expressions in the CHECK_FANS and CHECK_FANS2
Transitions are green, except for the one that matches the fan switch that was left
in the OFF position.
19
Turn the other fan on and verify that the SCM completes.
20
If necessary to enforce understanding, run the SCM several more times.
•
From Station, on the D_100 display, turn both the CIRCULATE and the SAFE flags
OFF.
•
In Control Builder, change the state of SCM_D100 to IDLE.
•
Change the Mode Attribute of SCM_D100 to Operator and change the state to
IDLE.
•
Run the program
27
To prepare the system, and run the SCM again:
Run the SCM with at least one fan switch off.
The expected result is that the SCM stops at the VERIFY Step. (Only the first 3
function blocks will be blue.)
Run the SCM with all fan switches on.
The expected result is that the SCM will complete execution through the last Sync
block. (Eight function blocks will be blue including the parallel transitions and steps.)
Fix any encountered problems.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Specify SCM Recipe Values and Invoke Transition
Action
 Step
21
When satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE and SAFE combo boxes to
OFF.
In Control Builder, change the state of SCM_D100 to Idle, and inactivate it.
Change the Mode Attribute of SCM_D100 to Operator and change the state to IDLE.
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Objective
•
Configure an abort sequence
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
•
All previous SCM labs in this section completed, tested, and verified
Introduction
This part of the program will execute an abort sequence.
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM
features.
In this portion of the SCM, you will add programming to turn off the Warning message and
turn on an Abort Message
27
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Build an SCM Abort Sequence
Action
 Step
1
The steps in this lab will have you:
Add a set of steps and transitions to begin a safety shut down sequence. In a
later module, you will complete this action by adding an Abort Handler to this
branch of the SCM.
Add the Abort steps and transitions to the right of the main program.
Add other steps and transitions (not the abort steps and transitions) under the
SYNC_1 block.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Action
 Step
2
Open SCM_D100 in project view.
ATTENTION
Place this next Transition to the right of your main
program, as shown in the diagram above.
Drag a transition from the library into your project.
Add a condition to the transition.
Enter the following:
Transition Name:
DUMMY
Transition Description:
DUMMY
Condition Description:
DUMMY
Condition Expression:
1=1
Primary Gate:
Connect
Secondary Gate:
Connect
You must add a transition here because the sequence branched at a step. In
this case, there was no useful action needed by this transition, so a dummy
was used.
4/13/2012
Connect and wire the NEXTCOMP[2] pin on the ‘Verify’ step to the Dummy
transition you just added – as shown below:
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
3
21
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Action
 Step
4
Drag a STEP from the library into your project and place it under your Dummy
transition.
Add two Step outputs.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
M_OFF_FAIL_ON
Step Description:
M_OFF_FAIL_ON
Min Wait Time:
10
ATTENTION
Min Wait Times and Max Active Times are given in
execution cycles. In this case, if the SCM scan time is
one second, then Min Wait Time would be 10 seconds.
You may wish to adjust this parameter to a longer time
during the check out procedure.
Max Active Time:
240
Output 1 Description:
TURN WARNING MESSAGE OFF
Output 1 Expression:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.F_MESSAGE OFF.
Output 2 Description:
TURN ABORT MESSAGE ON
Output 2 Expression:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_ABORT ON.
22
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Action
 Step
5
Add another dummy transition below the M_OFF_FAIL_ON Step.
Transition Name:
DUMMY2
Transition Description:
DUMMY2
6
Drag a STEP from the library into your project.
Add one Step output.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
ABORT_OFF
Step Description:
ABORT_OFF
Output 1 Description:
Turn Abort Message OFF
Output 1 Expression:
Create an expression to turn off FLAGS.P_ABORT.
7
Program check:
Complete the wiring of the steps and transitions.
Save, close and load SCM_D100.
Select the monitoring tab and make SCM_D100 active.
Make sure all the other CMs are loaded and active.
Check the FLAGS CM and make sure all the contained flag function blocks are
off.
27
In Station call up the graphic D_100.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Configure an SCM Abort Sequence
Action
 Step
8
Run the SCM as you did in the previous program check.
Verify the following:
−
When all fan switches are ON, the SCM executes the “normal” path
(through SYNCA).
−
When one or more of the fan switches are OFF, the SCM executes the
“abort” path (we just added).
After the sequence runs with at least one fan switch in the OFF position, the
message will indicate FAN FAILURE and PROGRAM ABORT. The Active
Step will also be blank.
ATTENTION
The Fan Failure message will disappear after a few
seconds. The Active Step will also be blank.
9
When satisfied with your program:
From the D_100 graphic in Station, set the CIRCULATE and SAFE combo
boxes to OFF.
Change SCM_Pressure Mode Attribute to Operator, and change the state to
Idle.
10
24
Inactivate SCM_D100.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Objective
•
Configure SCM_D100 to start the SCM_Pressure program
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the control
strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
•
All previous SCM labs in this section completed, tested, and verified
Introduction
In this section of the program, you will modify SCM_D100 to cause it to start SCM_Pressure (the first
program you wrote).
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM features.
Change the MODEATTR of SCM_Pressure to PROGRAM, and then start SCM_Pressure
•
Check to see if 11_PC15 has reached 1240 Kpag
•
Change the MODEATTR and MODE of selected points to be used later
•
Check to see if 11_FC20 is closed
27
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Continue with the Main Sequence
Action
 Step
1
For now, we are done with the Abort branch of the SCM.
You will add these next steps and transitions under the SYNC_1 block as
shown below.
2
ATTENTION
Write expressions to start the program you built in a
previous module.
Drag a transition from the library onto the project chart view of SCM_D100.
Enter the following:
Transition Name:
CHECK_IDLE
Transition Description:
Your choice
Condition:
Create an expression that checks to see if SCM_PRESSURE.STATE
is in the IDLE state.
Primary Gate:
As necessary
Secondary Gate:
As necessary
26
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Action
 Step
3
Drag a STEP from the library into your project.
Position it under the CHECK_IDLE transition.
Add two Step Outputs.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
START_PRESS_P
Step Description:
START_PRESS_P
Output 1 Expression:
Create an expression that will change SCM_PRESSURE.MODEATTR
to PROGRAM.
Output 1 Description:
SCM_Pressure Mode Attribute to PROGRAM
Output 2 Expression:
Create an expression that will change SCM_PRESSURE.COMMAND
to Start.
Output 2 Description:
SCM_Pressure Start command
4
Drag a transition from the library into your project.
NOTE: One of the last actions that SCM_PRESSURE performs is changing
the setpoint of PC15 to 1240 KPag.
SCM_D100 should check that SCM_Pressure ran successfully by checking
that PC15 PV is close to 1240.
Transition Name:
27
CHECK_PC15
Create a transition condition verifies that SCM_Pressure has completed
executing by checking that PC15’s PV is between 1230 and 1250 KPag.
Add expressions as needed.
All other values:
Your choice
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Action
 Step
5
Drag a STEP from the library into your project.
Add 16 Step Outputs.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
CIRCULATE
Create the expressions to do the following:
Change the MODEATTR of FC28, FC20, LC16, HC41, HC44 to PROGRAM
Change the MODE of FC28, FC20, LC16, HC41, HC44 to MAN
Change the OP of FC28, FC20, LC16, HC41, HC44to 0.0
Change FLAGS.FLOW.PV to 20.0
Enforce Order Option:
AllOutputs
All other values:
Your choice
ATTENTION
These points will be used in a later module.
6
Drag a transition from the library into your project.
Add expressions, as needed.
Transition Name:
VALVE_CHECK
Create a Transition that assures FC20 is closed.
All other values:
Your choice
7
Wire all the transitions and steps.
8
Prepare to check your program:
From the D_100 graphic in Station, set the CIRCULATE and SAFE to OFF.
Turn all of the fans ON.
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
Put SCM_PRESSURE Mode Attribute to Operator and the State in Idle.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
Action
 Step
9
Program Check:
Save, load, activate, and run SCM_D100.
Call the display D_100 in Station.
If one or more Fan switches are in the OFF position, your program should
follow the Abort sequence.
If all the fan switches are ON, then your program should start the
SCM_PRESSURE program (Assuming it is in IDLE and ready to go). Next, the
program should execute the CM changes indicated in Step 5, and then end
after FC20 is closed.
Fix any problems you encounter.
ATTENTION
It can take quite a while for some points to change
values due to tuning constants and the way the
simulation is implemented.
10
When you are satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE and SAFE
combo boxes to OFF.
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
27
Put SCM_PRESSURE Mode Attribute to Operator and the State in Idle.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use a Step to Start Another SCM
This page was intentionally left blank.
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Objective
•
Configure this SCM to use recipe values to set a minimum flow
Prerequisites:
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the control
strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
•
All previous SCM labs in this section completed, tested, and verified
27
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Turn Circulation on and Set Flow Level
Action
 Step
1
Open SCM_D100 in project view.
Drag a STEP from the library into your project and place it under the
VALVE_CHECK Transition.
Add 15 Step Outputs
Add a NEXTCOMP[2] pin to the bottom of this step.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
CIRCULATE2
Create the expressions to do the following:
Change the MODEATTR of AC12, FC28, FC19, PC15, PC16 to PROGRAM
Change the MODE of AC12, FC28, PC15, PC16 to AUTO
Change the MODE of FC19 to CAS
Change the SP of AC12 to SCM_D100.RECTARGET[3] (This is the Recipe
Target Value number 3)
Change the SPs of PC15 and PC16 to a value that is equal to Recipe Target
Value 2 plus 700.0 (Do this math within the Step Output expression.
Do not change the recipe Target Value.)
Turn HS62.FLAGA ON
Turn HS68.FLAGA OFF
Enforce Order Option:
AllOutputs
All other values:
Your choice
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
Action
 Step
2
Wire the output of CIRCULATE2 NEXTCOMP[2] pin back to the input of the
VALVE_CHECK Transition. You will also need to temporarily wire the
NEXTCOMP[1] pin back to the input of the VALVE_CHECK Transition so that
you can do the program check in the next step.
VALVE_CHECK
CIRCULATE2
3
Program Check List:
Save, load, activate and run your program.
If one or more fan switches are in the OFF position, your program should
follow the Abort sequence.
If all the fan switches are ON, then your program should start the
SCM_PRESSURE program (assuming it is in IDLE and ready to go). Next, the
program should execute the CM changes indicated in the Circulate step.
4
27
Once your program completes the CIRCULATE2 Step, it will branch back to
the VALVE_CHECK Transition continuously. This allows you to set the
circulate flow amounts by adjusting the Recipe Target Values.
When satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE and SAFE
combo boxes to OFF.
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
Put SCM_PRESSURE Mode Attribute to Operator and the State in Idle.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Use Recipe Values to Set Minimum Flow
This page was intentionally left blank.
34
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Objective
•
Configure the SCM to accept input values from the Process Flow textbox on the D_100
graphic
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all required CMs loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server (This is required at a later time to check the control
strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
•
All previous SCM labs in this section completed, tested, and verified
Introduction
In this section of the SCM, you will write programming to tie the value in the Process Flow textbox
(on the D_100 graphic) to the SPs of several controllers.
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM
features.
Create algorithms that convert the Process Flow textbox to a SP value in engineering unit,
for several controllers.
27
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Add the Process Sequence
Action
 Step
1
Open the SCM_D100 project chart view.
Delete the wire connection from CIRCULATE2 NEXTCOMP[1] to the input of
the VALVE_CHECK transition. Leave the NEXTCOMP[2] connection as is.
Drag a transition from the library into your project and place it under the
CIRCULATE2 step.
Add expressions as needed.
Transition Name:
PROCESS
Create a transition that checks to see if FLAGS.PROCESS is ON.
All other values:
Your choice
2
On the D-100 display, is a field named “Process Flow” (the actual parameter is
Flags.Flow.PV). The operator can enter a “Process Flow” from 0 – 100. This
value represents the percent of range in which the process will operate. For
example, if the operator enters 75, the SP of a tag will be changed to 75% of
range. This step, and the next step will accomplish that.
a. Drag a STEP from the library into your project and place it under the
PROCESS Transition.
b. Add Step Outputs as necessary
(Count the number of expressions required by this step (2) AND
the next step (4).)
c.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
RUN_PROCESS
Create the expressions to do the following:
Change the MODEATTR of FC20, LC16 to PROGRAM
Change the MODE of FC20 to CAS
Change the MODE of LC16 to AUTO
Turn HS68 FlagA ON. (Use 11_HS68.FlagA.PVFL)
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
 Step
3
Action
Create expressions which will calculate values based on “Process Flow”
(Flags.Flow.PV) as shown below:
PC15 and PC16 are reverse acting controllers. Use the following expressions
to calculate their SPs:
11_PC15.PIDA.SP := (1050.0-(11_PC15.PIDA.PVEUHI11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_PC15.PIDA.PVEULO
11_PC16.PIDA.SP := (1050.0-(11_PC16.PIDA.PVEUHI11_PC16.PIDA.PVEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_PC16.PIDA.PVEULO
FC28 and LC16 are direct acting controllers. Use the following expressions to
calculate their SPs:
11_FC28.PIDA.SP := ((11_FC28.PIDA.PVEUHI11_FC28.PIDA.PVEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_FC28.PIDA.PVEULO
11_LC16.PIDA.SP := ((11_LC16.PIDA.PVEUHI11_LC16.PIDA.PVEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_LC16.PIDA.PVEULO
Calculate AC12 SP based on the SP High and SP Low limits (rather than the
range of the tag). Use the following expression to calculate the SP:
11_AC12.PIDA.SP := ((11_AC12.PIDA.SPHILM11_AC12.PIDA.SPLOLM)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_AC12.PIDA.SPLOLM
27
Use the following expressions to vary the OP of 11_HC41 and 11_HC44 in
proportion to FLAGS.FLOW:
11_HC41.AUTOMANA.OP := ((11_HC41.AUTOMANA.XEUHI11_HC41.AUTOMANA.XEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_HC41.AUTOMANA.XEULO
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.OP := ((11_HC44.AUTOMANA.XEUHI11_HC44.AUTOMANA.XEULO)*(FLAGS.FLOW.PV/100.0)) +
11_HC44.AUTOMANA.XEULO
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
 Step
4
Action
Wire the RUN_PROCESS NEXTCOMP[1] pin back to the input of the
PROCESS Transition.
VALVE_CHECK
CIRCULATE2
PROCESS
RUN_PROCESS
38
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
Action
 Step
5
Program Check:
Save, load, activate, and run your program.
If one or more fan switches are in the OFF position, your program should
follow the Abort sequence.
If all the fan switches are ON, then your program should start the
SCM_PRESSURE program (assuming it is in IDLE and ready to go).
Once your program completes the CIRCULATE2 step, it will branch back to
the VALVE_CHECK transition continuously until the PROCESS flag is turned
ON.
When your program reaches the CIRCULATE2 step, select and change
PROCESS combo box to ON.
You should now be able to select and change the amount of flow in the
PROCESS FLOW textbox in the lower right of the D_100 graphic, and see the
process respond accordingly.
Set Process Flow to 30%. Verify that the SPs and OPs of the tags were
calculated and stored successfully:
PC15.SP and PC16.SP = 1435
FC28.SP = 46.50
LC16.SP = 30
AC12.SP = 0.6
HC41.OP and HC44.OP = 30
(look on Debutanizer_123)
Set Process Flow to 50%. Verify that the SPs and OPs of the tags were
calculated and stored successfully:
PC15.SP and PC16.SP = 1225
FC28.SP = 77.50
27
LC16.SP = 50
AC12.SP = 1.0
HC41.OP and HC44.OP = 50
(look on Debutanizer_123)
Try setting the Process Flow to other values. Setting the flow above 75% will
put a flame in the Flare Cam screen. Setting the flow above 95% will cause
the compressor to explode.
6
When you are satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE, SAFE, and
PROCESS combo boxes to OFF.
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
Put SCM_PRESSURE Mode Attribute to Operator and the State in Idle.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
Sequential Control Module - Lab
Interface an SCM with a Graphic Textbox
This page was intentionally left blank.
40
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Describe Interactive Instructions
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to
operate and configure Interactive
Instructions for a Sequential
Control Module (SCM)
• At the conclusion of this lesson,
you will know how to:
– Navigate Table View
28
– Operate an SCM Using Table
View
– Configure an SCM for informed
operation
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Navigating Table View

• Operating an SCM in Table View

• Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View

Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
Honeywell
Chart View and Table View
• Chart View
• Table View
Interactive Instructions
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Chart or Table
View Toggle
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Table View Structure
SCM’s Phase,
Step/ Transition
Detail Pane
Summary
Pane
Key
Parameters
Pane
Minitrend
Pane
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Additional
Detail Pane
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Table View
Control Builder table view:
A) Is used by operators to sign on to
Experion
B) Is an SCM as viewed in a
spreadsheet
C) Is another way to view and
operate SCMs
28
D) Requires video camera
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
Incorrect.
Correct!
The
The
Table
Tableis:
view
viewisisanother
anotherway
wayto
toview
viewand
and
You must answer
the question
before
operate
SCMs.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Clear
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
•
Navigating Table View
• Operating an SCM in Table View

•
Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Interactive Instructions
7
Interactive Instructions – Operation Buttons
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Expand/Collapse Instructions
Chart View
Bypass Output
Automatic Tracking
Instruction Filter
Go to Selected Step
Completed
Filter
SCM Command
Flow/List View
Print Option
Interactive Instructions
Filters and Settings
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Interactive Instruction - Table View (Flow/List View)
• List View
• Flow View
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell
List/Flow View selection
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Honeywell
28
Interactive Instructions – Step Symbols
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interactive Instructions – Step Symbols
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Step and Transition Box Colors
Step Execution Status (Box Color):
White – Step is not yet started
Green – Step is executing
Teal – Step complete, waiting for trailing
transition
Dark blue – Step has been executed
Yellow – Step execution has started and
warning exists
Red – Step execution has started and
error exists
Transition Status (Box Color):
Magenta – Some outputs were not
completed when the step was left
White – Transition is not yet active or
complete
Green – This transition is currently
active
Red – an error exists in one of the
transition conditions
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interactive Instruction – Table View Details
Step outputs
show in details
pane
Click on
step
Confirmable
Instruction
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interactive Instructions – Details
28
Current Parameter
Monitor Task
Parameter
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interactive Instruction – Entry Value –Station view
Trend
Current
Parameter
for Step
Output
Indication for
parameters
configured in
Trend with
color legends.
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Interactive Instruction – Operator Interaction
• Warnings, Notes, Instructions, Expressions and Comments
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
•
Navigating Table View
•
Operating an SCM in Table View
• Configuring an SCM for Informed Operation in Table View

Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
17
Interactive Instructions – Main Tab Step Configuration
Honeywell
28
Step Configuration Main Tab
•Edit Warning/Note
•Enforce Order
•Step-Level Confirmation
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions – Step Settings Configuration
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab
Honeywell
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Output Instruction Tab
-Instruction Type
-Target Parameter
-Current Parameter
-Entry Parameter
-Monitor Task
-Role
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
28
Interactive Instructions – Output Instruction Tab - Trend
Honeywell
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions – Output Advanced Tab
Honeywell
• Output Advanced Tab
–
–
–
–
Target value description
Maximum value of target
Minimum value of target
Engineering units descriptor
for target
– Description of current value
– Engineering units descriptor
for current value
– Description for entry value
– Maximum value of entry
value
– Minimum value of entry
value
– Engineering units descriptor
for entry value
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Interactive Instructions – HTML Editor
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HTML Editor
• Edit in HTML or Text
• Appearance
• Font
• Color
• Size
• Link to:
• SOP
• Intranet
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: SCM Expressions
SCM Expressions:
A) Cannot be used with a confirmable message
B) Cannot be used to command an SP message
C) Are not permitted to used in a step output
D) Must ask a question
Your
The
correct
answer:
answer
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
SCM
SCMExpressions
Expressions
cannot
cannotbe
beused
usedwith
withaa
You must answer
the question
before
confirmable
message.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Submit
Clear
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• Table View:
–
–
–
Is another way to view and control an SCM
Allows the operator to interact with the SCM by giving the SCM commands,
bypassing outputs and confirming outputs
Is configured in control builder on the Main and Output tabs in Step function
blocks
28
–
Can be viewed and operated in Control Builder
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 1 of 4
• Configure Target, Entry and Current Parameters
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
27
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 2 of 4
• Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 3 of 4
• Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Lab Examples – 4 of 4
28
• Configure an SCM Check Handler
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Interactive Instructions
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the Configure Target, Entry and Current Parameters and Configure
an SCM Abort Handler, Interrupt Handler and Check Handler lab exercises
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Interactive Instructions
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Interactive Instructions
4/13/2012
Topic: Interactive Instructions
Contents
28
Configure Interactive Instructions ..........................................................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Objective
•
Configure Target and Entry values for Interactive Instructions
•
Configure advanced tabs, trend items, etc.
Prerequisites
•
Experion Server with all required CMs built and loaded
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the Server. (This is required at a later time to check the
control strategy.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spread sheet loaded
•
All previous labs in this section completed, tested, and verified
Introduction
In this module you will configure target, entry, and current values to inform and help the operator to
control the process.
28
The process described in this lab is totally fictitious and created only to demonstrate SCM
features.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Configure SCMs for Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
1
When SCM_D100 reaches the CHECK_PC15 transition, the SCM waits until
11_PC15’s PV is between 1230 and 1250 KPag. It will appear to the operator
that the program is held at the step START_PRESS_P even though it’s the
CHECK_PC15 transition that is causing the wait. This step will configure a
Current Parameter to allow the operator to monitor PC15 PV.
a. Open SCM_D100 in Project view.
b. Configure the Current Parameter of the START_PRESS_P step to
display the PV of 11_PC15 (shown below).
c.
Check the Trend Current Parameter checkbox.
TIP
The ‘Current Description’ and the ‘Current EU
Description’ are automatically filled in.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
 Step
Configure a Warning that explains to the operator what the current value is
and why the program is waiting, at this point.
28
2
Action
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
3
On step CIRCULATE, configure the Current Parameter for step output #12 to
show the PV of 11_FC20 and trend this parameter:
a. Double click on step output #12 of step Circulate.
b. Select the Instruction tab (in the middle of the properties window).
c.
For the Current Parameter, select 11_FC20.PIDA.PV.
d. Check the Trend Current Parameter checkbox.
4
On the same step output, configure a Note to inform the operator that the
SCM is waiting for 11_FC20 PV to reach target value.
a. Click on the Edit Note button.
b. Enter the following text:
The PV of 11_FC20 must be less than 1 before the program
continues.
c.
5
Click OK (to close the note window).
For the step CIRCULATE, select AllOutputs for the Enforce Order option.
a. Select the Main tab.
b. For the Enforce Order option, select AllOutputs.
c.
6
Click OK (to close the step properties window)
On step Circulate2, for the step output which uses SCM_D100.RecTarget[3]
(step 11), configure the Current Parameter:
a. Display the properties of the step Circulate2.
b. Click on the Out. #11 tab.
c.
Select the Instruction tab (in the middle of the properties window).
d. For the Current Parameter, select 11_AC12.PIDA.PV.
e. Check the Trend Current Parameter checkbox.
7
In step Circulate2, find the first step output which uses
SCM_D100.RecTarget[2] (step12) and configure the Current Parameter of
that output to be 11_PC15.PIDA.PV.
Hint: Use the same procedure as the previous step.
8
In step Circulate2, find the second step output which uses
SCM_D100.RecTarget[2] and configure the Current Parameter of that output
to be 11_PC16.PIDA.PV. (step 13)
9
Click OK to close the properties of step Circulate2.
10
In step Circulate2, find the step output which turns on 11_HS62 and configure
the Monitor Task Parameter for that output to be 11_HS62.FLAGA.PVFL.
Hint: Look in the same place where Current Parameter is added.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
11
In step Circulate2, between outputs 14 & 15, add a step output which sends a
message to the operator. The message must require confirmation.
a. Add blank step out between step out #14 and 15 of the Circulate2 step.
b. Double click on the new step.
c.
Select the Instruction tab (in the middle of the properties window).
d. Select Confirm for the Instruction Type.
e. Click the Edit Instruction button.
f.
Enter the following instruction for the operator:
From the D_100 display, turn on the PROCESS flag. Then return to
this display and Confirm this message (by clicking on the
checkbox) for the program to proceed.
g. Click OK (to close the Instruction entry window).
h. Click OK to close the properties of the Circulate2 step.
12
Make the following change to the PROCESS transition:
a. Change this transition to a dummy. (condition 1 = 1)
13
In step Run_Process, find the step output which sets 11_PC15.PIDA.SP and
configure the Current Parameter of that output to be 11_PC15.PIDA.PV.
14
In step Run_Process, find the step output which sets 11_PC16.PIDA.SP and
configure the Current Parameter of that output to be 11_PC16.PIDA.PV.
15
In step Run_Process, find the step output which sets 11_FC28.PIDA.SP and
configure the Current Parameter of that output to be 11_FC28.PIDA.PV.
16
In step Run_Process, find the step output which sets 11_LC16.PIDA.SP and
configure the Current Parameter of that output to be 11_LC16.PIDA.PV.
17
Later in the lab, you will be entering a value for Flags.Flow.PV. This step will
configure the SCM (table view – interactive instructions) to allow an operator
to enter a value which will be stored into Flags.Flow.PV at runtime. Note: On
the D_100 display, the field named “Process Flow” is Flags.Flow.PV.
a. In the Run_Process step, output #1, on the Instruction tab, configure the
Entry Parameter to be FLAGS.FLOW.PV.
We can configure the SCM (table view – interactive instructions) to provide a
“suggested value” for the Entry Parameter configured in the previous step.
The “suggested value” is called the Target Parameter. The operator can
decide whether or not to enter the Target Parameter value into the Entry
Parameter. This step will configure the Target Parameter to show the current
value (at runtime) of Flags.Flow.PV.
28
18
a. In the Run_Process step, output #1, configure the Target Parameter to be
FLAGS.FLOW.PV.
19
4/13/2012
On the Main tab of the Run_Process step properties, configure a Warning
message that informs the operator to “Click on the FIRST step output and
enter a value between 1 and 100 (in the Entry field).”
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
20
Prepare the SCM to run:
a. Save and close SCM_D100.
b. Load and activate SCM_D100.
8
21
Change the mode attribute of SCM_Pressure to OPERATOR and put it in the
Idle state (Reset).
22
Cause the invoke transition condition of SCM_D100 to be true by turning on
the Circulate flag on the D_100 display.
23
From Control Builder Monitoring tab, display the chart view of SCM_D100.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
24
Click the
(SCM Navigation) button to switch to Table View.
ATTENTION
Within Table view there are two types of views.
•
List view and
•
Flow view
28
SCM opens in the Flow View mode.
TIP
Flow view displays the SCM in runtime based on the
sequence flow design.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
25
Click the
icon to view the SCM in List view.
TIP
List view displays the SCM based on the preferred
path (leftmost path) and then the subsequent parallel
paths in a sequence.
26
27
In Station, display the detail display of SCM_D100 (enter SCM_D100 in the
Command field and press the F12 key.)
28
Click on the Table View tab.
29
10
Click the
(SCM Navigation) button to switch to back to Chart View. (This
button toggles the view.)
Click the
icon to view the SCM in List view.
30
In Station, invoke the D_100 display. Make sure all the fans are on (Fan
Control), and turn the SAFE flag on.
31
Press the F8 (back) key to return to the Table View tab of SCM_D100.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
 Step
Action
When SCM operation reaches the START_PRESS_P step, you should
receive the 11_PC15 message. You should also see the Current Value and
Trend of 11_PC15 PV.
33
Monitor the Current Value for the step (11_PC15 PV). When it reaches 1230,
the SCM execution will continue.
28
32
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
34
If FC20 is closed, the SCM will continue to the Circulate2 step. If FC20 is not
yet closed, the program will stop at step Circulate (the transition following
Circulate) until FC20 closes.
To see the message which indicates that FC20 must be closed, click on the
Circulate step, then click on the step output which sets FC20.OP = 0. Note:
you may want to adjust the width of the ‘Description’ field. You may also need
to scroll down to find the step output which sets FC20.OP = 0.
ATTENTION
If you get an “Errors have occurred on this page…”
message, click OK.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
 Step
35
Action
When SCM operation reaches the CIRCULATE2 step, it is automatically
selected. Because we selected the Circulate step, now click on the
CIRCULATE2 step. Scroll through the step outputs. You should see Current
Values and Trends for 11_AC12, 11_PC15 and 11_PC16.
Click on the “+” on the step output with the confirmable message. You should
receive the confirmable start process message.
28
Perform the action requested by the message, then check the Confirm
checkbox to cause the SCM to continue execution.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
Interactive Instructions
Configure Interactive Instructions
Action
 Step
36
When SCM operation reaches the RUN_PROCESS step, you should see
Current Values for 11_PC15, 11_PC16, 11_FC28 and 11_LC16 (you may
need to scroll down the step outputs).
Click on the FIRST step output and change the Entry value (1 to 100%). The
process values should follow accordingly.
37
When satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE, SAFE, and
PROCESS flags to OFF.
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
Put SCM_PRESSURE Mode Attribute to Operator and the State in Idle.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Topic: SCM Abnormal Handlers
Contents
Configure an SCM Abort Handler ..........................................................................................................3
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler .....................................................................................................7
29
Configure an SCM Check Handler ......................................................................................................11
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Objective
•
Identify the purpose of Abort Handlers in an SCM
•
Configure SCM Handlers for different situations
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all the CM builds in earlier labs
•
D_100.htm graphics loaded on the server (This shall be required at later time to check the
control program.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SCM_PRESSURE configured and ready to run
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
Introduction
During the previous sequence, your program first established circulation then entered a process
mode. In this lab, you will add a Handler to help this process avoid a catastrophic event as well as
help reset the process to a ready condition after abnormal events occur.
You will use an Abort handler to reset the SCM
29
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Abort Handler
Procedure
Create an SCM Abort Handler

Action
Step
1
Open SCM_D100 in Project chart view.
2
Drag a Handler from the library into your project.
Enter the following data in the Main tab:
Name:
FanAbort
Description:
Reset Pressure Prog
Handler Type:
ABORT (Select from the drop down)
Click OK.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Abort Handler

Step
Action
3
If the handler is not already open, select the new FanAbort tab at the bottom
of the chart view.
a. Drag a Step from the library into the handler.
b. Add four Step Outputs.
c.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
STOP_P_PROG
Step Description:
Your Choice
Min Wait Time:
30
(Done only to allow time for viewing.)
Output Expression 1:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_ABORT off.
Output Expression 2:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_START off.
Output Expression 3:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.READY off.
Output Expression 4:
Create an expression that will reset SCM_D100.
Be sure to add descriptions to each Output.
All other values, your choice.
Select OK.
NOTE: In this case, you will not write an expression for the Invoke
Transition because script in the Main Handler will activate this Abort
Handler.
4
Select the Main tab at the bottom of SCM_D100 chart view.
Find the step named M_OFF_FAIL_ON in the abort sequence.
Add two step outputs.
Enter the following:
Output Expression 3:
Create an expression that will change the MODEATTR of
SCM_D100 to program.
Output Expression 4:
Create an expression that will command SCM_D100 to
ABORT.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
All other values, your choice.
5
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Abort Handler

Action
Step
5
Program Check
a. Save, load, and activate SCM_D100.
b. In Station, open the detail display of SCM_D100, and select the Table
View tab.
c.
Open the D_100 display and set CIRCULATE = ON.
d. Turn at least one of the fan switches OFF.
e. Set SAFE = ON.
f.
Press the F8 (back) Key to return to the Table View of SCM_D100.
g. Observe that the SCM cycles through Abort Handler sequence.
h. After the Abort sequence (30 seconds Min Wait Time), SCM_D100
should be Idle with its Mode Attribute set to PROGRAM. (Look on the
bottom left side of the detail display of SCM_D100.)
6
Change the Mode Attribute of SCM_D100 to Operator and Inactivate it.
This can be done from the detail display of SCM_D100 or from Control
Builder.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
(This Lab is Optional)
Objective
•
Identify the purpose of an Interrupt Handler in an SCM
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the server (This shall be required at later time to check the
control program.)
•
Control Builder running with one or two Project/Monitor tree windows open
•
SCM_PRESSURE configured and ready to run
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
Introduction
In this module you will add an Interrupt Handler to the SCM
•
If you remember in earlier modules, you were able to make the process flow high enough to
explode the compressor. (The D_100 graphic makes the explosion appear if the flow
through HC41 gets above 95%)
•
You will configure an interrupt handler that will change the flow back to 92%, should it ever
get above 93%.
29
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
Create an SCM Interrupt Handler

Action
Step
1
Drag a Handler from the library into your project.
Enter the following data in the Main tab.
Name:
SAVECOMP
Description:
your choice
Handler Type:
INTERRUPT (Select from the drop down.)
Click OK.
2
Add one condition to the Invoke transition.
Enter the following:
Transition Name:
SaveCompT
Description:
Your Choice
Condition:
Create a condition that will determine if FLAGS.FLOW PV is greater
than 93.0.
All other values, your choice.
3
Drag a Step from the library into the handler.
Add one Step Output.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
NO_BOOM
Step Description:
Your Choice
Min Wait Time:
10
(Done only to allow time for viewing.)
Output Expression 1:
Create an expression that will change the PV of the FLAGS.FLOW
function block to 92.0.
All other values, your choice.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler

Action
Step
4
Program Check:
a. Save, load, and activate SCM_D100.
b. Verify that SCM_Pressure has Mode Attribute = OPERATOR and is in IDLE.
c.
Turn all fans on (Fan Control).
d. Run SCM_D100 until it reaches the Run_Process Step.
e. Type 99.0 in the Entry box.
f.
Observe that the SCM cycles through the Interrupt Handler sequence.
g. Verify that the Interrupt handler changed the PROCESS value to 92.
5
When satisfied with your program:
Call up the D_100 graphic in Station and set the CIRCULATE, SAFE, and PROCESS
flags OFF.
29
In Control Builder, inactivate SCM_D100.
Change the Mode Attribute of SCM_PRESSURE to Operator and inactivate it. (This is
preparation to change it in the next lab.)
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Interrupt Handler
This page was intentionally left blank.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Check Handler
Configure an SCM Check Handler
(This Lab is Optional)
Objective
•
Identify the purpose of Check Handlers in an SCM
Prerequisites
•
Experion PKS Server with all the CMs builds in earlier labs
•
D_100.htm graphic loaded on the server (This shall be required at later time to check the control
program.)
•
Control Builder running with tree windows open
•
SCM_PRESSURE SCM configured and ready to run
•
Excel Data Exchange open with the simulation spreadsheet loaded
Introduction
In this module, you will configure a Check Handler to reset the flags in the FLAGS CM and
also return SCM_D100 MODEATTR to operator
29
•
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Check Handler
Create an SCM Check Handler

Action
Step
1
Drag a Handler from the library into SCM_D100.
Enter the following data in the Main tab.
Name:
SET_FLAGS
Description:
Your choice
Handler Type:
CHECK (Select from the drop down)
Select OK.
ATTENTION
There is no need for an expression in the Invoke
transition of a check handler, because a check handler
is run automatically during a reset (ex: activate).
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Check Handler

Action
Step
2
Drag a Step from the library into the handler.
Add six Step Outputs.
Enter the following:
Step Name:
RS_FLAGS
Step Description:
Your Choice
Min Wait Time:
30
(This is only for viewing purposes.)
Output Expression 1:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_START off.
Output Expression 2:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.F_MESSAGE off.
Output Expression 3:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.READY off.
Output Expression 4:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.P_ABORT off.
Output Expression 5:
Create an expression that will turn FLAGS.PROCESS off.
Output Expression 6:
Create an expression that will change the MODEATTR of SCM_D100 to
OPERATOR.
29
All other values, your choice.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
SCM Abnormal Handlers
Configure an SCM Check Handler

Action
Step
3
Program Check:
a. Save and load (but do NOT activate) SCM_D100.
b. In Control Builder, open the FLAGS Monitoring Chart View and turn ON the
following flags: P_START, F_MESSAGE, READY, P_ABORT, PROCESS.
c.
In Station, at the detail display of SCM_D100, on the Table View tab, issue the
command to Activate the SCM (Cmd = Active). Verify Access level is ‘mngr’.
d. Observe that the SCM cycles through the Check Handler sequence.
e. Verify that the mode attribute of SCM_D100 is OPERATOR.
f.
In Control Builder, verify that the appropriate flags have been turned OFF.
g. From the D_100 display, turn the CIRCULATE flag ON.
h. Set at least one of the Fan Switches OFF.
i.
Set the SAFE switch to ON.
j.
Press the F8 (back) key to return to SCM_D100 Table View.
k.
Observe that the SCM cycles through the Abort Handler sequence.
l.
Observe that the mode attribute of SCM_D100 is PROGRAM.
m. After the Min Wait Time of the Abort Handler step, observe that the SCM cycles
through the Check Handler sequence.
n. Verify that the mode attribute of SCM_D100 is OPERATOR.
o. In Control Builder, open the FLAGS Monitoring Chart View and verify that the
appropriate flags are OFF.
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Topic: Final Project
Contents
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
30
Complete the Final Project - 20 .............................................................................................................3
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Final Project
Complete the Final Project - 20
Complete the Final Project - 20
Final Project: APPLICATION OF SEQUENCE IN CASCADE LOOP CONTROL
•
You are an engineer assigned a task of designing a Cascade loop with a Temperature
controller being a primary controller and a Flow controller the secondary controller.
The loop is tested and operated by the Engineer/Operator
•
Your manager wants you to use a sequence to further automate the cascade control strategy
by:
­
Changing both the primary temperature and secondary flow controllers to manual
mode, if the process is UNSTABLE
­
Changing the primary temperature controller to AUTO and secondary flow
controller to CASCADE mode, if the process is STABLE
­
Changing both the primary temperature and secondary flow controllers to manual
under PRETRIP conditions
•
Understand Control Module operation and Sequence Control Module operation
•
Understand:
4/13/2012
­
The Cascade loop control strategy
­
Function blocks (PID, DACA, FLAG) operation in Control Builder
­
Sequential Control Module (SCM) operation
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
30
Objective:
Final Project
Complete the Final Project - 20
Process Description:
•
This is an application of a cascade loop control in which a secondary fuel flow controls the
temperature. Increase in the fuel flow results in increase in the temperature.
•
The process has 3 conditions
Unstable condition
0<TEMP CNTRL.PV<=50.0
Stable condition
50<TEMP CNTRL.PV<=75.0
Pre – trip condition
75<TEMP CNTRL.PV<=100.0
CMs:
CM NAME
INPUT
OUTPUT
ASSOCIATED BLOCKS
1TIC1002
TI
-
DACA, PIDA
1FIC1002
FI
FY
DACA, PIDA
Your Choice
-
-
FLAG
The CMs must do the following:
•
If the secondary controller mode is in MAN or AUTO the primary controller should be in
INIT mode
•
If the secondary controller is in CAS mode, then the change in the output of the primary,
results in the equivalent change, in the set point of the secondary
•
Alarms should occur when the PV of the flow transmitter crosses the following limits:
– LOLO alarm at 0.0 mm
– LO alarm at 50.0 mm
– HI alarm at 75.0 mm
– HIHI alarm at 100.0 mm
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Final Project
Complete the Final Project - 20
SCM:
SCM NAME
TRANSITION
STEPS
PROJECT
Your choice
Your choice
The SCM must do the following:
•
Start when invoked with a flag
•
Under an UNSTABLE condition both the primary and the secondary controller should be
forced to manual mode
•
Under a STABLE condition the secondary controller should be in CAS mode and the
primary controller in AUTO mode
•
Under a PRE-TRIP condition both the primary and the secondary controller should be
forced to manual mode
Control Group:
Add tags in the control group 200 to observe the behavior of cascade loop control.
Note:
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
30
Student shall use any free I/O channels available or, if none are available, un-assign any I/O from
the previously built points to make room.
Final Project
Complete the Final Project - 20
This page was intentionally left blank.
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
Identify PMIO Hardware
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
1
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• This lesson introduces you to the layout of a
typical PMIO cabinet and its main components.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be
able to:
– Describe the layout of a typical PMIO cabinet
– Describe the PMIO power subsystem chassis
and components
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• PMIO Cabinet Components
• PMIO Power Subsystem
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
3
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Cabinet Layout
• Three Main Components
– I/O Processor Card Files
– C200/C200E Controller
– Power Subsystem
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Topics
• PMIO Cabinet Components
• PMIO Power Subsystem
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Power Subsystem Chassis
Back plane
Power supply
tray
Tray for 24V
batteries
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Power Subsystem Components
72-hour CMOS
Memory backup
Power distribution
connectors
Battery Backup
switch
Grounding
And alarm
contacts
Redundant
Power
Supplies
24V battery backup –
25-minute power
Supply backup
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
7
Question 1: PMIO Cabinet Layout and Power Subsystem
Honeywell
A typical PM IO cabinet contains all of the following except:
A) I/O process card files, a C200/C200E controller and
a power subsystem
B) Experion Server
C) A 72-hour CMOS memory backup
D) A 24 V battery for 25 minutes of backup power
Your
The
correct
answer:
is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
AAanswer
typical
typicalPM
PMIO
IOcabinet
cabinetwill
willcontain
contain
Youofmust
answer
all
these
exceptthe
thequestion
Experionbefore
Server.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Clear
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Summary
• A typical PMIO cabinet has 3 sections. Top to bottom they are:
– I/O processor cards
– A C200/C200E controller
– A power subsystem
• The power subsystem can have:
– Redundant power supplies
– Full power battery backup
– CMOS battery backup for databases on the PMIO cards
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
9
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Identify PMIO Hardware
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Identify PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface
to the PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
PMIO
11
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn about the
C200/C200Eand PMIO interface components
contained in the C200/C200E rack.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be
able to:
– Describe the I/O link interface module (IOLIM)
– Identify the I/O link (IOL) interface cable and
connections
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
12
6
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Topics
• IOLIM
• IOL Interface Cable and Connections
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
13
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• I/O link interface module (IOLIM)
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
14
7
4/13/2012
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
Honeywell
• IOLIM functional requirements and
capacities:
– IOLIM supports a maximum of 40 I/O
processors (IOPs)
• Redundant IOPs count as one module
– C200/C200E supports a maximum of 2
IOLIMs and
64 I/O modules
• Any combination of rack, rail, or PM types
– IOLIM requires IOL cables A and B
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
PMIO
15
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• IOLIM installation
– Must be installed in a C200/C200E rack
– Can be made redundant with another IOLIM in
another C200/C200E rack
– Requires these jumper settings:
• Shield jumpers for IOL cable
• IOL address jumpers
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
16
8
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
• Shield Jumpers for IOL cable
– Jumpers for link A and for link B
Shield jumpers A and
B in IOLIM
Top of IOLIM
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
4/13/2012
17
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
Honeywell
• Shield Jumpers for IOL cable in IOP chassis
Shield
jumpers
A and B
IOL cable connectors A
and B
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
18
9
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
• IOL address jumper
– Only important when IOLIM is redundant
– Redundant partner must be different (one in, one out)
– Doesn’t matter which is which
– If not redundant, can be in or out
IOL address jumper
Bottom of IOLIM
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
PMIO
4/13/2012
19
Honeywell
Question 1: IOPs
How many IOPs can an IOLIM support?
A) 2
B) 10
C) 40
D) 64
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct!
EachIOLIM
IOLIM
can
cansupport
support
40
40IOPs.
IOPs.
You
must Each
answer
the question
before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
20
10
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Question 2: Redundant IOLIMs
For redundant IOLIMs, the link address jumper must be set in:
A) One of the two IOLIMs (doesn't matter which one)
B) Both IOLIMs
C) The power subsystem compartment
D) None of the above
Bottom of IOLIM
Incorrect.
Correct! For
Forredundant
redundantIOLIMs
IOLIMsthe
thelink
linkaddress
addressjumper
jumper
The
Your
correct
answer:
must
be setanswer
in one is:
of the two IOLIMs. It does not matter
You must
answer
the question
before
ofanywhere
IOLIM
has
jumper set.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
notwhich
-answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tothe
continue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
21
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• IOLIM
• IOL Interface Cable and Connections
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
22
11
4/13/2012
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
Honeywell
• IOL interface cable layout
To IOLIM
RJ-45
Connector B
IOL interface
cable Length: 2,
5 and 10 meters
To IO link
Cable B
To IOLIM
RJ-45
Connector A
To IO link
Cable A
To C200/C200E
rack 24VDC
power supply
Power cable
Length: 2, 5 and 10
meters
To cabinet power
Subsystem output
connector
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
PMIO
23
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• IOL interface cable
– Connection at IOLIM
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
24
12
4/13/2012
31
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
Honeywell
• IOL interface cable
Power distribution panel
connection
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
25
PMIO Hardware – C200/C200E Chassis
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• 24VDC Power Supply
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
26
13
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: IOL Interface Cable and Connections
The IOL interface cables connect to all of these except:
A) IOLIM RJ-45 connectors A and B
B) IOL cables A and B
C) C200/C200E rack 24VDC power supply
D) IOLIM power subsystem
Incorrect.
Correct! The
TheIOL
IOLinterface
interfacecable
cabledoes
doesnot
notconnect
connectto
tothe
the
power
There is no IOLIM power
The "IOLIM
Your
correct
answer:
answersubsystem".
is:
subsystem.
IOL interface
cablebefore
connects to the cabinet
You mustThe
answer
the question
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
this
this
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
power
subsystem.
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
PMIO
4/13/2012
27
Honeywell
Summary
• The hardware required to interface the C200/C200E to the PMIO
includes the IOLIM and IOL cables.
– A C200/C200E supports up to 2 IOLIMs and 64 I/O modules
– An IOLIM supports up to 40 redundant IOPs.
Shield jumpers for IO Link Cables A and B are located on both the IOLIM
– and
the PMIO backplane.
redundant IOLIMs, the link address jumper must be set in one of the two
– For
IOLIMs (doesn't matter which one).
IOL cable connects to:
– The• IOLIM
RJ-45 connectors A and B
• IOL cables A and B
• C200/C200E rack 24VDC power supply
• Cabinet power subsystem
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
28
14
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
29
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe the C200/C200E Hardware Interface to the PMIO
30
15
4/13/2012
Describe the I/O Card File
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
31
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn about the
components of the I/O processor card file
found in the PMIO cabinet.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be
able to:
– Identify the I/O link (IOL) interface cable
connections
– Locate an I/O processor (IOP) in a card file
– Explain card file addressing
– Identify the power connections
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
31
Topics
Honeywell
• IOL Connections
• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing
• Power Connections
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
33
Honeywell
IOL Interface Cable Connections – PMIO
Cards 1 - 15
File 5
IOLIM
CNI
Server
C200
01
Cards 1 - 15
PCIC
File 4
24
IOL cables
Cards 1 - 15
File 3
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
IOL Interface Cable Connections on IOP Card File
Honeywell
Cards 1 - 15
IOL cable connectors A
and B
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Topics
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• IOL Connections
• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing
• Power Connections
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
IOP Card File Locations – PMIO
Cards 1 - 15
File 5
IOLIM
CNI
Server
C200
01
Cards 1 - 15
PCIC
File 4
24
IOL cables
Cards 1 - 15
File 3
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
37
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOP Locations – PMIO
• Card file with cover plate
– IOP cards are referenced by their numerical location within each card file.
1
PMIO
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Topics
Honeywell
• IOL Connections
• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing
• Power Connections
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
39
Honeywell
IOP Card File Locations – PMIO
File number
jumpers
Cards 1 - 15
File 5
IOLIM
CNI
Server
C200
01
Cards 1 - 15
PCIC
File 4
24
IOL cables
Cards 1 - 15
File 3
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
31
File Number Jumpers for IOP Chassis
Honeywell
• File numbers range from 1 to 8
File number jumpers
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
41
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
File Number Jumpers for IOP Chassis
Honeywell
• Pin setting is one less than actual file number
• Odd parity
P 4 2 1
PMIO
FILE ADDR
P 4 2 1
P 4 2 1
FILE ADDR
FILE ADDR
File # 3
Pinned 2
File # 4
Pinned 3
File # 8
Pinned 7
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
UCN Address Jumpers
Honeywell
• UCN address jumpers do not apply to Experion PKS
UCN address jumpers – do
not set these (remove)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
43
Honeywell
Question 1: File Addressing
When setting address jumpers for card file #6 which
pins must have jumpers?
A) 4, 1
B) 4, 1, P
C) 4, 2
P 4 2 1
D) 4, 2, P
FILE ADDR
Incorrect.
Correct! For
Forcard
cardfile
file#6,
#6,pins,
pins,4,
4,11and
andPPmust
musthave
havejumpers.
jumpers.
Since we are pinning out card file #6 we actually pin it as #5
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
therefore we pin 4 and 1. When we do this we have an even
You must
answer set
the which
question
before
number
of -answer
jumpers
against the odd parity rule.
You
Incorrect
Correct
did You
not
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
togoes
continue
continue
completely
continuing
This rule states that
at all times an odd number of jumpers must
be set. Therefore we must set the 'P' parity jumper.
Click anywhere to continue.
PMIO
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Clear
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
31
Topics
Honeywell
• IOL Connections
• IOP Location
• Card File Addressing
• Power Connections
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
45
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Power for IOP Chassis
• Power from power subsystem
– Redundant power cables from subsystem
– Redundant power supplies (optional)
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: IOP Jumpers and Connections
C
B
D
A
Which of these are IOP card file number jumpers?
A) A
B) B
C) C
D) D
TheIncorrect!
Your
correct
answer:
answer
Correct!
Picture
Pictureis:
'A'
'A'shows
showsthe
theIOP
IOPcard
cardfile
file
You must answer
thejumpers.
question before
number
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Submit
Click anywhere to continue.
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
47
Summary
Clear
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• An I/O processor card file found in the PMIO cabinet:
to the IOLIM in the C200/C200E rack and to other I/O processor card
– Links
files through I/O link (IOL) interface cables
up to 15 IOPs identified by the card numbers on the card file cover
– Contains
plate
– Has a card file number that ranges from 1 through 8
• Numbers are set by jumpers as 0 through 7 with odd parity
• Card file jumpers are not to be confused with the UCN address jumpers
(which do not apply to Experion PKS)
– Gets power from the PMIO power subsystem
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the I/O Card File
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe the I/O Card File
4/13/2012
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
51
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn how to configure PMIO hardware in Control
Builder.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Configure an I/O link interface module (IOLIM)
– Add I/O processor (IOP) modules to the I/O link (IOL)
– Load and activate IOPs
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring an IOLIM
• Adding IOPs to the IOL
• Loading and Activating IOPs
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
53
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configure an IOLIM
• Select IOLIM from the list of interface modules
– An IOLIM appears in the Project tab and
– A configuration dialog box opens (next slide)
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configure an IOLIM
• Enter configuration parameters and click OK
Supervisory
CNI module
IOLIM slot
number
Check if
IOLIM is
redundant
Fill in secondary
IOLIM name if
redundant
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Configure an IOLIM
• Double-click the IOL under the IOLIM in Project
• Enter a name and description
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Question 1: Configuring an IOLIM
When you configure an IOLIM, you must complete all of these steps except:
A) Create the IOLIM in Control Builder
B) Enter IOLIM configuration parameters including the
C200/C200E chassis slot number in which it resides
C) Create a new IOL for the IOLIM and enter its name
and description
D) Enter the name and description for the IOL that is
created automatically when you create the IOLIM
Yourcorrect
The
answer:
answer is:
You must answer the question before
Yes!
No.
When
you
you
configure
an
an
IOLIM,
you
you must
must
YouIncorrect
Correct
did When
You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickconfigure
anywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
toIOLIM,
continue
continue
completely
continuing
complete all of these steps except "Create a new
IOL for the IOLIM and enter its name and
description". When an IOLIM is added the IOL is
automatically created by Control Builder.
Click anywhere to continue.
PMIO
Submit
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Clear
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring an IOLIM
• Adding IOPs to the IOL
• Loading and Activating IOPs
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add IOPs
• Add IOP modules to the IOL
– Click and drag from Library to Project
– Or select from I/O Modules
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
59
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Assign IOPs
• Assign the IOP to the IOL
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Assign IOPs
• Assigned IOPs appear under their IOL
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
61
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add IOPs
• Configure the IOP
Choose a
scan rate
IOP number,
1 – 40
Physical
IOP location
PMIO
Check if IOP
is redundant
Physical location
of secondary IOP
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 2: IOP Assignment
IOPs are assigned to:
A) A control execution environment (CEE)
B) An IOLIM
C) An IOL
D) Nothing. IOPs remain unassigned
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
Incorrect.
Correct! IOPs
IOPsare
areassigned
assignedto
toan
anIOL.
IOL.
You must answer the question before
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Clear
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Configuring an IOLIM
• Adding IOPs to the IOL
• Loading and Activating IOPs

PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs
• Right click the IOLIM
– Select Load with Contents
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs
• Verify the load list
• Do not check
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs
• After successful load, Monitor tab displays IOPs in blue.
– Indicates IOP is inactive
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs
• In Project, IOP channels appear under the
IOP.
• In Monitoring, IOP channels appear under
the IOP only after the CM that uses the
channel is downloaded.
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
Loading IOLIM, IOL, and IOPs
• When valid, LED turns green.
– IOP changes from yellow to blue in Monitor tree
• IOP can be activated from the monitoring tree or from a combo box.
– (Run = Active)
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 3: Loading and Activating IOPs
Which statement about loading and activating IOPs is false?
A) The IOL is automatically loaded with its IOLIM
B) The Project tab displays IOPs in blue when
they are located successfully
C) IOP channels appear under the IOP in the
Project tab
D) An IOP can be activated by changing its
execution state to Run
Incorrect.
Correct! The
Thefalse
falsestatement
statementisis""The
TheProject
Projecttab
tab
The
Your
correct
answer:
answer
is:when they are loaded." Actually
displays
IOPs
in blue
You
musttab
answer
the the
question
before
the
Monitor
displays
IOPS
in
blue.
The
Project
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
tab will not display
colors next to the IOPS.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Clear
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• When you configure an IOLIM and its associated hardware, remember:
– Create and configure the IOLIM in Control Builder
– The IOL is created automatically when you create the IOLIM
– Assign IOPs to the IOL and not the IOLIM
– The Monitor tab displays IOPs in blue when they are loaded successfully
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
71
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
72
36
Describe How to Configure PMIO Hardware
4/13/2012
31
Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel
Blocks in CMs
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
4/13/2012
73
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson you will learn to configure a PMIO channel block in a
control module (CM).
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will know how to:
– Configure and load a PMIO channel block
– Activate and delete a PMIO channel block
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
74
37
4/13/2012
Topics
Honeywell
• Configuring and Loading a PMIO Channel Block
• Activating and Deleting a PMIO Channel Block
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
4/13/2012
75
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block
Honeywell
• First, add and assign a PMIO channel block; then, configure the block
parameters.
– Two methods to add and assign a PMIO channel block:
• Method 1: Add block from Library -- PMIO tree;
then, assign to specific a IOP and a specific channel
• Method 2: Add block from Project – the specific IOP and specific
channel are automatically assigned
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
76
38
4/13/2012
31
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block
Honeywell
• Method 1: Library – PMIO tree
– Click and drag the channel block to a CM
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
4/13/2012
77
Assigning a Channel Block
Honeywell
• Right click the block to assign
Right-click
PMIO
Select Function
Block Assign
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
78
39
4/13/2012
Assigning a Channel Block
Honeywell
• The Function Block Assignment dialog box appears.
Select a channel from
the list of available
IOP channels
Click Assign
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
4/13/2012
79
Verifying the Channel Block Assignment
Honeywell
• After assigning an IOP channel, verify the IOP name and channel
number appear in the block.
IOP and channel
now assigned
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
80
40
4/13/2012
31
Adding and Assigning a Channel Block
Honeywell
• Method 2: Project
– Click and drag from the IOP in Project
IOP and channel
assigned automatically
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
81
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Channel Block Name
After assignment, the channel name
becomes:
CM name.Function Block name
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
82
41
4/13/2012
Configuring a Channel Block
Honeywell
• Configure the IO channel block in the Parameters dialog box
– Enter a name and description in the Main tab
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
83
Configuring a Channel Block
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Configure the IO channel block in the Parameters dialog box
– Enter appropriate parameters in the Configuration tab
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
84
42
4/13/2012
31
Wiring and Downloading the Function Blocks
Honeywell
• Soft-wire the CM blocks
• Download
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
85
Downloading the CM
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• In Monitoring, IOP channels appear under
the IOP after downloading the CM that uses
the channel
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
86
43
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Question 1: Loading a PMIO Channel Block
You must download a CM that uses a channel block to see the channel
block in which tab in the Control Builder:
A) Library tab
B) Monitoring tab
C) Project tab
D) All of the above
Incorrect. You must download a CM that uses a
Correct! You must download a CM that uses a channel
channelanswer
block to
channel block in the
The
Your
correct
answer:
is:see the
block
to see the channel
block in the Monitoring tab.
Monitoring tab. In, Monitoring, IOP channels appear
In,
Monitoring,
IOP the
channels
appear
under the IOP
You
must answer
question
before
under
the
IOP
only
after
the
CM
that
uses the channel
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Clickanywhere
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
only after the CMcontinuing
that uses the channel is downloaded.
is downloaded.
Click anywhere to continue.
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
87
Topics
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Configuring and Loading a PMIO Channel Block
• Activating and Deleting a PMIO Channel Block
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
88
44
4/13/2012
31
Activating IOP Channels
Honeywell
• PMIO channel blocks have
execution states: active and
inactive
– If inactive, channel blocks appear
blue in Monitoring
• Under the CM
• Under the IOPs
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
89
Activating IOP Channels
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• There are many options to activate IOP channels:
– Activate IOP channels directly:
• Under the CM or under the IOP
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
90
45
4/13/2012
Activating IOP Channels
Honeywell
• There are many options to activate IOP channels
– Activate from the CM
• With the CM
• Without the CM
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
91
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Channels in the Monitor Tab
• Activation causes channel blocks
to turn green
– Under the CM
– Under the IOPs
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
92
46
4/13/2012
31
Deleting IOP Channels
Honeywell
• IOP channels cannot be deleted
from the IOL
• The only way to delete IOP
channels is to delete the CM that
uses them
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
4/13/2012
93
Honeywell
Question 2: Activating and Deleting IOP Channels
An IOP channel block is not:
A) Activated from the CM with or without
activating the CM
B) Activated directly under the CM or under
the IOP in the Monitoring tab
C) Green in the Monitoring tab when it has
been activated
D) Deleted from its IOL
Incorrect.
Correct! An
AnIOP
IOPchannel
channelblock
blockisisnot
notdeleted
deleted
The correct
Your
answer:
answer is:
from its IOL. It can only be deleted by
Youdeleting
must answer
the
question
before
the anywhere
CM
that
contains
it.
YouIncorrect
Correct
did You
not -answer
answered
-Click
Click
anywhere
thisthis
question
correctly!
to
tocontinue
continue
completely
continuing
Click anywhere to continue.
Submit
PMIO
Clear
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
94
47
4/13/2012
Summary
Honeywell
• A PMIO channel block:
be added and assigned to a CM from the Library Tab (PMIO tree) or
– Can
from the Project Tab
– Is inactive or blue in Monitoring until activated when it turns green
– Can be activated from the CM with or without activating the CM
be activated directly under the CM or under the IOP in the Monitoring
– Can
tab
– Can be deleted only by deleting the CM that contains it
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
PMIO
4/13/2012
95
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CM
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc. Describe How to Configure PMIO Channel Blocks in CMs
96
48
4/13/2012
31
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300
System
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
97
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Overview
• In this lesson you will learn about the configuration of PMIO in C300
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
98
49
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PMIO Configuration in C300
• C300 has 2 IOLINK’s by default
– To configure PMIO in C300, IOFAMILY property of the IOLINK must be set
to PM_IO_TYPE
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
PMIO
99
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Add IOPs
• Add IOP modules to the IOLINK
– Click and drag from Library to Project
– Or select from I/O Modules
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
100
50
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
31
Honeywell
IOP Assignment
• The IO modules must be assigned to the IOLINK which is configured for
PMIO.
• Improper assignment gives an Assignment error
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
101
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
IOP Configuration and Load
• Procedure to configure and load an IOP in C300 is similar to IOP
configuration and load in C200/C200E
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
102
51
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the PMIO lab exercises.
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
103
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
PMIO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
104
52
Describe PMIO Configuration in a C300 System
4/13/2012
31
Topic: PMIO
Contents
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E .................................................................................3
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs .............................................................................................13
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E ......................................................................................29
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300 .........................................................................................39
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO ..........................................................................49
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO ......................................................................................75
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson you will be able to configure a SIMIOLIM and its associated I/O Link
(IOL).
•
Configure a SIMIOLIM with the proper settings in Control Builder
•
Configure an I/O Link (IOL) with the proper settings in Control Builder
Introduction
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you with the methods of configuring I/O Link Modules
(IOLIMs) in the Experion PKS system. The following procedures are introduced in this lab.
•
Configure an SIMIOLIM
Note
If you are using SIM-C300 / C300 in class, skip this portion of the lab.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure an IOLIM
Use the following procedure to configure and add a SIMIOLIM to a project.

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
Only students configuring a C200E should complete
this portion of the lab.
Students configuring a C300 should go to the following
portion of the lab:
“Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs”
Look on the Contents page (at the beginning of this
lab) to find the page number.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
2
Action
Select SIMIOLIM from the list of Interface Modules to open the configuration form.
From the File menu, select New>Interface Modules>SIMIOLIM – IO Link Interface
Simulator.
ATTENTION
The above method of adding an SIMIOLIM to the
Project is the same as we used, previously.
3
Enter the following details:
Tag Name:
IOLIM0303
Item Name:
IOLIM0303_item
Description:
IOLIM Simulation
`
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
4
Action
Enter the Host Name (the name of your assigned Server).
ATTENTION
Once the Host Name is added press enter. The Host
IP Address should appear automatically.
5
Click on the Server Displays tab.
6
Enter the following information:
Group:
51
Position:
3
Group Parameter: IOLIM0303
6
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
7
4/13/2012
Action
Click OK to add the configured IOLIM to Project Tree.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
Configure an IO Link
Use the following procedure to configure the I/O Link.

Step
1
Action
Click the “+” icon adjacent to IOLIM0303 to display the SIMIOLINK_###.
ATTENTION
You might get a different number adjacent to
SIMIOLINK. In this case it is 679.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
2
4/13/2012
Action
Right-click the SIMIOLINK_###, select Module Properties.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
3
Action
In the Main tab, enter
Tag Name:
IOLINK0303
Item Name:
IOLINK0303_item
Description:
IOLINK Simulation.
ATTENTION
The I/O LINK is the software window for the PMIO.
There will be numerous parameters in the Monitor Tab
(and therefore in the Station Point Detail) that provide
a view to the status of the various PMIO racks
associated with this IOLIM.
4
10
Click on the Server Displays tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E

Step
5
Action
Enter the following information:
Group:
51
Position:
4
Group Parameter: IOLINK0303
6
4/13/2012
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
PMIO
Configure an I/O Link Module (IOLIM) for C200E
This page was intentionally left blank.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Practice
Objective
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you with the configuration of Analog and Digital PM
IOPs.
•
Understand I/O module naming and configuration
•
Understand IOM location configuration: IOP File Number and Card Number
•
Configure 2 Digital, 2 Analog and 2 Hart IOPs in Control Builder
•
Download and verify the configuration
Introduction
The purpose of this Lesson is to familiarize you with the configuration of Analog and Digital
IOPs. The following procedures are included in this lab:
4/13/2012
•
Select an IOP
•
Create an Analog Input IOP
•
Configure a HLAI IOP
•
Create an Analog Output IOP
•
Create a Digital Input IOP
•
Create a Digital Output IOP
•
Create a Hart Analog Input IOP
•
Create a Hart Analog Output IOP
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
13
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Procedure
Select an IOP

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
This portion of the lab should be completed by ALL
students – those configuring a C200E, and also those
configuring a C300.
2
Use one of the following two methods to add an IOP.
Menu Method:
From the File menu, select New > I/O Modules > PMIO > [IOP selection].
14
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
3
Action
Library Method:
Navigate to the Library Tree window. Expand the PMIO directory and select an IOP.
If the Project Tree window is also open, the chosen IOP can be dragged to a blank
area (which adds it to Unassigned), or the IOP can be dragged directly to the
appropriate IOLINK
ATTENTION
There are many choices in Control Builder under the
I/O Modules menu pull down. All I/O types can be
accessed and added to a project using either the
Menu method or the Library method.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
15
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Create an Analog Input IOP
The following procedure creates an analog input IOP.

Step
Action
1
Arrange Project and Library windows in Control Builder as shown in Step 3.
2
Navigate to the Library Tree window in Control Builder and expand the PMIO library.
3
Drag and drop the HLAI IOP from the PMIO library to the blank area at the bottom of the
Project Tree window.
A configuration dialog box automatically opens when the IOP is added to the project
window
16
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
4
Action
Enter the following in the configuration dialog box:
Destination Tagnames:
CPM3AI_F3C01
Destination Item Names:
CPM3AI_F3C01_item
ATTENTION
It is a good idea for the module name to reflect the
type of module you are using and its location. This will
make tracking easier in the future when you add more
modules to your system. We chose CPM3AI_F3C01.
This refers to the CPM associated with the IOLIM, the
IOP type, the rack number, and the card number,
assuming card File 3 and card 1.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
5
Action
Click Finish and view the Project Tree window.
The correct name should now appear when you expand the Unassigned section in
the Project Tree window
18
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Configure a HLAI IOP
The following procedure configures a HLAI IOP.

Step
Action
1
Double-click CPM3AI_F3C01 in the Unassigned section of the Project Tree
window to display the Parameter Configuration form.
2
Enter the following information in the appropriate field in the Main tab:
Description:
Test Strategy PMIO AI Module
IOP Number: 1
I/O Link Scan Rate:
Accept the default: 250_ms
ATTENTION
PMIO has the ability to optimize communication on the
IO Link. Each IOP can have its own Scan Rate. The IO
Link bandwidth is divided into 1000 Link Units and they
can be used most effectively by determining how fast
updates are needed by the CMs which will use the IO
signals, and setting the Scan Rate accordingly. A link
unit is roughly equivalent to one parameter per second.
For a complete write-up on Link Units, including a Link
Unit Calculation tool, see Knowledge Builder,
Experion PKS R400 > Planning and Design >
Control Hardware Planning Guide > Process
Manager IO Integration Planning > System
Topology and Performance Considerations.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
3
Action
•
I/O Processor Modules may reside in up to eight PMIO card files.
•
Each IOP has a software designator: IOP Number
•
Each IOP has a physical location consisting of:
­ File Number (1-8)
­ Card Number (1-15)
•
Redundant IOPs use the same IOP Number designator:
Each partner has a unique File number and Card number. In class, enter
the following:
CPM3AI_F3C01 is in File 3, Card 1, non redundant, and is IOP Number 1
ATTENTION
PMIO modules can be mounted in any slot of any card
file. Therefore, part of the IOP configuration is the
physical location. This consists of the file number,
which is set up using jumpers on the chassis back
plane, and the slot number counted from left to right
starting at 1.
The above configuration uses card file three and slot
one and incorporates this information into the IOP
name. If your assigned AI module is in a different
location, modify your work accordingly. The IOP
Number assigned to a module does not have to be the
same as the card number. Recall that an IOLIM can
support up to 40 IOPs. The IOP numbers for these
would be from 1 to 40. The card numbers are related to
file slot locations and run from 1 to 15.
20
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
4
Action
Click the Server Displays tab.
•
4/13/2012
The Point Detail Display and the Group Detail Display are already filled.
This is true for hardware objects and SCMs. Input this information for CMs
5
Add CPM3AI_F3C01 to Group # 51, Pos # 5.
6
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
21
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Create an Analog Output IOP
The following procedure creates an analog output IOP.

Step
Action
1
Set up Control Builder making the Project Tree window, Library Tree window, and
Monitoring Tree window visible.
2
From the Library window, expand the PMIO library.
3
Drag and drop the IOP AO16 from the PMIO library to the blank space at the bottom of
the project tree.
A configuration dialog box automatically opens when the IOP is added to the project
window
4
Enter the following
Destination Tagnames:
CPM3AO_F3C02.
Destination Item Names:
CPM3AO_F3C02_item.
ATTENTION
This configuration assumes the IOP is located in File
3, Card 2.
5
Click Finish.
6
Double click CPM3AO_F3C02 in the Project Tree under the Unassigned section.
7
Enter the following information in the Parameters form.
Main tab:
Description:
IOP Number:
File:
Card:
Scan Rate:
Failure Option:
Test Strategy PMIO AO Module
2
3
2
250_MS
Hold
Server Displays tab:
Group:
51
Position:
6
Group Parameter: CPM3AO_F3C02
8
22
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Create a Digital Input IOP
The following procedure creates a digital input IOP.

Step
1
Action
From the File menu select:
New > I/O Modules > PMIO > DI24V – 24 Volt Digital Input, 32 ch
The method shown above is another way of adding a new I/O Module rather than the
method used in prior labs
ATTENTION
Here we use the File pull down to add a new IOP. One
benefit of this method is that you are able to see the
details of the Modules (number of channels,
voltage/current, Isolated/non-Isolated) directly in the
selection menu.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
23
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs

Step
2
Action
Enter the following information:
Main tab:
Tagname:
Item Name:
Description:
IOP Number:
File:
Card:
Scan Rate:
CPM3DI_F3C03
CPM3DI_F3C03_item
Test Strategy PMIO DI Module
3
3
3
100_MS
Server Displays tab:
Group:
Position:
Group Parameter:
3
24
51
7
CPM3DI_F3C03
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Create a Digital Output
The following procedure creates a digital output IOP.

Step
1
Action
From the File menu select:
New>I/O Modules>PMIO>DO32 – Digital Output, 32 ch
Using the Menu Method to create your new I/O Module will open the Main tab of Module
Properties.
2
Enter the following information in the Parameters form:
Main tab:
Tag Name:
Item Name:
Description:
IOP Number:
File:
Card:
Scan Rate:
CPM3DO_F3C04
CPM3DO_F3C04_item
Test Strategy PMIO DO Module
4
3
4
100_MS
Server Displays tab:
Group:
Position:
Group Parameter:
3
4/13/2012
51
8
CPM3DO_F3C04
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
25
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Create a Hart Analog Input IOP
The following procedure creates a Hart Analog Input IOP.

Step
1
Action
From the File menu select:
New>I/O Modules>PMIO>HLAIHART – High Level Analog Input, Hart Capable, 16ch
Using the Menu Method to create your new I/O Module will open the Main tab of Module
Properties.
2
Enter the following information in the Parameters form:
Main tab:
Tagname:
Item Name:
Module Description:
IOP Number:
File:
Card:
Scan Rate:
CPM3HAI_F3C11
CPM3HAI_F3C11_item
Test Strategy PMIO HLAI Module
5
3
11
250_MS
Server Displays tab:
Group:
Position:
Group Parameter:
3
26
52
1
CPM3HAI_F3C11
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
Creates a Hart Analog Output IOP
The following procedure creates a Hart Analog Output IOP.

Step
1
Action
From the File menu select:
New>I/O Modules>PMIO>AO16HART– Analog Output, Hart Capable, 16ch
Using the Menu Method to create your new I/O Module will open the Main tab of Module
Properties.
2
Enter the following information in the Parameters form:
Main tab:
Tagname:
Item Name:
Description:
IOP Number:
File:
Card:
Scan Rate:
CPM3HAO_F3C12
CPM3HAO_F3C12_item
Test Strategy PMIO HAO Module
6
3
12
250_MS
Server Displays tab:
Group:
Position:
Group Parameter:
3
4/13/2012
52
2
CPM3HAO_F3C12
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
27
PMIO
Configure Digital, Analog and Hart IOPs
This page was intentionally left blank.
28
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson, you will be able to assign, load, and activate IOPs in Control
Builder for C200E and verify that the IOP database has been validated.
Introduction
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you with the configuration of Analog and Digital
IOPs.
The following procedures are introduced in this lab:
•
Assign IOPs to the I/O Link
•
Load the IOLIM, IOLINK, and IOPs
•
Verify the load
•
Verify the IOP database has been validated
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
29
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Procedure
Assign IOPs to the IOLINK
The following procedure assigns IOPs to an I/O Link.

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
Only students configuring a C200E should complete
this portion of the lab.
Students configuring a C300 should go to the following
portion of the lab:
“Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300”
Look on the Contents page (at the beginning of this
lab) to find the page number.
2
From the Control Builder Edit menu, click Execution Environment Assignment to
display the Execution Environment Assignment screen.
ATTENTION
When configuring Series A IO modules, we assign
them to a CEE prior to loading. PMIOs are assigned to
an IOLINK and not a CEE. Depending on the type of
module selected in the IOMs tab, IOLINK or CEE
selections will appear in the Assign To section.
3
Locate the Available Modules
section on the left side of the
window and Click the tab
labeled IOMs.
4
Locate your destination I/O Link
IOLINK0303
30
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
Action
5
If your Project has multiple I/O
Links, then click the applicable
destination I/O Link from the
window labeled Assign To:
6
Use the <Ctrl> or Shift key and select all the IOMs:
If you only have one I/O Link, it will be selected by
default.
CPM3AI_F3C01
CPM3AO_F3C02
CPM3DI_F3C03
CPM3DO_F3C04
CPM3HAI_F3C11
CPM3HAO_F3C12
4/13/2012
7
Select your destination IOLINK (IOLINK0303 created previously) from the Assign To
list.
8
Click the Assign button. After a few seconds, your IOPs will appear in the section of the
window labeled Assigned Modules.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
9
Action
Click Close and observe that your IOPs now appear in the Project tab assigned to
IOLINK0303.
ATTENTION
An alternative to this is to manually drag the IOP from
Unassigned to the IOLINK
IOPs can be directly assigned to an IOLINK, when
adding them from the library.
32
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Load the IOLIM, IOLINK, and IOPs
This procedure loads the IOLIM, IOLINK, and IOPs.

Step
Action
1
In the Project Tree window, right click IOLIM0303 to open the shortcut menu, and select
Load with Contents.
There are two commands you may use to load objects to your IOLIM: Load, and
Load With Contents. The Load command loads the selected objects to your
IOLIM. The Load With Contents command loads the selected object along with
all objects assigned to it. For the IOLIM, contents are itself along with its IOLINK
and IOPs. For the IOLINK, contents are itself and its IOPs.
Load With Contents can be accessed from the Controller menu or by right clicking
on the IOLIM or IOLINK.
In this lab exercise use the Load With Contents command.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
33
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
Action
2
Click Continue in the Load window. Verify that the IOLINK and all the IOPs will be
loaded.
3
DO NOT select the Automatic Post Load State check box.
ATTENTION
You will activate the IOPs manually.
4
34
Click OK.
•
If there are no errors, the Load Dialog automatically closes.
•
If you get a configuration error, close the load and determine the problem before
proceeding
•
The usual reasons are:
­
Wrong IOP type selected
­
Wrong slot configured
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E
Verify the Load
Follow this procedure to verify that the IOP has loaded correctly.

Step
1
2
Action
After loading successfully, go to the Monitoring Tree window.
The IOLIM will already be activated (green in color).
The IOLINK is also active.
3
4/13/2012
The IOPs will be blue in color, indicating their state is inactive.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
35
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
4
Action
Call up Group 51 in Station and examine the IOPs.
The green color adjacent to the Database Valid item indicates that the database is
validated.
36
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
5
4/13/2012
Action
Compare the IOPs in the Project and Monitoring Trees.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
37
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C200E

Step
6
Action
Expand the DI IOP in Project.
•
The contents of a Project IOP are its
channels
•
The channels do not appear in the
contents of the IOP in the Monitoring
tab until they are downloaded in CMs
which use the channels
•
Once a channel is assigned to an IO
block in a CM, the channel name
displayed in Project and Monitoring is
the name of the IO block:
CM name.FB name
NOTE: There are two ways to add IOP
channels to CMs:
1. Drag the channel from the IOP in the
Project tab to the CM.
2. Drag the channel from the IOP type in
Library to the CM.The first method
saves having to assign the channel to
an IOP as it is already selected from an
IOP contents tree. The second method
requires assignment to a particular IOP
and channel. This is done by right
clicking on the IO block in the CM and
selecting Function Block Assign.
7
Select all the IOPs from the Monitoring Tree window and activate them.
ATTENTION
To activate the IOP right click on the IOP and select
Activate > Selected Item(s).
38
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Practice
Objective
After completing this lesson, you will be able to assign, load, and activate IOPs in Control
Builder for C300 and verify that the IOP database has been validated.
Introduction
The purpose of this lesson is to familiarize you with the configuration of Analog and Digital
IOPs
The following procedures are introduced in this lab:
•
Assign IOPs to the I/O Link
•
Load the IOLINK, and IOPs
•
Verify the load
•
Verify the IOP database has been validated
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
39
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Procedure
Assign IOPs to the IOLINK
The following procedure assigns IOPs to an I/O Link.

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
Only students configuring a C300 should complete this
portion of the lab.
Students configuring a C200E should go to the
following portion of the lab:
“Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO”
Look on the Contents page (at the beginning of this
lab) to find the page number.
2
From the Control Builder Edit menu, click Execution Environment Assignment to
display the Execution Environment Assignment screen
ATTENTION
When configuring Series C IO modules, we assign
them to a CEE prior to loading. PMIOs are assigned to
an IOLINK and not a CEE. Depending on the type of
module selected in the IOMs tab, IOLINK or CEE
selections will appear in the ‘Assign To’ section.
3
Locate the Available Modules
section on the left side of the
window and click the tab
labeled IOMs
4
Locate your destination I/O Link
PMIO_IOLINK
40
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
Action
5
If your Project has multiple I/O Links, then click the applicable destination I/O Link from
the window labeled Assign To:
6
In the IOMs tab, press and hold the <CTRL> key, then select:
CPM3AI_F3C01
CPM3AO_F3C02
CPM3DI_F3C03
CPM3DO_F3C04
CPM3HAI_F3C11
CPM3HAO_F3C12
4/13/2012
7
Select your destination IOLINK (PMIO_IOLINK created previously) from the Assign To
list.
8
Click the Assign button. After a few seconds, your IOPs will appear in the section of the
window labeled Assigned Modules.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
41
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
9
Action
Click Close and observe that your IOPs now appear in the Project tab assigned to
PMIO_IOLINK
ATTENTION
An alternative to this is to manually drag the IOP from
Unassigned to the IOLINK
IOPs can be directly assigned to an IOLINK, when
adding them from the library.
42
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Load the IOLINK, and IOPs
This procedure loads the IOLINK, and IOPs.

Step
1
Action
In the Project Tree window, right click PMIO_IOLINK to open the shortcut menu, and
select Load with Contents
There are two commands you may use to load objects to your IOLIM: Load, and
Load With Contents. The Load command loads the selected objects to your
IOLINK. The Load With Contents command loads the selected object along
with all objects assigned to it. For the IOLINK, contents are itself and its IOPs.
Load With Contents can be accessed from the Controller menu or by right clicking
on the IOLIM or IOLINK.
In this lab exercise use the Load With Contents command.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
43
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
Action
2
Click Continue in the Load window. Verify that the PMIO_IOLINK and all your IOPs are
selected.
3
DO NOT select the Automatic Change ALL….. check box.
ATTENTION
You will activate the IOPs manually.
4
44
Click OK.
•
If there are no errors, the Load Dialog automatically closes.
•
If you get a configuration error, close the load and determine the problem before
proceeding
•
The usual reasons are:
­
Wrong IOP type selected
­
Wrong slot configured
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300
Verify the Load
Follow this procedure to verify that the IOP has loaded correctly.

Step
4/13/2012
Action
1
After loading successfully, go to the Monitoring Tree window.
2
The PMIO_IOLINK will already be activated (green in color)
3
The IOP’s will be blue in color, indicating their state is inactive.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
45
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
4
Action
Call up Group 51 in Station and examine the IOPs.
The green color adjacent to the Database Valid item indicates that the database is
validated.
46
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
5
4/13/2012
Action
Compare the IOPs in the Project and Monitoring Trees.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
47
PMIO
Assign, Load, and Activate PMIO for C300

Step
6
Action
Expand the DI IOP in Project.
•
The contents of a Project IOP are its
channels
•
The channels do not appear in the
contents of the IOP in the Monitoring
tab until they are downloaded in CMs
which use the channels
•
Once a channel is assigned to an IO
block in a CM, the channel name
displayed in Project and Monitoring is
the name of the IO block:
CM name.FB name
NOTE: There are two ways to add IOP
channels to CMs:
1. Drag the channel from the IOP in
the Project tab to the CM.
2. Drag the channel from the IOP type
in Library to the CM.The first method
saves having to assign the channel to
an IOP as it is already selected from
an IOP contents tree. The second
method requires assignment to a
particular IOP and channel. This is
done by right clicking on the IO block
in the CM and selecting Function Block
Assign.
7
Select all the IOPs from the Monitoring Tree window and activate them.
ATTENTION
To activate the IOP right click on the IOP and select
Activate > Selected Item(s).
48
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
(This Lab is Optional)
Practice
Objective
After you complete this lesson you should be able to configure a continuous control strategy with
PMIO and contrast it to Series A and Series C IO.
•
Configure a PID loop CM using PMIODownload and verify the CM
Introduction
The purpose of this lesson is to provide the knowledge to configure a continuous control strategy,
using PMIO.
The following procedures are included in this lab:
•
Create and save a Control Module
•
Configure a Control Module
•
Assign CMs to the CEE
•
Add Function Blocks to a CM
•
Configure a PMIO AI Channel Block
•
Configure a Data Acquisition Block
•
Configure a PID Block
•
Move Pins on Function Blocks
•
Configure an AO Block
•
Finish your CM
•
Configure a Hart temperature transmitter
Note:
If you are using SIM_C300 / C300, then assign the CM to CEE of SIM-C300 / C300.
IOLIM0303 and IOLINK0303 (Referred in this lab) will not be present if you are using SIM-C300 /
C300. Use PMIO_IOLINK to access the IOP
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
49
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Procedure
Create and Save a Control Module
The following procedure creates and saves a Control Module.

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
This portion of the lab should be completed by ALL
students – those configuring a C200E, and also those
configuring a C300.
2
Set up the Control Builder with both the Library and Project views visible.
3
Expand System from Library window and select CONTROLMODULE.
4
Drag and drop the Control Module into the open space at the bottom of the Project Root
ATTENTION
To create a Control Strategy, you must create a Control
Module and insert and connect function blocks. When you
drag and drop the CM to the Project root, it will appear under
the Unassigned node. Control Module names are sequentially
numbered (for example, CM30, CM31, and so on). The new
Control Module is automatically added to your Project.
50
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
5
Action
In the resulting dialog box, enter the following:
Destination Tagnames:
CM3_FIC201
Destination Item Names: CM3_FIC201_item
6
4/13/2012
Click Finish to add CM3_FIC201 to your Project Tree window under the Unassigned
section.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
51
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a Module
The following procedure configures a Control Module.

Step
1
Action
Locate your CM under the Unassigned section of the Project Tree window.
To configure a CM, you must do two things:
•
Define the parameters of the Control Module object.
•
Create, configure, and connect function blocks.
This can be done in any order. For this procedure, you will configure the Control Module
parameters first.
CM creation is the same regardless of the IO family used.
2
52
Right-click CM3_FIC201 to open the shortcut menu and then select Module Properties
to call up top level CM parameter entry screens.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
3
Action
Enter the following parameters in the Main tab:
Parent Asset
STEAM FLOW_C11
Description
STEAM FLOW CTRL
Engr Units
M3/Sec
Keyword
STEAM
Execution Period
200MS
Execution Phase
0
ATTENTION
It is important you use descriptive entries for Description
and Keyword. The Description should represent what the
CM will do in your project. In this example the CM will
control steam flow -- therefore, the keyword STEAM is
used.
4
4/13/2012
Click the Server Displays tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
53
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
5
Action
Enter
1. sysDtlPIDA in the Point Detail Display
2. sysGrpPIDA in the Group Detail Display
54
6
Add the CM to Group 61, Position1
7
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Assign the CM to the CEE

Step
1
From the Control Builder Edit menu, click Execution Environment Assign to display
the Assignments screen.
2
Locate the Available Modules section on the left side of the window and Click
CM3_FIC201 in the tab labeled CMs/SCMs.
3
4/13/2012
Action
Select CEESCEFB61 (or SIM_CEEC300) in the Assign To: pane.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
55
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

56
Step
Action
4
Click the Assign button. CM CM3_FIC201 is assigned to the CEE and will appear in the
Assigned Modules list.
5
Click Close.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Add Function Blocks to a CM

Step
1
Action
Double-click the CM (CM3_FIC201) in the Project Tab to open the CM chart.
ATTENTION
You can add PMIO function blocks to a CM in two
ways:
1
The Project Tree method.
2
The Library Tree method.
We will use the Project Tree method. This method
uses the fact that PMIO modules contain their own
configuration databases. Therefore when you add an
IOP, its configuration parameters are available from
Project.
In this case, select the first AI channel from your HLAI
IOP.
2
Expand the IOLIM0303 and IOLINK0303 and Click the + next to CPM3AI_F3C01 in
project to see the I/O Channels of CPM3AI_F3C01 IOP.
ATTENTION
If you are using SIM-C300 / C300, then Expand
SIM_C300  PMIO_IOLINK
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
57
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
3
Action
Click the block named AICHANNEL_01 and drag it into the CM (CM3_FIC201).
ATTENTION
When adding blocks from Project, the IO Channel
block is already assigned to an IOP and channel.
4
Drag the following blocks from the Library into your CM:
Block Family
DATAACQ
REGCTL
58
Block
DATAACQ
PID
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
5
Action
Add the AO PMIO Function block.
•
In the Library tab, expand the PMIO tree and click the + next to the AO16 object.
•
Click the block named AOCHANNEL and drag it into the CM.
ATTENTION
The IOP and channel are not yet assigned. We will do
that when we configure the block details.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
59
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
6
60
Action
Arrange your blocks on the screen as shown below.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a PMIO AI Channel Block

Step
Action
1
Double-click the PMIO AICHANNEL block.
2
Enter following details:
Name
:
Associated IOP :
AI0101
CPM3AI_FC301 (This is already assigned, Please see below.)
Associated IOP Type : HLAI
ATTENTION
The Associated IOP and Channel Number are already
assigned. Since this block was added from the chosen
HLAI IOP in the Project tab, it is already assigned to
the IOP and channel. When the block is renamed, the
channel takes on the same name in the IOP tree.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
61
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
3
Action
Click on the Configuration tab and enter following details:
PV Extended High Range:
5050
PV High Range :
5000
PV Low Range:
0
PV Extended Low Range:
-50
Low Cutoff Signal:
NaN
Accept all other values as default.
ATTENTION
The configuration of a PMIO AI channel differs from
that of Series A IO. With Series A IO all configuration
parameters reside in the C200E database. PMIO
parameters are split between the IOPs and their
associated IOLIM. The IOLIM communicates
parameter information to the associated C200E.
Each PMIO channel has a set of configurable
parameters and execution states. The parameters for
a HLAI analog input block are shown here.
4
62
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a Data Acquisition Block

Step
Action
1
Double click the DATAACQ block.
2
Enter the following information:
DACA
Name :
ATTENTION
This block must be named DACA in order for the
Experion PKS supplied PID point detail display to
function properly.
3
Enter the following additional information present on the Main tab:
M3/Sec
Engr Units
Execution Order in CM 20
PVEU Range Hi
5000
PVEU Range Lo
0
PV Extended Limits Hi 5050
PV Extended Limits Lo -50
4
4/13/2012
Low Signal Cut Off
0
PV Character
None
Clamping Option:
Enable
Click the Alarms tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
63
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
5
Action
Enter the following information in the Alarms form for:
PV High Trip Point
4000
Priority
High
PV High High Trip Point
4500
Priority
Urgent
ATTENTION
The Alarms in the DATAACQ block must be set within
the range of your PVEU Range Hi and PVEU Range
Lo. This will cause your block to go into Alarm if it
exceeds the ranges.
It is important that you follow the sequence. The
system will not allow you to enter the PV High High
Trip Point value before you enter the PV High Trip
Point value.
6
64
Click OK.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a PID Block

Step
Action
1
Double-click the PID block.
2
Enter the following information:
PIDA
M3/Sec
30
5000
0
Name
Engineering Units
Execution Order
PVEU Range Hi
PVEU Range Lo
ATTENTION
It is important that you name this block PIDA. If you do
not name the block PIDA, you will not be able to see
many parameters from the Station Detail Displays.
3
4/13/2012
Click the Algorithm tab.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
65
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
4
Action
Enter the following algorithm information:
T1
T1 High Limit
High Gain Limit
Linear Gain
Overall Gain
5
Click the Alarms Tab.
6
Enter the following information in the Alarms form for OP High (OPHIALM.TP):
95
Low
0
Trip Point
Priority
Severity
7
Click the SetPoint Tab.
8
Enter the following information for the Input Range:
High Limit
Low Limit
9
66
0.1
2.0
2.0
LIN
.5
5000
0
Click the Block Pins tab in the Configuration form.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
10
Action
Select Location for the PV pin to be at left.
TIP
To make the routing of the soft wiring from the DACA
block to the PIDA block more direct and neat, move
the PV input from the top of the PIDA block to the left.
This will not improve performance, just clean up the
wiring.
11
4/13/2012
Click OK to close the PID parameter configuration form.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
67
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure an AO Block

Step
Action
1
Double-click the PMIO AOCCHANNEL block.
2
Name the block AO01.
3
Accept the Defaults on the Configuration tab:
Output Direction Direct
OP Characterization Not checked
68
4
Click OK.
5
Right click the block to open the shortcut menu and select Function Block Assign.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
6
Action
In the Function Block Assignment Dialog:
1
2
Select Channel 1 of your assigned AO16 module.
Click Assign
ATTENTION
The Function Block Assignment Dialog shows all channels of
all IOPs in the Project of the type selected. That is why the
names of the IOP modules need to be descriptive. Use the
scroll bar to see the channel choices.
7
4/13/2012
The AO block is now assigned to an IOP and Channel number.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
69
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

70
Step
Action
8
Wire the blocks together as shown.
9
Save and close your CM.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
Configure a Hart Temperature Transmitter

Step
1
Action
Add and assign a new Control Module to your CEE.
Open the parameters Main tab and configure as below.
In Server Displays Tab
Point Detail Display: sysDtlDACA
Group Detail Display: sysGrpDACA
Group#:
61
Pos# :
2
Group Parameter: Hart1
Click OK.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
71
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
2
Action
Open Hart1 in chart view.
Expand the IOLIM0303 tree and browse to HART AI IO (CPM3HAI_F3C11) in the project
tree.
Drag Channel 01 onto the Hart1 chart.
`
ATTENTION
If you are using SIM-C300 / C300, then expand the
PMIO_IOLINK
3
Double click and open the HAICHANNEL_01 block properties window.
Select the HART Configuration tab and enable HART.
72
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO

Step
4
Action
Select the Main Tab.
Change the name of HAICHANNEL_01 to HAI.
Click OK to close block properties for HAI.
5
Add a DATAACQ function block from the library.
Change the name of DATAACQ to DACA.
Close the properties windows for DACA block.
Wire the blocks as shown below.
6
4/13/2012
Save and close the CM.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
73
PMIO
Configure a Continuous Control Strategy with PMIO
This page was intentionally left blank.
74
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
(This Lab is Optional)
Practice
Objective
After you complete this lesson, you will be able to activate CMs with PMIO channels and contrast
the activation to that of CMs using Series A and Series C IO.
•
Download a CM with PMIO channels
•
Activate a CM with PMIO channels
•
Activate and deactivate PMIO channels
Introduction
The purpose of this lesson is to give the knowledge to load and activate CMs that use PMIO
channels.
•
Load CMs
•
Activate CMs and IOP Channels
Note:
If you are using SIM_C300 / C300, then assignment of CM or IOP has to be done to CEE of SIMC300 / C300
IOLIM0303 and IOLINK0303 (Referred in this lab) will not be present if you are using SIM-C300 /
C300. Use PMIO_IOLINK to access the IOP
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
75
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Procedure
Load CMs

Step
1
Action
Read the important information in the Attention box:
ATTENTION
This portion of the lab should be completed by ALL
students – those configuring a C200E, and also those
configuring a C300.
2
76
Select CM3_FIC201 and Hart1 Control Modules from the Project tab and click the Load
button.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO

Step
3
Action
Click Continue and verify the items to be loaded.
ATTENTION
The PMIO channel blocks are listed in the Load Dialog
box as separate entries with their own Post Load
States.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
77
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO

Step
4
Action
Do NOT select the automatic Post Load State check box.
ATTENTION
IOPs have their own databases. Each channel has
capability beyond merely dealing with raw inputs and
outputs. One feature of a channel is its ability to be
active or inactive. Although both the CM and Channels
can be made active from the Automatically Change
checkbox, we will activate the blocks after loading to
learn from the process.
5
Click OK.
6
The Load dialog box will appear.
ATTENTION
The Load dialog box will automatically disappear then
the load is complete with no errors.
78
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
Activating CMs and IOP Channels

Step
Action
1
After successfully loading the CM, go to the Monitoring tab.
2
Expand your CPM, CEE, and CMs in the tree.
3
Expand your IOLIM and IOLINK and your IOPs.
ATTENTION
Both the CMs and the IOP channel blocks are blue.
The blue channel blocks appear both under the CM
and under the IOPs.
The execution status is the same in both locations,
and can be changed from either location.
If you are using SIM C300 / C300, expand the
PMIO_IOLINK and the IOP
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
79
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO

Step
Action
4
To activate from the CM, select Hart1 and CM3_FIC201 and activate the CMs as shown.
ATTENTION
Activate the IOP Channel Blocks from either the CM or
the IOPs.
To Activate one Channel Block, right click the block
from under either the CM or under the IOP and select
Activate > Selected Item(s) and Content(s).
5
80
Click Yes in the ‘Change State’ dialog box.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
31
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO

Step
Action
6
ATTENTION
The IO Channel Blocks turn green (Active) under both
the CM and the IOP tree locations
IOP location is different for SIM-C300 / C300 ( in
PMIO_IOLINK)
7
4/13/2012
NOTE: PMIO and Hart devices do not support the ability to use simulated values as
inputs, as does C200E I/O.
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
81
PMIO
Load, Activate, and Operate CMs with PMIO
This page was intentionally left blank.
82
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
32
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
1
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Overview
Honeywell
• In this presentation we will learn types of PID Blocks:
– Proportional, Integral & Derivative (PID)
– Proportional, Integral & Derivative with External Reset Feedback (PIDER)
– Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Feed forward (PIDFF)
– Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Profit Loop PKS (PID_PL)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
2
1
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Overview
Honeywell
• PID Blocks
–
Are regulatory control blocks that operate as a proportional-integralderivative (PID) controller
– Support the Ideal form of calculating the PID terms
– Ideal form is often called the digital-computer version of the PID controller
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
3
PID
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• PID
– Provides an implementation of the PID algorithm using the Ideal form,
whereby the following combinations of control terms may be configured:
– Proportional-only (acts on the error PV - SP)
– Integral-only (acts on the error PV - SP)
– Proportional & integral (act on error PV - SP), & derivative (acts on changes
in PV)
– Proportional & derivative (act on changes in PV), & integral (acts on the error
PV - SP)
– Proportional, integral & derivative (act on the error PV - SP)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4
2
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• PIDER
– Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller that accepts a
reset feedback signal, a tracking value, and a tracking control switch
– Supports the same Ideal form of calculating the PID terms as the PID block
– Also prevents windup when the secondary does not propagate windup
status or control initialization data back to the primary of a remote (foreign)
controller
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
5
PIDFF
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• PIDFF
– Provides the same classic PID function as outlined above with the ability to
accept a “feed forward” signal
– Can configure the feed forward signal to be added to or multiplied by the
PID’s incremental output to meet varying control requirements
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
6
3
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
PIDER
PID_PL
Honeywell
• PID_PL
– Provides PID control using a model predictive control package called Profit
Loop PKS
– Incorporates robust control techniques to enhance control performance
despite process model uncertainty and measurement error
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
7
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PID
• The PID block has two analog inputs – a process variable (PV) and a set
point (SP)
– The difference between PV and SP is the error, and the PID block calculates
a control output (OP) that drives the error to zero
• The following equations are supported:
– Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID) on the error
– Proportional and Integral (PI) on the error and Derivative (D) on changes in
PV
– Integral (I) on the error and Proportional and Derivative (PD) on changes in
PV
– Integral (I) only
– Proportional (P) only
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
8
4
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• The Main Tab is for configuring the name, process value, and mode
Allow to set the
PV values
Specifies the execution
order of the block in the
CM relative to other blocks
contained in this CM
Explained Later
Explained
later
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
9
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Manual PV Option
•
Used to specify the mode and output the block is to
assume when PV status (PVSTS) changes to MANUAL
•
The following options are available
– NOSHED - No changes
– SHEDHOLD - Sets MODE to MANUAL and MODEATTR to Operator, disables
external mode switching (ESWPERM), and holds output at the last good value
– SHEDLOW - Sets MODE to MANUAL and MODEATTR to Operator, disables external
mode switching (ESWPERM), and sets output to its extended low limit (OPEXLOLM)
value
– SHEDHIGH - Sets MODE to MANUAL and MODEATTR to Operator, disables
external mode switching (ESWPERM), and sets output to its extended high limit
(OPEXHILM) value
– SHEDSAFE - Sets MODE to MANUAL and MODEATTR to Operator, disables
external mode switching (ESWPERM), and sets output to the configured safe output
(SAFEOP) value
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
10
5
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
PID Main Tab
Honeywell
Safety Interlock and Bad Control Option
• Safety Interlock Option
– Specifies the value of MODE and OP which the block is to assume upon a
safety interlock alarm
• Bad Control Option
– Specifies the value of MODE and OP which the block is to assume if CV
goes BAD
• Both the parameters have the same options
• The explanation for each parameter value was
provided in previous slides
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
11
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PID Main Tab
Identifies the Analog Input Channel block to read
PVRAW. The faceplate display shows the block’s
PVRAW from this input source in comparison with
the PV
Applicable only for Cascade loops. Block accepts or
ignores the initialization and override requests from
the secondary based on this selection . The default
selection is Enabled (checked or accepts requests).
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
12
6
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
•
Mode identifies who may store values to the block's initializable inputs or output
•
MODE processing checks for the following conditions and changes the block's MODE as
appropriate
•
–
External request for MODE switching
–
Safety interlock request
Configuration options available are:
–
NONE - No Mode configured
–
MAN - OP is stored by either the operator or a user program
–
AUTO - The function block derives OP. The input is stored by either the operator or an user
program
–
CAS – The block fetches its initializable input from the primary and calculates OP
–
BCAS – The function block derives OP. The input is pulled from another function block (the
primary)
–
NORMAL - Parameter NORMMODE value is used
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
13
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Mode Attribute
• Mode Attribute identifies who may store values to the output (OP) when
the block's MODE is Manual
• Configuration options available are:
– NONE - Mode Attribute is not configured
– OPERATOR - Operator can set MODE, OP, SP, RATIO and BIAS
– PROGRAM - Program can set MODE, OP, SP, RATIO and BIAS
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
14
7
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Mode
Honeywell
Normal Mode
• Normal Mode is the MODE that the block is to assume when the
Control to Normal function is initiated through the Station
display
• When the MODE option is set to NORMAL, the block chooses the mode
from this parameter
• Configuration options available are similar to MODE
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
15
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Normal Mode Attribute
• Normal Mode Attribute is the Mode Attribute (MODEATTR) the
block is to assume when the Control to Normal function is
initiated through the Station display
• Configuration options available are:
– NONE - Normal Mode Attribute is not configured
– OPERATOR - Operator stores to OP or SP as determined by MODE.
Operator also store to MODE
– PROGRAM - A program stores to OP or SP as determined by MODE.
Program also store to MODE.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
16
8
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Permit operator mode, permit external mode, enable external mode
switching
Specify if operators are permitted to make MODE
changes or not. The default is Enabled (checked). A
store to MODE does not change the NORMMODE
Explained on next slide
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
17
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
External Mode Switching
• External Mode Switching is used to establish mode interlocks within a
control strategy
• Example:
– A Logic block sets a Boolean (True or False value) based on some start-up
conditions
– One or more Regulatory Control blocks are configured to go into cascade
mode when the Boolean is true (Mode is changed externally by logic block)
• Permit External Mode Switching (ESWPERM) parameter specifies if
external MODE switching is permitted or not
– Engineer access level is needed to enable/disable this parameter
• Enable External Mode Switching parameter enables the External Mode
switching function
– This parameter is valid only if ESWPERM is checked (Permitted)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
18
9
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
PID Main Tab
Honeywell
Enable Bad Output Connection Option
• Enable Bad Output Connection Option is a checkbox selection option
available in all regulatory control blocks
– By default disabled,
• To enable BADOCOPT, enable the option BADOCOPTENB
• If enabled, user can configure the delay value in BADOCOPT parameter
– Mode is forced to MANUAL after a specified delay on loss of I/O
communication
Enter Bad Output Connection
Option between 0 to 60
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
19
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
Used to select the control
equation. The selections are
EQA, EQB, EQC, EQD, and
EQE. Explained in next slide
Explained later in presentation
Specifies the Integral time
used in the Control equation
Specifies the High and Low
limit values for the Integral
time setting
Specifies the Derivative time
used in the Control equation
Specifies the High and Low
limit values for the Derivative
time setting
Used to set the gain limits
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
20
10
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Linear Gain (LIN) provides a proportional control action that is equal to a
constant (K) times the error (PV -SP)
– Applies to equations A, B, and C
– Overall Gain option specifies the overall gain value which is used to
calculate the proportional term in the PID equation
• Default value is 1
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
21
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
•
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Gap gain (GAP) option reduces the sensitivity
of the control action when the PV is in a userspecified band (gap) around the set point
– Applies to equations A, B, and C
– Gap High Limit specifies (GAPHILM) the high
limit value in PV engineering units to be used
when calculating GAP gain
– Gap Low Limit (GAPLOLM) specifies the low
limit value in PV engineering units to be used
when calculating GAP gain
– Gap Gain Factor (KMODIFGAP) specifies the
value used for calculating overall gain (K) when
the PV input is within the user specified band
(GAPLOLM - GAPHILM) around the SP.
• The value range is 0.0 to 1.0
•
Linear Gain Factor (KLIN) specifies the value
used for calculating the overall gain (K) in
association with GAP, NONLIN, or EXT gain
option
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
22
11
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
• Non Linear gain (NONLIN) option provides a proportional control action
that is equal to the square of the error
– Applies to equations A, B, and C
– Non-Linearity Form (NLFORM) specifies the
value (0 or 1) to be used for calculating gain (K)
• Default value is 1
– Non-Linear Gain Factor (NLGAIN) specifies the non-linear gain value to be
used for calculating gain (K)
• Default value is 0
• Legacy Gap - Allows the user to revert back to old GAP and Nonlinear
gain calculations so that there is no change in behavior after migration
from TPS to Experion
– When enabled, it will allow the Experion controllers to have the same
behavior as the TPS xPM controller
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
23
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
• External gain (EXT) option modifies the gain (K) by an input value from
either the process, another function block, or a user program
– Used to compensate for nonlinear process gain
– Lets you tune the PID gain independent of the normal operating point of the
process
– Eg: For controlling the level of tank whose cross-section is not constant, the
EXT option can be used to modify the gain to compensate for the nonlinear
rate of level change, which is caused by the changing shape of the tank
• Applies to equations A, B, and C
• External Gain Factor (KMODIFEXT) specifies an input value from either
the process, another function block, or a user program to be used to
modify the gain (K) calculation per this equation:
K = KLIN * KMODIFEXT
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
24
12
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• The PID block provides five different equations for calculating the PID
– The CTLEQN parameter is used to specify the desired equation
• Equation A:
– All three terms (Proportional, Integral, Derivative) act on the error (PV - SP)
as shown
• Equation B:
– The proportional and integral terms act on the error (PV - SP) and the
derivative term acts on changes in PV
– This equation is used to eliminate derivative spikes in the control action as a
result of quick changes in SP
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
25
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
• Equation C:
– The integral term acts on the error (PV - SP) and the proportional and
derivative terms act on changes in PV
– This equation provides the smoothest and slowest response to SP changes
• Equation D
– Provides only Integral control
• Equation E
– Provides only Proportional Control
• CV = K (PV - SP) + OPBIAS.FIX + OPBIAS.FLOAT
• Equation E does not work with the override feedback function
• It is a whole value algorithm that bumps the output to PV-SP regardless
of the ORFBVAL preset to CV
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
26
13
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
• Acronyms used in the Equations :
– CV = output of PID (Equations A, B, C, D) in percent or output of P-controller
(Equation E only) in engineering units
– K = gain (proportional term)
– L-1 = inverse of the LaPlace transform
– PV = process input value in engineering units
– PVP = PV in percent
– a = 1/16 fixed rate amplitude
– s = La Place operator
– SP = set point value in engineering units
– SPP = SP in percent
– T1 = integral time constant in minutes
– T2 = derivative time constant in minutes
– OPBIAS.FIX = fixed bias (Equation E only)
– OPBIAS.FLOAT = floating bias (Equation E only)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
27
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Algorithm
• Direct or reverse control
– A PID block is configured for direct-control action or reverse-control action
– Changing the control action effectively changes the sign of the gain
• With direct-control action, an increase in the error (PV - SP) increases
the PID output (CV)
• With reverse-control action, an increase in the error (PV - SP) decreases
the PID output (CV)
– For example,
• If SPP = 50% and PVP = 51%, then the error is 1%
– With direct-control action, if PVP changes to 52%, the error
increases causing CV to increase
– With reverse-control action, if PVP changes to 52%, the error
increases causing CV to decrease
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
28
14
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• SP contains set point value in engineering units (SPP is the SP value in
percent)
Specifies the Set
point high and low
limits
Specifies an
initial set point
value. The
default value is 0
Explained later
Explained later in
the presentation
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
29
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Set Point Tab
• Timeout
– Mode:
• Allows to select the desired MODE the block is to assume if an
initializable input times out
• The selections are AUTO, BCAS, CAS, MAN,NONE,and NORMAL
• The default selection is MAN
– Time:
• Time in seconds that must expire before the block assumes that its input
update has timed out
• The block must be in CAS mode for it to monitor its primary input for
timeout
• The default setting is 0, which means the timeout function is disabled
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
30
15
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Set Point Tab
Honeywell
Set Point Tab
• Enable SP Push: (PUSHSP)
– Used for Cascade loops where the Primary and Secondary are in different
Experion clusters
– When Selected, the SP for the Secondary PID block is pushed from the
Primary through an Inter Cluster Gateway
– When this option is not selected the Secondary will pull the SP from the
primary
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
31
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Set Point Tab
• Enable Advisory SP Processing (ADVDEVOPT)
– Generates a deviation alarm when the PV deviates from a user specified
“advisory” SP value
– The default selection is unchecked (Disabled)
• Advisory SP Value (ADVSP)
– Sets an advisory SP value in PV engineering units, when Advisory SP
Processing is enabled
– When PV exceeds or deviates from this value, the block generates an
advisory deviation alarm
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
32
16
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
– Specifies if PV tracking is enabled for this block
– When PV tracking is enabled, it sets the SP equal to PV when a cascade
loop is interrupted by either initialization, operator or program operation
(setting MODE to MAN)
– Enabled for PIDs in a cascade loop
– Default selection is unchecked (disabled)
• Enable PV Tracking in Auto/Init (PVTRAKOPTAI)
– Specifies if PV Tracking option is enabled for the specific case when the
block is in Auto mode and it is undergoing initialization (INITMAN is ON)
– The default selection is unchecked (disabled)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
33
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Set Point Tab
• Enable SP Ramping (SPTVOPT)
– Allow to specify if an operator can initiate a set point ramp action or not
– It provides a smooth transition from the current set point value to a new one
– The default selection is unchecked (disabled)
• Normal Ramp Rate (SPTVNORMRATE)
– Specifies a ramp rate per minute in engineering units, when SP Ramping is
enabled
– This starts the SP ramping function without specifying a ramp time
– The default selection is Not a Number (NaN)
• Max. Ramp Deviation (SPTVDEVMAX)
– Specifies the maximum Ramp deviation value per minute
in engineering units, when SP Ramping is enabled
– Maintains the PV value within the specified deviation
range for a ramping SP
• Stops the SP ramp until the PV input catches up
with the SP value
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
34
17
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Set Point Tab
• Enable PV Tracking (PVTRAKOPT)
Honeywell
Output Tab
• Output Indication (OUTIND) parameter specifies the way to access the
output (OP) parameter and display them on the block’s faceplate display
• Following options are available
–
–
–
–
Direct
Reverse
DirectDisplnd
ReverseDisplnd
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
35
Honeywell
Output Tab
•
Direct
•
Reverse
•
DirectDisplnd
•
ReverseDisplnd
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
– No value reversal - Output range is 0 to 100 percent
– No display indications - Closed / Open indication is not shown on the OP bar graph of
the faceplate display
– This is the default selection
– Value reversal - Output range is 100 to 0 percent
– No display indications - Closed / Open indication is not shown on the OP bar graph of
the faceplate display
– No value reversal - output range is 0 to 100 percent
– Closed and Open indications are shown at the 0 and 100 percent points on the OP
bar graph of the faceplate display
– No value reversal - output range is 0 to 100 percent
– Closed and Open indications are shown at the 100 and 0 percent points on the OP
bar graph of the faceplate
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
36
18
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Valve indicator position shows a graphical indicator on the OP bar
graphs of whether a valve is open at 0% or closed at 100%
– If the valve is opened, it will be indicated by Hollow Valve
– If it closed, it will be indicated as Filled Valve
Closing of valve in
Reverse Direction
Closing of valve in
Direct Direction
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
37
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Alarms Tab
• Set the alarm values for PID block
Sets the trip points for the given alarm.
The default value is NaN (Disables trip
point)
Allow to enable or disable Advisory
Deviation and/or Safety Interlock alarm
types
Type – Identifies the types of
alarms this block supports
Assign a relative severity
individually for each alarm
type as a number between
0 to 15, with 15 being the
most severe
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
38
19
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Output
Honeywell
Alarms Tab
Alarm is neither reported
nor annunciated
Alarm is logged but it
does not appear on the
Alarm Summary display
Alarm is annunciated
and appears on the
Alarm Summary display
Specifies a dead band value
that applies to all analog alarms
to prevent nuisance alarms due
to noise at values near the trip
point. Default value is 1
Specifies a time in seconds to define how
long an analog alarm must exist before it is
set true. The default value is 0, which means
the alarm is set true as soon as the value
exceeds the deadband value
Specifies the unit of deadband
value (Percent or EU
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
39
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Tab
• SCM tab allows the configuration of Sequential Control Module (SCM)
parameters for either block
Select an SCM Mode Tracking Option
(MODETRACK) to identify when the operator
can take over control of the device from the
Sequential Control Module (SCM)
Set the abnormal
state options for
abnormal conditions
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
40
20
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• MODETRACK is used by the device to determine the states of
MODEATTR and NORMMODEATTR based upon the MODE (that is,
SCMMODE) of the containing CONTROLMODULE block
• Following MODETRACK options are available
–
–
–
–
ONESHOT
CONTRTN
SEMICONT
CONT
• ONESHOT
– When SCMMODE is changed from Manual to Auto, SemiAuto or SingleStep
or when SCMSTATE changes from idle to Running:
• MODEATTR is set to Program, but can also be changed by the operator
– When SCMMODE is changed back to Manual:
• MODEATTR is returned to operator
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
41
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Tab
• CONTRTN
– When SCMMODE is changed from Manual to Auto, SemiAuto or SingleStep
or the SCMSTATE changes from idle to Running:
• MODEATTR is set to Program and cannot be changed by the operator
as long as the SCM remains in automatic
– When SCMMODE is changed back to Manual:
• MODEATTR is returned to operator
• SEMICONT
– When SCMMODE is changed from Manual to Auto, SemiAuto or SingleStep
or the SCMSTATE changes from idle to Running or when any of the
SCMSTEP(i) changes while SCMMODE is automatic:
• MODEATTR is set to Program, but can also be changed by the operator
– When SCMMODE is changed back to Manual:
• MODEATTR is returned to operator
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
42
21
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
SCM Tab
Honeywell
SCM Tab
• CONT
– When SCMMODE is changed from Manual to Auto, SemiAuto or SingleStep
• MODEATTR is set to Program and cannot be changed by the operator
as long as the SCM remains in Automatic
– When SCMMODE is changed back to Manual
• MODEATTR is not changed, but the Operator can overwrite it
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
43
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Tab
• Option Type
– Allow to specify the action the function block is to take when the SCM goes
into an abnormal state
– The Starting State Option (STARTOPT)
• Applies when the SCM state is Checking, Idle, or Complete
– The Stop/Abort State Option (STOPOPT)
• Applies when the SCM state is Stopping or Stopped, Aborting or Aborted
– The Hold State Option (HOLDOPT)
• Applies when the SCM state is Holding or Hold
– The Restart State Option (RESTARTOPT)
• Applies when the SCM state is Resume or Run
– The NONE and LASTREQ
• The only selections for the Restart State Option
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
44
22
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
NONE - No changes
MAN - Set MODEREQ to MANUAL
AUTO - Set MODEREQ to AUTOMATIC
CAS - Set MODEREQ to CASCADE
FIXEDOP - Set OPREQ to the Configured Value
HOLDPV - Set SPREQ to PV
FIXED SP - Set SPREQ to the Configured Value and SPRATEREQ to
NaN
• RAMPEDSP - Set SPTVREQ to the Configured Value and
SPRATEREQ to Configured Rate
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
45
SCM Tab
• Value for (STARTVAL, STOPVAL, HOLDVAL)
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
– Specifies an output or set point value within the respective range depending
upon Option Type selection
• For output, the range is between OPEXLOLM and OPEXHILM
• For Set point the range is between SPLOLM and SPHILM
– The default value is NaN (Not a Number)
• Rate for (STARTRATE, STOPRATE, HOLDRATE)
– Applicable only for RAMPEDSP option
– Specifies a rate value (STARTRATE, STOPRATE, HOLDRATE) for setting
the SPRATEREQ of SP ramping function
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
46
23
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
SCM Tab
Topics
Honeywell
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative (PID)
Integral & Derivative with External Reset Feedback
• Proportional,
(PIDER)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Feed forward (PIDFF)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Profit Loop PKS (PID_PL)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
47
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PIDER
• PIDER block is a regulatory control block that operates as a
proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller that accepts a reset
feedback signal, a tracking value, and a tracking control switch
– Supports the same form of calculating the PID terms as the PID block
– Prevents windup in a cascade loop, when the secondary does not propagate
windup status or control initialization data back to the primary of a remote
(foreign) controller
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
48
24
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• The PIDER block accepts five inputs
– A process variable (PV), a set point (SP), a reset feedback value (RFB), a
tracking value (TRFB), and a tracking control switch (S1)
– The reset feedback (RFB) signal comes from the remote controller’s PV, and
the tracking value (TRFB) comes from its PV or SP
– By monitoring the remote controller’s PV and SP, the PIDER block can
determine if the remote controller is responding
• If the remote controller is not responding, it can prevent its own output
from winding up
• The following equations are supported:
– Proportional, Integral, and Derivative (PID) on the error (Equation A)
– Proportional and Integral (PI) on the error and Derivative (D) on changes in
PV (Equation B)
– Integral (I) on the error and Proportional and Derivative (PD) on changes in
PV (Equation C)
– Integral (I) only (Equation D)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
49
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PIDER
• All Tabs are similar to PID block
• The option of Reset Feedback in algorithm tab is available for PIDER
The gain value to be applied
to the Reset Feedback signal
as a scaling factor
The maximum deviation allowed
between the calculated value (CV)
and the RFB signal in percent
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
50
25
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
PIDER
Topics
Honeywell
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative (PID)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with External Reset Feedback
(PIDER)
•
Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Feed forward (PIDFF)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Profit Loop PKS (PID_PL)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
51
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PIDFF
• The PIDFF block is like the PID block but it accepts a feedforward signal
as an additional input
– Can configure the PIDFF block so the feedforward signal is added to or
multiplied by the normal PID algorithm’s incremental output to meet
particular control requirements
– Can implement a feedforward control function through a single function block
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
52
26
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• The PIDFF block has three analog inputs – a process variable (PV), a
set point (SP), and a feedforward signal (FF)
• The difference between PV and SP is the error and this block calculates
a control output (OP) that should drive the error to zero
• The feedforward signal (FF) is included in the calculation of the PID’s
incremental output before the full value output is accumulated
• It supports the same Tabs as the PID block except the Feedforward
option in algorithm tab
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
53
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
•
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Feedforward: Select whether the feedforward signal (FF) will be added to or
multiplied by the PIDFF block’s incremental output
– ADD:• FF is multiplied by a user-specified scale factor (KF) and added to the
incremental PID output (DELCV)
• As an example, this scale factor might be used to convert FF from engineering
units to percent
– MULTIPLY:• FF is multiplied by the scale factor (KF) and then multiplied by the full-value PID
output (CV)
– Gain:• Specify the gain (KFF) for the feedforward input
– Bias:• Specify the bias (BFF) for the feedforward input
• Applicable for Multiply option only
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
54
27
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
PIDFF
Topics
Honeywell
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative (PID)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with External Reset Feedback
(PIDER)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Feed forward (PIDFF)
• Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Profit Loop PKS (PID_PL)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
55
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
PID_PL
• The PID-PL block is a regulatory control block combining the
functionality of PID controller with Profit Loop PKS
– Profit Loop PKS is a robust, model-based, predictive controller and optimizer
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
56
28
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
•
In many cases, Profit Loop PKS provides superior control and should be used in
place of the standard PID algorithms:
– Processes with significant delay or inverse (wrong-way) response
– Property control employing infrequent measurement updates (such as from a gas
chromatograph)
– Noisy processes where valve wear is problematic
– Dynamically changing processes
– Range control – Processes where range control will be beneficial, such as tank surge
control
• Range control constrains the PV within a user specified range (gap) rather than to
a fixed setpoint
•
Profit Loop PKS supports following equations
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
Equation A
Equation B
Equation C
Equation D
Equation E
Equation F
Equation G
PROFITLOOP
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
57
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Algorithm Tab
• ProfitLoop Control Mode (CTRLMODE) – Lets you select the means of
control for the PID-PL block:
– SETPOINT:
• With this selection, the function block’s PV tracks the setpoint (SP)
– RANGE:
• With this selection, the function block’s PV stays within high and low
setpoint limits (SPHI and SPLO)
– Performance Ratio
• Setting is for non-integrating processes (D[1]<> 0)
• It defines how hard the function block will “push” to a setpoint or range
limit
• Enter a performance ratio value of 0.1 to 10.0 for the desired ratio of
closed loop control response to open loop response
– Closed-Loop Response
• Enter a time of greater than 0.1 minute
for the desired closed-loop response time
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
58
29
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
PID_PL
Honeywell
Setpoint Tab
• Many attributes configured on this tab are the same as those for the PID
block
• Range Control (Set Point Tab)
– SP High (SPHI)
• Applicable only if the Control Range is set to RANGE
• Used to enter the upper range limit for SP, in Engineering Units
• The value must be greater than or equal to SPLO, and less than
SPHILM, that is: SPLO >= SPHI < SPHILM
– SP Low (SPLO)
• Applicable only if the Control Range is set to RANGE
• Used to enter the lower range limit for SP, in Engineering Units
• The value must be less than or equal to SPHI, and greater than
SPLOLM, that is: SPLOLM > SPLO <= SPHI
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
59
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Setpoint Tab
• Range Control Ramping
–
SPLO Ramp Rate
• Applicable only if the Control Range is set to RANGE
• It is the ramp rate applied to external (operator or program) changes in
the lower control limit (SPLO)
• The rate must be greater than 0 and expressed in EU/minute
– SPHI Ramp Rate
• Applicable only if the Control Range is set to RANGE
• It is the ramp rate applied to external (operator or program) changes in
the higher control limit (SPHI)
• The rate must be greater than 0 and expressed in EU/minute
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
60
30
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Many attributes configured on this tab are the same as those in the PID
block
• The attribute specific to the PID-PL block is
– Valve Travel Reduction
• Allows to select the level of noise filtering to be applied to model bias
• Possible selections are:
– NORMAL: Apply no additional noise filtering
– MODERATE: Apply some additional filtering
– FULL: Apply maximum additional filtering
• Reducing the noise level leads to a reduction in valve travel with fewer
valve reversals
• There is little impact on the responsiveness of the control algorithm to
fast disturbances
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
61
Honeywell
Laplace Transfer Function Model
•
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
For Profit Loop PKS, the dynamic model is entered as a LaPlace transfer
function of the form:
– Where
• G is the process gain;
• T is the deadtime;
• n and d1 are the process dynamics
– The Laplace variable, s, has units of min(-1), requiring dynamics and deadtimes to be
entered in minutes
– PID-PL buffers user entered model changes to prevent partial updating of the model
• Model changes are not accepted on a running function block until the
UPDATEMODEL flag has been set
– This flag will automatically clear on completion of the update
• To abort the model update, the RESETMODEL flag can be set
– This flag resets the user interface to the active model and clears itself
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
62
31
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Output Tab
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
• Tab is used for configuring the process model for your Profit Loop PKS
controller
• Manual entry of a model in Laplace form, In addition, optimization, PV,
and OP settings can be made
Set optimization
setting
Define the transfer
function model of
process dynamics to
be used in the control
of process
Set PV
configuration
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
63
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
•
•
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Entries or changes in the area are treated differently, depending on whether
working in Project view or Monitoring view
For Project mode:
– If entries or changes are made in the Model area, the parameter values are updated
in the Engineering Repository Database (ERDB) immediately
•
For Monitoring mode:
– If entries or changes are made in the Model area , they are displayed, but the function
block is not updated until the Update Model command is selected
•
Transfer Function # of Numerator Coefficients
– The number of numerator coefficients, from 1 to 5, in the Laplace transfer function
model of the process
– Number should be at least one less than the number of denominator coefficients
•
Transfer Function Numerator Coefficients
– The desired value for each coefficient in the array defining the numerator polynomial
in the Laplace transfer function model of the process
– N[1] is the coefficient preceding the s^0 (constant) term, while N[5] is the coefficient
preceding the s^4 term
– If the coefficient will not be used, enter a value of 0
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
64
32
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Transfer Function # of Denominator Coefficients
– The number of denominator coefficients, from 1 to 5, in the Laplace transfer
function model of the process
– Number should be at least one greater than the number of numerator
coefficients
• Transfer Function Denominator Coefficients
– The desired value for each coefficient in the array defining the denominator
polynomial in the Laplace transfer function model of the process
– D[1] is the coefficient preceding the s^0 (constant) term, while D[5] is the
coefficient preceding the s^4 term
• Process Gain
– A nonzero value, for the gain associated with the Laplace transfer function
model of the process
– Use the value corresponding to the defined process gain units
– Process gain units is defined in percentage (%PV / %OP) or Engineering
Units (PVEU/OPEU)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
65
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
• Deadtime
– A value of 0 - 3000 execution intervals, for the process deadtime
(transportation lag) as defined in the Laplace transfer function model
– Entry depends on the execution period on the Control Module
• Process Gain Units
– The units to be used in conjunction with the process gain:
• PVEU/OPEU:- Gain expressed in engineering units
• %PV/%OP:- Gain expressed as a percentage of range
• Update Model
– The model defined in the PID-PL configuration form can be downloaded to
the active controller
– Clicking this button updates model values in the ERDB, calculates the
model, and calculates the controller
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
66
33
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
• Reset Model
– The model in the PID-PL configuration form can be reset to match the model
in the active controller
– Button is inactive if the model in the configuration form matches the model in
the active controller
• Start Assistant
– The Profit Loop PKS Assistant, a companion intended to simplify Profit Loop
PKS configuration activities, can be started from the Advanced tab
– The Assistant provides several tools to help with the model definition
process
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
67
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
• Optimizer Mode
–
When the Control Mode is set to Range (on the Algorithm form), it can allow
the process to completely float within the range, or may impose a secondary
"optimization" objective to drive the process to an optimal state
– The desired optimization modes are:
• NONE: No optimization
• MINIMIZE: Optimize toward the lower limit of the range (minimize the
PV)
• MAXIMIZE: Optimize toward the upper limit of the range (maximize the
PV)
• OPTTARGET: Optimize toward a specific target value (a user-specified
SP)
• DUALRANGE: Strive to keep the optimal solution between optimization
limits, SPLOLMOPT and SPHILMOPT
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
68
34
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Optimizer Speed
– Dictates how fast the optimizer drives the process towards the optimal
target. Enter a value of 0.1 to 10.0
– It is a unitless value
Define the SP Offset
high and low limits
Define the OP Offset
high and low limits
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
69
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
• Async PV Option:
– Updates the function block about the new PV measurement (when not to
expect a change), so that the function block does not react to obsolete
information
– CONTINUOUS:
• The PV measurement is updated at least once with every execution
period
• Select this setting when the sensor involved generates a continuously
updated signal, such as a thermocouple or strain gauge
– ONPVCHANGE:
• The PV measurement is updated when the PV parameter changes
• Selection is appropriate for gas chromatographs
• Do not select ONPVCHANGE if noise alters the PV value between
analyzer updates.
– EXTERNALSYNC: The PV measurement is updated when an external flag,
connected to NEWSAMPLE is set
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
70
35
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Advanced Tab
Honeywell
Alarms Tab
• Predicted PV High
– The predicted PV high alarm is used to indicate if the predicted steady-state
PV value exceeds the value specified for more than a specified time (bad PV
shed time)
• A value greater than or equal to zero enables the predicted PV high
alarm trip point
• NaN (Not a Number) disables the predicted PV high alarm
• Predicated PV Low
– The predicted PV low alarm is used to indicate if the predicted steady-state
PV value drops below a particular value (entered on the PID-PL Block
Parameters - Algorithm form) for more than a specified time
• A value greater than or equal to zero enables the predicted PV low
alarm trip point
• NaN (Not a Number) disables the predicted PV low alarm
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
71
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Alarms Tab
• Bad PV Shed Time (Sec)
– Specifies the amount of time (in seconds) the block is allowed to run in Bad
PV before a bad PV alarm is generated
• If the PID-PL block’s PV falls out of range, PVSTS changes to Bad
– Profit Loop PKS discontinues bias updating and operates strictly from its
model predictions, for the specified amount of bad PV shed time
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
72
36
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
–
–
–
–
Proportional, Integral & Derivative (PID)
Proportional, Integral & Derivative with External Reset Feedback (PIDER)
Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Feed forward (PIDFF)
Proportional, Integral & Derivative with Profit Loop PKS (PID_PL)
• PID:
– The PID blocks are regulatory control block that operates as a proportionalintegral-derivative (PID) controller
• PIDER:
– Operates as a proportional-integral-derivative (PID) controller that accepts a
reset feedback signal, a tracking value, and a tracking control switch
• PIDFF:
– Provides the same classic PID function with the ability to accept a “feed
forward” signal
• PID_PL
– Provides PID control using a model predictive control package called Profit
Loop PKS
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
73
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
74
37
Describe Types of PID Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Summary
• Type of PID blocks:
Describe Device Control Blocks
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
75
Honeywell
Overview Device Control Point
Output Truth Table and State Names
State
State Name
DI
State
State Name
DO
START
1
STOP
0
State 1
START
1
State 1
State 0
STOP
0
State 0
DI
Appendix
DO
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
76
38
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• The Device Control (DEVCTL) Block is a multi-input, multi-output
function block
– Provides an interface for discrete devices, such as motors, solenoid valves,
and motor-operated valves
– Provides built-in structures for handling interlocks
– Supports the interlock conditions to be viewed in group, detail and graphic
displays
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
77
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Device Control Block
• Manipulates sets of digital outputs and interprets corresponding
feedback of digital inputs represented by the state parameter PV
(Current Feedback State)
• Operation consists of
– Transmitting commands represented by state parameter OP (commanded
output state)
– Monitoring PV
– Producing alarms based on various configurations
• PV has not achieved state commanded in OP
• Provides safety interlocks, individual state interlocks, initialization
manual, maintenance statistics, and batch level 1 drive functions
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
78
39
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Device Control Block
Honeywell
Configuration Properties
Parameters common to
all function blocks
Used to set the block’s
mode attribute.
This parameter
determines whether the
operator or sequence of
program has authority to
change parameters
associated channel Block
Specifies the value for
Mode attribute
(MODEATTR), when
the Control to Normal
function is initiated through
the Station display
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
79
Mode Attribute and Normal Mode Attribute
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Mode Attribute (MODEATTR) parameter determines who can command
a change to the OP value
– OPERATOR: Only an operator may command the output state (OP)
– PROGRAM: Only other function blocks (example: Logic blocks, SCM
programs) can command the output state by setting OPREQ parameter
– NORMAL: Setting specified by the Normal Mode Attribute
(NORMMODEATTR) is used, if it is not NONE
• If NORMMODEATTR is NONE then no change in MODEATTR
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
80
40
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Used to enable or disable PV source selection (PVSCROPT)
– Default is enabled or box checked
PV value is provided by
an SCM
Operator stores PV value
directly
PV value is derived from
the parameter PVAUTO
representing the assigned
state of the actual inputs
DI[1..4]
PV value is derived
directly from the
commanded output state
(OP)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
81
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Block Sizing and State Names
Specifies the number of digital inputs
to be used. Maximum input Block size
is 4. Default is 2
Specifies the number of digital
outputs to be used. Maximum Block
Size is 3 Default is 1
Specifies the number of states.
Maximum State size is 3. Default
is 2
Specifies a name used to
identify the given state.
Upto 12 characters can be
used for each state.
State 2 name is
applicable only if the
Number of States is three
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
82
41
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Enable PV Source Selection
Honeywell
Input Tab
• Inputs are Boolean values which represents the state of any other block
output or a field DICHANNEL (Digital Input Channel) block
Same as the
entry in Main tab
Shows the input
combinations associated
with a given state. A
check in the box for the
input represents its ON
condition and no check
for its OFF position. The
default State is null (BAD)
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
83
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Output Tab
• Outputs are configured as Boolean or Pulsed (On Pulse or Off Pulse)
• The Number of Digital Outputs (NUMDOUTS) parameter is used to
select the number of active Digital/Pulse outputs
– When this parameter is 0 (zero), other outputs and OP parameters have no
meaning
Same as the
entry in Main tab
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
84
42
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• Each output is either Boolean or Pulsed (On Pulse or Off Pulse)
– Output (OP) value can be connected to any other block parameter or to a
field DOCHANNEL (Digital Output Channel) block
• The DOCHANNEL (DOC) block connects to three different inputs from a
DEVCTL block
– DOC.SO may be connected to DO [1 .. 3] of DEVCTL block
– DOC.ONPULSE may be connected to pulsed outputs PO [1 .. 3] of DEVCTL
block
– DOC.OFFPULSE may be connected to pulsed outputs PO [1 .. 3] of
DEVCTL block
– Only one input can be connected for any single DOC
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
85
Honeywell
Output States
Selects the state that
defines the DEVCTL
block in a safe state.
The default is State 0.
State 2 selection is only
applicable if number of
states (NUMSTATES) is
three
Used to specify the output
combinations associated with a
given state. Check the box for the
output to associate to ON condition
or leave it unchecked for its OFF
position. The default is OFF or
unchecked
Appendix
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
86
43
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Output
Honeywell
Pulse Output
• Enable / Disable the
Pulse Output (PO)
– When enabled, the corresponding
output (PO[x]) pin is exposed on
the block
– Default is no pulse outputs configured
– Selectable outputs depend upon the configured number of outputs
• Pulse Width is used to specify the width of a given output pulse
– Range is 0 to 60 seconds
– Configurable only when the output is configured as a pulse output
– The default value is 1 second for all configured pulse outputs
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
87
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Pulse Width
• DOCHANNEL block determines the actual pulse width resolution and
accuracy based on its execution rate
– Rounds up the configured pulse width value consistent with its own
execution rate.
• If the execution rate of the DOCHANNEL block is 125 milliseconds and
the configured PULSEWIDTH value is 450 milliseconds (.45 seconds),
the actual pulse time output would be 500 milliseconds, which is the next
highest multiple of 125 milliseconds
• A PULSEWIDTH value of 0 is a special case
– If a 0 pulse is sent to ONPULSE or OFFPULSE, the DOCHANNEL block
immediately turns OFF any existing pulse
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
88
44
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
• The Momentary State (MOMSTATE)
parameter configures the states being
used as momentary
– Similar to push-button operation
– When the operator commands a new output
state (OP), the selected momentary state is
active for a Fixed Time or as long as the operator request the value
– Once the operator ceases requesting the value and the internal timeout
occurs, the DEVCTL block returns to the Safe Output State (SAFEOP)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
89
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Momentary State
• Fixed Time
– For CM periods < 5 seconds
• Momentary States are equal to 5 seconds for all possible CM periods
– For CM periods > 5 seconds (ACE)
• Momentary states are at least one execution cycle, which can be up to
20 seconds on ACE
• Safe state (SAFEOP) cannot be configured as Momentary state
• Default value is NONE
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
90
45
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Momentary State
Honeywell
Seal-In Option
• Seal-In option is used to clear output commands when the process
feedback state (PV) cannot follow the commanded output state (OP)
– It is detected by the Command Disagree or Uncommanded Change alarms
– Default it is unchecked or disabled
• If the Seal-In option is enabled and when PV does not follow the
commanded output, then
– Field output destinations are set to the Safe Output State (SAFEOP), but OP
is not altered
• OPFINAL shows the state which was commanded to the output
destinations
– OPFINAL is set equal to OP on the next operator action to OP, which clears
the “seal” condition
• Seal-In option and Momentary state are mutually exclusive
– Momentary state has to be None to configure the Seal-In option
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
91
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Output Initialization
• The Output Init option (INITOPOPT) is used to
configure Output Initialization option
• The following options are available
– NORMALOPT - Performs Normal initialization
• When INITMAN parameter transitions from ON to OFF, the Device
Control FB provides an output value (OP) as follows:
– If Safety Interlock is active, the OP is set to SAFEOP
– If the Override Interlocks are active and not bypassed, the OP is set
to the highest priority Override Interlock
– If LocalMan is ON
• OP tracks PV, if PV is in State0 or State1or State2
• OP is set to SAFEOP, if PV is in Null or InBetween states or PV
does not exist
– SAFEOPOPT – Output is set to Safe output (SAFEOP)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
92
46
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
– HOLDOPOPT - Initialization will not be performed
• OP remains the last value
– HOLDOPOPT with Legacy Output Init Option (LEGACYINITOPT)
• OP remains on last value
• When the Device Control recovers from the initialization manual
condition, the output is not sent to the output point unless an override
interlock or safety interlock is active and not bypassed
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
93
Permissive and Override Interlock Bypassing
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Used to enable or disable the
bypass for Permissive and Override
Interlocks. Default is disabled
Used to Bypass the Permissive and
Override Interlocks. When this
parameter is Enabled, the OP can
be changed regardless of the state
of Override and Permissive
interlocks (Does not affect the
Safety Override Interlock). When it
is OFF, existing Override Interlocks
(OI[0..2]) takes effect . The default is
OFF
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
94
47
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Output Initialization
Honeywell
Init OP After Load
• Init OP After Load (INITOPAFTLD)
parameter is used to configure the
initialization values of digital outputs (DOs)
to their desired values
– Used for the strategy where the outputs of a DevCtl FB is connected to noninitializable blocks (Logic blocks)
• Default option initializes the OP to State0
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
95
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Permissives and Interlocks
• Interlock Strategies are implemented using Permissives, Override
Interlocks, and the Safety Interlock
• Permissive P(0-2)
– There is a Permissive for each state
– Normally ON
– Operator can select the state if it’s
Permissive is asserted (ON)
– Can be Bypassed
• Override Interlock OI(0-2)
– There is an Override Interlock for each state
– Normally OFF
– When an Override Interlock is asserted (ON)
the Output is forced to it’s state
– Can be Bypassed
• Safety Interlock SI
– Normally OFF
– Sets the Output to the Safe State when asserted (ON)
– Cannot be Bypassed
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
96
48
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Enable or Disable collection of
Maintenance Statistics. Default it
is disabled
Maximum number of
hours of PV
accumulated in state 0
Maximum
number of
transitions of
PV accumulated
in state 0
RESETFL Parameter is available
only when the block is red
tagged. An user program or
another FB can turn ON the this
parameter to reset the statistics
anytime
Accumulated number of safety
interlock trips due to OP
changing state, since the last
statistics reset
Accumulated number of
transitions of PV to state 1,
since the last statistics reset
Accumulated time of PV in state
1, since the last statistics reset
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
97
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
SCM Tab
Used to select the Mode Tracking
function for the SCM associated
with this block’s Control Module
Specifies the action the function
block is to take when the SCM goes
to Starting state, Stop/Abort State
and Hold State
Used to select the Restart State
option. Applicable only when the
SCM state is Resume or Run
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
98
49
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Maintenance Tab
Honeywell
Alarms Tab
Priority and Severity levels for
Command Disagree, Command Fail,
Uncommand change and Bad PV
alarms
Sets the feedback time of different
states(0,1 and 2) for Command
Disagree and Command Fail alarms
Configure the priority and Severity
levels and Enable/Disable the Safety
Override, Override and Off Normal
Alarms
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
99
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Commanding Device
Control Block outputs from
SCMs
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
100
50
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Logic and Override/Interlocks were used
to drive the Device Control block output
in the course labs – as in the case of the
template FANLOGIC
In a simple example:
An SCM could write to a flag in the logic
which could assert an Override/Interlock
forcing the output to the associated state.
The following slides show several other methods for an SCM to command Device
Control Module outputs:
1) Generic OP – GOP
2) Output Command - OPCMD
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
101
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Generic OP - GOP
The SCM writes to the GOP parameter on the device control block.
This is the most commonly used device control command
• Pros
– Simple direct programming of devices allowing flexible easy to understand
designs
• Cons
– Programming must be structured to prevent step output failures for device
control blocks with Override/Interlocks asserted or in Operator MODEATTR
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
102
51
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Using Logic and Override/Interlocks
Honeywell
Output Command - OPCMD
Output command parameters OPCMD[0..2] on the device control block can
be commanded directly from an SCM.
• Pros
– SCM writes to a flag (logic associated with the device control block)
– Commanding a device with an active interlock will not cause an SCM failure
– Commanding a device in operator MODEATTR will not cause a failure
• Cons
– Requires logic associated with the device control block (see next slide)
– Action upon transition to Program or interlock clear will not always be apparent
and may be confusing for operators:
– Device will return to the last requested state on interlock clear
– The last requested state will be executed when the device control block
MODEATTR is set to Program
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
103
Honeywell
Common Device CM Configuration
Appendix
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
104
52
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Describe Device Control Blocks
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
105
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
106
53
Describe Device Control Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in
CEE
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
107
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Introduction
•
Enhanced HPM algorithms is introduced in R300 for CEE.
– Regulatory Summer
– Signal Selector
– Reverse Output
•
Supported in
– ACE
– C200
– C200E
– C300
– SIM-ACE
– SIM-C200
– SIM-C200E
– SIM-C300
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
108
54
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
• Regulatory control block
• Has four inputs X1 to X4
• Provides scaling factor for each input
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
109
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Regulatory Summer
• Algorithm – Sum four scaled inputs. Add overall gain and overall bias.
• X1 is an initializable input for this block while other inputs are noninitializable.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
110
55
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Regulatory Summer
Honeywell
Signal Selector
• Six input Auxiliary Block
• Combines HPM’s HiLoAvg and MidOf3
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
111
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Signal Selector
• Algorithms possible
– MINIMUM (MIN)
– MAXIMUM (MAX)
– MEDIAN (MED)
– AVERAGE (AVG)
– MULTIPLEXER (MUX)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
112
56
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• Provides reverse output
Reverse Output Option
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
113
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Summary
• We have learned about the two native function blocks added in R300:
– Regulatory Summer
– Signal Selector
– Reverse Output
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
114
57
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
32
Reverse Output
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
115
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
116
58
Describe the HPM Functions Duplicated in CEE
4/13/2012
32
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
117
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• Power Function blocks
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
118
59
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Power Function Blocks
Honeywell
• Power Function blocks are primarily aimed at providing process
strategies specific to the Power Generation market
• Twelve strategies (for C300/ C200E) have been identified and listed
below
– These blocks cannot be used in a C200 controller
No.
Function Block
1
Digital Acquisition (DIGACQ in Utility Library)
2
Contact Monitoring (CONTACTMON in Logic Library)
3
Rate of Change (ROC in Auxiliary Library)
4
First Out Detection FB (FIRSTOUT in Utility Library)
5
Drum Level Computation Block (LEVELCOMP in Powergen Library)
6
Main - IBV Logic FB (MAINIBV in Powergen Library)
7
HT Motor Control Function Block (HTMOTOR in Powergen Library)
8
LT Motor Control Function Block (LTMOTOR in Powergen Library)
9
Valve / Damper Control Function Block (VALVEDAMPER in Powergen Library)
10
Solenoid Valve Control Function Block (SOLENOID in Powergen Library)
11
Alarm Annunciator Function Block (ALMPANEL, ALMWINDOW in Utility Library)
12
Group capability and runback (GRPCAPRBK in Powergen Library)
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
119
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Digital Acquisition Block
• The Digital Acquisition function block is used when the PVSOURCE is
defined by the operator
– Input to this block is from a DI channel when PVSource is AUTO
– Input to this block is from the operator when PVSource is MAN
– Any block with a digital output can be the input when PVSource is SUB
• Reduces the PU and MU usage vs DevCtl block
• This block is independent of the Channel type feeding the block
• In the Utility library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
120
60
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
• The Contact Monitoring block is used to generate an alarm whenever
the state of both inputs is simultaneously ON or OFF based on the
NORMAL alarm state configuration
• The Contact Monitoring block is used for limit switches with NO and NC
contacts with the same activation mechanism
• In the LOGIC library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
121
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Functions of CONTACTMON
• Enables alarm generation whenever the state of both inputs is the same
or different based on the normal alarm state configuration
• Provides the state at IN[1] and IN[2] as OUT1 and OUT2
• PVFL gives the negated XOR results of IN[1] and IN[2]
IN[1]
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
IN[2]
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
PVFL
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
• When NORMAL is State0, an alarm will be generated whenever the
state of both inputs is the same
• When NORMAL is State1, an alarm will be generated whenever the
state of both inputs is different
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
122
61
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Contact Monitoring (CONTACTMON) Block
Honeywell
Rate of Change (ROC) Block
• Rate of Change block is a computational block used on the input side of
Control blocks for limiting the input variable (typically SP)
• In Power plants, speed of HT motors requires control without exceeding
the rate of change of the current
• In some temperature control applications,
dynamic profiling is needed based on the
deviation of SP and actual temperature
• In the Auxiliary library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
123
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Rate of Change (ROC) Functions
• If the input variation is more than the rate trip limit in either direction, the
rate of change of output is limited to the change specified by the rate trip
limit
– The output changes at the specified rate limits until the value is equal to the
input variable
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
124
62
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
• A FirstOut Detection block identifies the digital input signal, among a set
of digital signals, that was first to transition from its normal state
– Usually this block is associated with critical equipment
• Interlocks and Stop commands for equipment or drives are connected as
inputs to the FIRSTOUT block
– When an input signal transitions from its configured NORMAL state, the
output flag of the FIRSTOUT block is raised
– The input responsible for the FIRSTOUT flag is recorded
– The recording is locked until a reset is applied to the block after all inputs
have returned to the Normal state
• In the Utility library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
125
Drum Level Computation Block (LEVELCOMP)
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
• The Drum Level Computation block (LEVELCOMP) computes the drum
level from the measured DP and other field specific constants
– In Power plants, the drum level is measured indirectly in terms of differential
pressure (DP), and the level is computed based on the measured DP
• Differential Pressure to Level computation techniques are employed in
level measurements like Boiler Drums, De-aerators, and HP heaters
where the process fluid is at high pressure and temperature
• In the POWERGEN library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
126
63
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
FirstOut Detection (FIRSTOUT) Block
Honeywell
Drum Level Computation Block (LEVELCOMP)
• The equation for computing drum level:
h = ( H (ρRef - ρS ) – DP ) / (ρW - ρS )
where
–
–
–
–
h: Drum level to be measured
H: Length of stand pipe
DP: Differential pressure of the drum
ρRef : Density of water in wet leg (This
computation uses the Water Leg
temperature)
– ρS : Density of steam
– ρW : Density of water
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
127
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Main – IBV Logic Function Block (MAINIBV)
• The Main – IBV (Integral Bypass Valve) Logic function block (MAINIBV)
has a user configurable DELAY parameter for providing a time delay
before releasing an open command to the main valve
– Timer starts when the IBV open feedback is sensed by the block
• In the POWERGEN library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
128
64
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
• Prior to R310 “Drive Control” was accomplished using Device Control
Blocks (DEVCTL)
– The existing Device Control Block was designed for all types of drives such
as LT, HT, and valves
– There is a single permissive and interlock input for each state
– All switchgear-related inputs and process inputs had to be connected to this
one single input pin by employing OR/AND blocks for multiplexing
• Four different drive control blocks have been developed and are located
in the POWERGEN library
–
–
–
–
Valve / Damper Control (VALVEDAMPER)
Solenoid Valve Control (SOLENOID)
LT Motor Control (LTMOTOR)
HT Motor Control (HTMOTOR)
• These blocks are derived from the DEVCTL block and customized to
meet Drive Control requirements
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
129
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Alarm Annunciator Function Blocks
• The Alarm Annunciator FB are used to implement the annunciation
sequence for alarm groups connected to window annunciators
• The alarm annunciator is implemented as two blocks:
– ALMWINDOW - Encapsulates the function of individual alarm groups
– ANNPANEL - Controls the lamp test, acknowledge, and reset functions
• The Alarm Window function block accepts Boolean inputs (1 to 16) and
performs the configured sequence
– It provides one alarm output (ALMOUT) and group status output (FLSHSTAT)
• The Annunciator Panel function block accepts the FLSHSTAT from
Alarm Window function block and provides:
– Lamp output for the annunciation windows with synchronized lamp flash
sequence
– Hooter annunciation
• In the Utility library
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
130
65
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Drive Control Blocks
Group Capability and Runback Block
Honeywell
• The Group Capability and Runback function block provides the Group
Capability and Group Runback Rate for the unit represented by the
configured equipment
• Accepts equipments’ status inputs and desired unit load set point
• Number of devices connected is configurable
• In the POWERGEN library
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
131
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
132
66
Describe Power Generation Function Blocks
4/13/2012
32
Describe the HART Functionality in
C200/C200E Operations
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
133
Honeywell
Introduction
• In this lesson, you will learn about HART device functionality.
• At the conclusion of this lesson, you will be able to:
– Describe HART signals
– Distinguish among HART universal, common practice and device-specific
commands
– Explain how the device description (DD) files are loaded to the system
– Describe the types and characteristics of
HART-enabled I/O
– Distinguish between HART control-related data and
offline data and how they flow through the system
– Explain the purpose of the general status and
device-specific status for a HART device and
where the statuses can be viewed in the system
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
134
67
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
• HART Signals
• HART Commands
• HART Device Description Manager
• HART-Enabled I/O
• HART Data
• HART Device Status
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
135
Honeywell
HART Signal Characteristics
+0.5 mA
- 0.5 mA
The digital signal rides on top of the
4-20 mA DC analog signal
FSK
1200
Hz
“1”
2200
Hz
“0”
20 mA -
4 mA -
• Traditional wiring and well understood implementation
• Hybrid (analog and digital signals)
• Command/response (half-duplex) communication structure
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
136
68
4/13/2012
HART Output Device:
HART Input Device:
24 Vdc
4-20 mA
4-20 mA
Digital component is always bidirectional
The HART digital signal is superimposed on the
standard 4-20 mA signal
All memory resident device data is accessed using this
digital portion of the protocol
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
137
Honeywell
Topics
•
4/13/2012
HART Signals
• HART Commands

•
HART Device Description Manager
•
HART-enabled I/O
•
HART Data
•
HART Device Status
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
138
69
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Device Signaling
Honeywell
HART Command Ranges
• Universal Commands (0-30):
–
–
–
–
Represents the basic command set required by most HART devices
All commands in this set must be supported by all HART devices
Commands must be implemented exactly as specified by the HART foundation specification
DD interpretation is not required for this command set
• Common Practice Commands (32-121):
– A set of commands applicable to a wide range of devices
– This command set should be supported by devices whenever possible, but this is not mandatory
– Although the function of each command is well defined by the HART foundation specification,
the actual meaning of the response data may require the interpretation of vendor DD files
• Device-specific Commands (128-253):
– This Command set is completely defined by the device vendor
– Each command performs a function that is specific to the particular device type and model
– The use of these commands requires full interpretation of the vendor DD files
DD
Appendix
-Device description file
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
139
Honeywell
Device-specific Commands
• Device-specific commands (128-253) are set by the device
manufacturer, so they will be different for each manufacturer and
product type
• Some examples of device-specific commands in the Honeywell
temperature transmitter are the ability to:
– Pick the specific input type: T, J, or K thermocouple; 3- or 4-wire RTD; etc.
– Alarm on input break detection
– Determine whether a meter is installed and determine its units and range
– Turn write protection on or off with password protection
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
140
70
4/13/2012
•
HART Signals
•
HART Commands
• HART Device Description Manager

•
HART-enabled I/O
•
HART Data
•
HART Device Status
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
141
4/13/2012
Honeywell
HART Device Description Manager
• There is no need to load Honeywell DD files because they are
automatically loaded with the Experion software
• DD files for other vendors are available from the vendor or the HART
Foundation at http://www.hartcomm.org/
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
142
71
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Topics
Honeywell
HART Device Description Manager
• To load device description files:
– Programs > Honeywell Experion PKS > Engineering Tools > Device
Description Manager
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
143
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
•
HART Signals
•
HART Commands
•
HART Device Description Manager
• HART-enabled I/O

•
HART Data
•
HART Device Status
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
144
72
4/13/2012
Non-redundant CIOM-A
Chassis I/O format
Redundant PMIO
Chassis I/O format
8-channel HART AI
8-channel HART AO
16-channel HART AI
16-channel HART AO
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
145
Honeywell
HART-enabled I/O - Direct Connection
All HART analog and
digital data passes
through the HARTenabled I/O
Experion PKS Server
C200/C200E/C200/C200EE
Characteristics:
 Reduced hardware and physical foot print
 One communication network
 HART variables are available for control
 HART status is available for control
 Effective/efficient status handling
 All HART data is available through the system
Redundant HART
PM AI and AO IOP
(16 channels/IOP)
Appendix
Non-redundant HART
CIOM-A (1756) AI and AO IOM
(8 channels/IOM)
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
146
73
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
HART-enabled I/O
Honeywell
Topics
•
HART Signals
•
HART Commands
•
HART Device Description Manager
•
HART-enabled I/O
• HART Data

•
HART Device Status
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
147
Control-related Data is Cached on the IOM
Control
Processor
Honeywell
Honeywell
Field
Device Manager
Control
System
The HART command originates from the IOM/IOP and the
response is cached in the IOM/IOP
I/O
 Device ID information (Tag, manufacturer, model, SN, etc.)
 Software and hardware revision level
 Dynamic variables (PV, SV, TV, FV)
HART
Device
 Device variables up to 255 (Slot-0 through Slot-3)
 General and device-specific status information
 Range related information
 Device material of construction
 Full device setup and configuration information
 Trends and test analysis data
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
148
74
4/13/2012
Control
Processor
Honeywell
Control
System
Asset
Management
System
The HART offline data passes through the IOM/IOP and the software
multiplexer to the Asset Management System
I/O
 Device ID information (Tag, manufacturer, model, SN, etc.)
 Software and hardware revision level
 Dynamic variables (PV, SV, TV, FV)
HART
Device
 Device variables up to 255 (Slot-0 through Slot-3)
 General and device-specific status information
 Range related information
 Device material of construction
 Full device setup and configuration information
 Trends and test analysis data
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
149
4/13/2012
Honeywell
Topics
•
HART Signals
•
HART Commands
•
HART Device Description Manager
•
HART-enabled I/O
•
HART Data
• HART Device Status

Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
150
75
4/13/2012
32
Offline Data is Passed Through
Honeywell
HART Device Status
• Every HART device must return a general status with every command
response
• The device-specific status is optional
Device General Status:
Communication error
Field device malfunction
Configuration changed
Cold start (power up reset)
Optional device-specific
errors and conditions
More status available
Loop current fixed
Loop current saturated (PV out of limits)
Non-primary variable out of limits
Primary variable out of limits
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
4/13/2012
151
Honeywell
Control Module (CM) Association
The HART offline data passes through the IOM/IOP and the software
multiplexer to the Asset Management System
Associated control module
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
152
76
4/13/2012
STT25H
Host issues Command 48
The STT25H uses only 3 of the
available 17 bytes (byte 0, 1, and 2)
Device responds with status
Byte – 0 Critical
Byte – 1 Non-Critical
Byte – 2 Information
0
undefined
0
CJ Over Temp
0
Suspect Input
1
Hardware Failure
1
undefined
1
undefined
2
Input Open
2
Input out of Spec
2
undefined
3
NVM Calib Failed
3
Output Saturated
3
undefined
4
NVM Conf Failed
4
In Output Mode
4
undefined
5
undefined
5
undefined
5
undefined
6
undefined
6
undefined
6
undefined
7
undefined
7
User Correct Active
7
4 Wires Configuration
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
4/13/2012
153
Honeywell
Device-specific Status Can Be Used in Control
Command 48 Byte-0
Bit
Honeywell
STT255
Temperature
Transmitter
Control Module
HCMD48BT[#] DD Descriptor
0
[0]
undefined
1
[1]
Hardware
Failure
2
[2]
Input Open
3
[3]
NVM Calib
Failed
4
[4]
NVM Conf
Failed
IN(1)
5
[5]
undefined
LOGIC: AND
6
[6]
undefined
7
[7]
undefined
HART AI
Block
HCMD48BT[1] pin
IN(2)
ANDA
LOGIC: ONDELAY
DELATA
Delay Time 30 sec
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
154
77
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
Sample - STT25H Device-specific Status
Summary
• When working with HART devices, remember:
Honeywell
HART signals have a high-frequency, bidirectional digital component and a
– low-frequency,
unidirectional analog component.
– HART commands include:
• Universal commands that are mandatory and do not require DDs
• Common practice commands that are optional and may require DDs
• Device-specific commands defined by device vendors that require DDs
DD files are automatically loaded with the Experion software
– Honeywell
while non-Honeywell DD files are loaded using the DD Manager.
HART command originates in the IOM/IOP and the control-related data
– The
are cached there.
device must return a general status with every command response
– AbutHART
a device-specific status is optional.
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
Appendix
4/13/2012
155
Honeywell
Conclusion
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Completion
Certificate
Proceed to the next lesson in your course material.
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Describe the HART Functionality in C200/C200E Operations
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
156
78
4/13/2012
32
Control Module Reference
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
157
Honeywell
FC01
Appendix
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
158
79
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell
FC17
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
159
Honeywell
FC18
Appendix
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
160
80
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
161
Honeywell
HS_A
Appendix
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
162
81
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
HS14A
Honeywell
HS62
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
163
Honeywell
HS63
Appendix
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
164
82
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
165
Honeywell
PC16
Appendix
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
166
83
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
32
Honeywell
LC14
Honeywell
TI20
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
167
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
Honeywell
This page intentionally left blank
Appendix
Honeywell Confidential
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
168
84
Control Module Reference
4/13/2012
32
Topic: Appendix
Contents
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs ..............................................................................3
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
1
This page was intentionally left blank.
2
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
32
Introduction
The C200E/C300 labs are a gradual progression of implementing a C200E/C300 controller.
•
•
•
•
The labs use the Simulation Control Environment (SCE) feature of the ExperionPKS
The SCE is identical in most parts to the C200E/C300 Control Engineering Environment
(CEE)
The main difference is that the SCE uses simulated I/O, whereas the CEE uses real I/O
There are other differences in terms of execution cycle times, peer-to-peer functionality, but
these differences do not impact the lab exercises
The simulated I/O is driven by Sequential Control Modules simulating a Debutanizer.
This document provides details of the Debutanizer and the controls needed.
Process Description
The Debutanizer Model separates a blended feed using a distillation tower to produce the following
products:
•
•
C5 and heavier hydrocarbons which are sent to storage
C4 hydrocarbons and lighter hydrocarbons that are sent as feed to the Depropanizer
Note: Familiarity with distillation concepts is not required to complete the labs.
A very brief overview of the process is given below. A more detailed process flow is provided as
an appendix
The Debutanizer P&ID can be found in a later section.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
3
Process Equipment
The following table describes the process equipment used by the Debutanizer
Tag
Description
D-100
Debutanizer Reflux Drum
T-100
Debutanizer
P-62
Reflux pump (from D-100 to T-100 )
P-63
Spare reflux pump (from D-100 to T-100)
P-68
Feed pump from (D-100 to Depropanizer)
P-69
Spare feed pump from (D-100 to Depropanizer)
E-100
Debutanizer Reboiler
E-110
Debutanizer Condenser
Control System
The following sections describe the instruments and control loops used in the distillation process.
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
32
Instrumentation
The following table lists the tagname and range for each instrument in the model.
Items marked with an * are built by the student. The other items are imported.
SI Unit
Range
Units
T-100 Overheads Analyzer
0-2
mol % C5
11_FC01
Heavy Feed to Debutanizer
0 - 600
m3 /hr
11_FC02
Light Feed to Debutanizer
0 - 70
m3 /hr
11_FC15
E-100 Steam Flow
0 - 62
T/hr
*
11_FC17
T-100 Bottom to Storage Tank 1
0 - 385
m3 /hr
*
11_FC18
T-100 Bottom to Off Specification Tank
2
0 - 385
m3 /hr
11_FC19
Debutanizer Reflux
0 - 305
m3/hr
11_FC20
Depropanizer Feed
0 - 155
m3/hr
11_FC28
P-68/69 Minimum Flow Spillback
0 - 155
m3 /hr
11_HC41
D-100 Overhead to Flare
0 - 100
%
11_HC44
D-100 Bypass from Compressor
Interstage Drum
0 - 100
%
11_HS14A
E-110A Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14B
E-110B Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14C
E-110C Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14D
E-110D Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14E
E-110E Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14F
E-110F Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14G
E-110G Fan
Stop - Start
-
11_HS14H
E-110H Fan
Stop - Start
-
*
11_HS62
P-62 Debutanizer Reflux Pump
Stop - Start
-
*
11_HS63
P-63 Debutanizer Reflux Pump Spare
Stop - Start
-
11_HS68
P-68 Depropanizer Feed Pump
Stop - Start
-
11_HS69
P-69 Depropanizer Feed Pump Spare
Stop - Start
-
11_LC14
T-100, Debutanizer Bottoms Level
0 - 100
%
11_LC16
D-100, Reflux Drum Level
0 - 100
%
11_LSD15
Debutanizer Bottoms Low Level Trip
Shutdown - Normal
-
*
*
*
4/13/2012
Tag
Description
11_AC12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
5
SI Unit
*
*
6
Tag
Description
Range
Units
11_PC15
T-100, Pressure Controller
700 -1750
kPag
11_PC16
D-100, Pressure Controller
700 - 1750
kPag
11_PI14
T-100, Bottoms Pressure
0 - 1800
kPag
11_TC10
T-100, Tray 2, Reboiler
90 - 215
°C
11_TI20
T-100, Bottoms
0 - 260
°C
11_TI21
E-100, Reboiler Outlet
0 - 260
°C
11_TI22
E-100, Reboiler Inlet
0 - 260
°C
11_TI23
T-100, Tray 4
0 - 260
°C
11_TI24
T-100, Tray 23
0 - 260
°C
11_TI25
T-100, Overheads
0 - 260
°C
11_T126
T-100, Reflux
0 - 260
°C
11_TI40
Heavy Feed Temperature
0 - 135
°C
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
The first set of labs creates the continuous control modules needed for the Debutanizer to work. The
steps involve building the control modules, loading and then testing the functions.
Lab 1: Configure C 200 Hardware
This lab is used to build the necessary C200E hardware. The steps create a C200E controller in the
Simulated Control Environment (SCE), with the Control Processor, the CEE and all the I/O
modules needed. The modules are loaded to the controller at the end to verify correct operation. The
actual lab requires the building of several I/O modules. Other modules are imported into the project.
The I/O list assignment is attached in Appendix 1.
Lab 2: Configure a Control Module for Data Acquisition
The point 11_TI20 is built in this lab. 11_TI20 will have alarming and will be seen in a group and
detail display. 11_TI20 also will be historized.
Lab 3: Configure a PID Control Module
The Heavy Feed Flow, 11_FC01 is built in this lab. The requirement is PID control, with bumpless
Auto – Manual transfer. Alarms, groups and historization enabled. The module is built, loaded and
activated and then an SCM imported for simulation. This permits values to be seen. The remaining
modules, of a similar type, are then imported into the project with an appropriate SCM to simulate
the process values.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
7
32
Control Loops and Lab Sequence
Lab 4: Configure a PID Control Module with Split Range outputs
The pressure in the reflux drum D 100 is controlled using two valves, with the following logic:
• In case the pressure is below the setpoint, the drum is pressurized from the distillation tower,
T 100, through the PV 16 A valve.
• In case the pressure is above the setpoint, the drum pressure is released through the PV 16 B
valve.
PV16A valve is reverse acting and PV16B valves are direct acting.
The following table illustrates how valves A and B open with the split range signal. Valve A is the
valve on the line bypassing the debutanizer overhead condenser E-110. Valve B is on the line
connecting D-100 to the compressor interstage drum
Signal from PC16
Valve
Condition
0
A
Wide open
50
A
Closed
50
B
Closed
100
B
Open
The loop must be configured with bumpless transfer and the ability to operate the valves manually.
An SCM will be imported, downloaded and activated to simulate values.
Lab 5: Configure a Cascade PID Control Module
The first Cascade loop is planned around LC14, the T 100 bottoms level control.
The P&ID shows that this loop has an interlock with the bottom safety valve, and is master to both
the outlet streams (FC 17 and FC 18).
11_LSD15 is an interlock valve, which trips in the event of low level. The trip is reset when the
level is above 5%. The comparator for 5% will be built.
The interlock CM (11_LSD15) is imported into your project along with the appropriate SCM for
process simulation.
The cascade loop, with 11_LC14 as master and 11_FC 17 as secondary, is then built, downloaded
and operated. The loops require bumpless transfer, from CAS to AUTO to MAN.
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
32
Lab 6: Configure a Cascade PID Control Module with two secondaries
In this lab, the FC 18 loop is added as a secondary to the LC 14 loop built in the previous lab.
Similar considerations of operation apply i.e., the loops require bumpless transfer, from CAS to
AUTO to MAN.
In addition, the following requirements apply:
• The ratio of the flow of FC 17 and FC 18 is 70:30
• The addition of the two flows needs to be displayed
The module built in the previous lab is modified, downloaded and tested
The remaining cascade control modules and SCMs for simulation are then imported into the project.
Lab 7: Configure a Device Control Module – with Logic
The control logic for switching the fans of the Condenser, E 110, is developed in this lab.
Operationally, the cooling fans are to be turned on, in case the top temperature, 11_TI25 is greater
than a specified value. The operator initiates the start command, and each additional fan starts up as
the temperature increases.
Lab 8: Configure a Device Control Module – with Interlock
In this lab, the control for a pair of pumps, P62 and P63 is developed.
Operationally,
• Start command is provided by the operator, for P62.
• If P 62 does not start within 20 seconds from the start command, then P63 should start.
• At any time, only one pump can be running.
The modules are built, loaded and tested.
The device control modules for the other pumps are then imported into the project along with 2
programs that permit the pumps to operate.
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
9
Conclusion
At the end of these labs, all the points would have been loaded, and the simulation would represent
the Debutanizer in a steady operating state. The graphic, groups, trends and alarms would reflect the
plant operating conditions.
Note: There are several additional Sequential Control Modules that will be imported during the lab
exercises to simulate values. You will be given the names of the SCMs in the lab exercises.
10
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
32
P&ID
4/13/2012
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
11
This page was intentionally left blank.
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Appendix 1 – C200E I/O list assignments
Tag
Name
Module
Name
Channel
IOM slot
Number
1
11_AC12.AI
AI_3_4_4
0
3
4
4
2
11_FC19.FI
AI_3_4_4
1
3
4
4
3
11_FC01.FI
AI_3_4_4
2
3
4
4
4
11_FC02.FI
AI_3_4_4
3
3
4
4
5
11_FC15.FI
AI_3_4_4
4
3
4
4
6
11_TC10.TI
AI_3_4_4
5
3
4
4
7
11_LC14.LI
AI_5_4_4
0
5
4
4
8
11_FC17.FT
AI_5_4_4
1
5
4
4
9
11_FC18.FI
AI_5_4_4
2
5
4
4
10
11_FC28.FI
AI_5_4_4
3
5
4
4
11
11_LC16.LI
AI_5_4_4
4
5
4
4
12
11_FC20.FI
AI_5_4_4
5
5
4
4
13
11_PC15.PI
AI_5_4_4
6
5
4
4
14
11_PC16.PI
AI_5_4_4
7
5
4
4
15
11_PI14.PI
AI_8_4_4
0
8
4
4
16
11_TI20.TI
AI_8_4_4
1
8
4
4
17
11_TI21.TI
AI_8_4_4
2
8
4
4
18
11_TI22.TI
AI_8_4_4
3
8
4
4
19
11_TI23.TI
AI_8_4_4
4
8
4
4
20
11_TI25.TI
AI_8_4_4
5
8
4
4
21
11_TI26.TI
AI_8_4_4
6
8
4
4
22
11_TI40.TI
AI_8_4_4
7
8
4
4
4/13/2012
Remote I/O
CNET Module
Chassis MAC ID Slot Number
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
32
Sr.
No
13
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Sr.
No
Tag
Name
Module
Name
Channel
IOM slot
Number
23
11_TI24.TI
AI_8_4_4
8
8
4
4
24
11_FC19.FV
AO_4_4_4
0
4
4
4
25
11_FC01.FV
AO_4_4_4
1
4
4
4
26
11_FC02.FV
AO_4_4_4
2
4
4
4
27
11_FC15.FV
AO_4_4_4
3
4
4
4
28
11_FC17.FY
AO_4_4_4
4
4
4
4
29
11_FC28.FV
AO_4_4_4
5
4
4
4
30
11_FC20.FY
AO_4_4_4
6
4
4
4
31
11_FC18.FV
AO_4_4_4
7
4
4
4
32
11_PC15.PV
AO_7_4_4
0
7
4
4
33
11_PC16.PVA
AO_7_4_4
1
7
4
4
34
11_PC16.PVB
AO_7_4_4
2
7
4
4
35
11_HC41.HC
AO_7_4_4
3
7
4
4
36
11_HC44.HC
AO_7_4_4
4
7
4
4
39
11_HS14A.HI
DI_10_4_4
0
10
4
4
40
11_HS14B.HI
DI_10_4_4
1
10
4
4
41
11_HS14C.HI
DI_10_4_4
2
10
4
4
42
11_HS14D.HI
DI_10_4_4
3
10
4
4
43
11_HS14E.HI
DI_10_4_4
4
10
4
4
44
11_HS14F.HI
DI_10_4_4
5
10
4
4
45
11_HS14G.HI
DI_10_4_4
6
10
4
4
46
11_HS14H.HI
DI_10_4_4
7
10
4
4
14
Remote I/O
CNET Module
Chassis MAC ID Slot Number
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Tag
Name
Module
Name
Channel
IOM slot
Number
48
11_HS62.HI
DI_10_4_4
9
10
4
4
49
11_HS63.HI
DI_10_4_4
10
10
4
4
50
11_HS68.HI
DI_10_4_4
11
10
4
4
51
11_HS69.HI
DI_10_4_4
12
10
4
4
52
11_LSD15.LS
DI_10_4_4
13
10
4
4
53
11_LC16.LSD15
DO_6_4_4
2
6
4
4
54
11_LSD15.HV39
DO_6_4_4
3
6
4
4
55
11_HS14A.HS
DO_9_4_4
0
9
4
4
56
11_HS14B.HS
DO_9_4_4
1
9
4
4
57
11_HS14C.HS
DO_9_4_4
2
9
4
4
58
11_HS14D.HS
DO_9_4_4
3
9
4
4
59
11_HS14E.HS
DO_9_4_4
4
9
4
4
60
11_HS14F.HS
DO_9_4_4
5
9
4
4
61
11_HS14G.HS
DO_9_4_4
6
9
4
4
62
11_HS14H.HS
DO_9_4_4
7
9
4
4
63
11_HS63.HS
DO_9_4_4
9
9
4
4
64
11_HS62.HS
DO_9_4_4
10
9
4
4
65
11_HS68.HS
DO_9_4_4
11
9
4
4
66
11_HS69.HS
DO_9_4_4
12
9
4
4
4/13/2012
Remote I/O
CNET Module
Chassis MAC ID Slot Number
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
32
Sr.
No
15
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Appendix 1 – C300 I/O list assignments
Sr.
No
Tag
Name
Module
Name
IOM
Number
Channel
1
11_AC12.AI
C_AI_1
1
1
2
11_FC19.FI
C_AI_1
1
3
11_FC01.FI
C_AI_1
1
4
11_FC02.FI
C_AI_1
1
5
11_FC15.FI
C_AI_1
1
6
11_TC10.TI
C_AI_1
1
7
11_LC14.LI
C_AI_1
1
8
11_FC17.FT
C_AI_1
1
9
11_FC18.FI
C_AI_1
1
10
11_FC28.FI
C_AI_1
1
11
11_LC16.LI
C_AI_1
1
12
11_FC20.FI
C_AI_1
1
13
11_PC15.PI
C_AI_1
1
14
11_PC16.PI
C_AI_1
1
15
11_PI14.PI
C_AI_2
2
16
4
11
2
3
10
14
12
13
6
7
5
8
15
1
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Tag
Name
16
11_TI20.TI
17
11_TI21.TI
18
11_TI22.TI
19
11_TI23.TI
20
11_TI25.TI
21
11_TI26.TI
22
11_TI40.TI
23
11_TI24.TI
24
11_FC19.FV
25
11_FC01.FV
26
11_FC02.FV
27
11_FC15.FV
28
11_FC17.FY
29
11_FC28.FV
30
11_FC20.FY
4/13/2012
Module
Name
IOM
Number
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AI_2
2
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
Channel
32
Sr.
No
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
6
3
9
1
2
10
5
4
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
17
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Sr.
No
Tag
Name
31
11_FC18.FV
32
11_PC15.PV
33
11_PC16.PVA
34
11_PC16.PVB
35
11_HC41.HC
36
11_HC44.HC
39
11_HS14A.HI
40
11_HS14B.HI
41
11_HS14C.HI
42
11_HS14D.HI
43
11_HS14E.HI
44
11_HS14F.HI
45
11_HS14G.HI
46
11_HS14H.HI
18
Module
Name
IOM
Number
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_AO_4
4
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
Channel
11
8
12
13
6
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Tag
Name
48
11_HS62.HI
49
11_HS63.HI
50
11_HS68.HI
51
11_HS69.HI
52
11_HS63.HS
53
11_LC16.LSD15
54
11_LSD15.HV39
55
11_HS14A.HS
56
11_HS14B.HS
57
11_HS14C.HS
58
11_HS14D.HS
59
11_HS14E.HS
60
11_HS14F.HS
61
11_HS14G.HS
4/13/2012
Module
Name
IOM
Number
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DI_6
6
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
Channel
32
Sr.
No
9
10
11
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
19
Appendix
Guide to Debutanizer Model for C200E/C300 Labs
Sr.
No
Tag
Name
62
11_HS14H.HS
63
11_HS62.HS
64
11_HS68.HS
65
11_HS69.HS
20
Module
Name
IOM
Number
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
C_DO_7
7
Channel
10
13
11
12
Copyright © 2012 Honeywell International Inc.
HPS Automation College written permission required to distribute
Honeywell Confidential and Proprietary
4/13/2012
More Information
To learn more about Automation College,
view a list of global locations and available
training, visit www.automationcollege.com
or email HPSWeb@Honeywell.com
.
Honeywell
Automation & Control Solutions
Process Solutions
Automation College
www.honeywellprocess.com
January 2012
© 2012 Honeywell International Inc.